Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Miscellaneous - 350 WINTHROP AVENUE 4/30/2018 (6)
/ MASSACHUSETTS UNIFORM APPLICATION FOR A PERMIT TO PERFORM GAS FITTING WORK i ` CITY cr�- �i � �( MA DATE / 1 PERMIT #1771 JOBSITE ADDRESS 9� rz _+�Q m OWNER'S NAME OWNER ADDRESS TE 179- Gba FAX TYPE OR PRINT OCCUPANCY TYPE COMMERCIAL EDUCATIONAL RESIDENTIAL El CLEARLY NEW: 0 RENOVATION: ® REPLACEMENT: a PLANS SUBMITTED: YES F-Ij NO EJ APPLIANCES"I FLOORS- ► BSM*l 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 7 8 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 14 BOILER 11 111 11 111 111 111 111 Ill ill Ill IllI BOOSTER CONVERSION BURNER COOK STOVE DIRECT VENT HEATER DRYER FIREPLACE FRYOLATOR FURNACE GENERATOR GRILLE INFRARED HEATER LABORATORY COCKS MAKEUPAIR UNIT OVEN POOL HEATER ROOM / SPACE HEATER ROOF TOP UNIT TEST UNIT HEATER UNVENTED ROOM HEATER WATER HEATER INSURANCE COVERAGE I have a current liability insurance policy or its substantial equivalent which meets the requirements of MGL. Ch.142 YES 1 NO [j IF YOU CHECKED YES, PLEASE INDICATE THE TYPE OF COVERAGE BY CHECKING THE APPROPRIATE BOX BELOW LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY X OTHER TYPE INDEMNITY ®f BOND �] OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the licensee does not have the insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Massachusetts G,/yral Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. CHECK ONE ONLY: OWNER I AGENT of SIGNATURE OF OWNER OR AGENT 1 her y ertify that all of the details and information I have submitted or entered regarding this application are true and accurate to the best of my knowlec:�l and t at II plumbing work and installations performed under the permit issued for this application will be in co Mance wittl,�all Pertinent provision of the Mass usetts State Plumbing Code, and Chapter 142 of the General Laws.j ,` PLUMBER-GASFITTER NAME d} cwt S LICENSE # IU SIGNATURE MP 0 MGF 0 JP E] JGF [] LPGI © CORPORATION Ell # = PARTNERSHIP ®#= LLC N#� COMPANY NAME:ADDRESS 3��_ o s e.�• --� CITY o _ �.r�.! -- - - _� STATE I A) / ZIP FAX - /57=a46I CELL 1EMAIL ! t`��`! 0 Z H U W a QK ' i >41 o z O D W >- OE a Z w W � Q w rj a O� Pk w C W o a a a I J LL CL �. a x w F - w W H U W a c�7 The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of IndustrialAccidents 1 Congress Street, Suite 100 t Boston, MA 02114-2017 www mass.gov/dia Workers' Compensation Insurance Affidavit: Builders/Contractors/Electricians/Plumbers. TO BE FILED WITH THE PERMITTING AUTHORITY. Name (Business/Organization/Individual): Address: 3 k0 �E ki's � L City/State/Zip: P 6 Y v,,.. P -,-'V 8 0401 Phone #: 603 -a o rB e I Are you an employer? Check the appropriate box: Type of project (required): 1,N I am.a. employer with 70 ! employees (full and/or part-time).* %. ❑ New construction -2. ❑ I am a sole proprietor or partnership and have no employees working for me in 8. El Remodeling any capacity. [No workers' comp. insurance required.] 9. ❑ Demolition 3. ❑ I am a homeowner doing all work myself. [No workers' comp. insurance required.] t 10 Building addition ❑ 4. FJI am a homeowner and will be hiring contractors to conduct all work on my property. I will ensure that all contractors either have workers' compensation insurance or are sole 11. ❑ Electrical repairs or additions proprietors with no employees. 12. ❑ Plumbing repairs or additions 5. ❑ I am a general contractor and I have hired the sub -contractors listed on the attached sheet. These sub -contractors have employees and have workers' comp. insurance.$ 13. Roof re airs ❑ ' ` #VC 6. F-1Weare a corporation and its officers have exercised their right of 'exemption per MGL c. 14. gl Other 152, §1(4), and we have no..employees. [No workers' comp. insurance required.] v �' *Any applicant that checks box #1 must also fill out the section below showing their workers' compensation policy information. I Homeowners who submif 'this affidavit indicating they are doing all work and then hire outside contractors must submit a new affidavit indicating such. $Contractors that check this box must attached an additional sheet showing the name of the sub -contractors and state whether or not those entities have employees. If the sub -contractors have employees, they must provide their workers' comp. policy number. I am an employer that is providing workers' compensation insurance for my employees.' Below is the policy and job site information. r, Insurance Company i U k —Cl( ^_ S o,raK LQ C 0 _X p 4 Policy # or Self ins, Lie. #: ` (Ai ( Expiration Date: Job Site Address: S-5-0 W ' `� "''� `^� City/State/Zip: No J /'`_bJy4', A&, Attach a copy of the workers' compensation pol y declaration page (showing the policy number and expiration date). Failure to secure coverage as required under MGL c. 152, §25A is a criminal violation punishable by a fine up to $1,500.00 and/or one-year imprisonment, as well as civil penalties in the form of a STOP WORK ORDER and a fine of up to $250.00 a day against the violator. A copy of this statement may be forwarded to the Office of Investigations of the DIA for insurance coverage verification. I do herebyertii y under the pa I and penalties of perjury that the information provided above is true and correct. r Signature: G Date: 3 b s Phone#: (g o 3 `� �`1` `�✓ 3�q Official use only. Do not write in this area, to be completed by city or town official: City or Town: Permit/License # Issuing Authority (circle one): 1. Board of Health 2. Building Department 3. City/Town Clerk 4. Electrical Inspector 5. Plumbing Inspector 6. Other Contact Person: Phone #• Information and Instructions Massachusetts General Laws chapter 152 requires all employers to provide workers' compensation for their employees. Pursuant to this statute, an employee is defined as "...every person in the service of another under any contract bf hire, express or implied, oral or written." An employer is defined as "an individual, partnership, association, corporation or other legal entity, or any two or more of the foregoing engaged in a joint enterprise, and including the legal representatives of a deceased employer, or the receiver or trustee of an individual, partnership, association or other legal entity, employing employees. However the owner of a dwelling house having not more than three apartments and who resides therein, or the occupant of the dwelling house of another who employs persons to do maintenance, construction or repair work on such dwelling house or on the grounds or building appurtenant thereto shall not because of such employment be deemed to be an employer." MGL chapter 152, §25C(6) also states that "every state or local licensing agency shall withhold the issuance or renewal of a license or permit to operate a business or to construct buildings in the commonwealth for any applicant who has not produced acceptable evidence of compliance with the insurance coverage required." Additionally, MGL chapter 152, §25C(7) states "Neither the commonwealth nor any of its political subdivisions shall. enter into any contract for the performance of public work until acceptable evidence of compliance with the insurance requirements of this chapter have been presented to the contracting authority." Applicants Please fill out the workers' compensation affidavit completely, by checking the boxes that apply to your situation and, if necessary, supply sub -contractors) name(s), address(es) and phone number(s) along with their certificate(s) of insurance. Limited Liability Companies (LLC) or Limited Liability Partnerships (LLP) with no employees other than the members or partners, are not required to carry workers' compensation insurance. If an LLC or LLP does have employees, a policy is required. Be advised that this affidavit may be submitted to the Department of Industrial Accidents for confirmation of insurance coverage. Also be sure to sign and date the affidavit. The affidavit should be returned to the city or town that the application for the permit or license is being requested, not the Department of Industrial Accidents. Should you have any questions regarding the law or if you are required to obtain a workers' compensation policy, please call the Department at the number listed below. Self-insured companies should'enter their self-insurance license number on the appropriate line. City or Town Officials Please be sure that the affidavit is complete and printed legibly. The Department has provided a space at the bottom of the affidavit for you to fill out in the event the Office of Investigations has to contact you regarding the applicant. Please be sure to fill in the permit/license number which will be used as a reference number. In addition, an applicant that must submit multiple permit/license applications in any given year, need only submit one affidavit indicating current policy information (if necessary) and under "Job Site Address" the applicant should write "all locations in (city or town)." A copy of the affidavit that has been officially stamped or marked by the city or town may be provided to the applicant as proof that a valid affidavit is on file for future permits or licenses. A new affidavit must be filled out each year. Where a home owner or citizen is obtaining a license or permit not related to any business or commercial venture (i.e. a dog license or permit to burn leaves etc.) said person is NOT required to complete this affidavit. The Department's address, telephone and fax number: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Industrial Accidents 1 Congress Street, Suite 100 Boston, MA 02114-2017 Tel. # 617-727-4900 ext. 7406 or 1-877-MASSAFE Fax # 617-727-7749 Revised 02-23-15 www.mass.gov/dia Date/%3...1...x.................... TOWROF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR GAS INSTALLATION This certifies thatt.:.. '............. ............ �'' ..I5... , �... LL -O-- ...................... has permission for gas installation ......... 9 ............... ` nn ........... in the buildings of ......e k..�S.....:jr;l....................................... ,r a�........................ . North Andover, Mass. .................... :................ ... Fee. ` O..-.... Lic. No 16.5A.I............................................................................. GASINSPECTOR Check #t,20 f9 i > i MD A� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCEF5/7/2015 DATE(MMIDDIYYYY) WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER FIAI/Cross Insurance 1100 Elm Street CONTACT NAME: Jennifer Kokolis PHONE (603) 669-3218 FAC No (603)645-4331 AD RIE •7kokolis@crossagency.com INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGENAIC # Manchester NH 03101 INSURER A:Harleysville Worcester In Co 26182 INSURED Capstone Mechanical LLC P.O. BOX 89 INSURER B NOrGUARD Insurance Company INSURERC: INSURER D: INSURER E Portsmouth NH 03802 INSURER F: res_♦ 1J1V11 19UIr1OCr[. THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TD `DL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSR POLICY NUMBER MMIDD/YYYY) (MMIDDIYYYYI LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 100,000 A CLAIMS MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 -MADE OCCUR SPP00000074693U 2/1/2014 2/1/2015 PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 FEN -L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PRO LOC $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X Ea accident 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ A ANY AUTO ALL OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS aAO0000074698u 2/1/2014 12/1/2015 BODILY INJURY (Per $ ( ) A X HIRED AUTOS X AUTOS �ED A00000074692U (CT auto) 12/1/2014 12/1/2015 PROPERTY DAMAGE $ Per accident Underinsured motorist $ 1 000,000 X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 4,000,000 A EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $ 4,000,000 DED I X I RETENTION 10,000 000000746900 12/1/2014 2/1/2015 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY WC592731 (3a.) CT, DE,YIN $ WCSTATU- OTH- X OFFICER/MEANY IMBOER/EXCLUDED?ECUTIVEFYI N/A MD, NH, NJ, NY, PA, E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under 6 VA; James McKenna 6 2/1/2014 2/1/2015 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Ken Slover excluded A Leased/rented equipment SPP00000074693u 2/1/2014 12/1/2015 Limit: $25,000 Deductible: $1,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) Refer to policy for exclusionary endorsements and special provisions. Town of North Andover, MA 120 Main Street North Andover, MA 01845 I lum SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Hendershot, CIC/JSC 1_171�klc 01 44Y664 - 1--.1 V 19SS-Z010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. INS025 r9mnnF1 nl Tha At'00F1 nmmn mnrf Inn^ nra rnnicfararl m2r4a ^f A!`r10r1 ��� �:� . S£, fi i; b 's3ii nS� i SUBMITTAL DATA For: Approval Order #: Date: 12/04/2014 Project: #10535 North Andover, MA Project #: Location: North Andover, MA Engineer: Jeff Nieman Evergreen Air Conditioning 740 Randall Street Downers Grove, IL 60515 630-841-1600 Purchaser: Submitter: Matt McNair York / JCI 5005 York Drive Norman, OK 73069 405-419-6543 Unitary Sales Tool 0.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 Date 12/04/2014 v MAW Project Name #10535 North Andover, MA Project Number Rr* Client / Purchaser Submittal Summary Page Qty Tag # Model # Description 3 AC- 1, 2 & 5 ZR300S24G4DZZ3 25 Ton, York Large Sunline Single Packaged R-41 OA Air Conditioner, 10.0 EER / 10.5 IEER MagnaDRY with Reheat, Two Stage Cooling, 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat, 10 HP Standard Static Belt Drive Blower, 460-3-60 • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom Return Only) • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Phase Monitor • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • VAV Controller with VFD • Hot Gas Bypass • Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Unitary Sales Tool v1.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12104/2014 Qty Tag # Model # Description 1 AC- 8 ZR240S24G4DZZ3 20 Ton, York Large Sunline Single Packaged R-41 OA Air Conditioner, 12.1 EER / 12.9 IEER MagnaDRY with Reheat, Two Stage Cooling, 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat, 7.5 HP Standard Static Belt Drive Blower, 460-3-60 • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom Return Only) • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Phase Monitor • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • VAV Controller with VFD • Hot Gas Bypass • Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor unitary sales Tool vl.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12104/2014 Qty Tag # Model # Description 1 AC- 7 ZJ090S15W4DZZ7 7.5 Ton, York Predator Single Packaged R-41 OA Air Conditioner, 12.2 EER / 13.0 IEER, Two Stage Cooling, 144 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat, 3 HP High Static Belt Drive Blower, 460-3-60, Microchannel Condenser Coil, Composite Drain Pan • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Hoods (Bottom or Horizontal End Return Only) • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non Powered Convenience Outlet • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Phase Monitor NOTES: -Ignore the ZZxxxx at the end of the model numbers. Unitary Sales Tool 0.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 • Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor 1 HG041i5 Hail Guard Kit 1 1-5005-5035 4 Ton Curb Adapter- 4 Da Build P y t RSfJOt YC;RIf Sped Sensor 1NICtx31 Wel m & t3vrritl dfoe 'n, 7 ..:. : AN-R/JCI-YORK Space Sensor Sales Area t� R3 YC7E1 JC1 i.(GfJpece tensor w1 Overnd 2 AC- 7 & 9 S-5035 3-12.5 T S' Hold Down Clips Set (4) NOTES: -Ignore the ZZxxxx at the end of the model numbers. Unitary Sales Tool 0.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 -NO HGBP on ANY units. -All units will come with Costgard Condensate Drain Kit. -ALL RTU's will have 2 yr parts, 10 yr Compressor & HX Standard warranty. All claims should be filed locally. Unitary Sales Tool 0.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12104/2014 -ALL labor including warranty labor, start up, troubleshooting, travel time, etc. is the responsibility of the contractor. Equipment start-up and commissioning by a factory trained technician is recommended. Contact your supplying distributor or sales representative for additional information & guidance. unitary Sales Tool vl.5.9.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes, Printed 1 210 4/2 01 4 Reheat MagnaDryTM Single Pkg. R -410A AC I Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZR300S24G4DZZ3 Quantity 3 Tag #: AC. 1, 2 & 5 System: ZR300S24G4O7Z3 (3) Coolinq Performance Total capacity 318.4 MBH Sensible capacity 232.1 MBH Refrigerant type R-41 OA Efficiency (at ARI) 10.00 EER Integrated eff. (at ARI) 10.50 IEER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 °F Entering DB temp. 80,0 °F Entering WB temp. 67.0 °F Leaving DB temp, 58,5 °F Leaving WB temp. 56.9 °F Power input (w/o blower) 23.99 kW Sound power 92 dB(A) Reheat Performance Total capacity 137.9 MBH Ambient DB temp. 85 °F Entering DB temp. 75 °F Entering WB temp. 67 °F Leaving DB temp. 75 °F Leaving WB temp. 62.9 °F Power input (w/o blower) 21.24 kW Gallons of water per hour 15.73 al/hr Gas Heating Performance Entering DB temp. 60 °F Heating output capacity (Max) 240 MBH Supply air 10000 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 300 MBH Leaving DB temp. 82,2 °F Air temp. rise 22,2 °F SSE 80.0 % Stages 2 Supply Air Blower Performance Supply air 10000 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.3 IWG Unit static resistance 0.15 IWG Blower speed 1068 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 11.50 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 10.00 HP Actual required BHP 10.06 HP Power input 8.24 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 62.5 Amps Unit max over -current protection 80 Amps Dimensions & Wei ht Hgt 53 in. Len 181 in. Wth 92 in. Weight with factory installed options 3240 lbs. Clearances Right 36 in. Front 36 in. Back 49 in. J -0p 72 in. Bottom 0 in. Left 36 in. Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures = 25 Ton • York Sunline Units are Manufactured at an ISO 9001 Registered Facility and Each Rooftop is Completely Computer -Run Tested Prior to Shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Salt Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards). • Through -the -Curb and Through -The -Base Utility Connections • Either Supply and/or Return can be Field Converted from Vertical to Horizontal Configuration without Cutting Panels • Full Perimeter Base Rails with Built in Rigging Capabilities • Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Dual Refrigerant Circuits for Efficient Part Load Operation with Scroll Compressors • Two Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Hot Gas Bypass • 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • 10 HP Standard Static Belt Drive Blower • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Replacement Filters: 4 - (16" x 25" x 2" or 4") AND 4 - (16" x 20" x 2" or 4"). Unit accepts 2" or 4" wide filters. • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • Phase Monitor • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom.Retum Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • An Integrated Low -Ambient Control, Anti -Short Cycle Protection, Lead -Lag, Fan On and Fan off Delays, Low Voltage Protection, On -Board Diagnostic and Fault Code Display. Allows all units to operate in the cooling mode down to 0 °F outdoor ambient without additional components or intervention. • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the High and Low -Pressure Switches, the Freezestats, the Gas Valve, if Applicable, and the Temperature Limit Switch on Gas and Electric Heat Units. The Unit Control Board will Alarm on Ignition Failures, Safety Lockouts and Repeated Limit Switch Trips. BAS Controller • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor • VAV Controller with VFD Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty - Compressors and Electric Heater Elements • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty -Stainless Steel Tubular Heat Exchangers unitary aaies iooi vi.asu Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 Reheat MagnaDryTM Single Pkg. R -410A AC Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZR300S24G4DZZ3 Quantity: 3 Tag #: AC -1, 2 & 5 System: ZR300S24G4DZZ3 (3) Factory installed Options ZR300S24G4DZZ3 Product Identifier: Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: Additional Options: 10.0 EER / 10.5 IEER MagnaDRY with Reheat 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Phase Monitor Stainless Steel Drain Pan Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels VAV Controller with VFD Hot Gas Bypass Simplicity@ SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Field Installed Accessories ..—Y -- oo v .o.a.0 mto maoon is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12l04/201d 07 G M = - 10 a a - c N N m- - _ 00 N o � d o t 0o ro r app 3oM1 8 r _ ry ry o ry ry N � m o ry ��u 11 Q _ I 0 - - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ o oz - I }\� Vi fq o . I � � oN e - al rv� I I Y x � =y W ti 4 r----7�-- -� I i a o" N o M O6O _ Ir�� e= -I m4 N Qi V<O � Iry nm 1 me 2z la'lZ Mn zo 0 a a �® v i < .y Nn < WiW.► r --- AA '-- .. t- ASO usuimm oo i -4u.02 - x ¢�O.=if�u G m t na0 co - !Q ��6 Wdr Wn Otx.� ON< pj � O O 00 O z a w O-ui -------- r0� p O WW VWe�nc �wc zx O�vNr SWO 4NtvWx - Z� O O _;o OwONo6�Wn_z z ON a 1' N v�3 u em_ = ooersoe<�.<-Wuza z LLc � �i Q O¢r...................r....z o�ic rNN ar x zOd� IMA w4wn Nni+�iNer�-> <soN "a�_� w0 °` o� •K' � Ocw.. ¢x�OzwW �zzz--'Nw ... � O �za0 1 f �f � E M ox' 5<rO mOmoe53�< oy�4uW zooNz:� \• to d W I I ._ t Z U •• C rn _z •� 3 5 x J W N W o o�xs"' oo�zwi.-vuir pp V z r m0 O O O N z- O- x- a- O W VeC-VNmSro0e0 W i -n f CJ _ Large Sunune rage: iu 191YORK Single Package R -410A Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ300S24G4DZZ3 I.Quantity: 2 Tag #: AC- 3 & 4 System: ZJ300S24G4DZZ3 (2) cooprig Performance Total capacity 309.9 MBH Sensible capacity 224.0 MBH Refrigerant type R -410A Efficiency (at ARI) 10.50 EER Integrated eff. (at ARI) 10.60 IEER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 •F Entering DB temp. 80.0 °F Entering WB temp. 67.0 •F Leaving DB temp. 59.3 °F Leaving WB temp. 57,2 "F Power input (w/o blower) 24.38 kW Sound power 92 dB(A) Gas Heating Performance Entering DB temp. 60 °F Heating output capacity (Max) 240 MBH Supply air 10000 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 300 MBH Leaving DB temp. 82,2 °F Air temp, rise 22.2 °F 80.0 %n SSEes 2 Supply Air Blower Performance Supply air 10000 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.6 IWG Unit static resistance 0.15 IWG Blower speed 1006 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 11.50 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 10.00 HP Actual required BHP 9.14 HP Power input 7.49 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 66.3 Amps Unit max over -current protection 70 Amps Dimensions & Weight Hgt 53 in. Len 181 in. Wth 92 in. Weight with facto installed options 3263 lbs. Clearances Right" 36 in. Front 36 in. Back 49 in. Top 72 in. Bottom n in I eft 3R h Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures c us 25 Ton • York Sunline Units are Manufactured at an ISO 9001 Registered Facility and Each Rooftop is Completely Computer -Run Tested Prior to Shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Salt Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards). • Through -the -Curb and Through -The -Base Utility Connections • Either Supply and/or Return can be Field Converted from Vertical to Horizontal Configuration without Cutting Panels • Full Perimeter Base Rails with Built in Rigging Capabilities • Hinged & Tool Free Fitter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Four Independent Refrigerant Circuits for Efficient Part Load Operation with Scroll Compressors • Four Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Hot Gas Bypass • 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • 10 HP Standard Static Belt Drive Blower • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Replacement Filters: For 2" filters 12 - (12" x 24" x 2") OR For 4" fitters 2 - (20" X 24" x 4") AND 4- (24" X 24" x 4") • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • Phase Monitor • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom Return Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • An Integrated Low -Ambient Control, Anti -Short Cycle Protection, Lead -Lag, Fan On and Fan off Delays, Low Voltage Protection, On -Board Diagnostic and Fault Code Display. Allows all units to operate in the cooling mode down to 0 °F outdoor ambient without additional components or intervention. • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the High and Low -Pressure Switches, the Freezestats, the Gas Valve, if Applicable, and the Temperature Limit Switch on Gas and Electric Heat Units. The Unit Control Board will Alarm on Ignition Failures, Safety Lockouts and Repeated Limit Switch Trips. BAS Controller • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor • VAV Controller with VFD Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty -Compressors and Electric Healer Elements • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty -Stainless Steel Tubular Heat Exchangers ^w ��•�� mrormaaon is suotect to cnange wrtnout notice. check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 �MYIC OR g Large Sunline Page: 11 Single Package R -410A Air Conditioner Project Name: 010535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ300S24G4DZZ3 Quantity: 2 Tag #: AC- 3 & 4 System: ZJ300S24G4DZZ3 (2) Factory Installed Options ZJ300S24G4DZZ3 Product identifier: Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: Additional Options: 10.5 EER / 10.6 IEER 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Phase Monitor Stainless Steel Drain Pan Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels VAV Controller with VFD Hot Gas Bypass Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Field Installed Accessories 11.,aq oamcs .um v i a.a.v mtmmauon 13 suDJeCt to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12104/2014 �2 M v Cl A C fn S m e d o m ui f. m e - •• WO - 35N ` Uw ry ry r ry ry ry ry vi •n r vi vs of vi m ry ry e ry r o ry � m _ I uay O u + _ io - - - - - sV dN c _ W o N mIA Em. 00 c f -e Yw Wu V.19 m ods !�,� _� m< • a� — W4� N I - mN y _ ISL off" O V O 2•-C1W¢ - - x .-.ic otD d O 33 SO�ac Ut�x NN¢x s �i� a az OOc.� �2c rOt- W �- Q O w W M C w< 2 6cc i0 O - z Jom .. a.z zwws•-•-w�zoo � �c�� �-zz ".a .u'x '-.-au ii o f.) _eoa_voN_mz --<o.-xo__`n_Fo.�.,z�"-•moi`rv'o � Q ��ic a.- pp m QwMN•N+fnNa-OON aN-e 6sci0y0-i O t7 06O t K��W � � O � _cOr 't o0 � x ¢ i 1 - •'.m . Z .. a r-xF-zO w w� o omz�"�oorzwsrH� u r m000$Nm-o-x-o.-� ` ..owRsmw Reheat MagnaDryTM Single Pkg. R41 OA AC Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZR240S2404DZZ3 Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 8 System: ZR240S24G4DZZ3 Cooling Performance Total capacity 256.1 MBH Sensible capacity 185.7 MBH Refrigerant type R-41 OA Efficiency (at ARI) 12.10 EER Integrated eff. (at ARI) 12.90 IEER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 °F Entering DB temp. 80.0 °F Entering WB temp. 67.0 °F Leaving DB temp. 57.7 °F Leaving WB temp. 56.4 °F Power input (w/o blower) 17.65 kW Sound power 92 dB(A) Reheat Performance Total capacity 117.1 MBH Ambient DB temp. 85 °F Entering DB temp. 75 °F Entering WB temp. 67 °F Leaving DB temp. 75 °F Leaving WB temp. 62.5 °F Power input (w/o blower) 15.78 kW Gallons of water per hour 13.36 al/hr Gas HeatingPerformance Entering DB temp. 60 °F Heating output capacity (Max) 240 MBH Supply air 7700 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 300 MBH Leaving DB temp. 88,9 °F Air temp. rise 28.9 °F SSE 80.0 % Stages 2 Supply Air Blower Performance Supply air 7700 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.3 IWG Unit static resistance 0.15 IWG Blower speed 903 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 8.63 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 7.50 HP Actual required BHP 5.15 HP Power input 4.31 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 55.2 Amps Unit max over -current protection 70 Amps Dimensions & Weight Hgt 53 in. Len 181 in. Wih 92 in. Weight with factory installed options 3135 lbs. Clearances Right 36 in. Front 36 in. Back 49 in. To p 72 in. Bottom 0 in. Left 36 in. Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures 20 Ton • York Sunline Units are Manufactured at an ISO 9001 Registered Facility and Each Rooftop is Completely Computer -Run Tested Prior to Shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Safi Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards). • Through -the -Curb and Through -The -Base Utility Connections • Either Supply and/or Return can be Field Converted from Vertical to Horizontal Configuration without Cutting Panels • Full Perimeter Base Rails with Built in Rigging Capabilities • Hinged 8r Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Dual Refrigerant Circuits for Efficient Part Load Operation with Scroll Compressors • Two Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Hot Gas Bypass • 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • 7.5 HP Standard Static Belt Drive Blower • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Replacement Filters: 4 - (16" x 25" x 2" or 4") AND 4 - (16" x 20" x 2" or 4'). Unit accepts 2" or 4" wide filters. • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • Phase Monitor • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom Return Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • An Integrated Low -Ambient Control, Anti -Short Cycle Protection, Lead -Lag, Fan On and Fan off Delays, Low Voltage Protection, On -Board Diagnostic and Fault Code Display. Allows all units to operate in the cooling mode down to 0 °F outdoor ambient without additional components or intervention. • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the High and Low -Pressure Switches, the Freezestats, the Gas Valve, if Applicable, and the Temperature Limit Switch on Gas and Electric Heat Units. The Unit Control Board will Alarm on Ignition Failures, Safety Lockouts and Repeated Limit Switch Trips. BAS Controller • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MSfTP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor • VAV Controller with VFD Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty - Compressors and Electric Heater Elements • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty -Stainless Steel Tubular Heat Exchangers umaiy nares foul vi.o.a.0 information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 Large Sunline Reheat MagnaDryTM Single Pkg. R-41 OA AC Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZR240S2404DZZ3 Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 8 System: ZR240S24G4DZZ3 Factory Installed Options ZR240S24G4DZZ3 Product Identifier: Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: Additional Options: 12.1 EER / 12.9 IEER MagnaDRY with Reheat 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Phase Monitor Stainless Steel Drain Pan Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels VAV Controller with VFD Hot Gas Bypass Simplicity@ SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS(TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Field Installed Accessories mwrmanon is suoJea to change without notice. check local codes. Pdnted 12/04/2014 � M M N N ao _ - o0 � N o _ d .2 v+� - s _ f VV O �✓ z- g -----_-_-- ---_- _ - - a <I m o a o y N J a 1 =W O w ro cc O Zi u iy e - ------ - o� o g y m< n e TZ- o ' o mea 0 m _ g Zee; n`. -.o I eg_ d `) ► oz zo�:z a "' a ~ V O s O Cs V O O V O W.Vi 2 Awo et < <�Nyis Swp Nx tix0 s Oen �yiuz� r -w 0 c ds cc �3 w33 wwOv�V O ..emaa�o 4�y�t�s3 Z% a Omega ee.�mz c90 O w ik ^Oo�6�so i i C i i y- o i O � ZO d '0 V�e ,i wW2 OOi CO T Zar-000mo S;�i2� _� Nf c OaV QN4LLVV SOO.nZ Z� O Z V s O u'nt- e OrJOZ�OCinQOyv�Uw� o w w �000 i3O �- 0000.nz-O-x-F-Zws�n-� x V � c y wVo�-V�nmSi-o0o0 w � � �N e I •O � C -tin a of ao � mm ®� Single Package R-41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ240S24M4DZZ3 Quanfity: 1 Tag #: AC- 6 System: ZJ240S24M4DZZ3 Cooling Performance Total capacity 258.5 MBH Sensible capacity 188.5 MBH Refrigerant type R410A Efficiency (at ARI) 11.00 EER Integrated eff. (at ARI) 12.00 IEER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 •F Entering DB temp. 80.0 •F Entering WB temp. 67.0 •F Leaving DB temp. 58.2 °F Leaving WB temp. 56.8 °F Power input (w/o blower) 18.31 kW Sound power 92 dB(A) Gas Heating Performance Entering DB temp. 60 °F Heating output capacity (Max) 240 MBH Supply air 8000 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 300 MBH Leaving DB temp. 87.8 °F Air temp. rise 27.8 °F 80.0 % SSEes 2 Supply Air Blower Performance Supply air 8000 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.85 IWG Unit static resistance 0.15 IWG Blower speed 969 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 8.63 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 7.50 HP Actual required BHP 6.31 HP Power input 5.29 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 51.3 Amps Unit max over -current protection 60 Amps Dimensions & Weight Hgt 53 in. Len 181 in. Wth 92 in. Weight with factory installed options 3177 lbs. Clearances Right 36 in. Front 36 in. Back 49 in. Too 72 in. Bnftnm n in I aft oa i� Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures on c us _ 1171- 20 Ton • York Sunline Units are Manufactured at an ISO 9001 Registered Facility and Each Rooftop is Completely Computer -Run Tested Prior to Shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Salt Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards). • Through -the -Curb and Through -The -Base Utility Connections • Either Supply and/or Return can be Field Converted from Vertical to Horizontal Configuration without Cutting Panels • Full Perimeter Base Rails with Built in Rigging Capabilities • Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels • Stainless Steel Drain Pan • Four Independent Refrigerant Circuits for Efficient Part Load Operation with Scroll Compressors • Four Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Hot Gas Bypass • 240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • 7.5 HP High Static Bell Drive Blower • 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) • Replacement Filters: For 2" filters 12 - (12" x 24" x 2") OR For 4" fitters 2 - (20" X 24" x 4") AND 4- (24" X 24" x 4") • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non Powered Convenience Outlet (110 VAC) • Phase Monitor • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom Return Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • An Integrated Low -Ambient Control, Anti -Short Cycle Protection, Lead -Lag, Fan On and Fan off Delays, Low Voltage Protection, On -Board Diagnostic and Fault Code Display. Allows all units to operate in the cooling mode down to 0 "F outdoor ambient without additional components or intervention. • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the High and Low -Pressure Switches, the Freezestats, the Gas Valve, if Applicable, and the Temperature Limit Switch on Gas and Electric Heat Units. The Unit Control Board will Alarm on Ignition Failures, Safety Lockouts and Repeated Limit Switch Trips. BAS Controller • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor • VAV Controller with VFD Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty - Compressors and Electric Heater Elements • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty - Stainless Steel Tubular Heat Exchangers �•• •�•� �a,�� «•a•,, iniormauon is suojeta to cnange wdnout notice. cnerat iocai codes. Pdnted 12/04/2014 Single Package R41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ240S24M4DZZ3 (Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 6 System: ZJ240S24M4DZZ3 Factory Installed Options ZJ240S24M4DZZ3 Product Identifier: I J I 11.0 EER / 12.0 IEER Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: I S24 1240 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat Voltage: 1 4 1 460-3-60 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Phase Monitor Stainless Steel Drain Pan Hinged & Tool Free Filter, Blower, Motor and Electrical Access Panels Additional Options: ZZ VAV Controller with VFD Hot Gas Bypass Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MSrrP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Field Installed Accessories rotary sates mot w.5.9.o Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/201, 00 M M CL _ 00 N e - DO � N m - 3 O � F m a cm zw �za w_o OVw �� 32,E uv z Y 32OG OM112 OETVm W _ -l4 s� aN AN a o - _ - - - o 0 o -E. - -- - =- S L R c v Yw rn Qoa WI ` ^� o m w e, __—� tt •w -O'- io O Zx VO OV Ou6i � O 6✓OiNux 2W0 z x x0 � w0•nuuzV .w Qz cc _ � �3 3O Ow0•no c�a� _ Z {Q vmlD <`z Y_t-wwx NacOOs ¢ r- o Jcw mzo Ua ~oc~Owz H � Nw< u Nr+•yNO � Fm x gam, woomi �-•ouPnY u_z � I C � Z r OZV OZU-•uW Z�ONa sh. P.D c_?w �< •- etc.." H OS.�YOOw ` I � .-. f w � z w O O¢z30�Oo�•-YwZ�N� wz Ow�secw r- m0000Pnm-O-x-a-O w -- Single Package R41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ090S16W4DZZ7 (Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 7 System: ZJ090S15W4DZZ71 Cooling Performance Total capacity 97.0 MBH Sensible capacity 70.0 MBH Refrigerant type R410A Efficiency (at ARI) 12,00 EER Integrated eft. (at ARI) 13.00 IEER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 °F Entering DB temp. 80.0 °F Entering WB temp. 67.0 °F Leaving DB temp. 58,4 •F Leaving WB temp. 56,8 •F Part load efficiency 14.2 IPLV Power input (w/o blower) 6.87 kW Sound power 83 dB(A) Gas Heating Performance Entering DB temp. 60 °F Heating output capacity (Max) 144 MBH Supply air 3000 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 180 MBH Leaving DB temp. 104,4 °F Air temp. rise 44.4 °F 80.0 % SSEes 2 Supply Air Blower Performance Supply air 3000 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.6 IWG Unit static resistance 0.28 IWG Blower speed 955 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 3.45 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 3.00 HP Actual required BHP 1,82 HP Power input 1.70 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 21.8 Amps Unit max over -current protection 25 Amps Dimensions & Weight Hgt 51 in. Len 89 in. Wth 59 in. Weight with factory installed options 1305 lbs. Clearances Right 12 in. Front 36 in. Back 36 in. To p 72 in. Bottom 0 in. Left 36 in. Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures BC us 7.5 Ton • York Predator units are manufactured at an ISO 9001 registered facility and each rooftop is completely computer -run tested prior to shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Salt Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards) • Through -the -Curb and Through -the -Base Utility Connections • Full perimeter base rails with built in rigging capabilities • Hinged Access Panels • Slide -Out Condensate Drain Pan • Reciprocating Compressor • Two Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Microchannel Condenser Coil • 144 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • 3 HP High Static Belt Drive Blower • Unit Ships with 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) with a Standard Filter Rack that will Accept up to 4" Filters • Replacement Filters: 4 - (24" x 20"). Unit accepts 2" or 4" wide filters. • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non -Powered Convenience Outlet • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer wBarometric Relief and Power Exhaust and Hoods (Bottom or Horizontal End Return Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the high and low-pressure switches, the freezestats, the gas valve, if applicable, and the temperature limit switch on gas and electric heat units. The unit control board will alarm on ignition failures, safety lockouts and repeated limit switch trips. BAS Controller • IntelliSpeed control of the VFD based on stages of cooling. Provides Single Zone VAV Fan Operation as defined by ASHRAE 90.1 section 6.4.3.10. • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty - Compressors • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty on Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger ���„•�r Intormauon Is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 Single Package R-41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model* ZJ090S15W4DZZ7 Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 7 System: ZJ090S15W40ZZ71 Factory Installed Options ZJ090S1 SW4DZZ7 Product Identifier: I J 1 12.2 EER / 13.0 IEER Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: I S15 I 144 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat Voltage: 1 4 1 460-3-60 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Microchannel Condenser Coil Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MSrTP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Additional Options: ZZ ReturnDischarge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Composite Drain Pan IntelliSpeed control of the VFD based on stages of cooling (Provides Single Zone VAV Fan Operation as defined by ASHRAE 90.1 section 6.4.3.10) Field Installed Accessories 0 1 HG0411 - Hail Guard Kit (37.0 lbs) "my owes ium - a.a.0 mtormation is sunJect to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12104/2014 W a e�•1 to w Z N a � • w Z��Z•• N C Q£N ^ N m �w LL m� N u :n i m m I � vHi r QNQ' Z m � 2 N r u N M T m to Nu ¢W d jw KwF2- dOv1�Q w2U�wlr-1WH J yy 8cc O aC O r H p n d H z 3 3 O 0 h H r V O Z Z qrHOvfZz lm.: IU r�W 000rwom>Cq r Ii z >m wz u.Y.lm In 8 o d q� q .. ,-oo� zHWHx grrw r K X N U Jmow^^^.-�� owm grzzrwwx �nm uu..-� om � zm z g1�iWW� LLo � aa S� INu WJ H S r ILII � H x W z r Q o w n o 0 K W •760 r qr ouc �..� wawNln lc lcN min �.mJWn �t7 o:naa �a�ln r H � � Nrvf lvl tvl l� E Q1nYo ZC217 Uq �zU EZQ1A rJw Q zJOHw w F 31' 2 eS3 KUZpV1-: VIGZHH CS oC 2 aC li - •• �• z IIII!Illlllllh Q W �n .� �^ $m�� �+ illlilllllllll• do �z �mm� m� � �az m.•. a �J rp �,J _ m o � IIIIIIIIIIIIII ��nnJY m IIIIIIIIIIIIII. WO `^ ,^wJ Y Off. -.O.^ -. .....�.•... ._.. - N N FV - m^ NuHu ¢1011 V1 i C vm10� m e--------:-----� a a e�•1 to I Z��Z•• N C Q£N • �w LL m� N u a � c L' 1 M = Z��Z•• N C Q£N • I M^ 4 r rwi� /-Zq�4V1:Oi IW'J tx7 JW w21 Z ZQHmF�V J UK O � min O WO p to Nu ¢W d jw KwF2- dOv1�Q w2U�wlr-1WH J yy 8cc O aC O r H p n d H z 3 3 O 0 h H r V O Z Z qrHOvfZz lm.: IU r�W 000rwom>Cq r z >m wz u.Y.lm In 8 o d q� q .. ,-oo� zHWHx grrw r ia u s u d m J Qo x �zr zranoc vl � c L' 1 M = YSW QJQ U' O / � QqW UZU�VIm 2 Wren' / z zvdl� ��rumiw� lra,�oa Ir/ O c S OwrrKOSNr H�U - l•J • I 4 r rwi� /-Zq�4V1:Oi IW'J tx7 JW w21 Z ZQHmF�V J UK to jw KwF2- dOv1�Q w2U�wlr-1WH J yy 8cc O aC O r H p n d H z 3 3 O 0 h H r V O Z Z qrHOvfZz lm.: IU r�W 000rwom>Cq z d q� q .. ,-oo� zHWHx grrw r N U Jmow^^^.-�� owm grzzrwwx �nm uu..-� om � zm z g1�iWW� LLo � Q �� � z OHf Oi O1 O1 H�'�Vlm tJ�Vf�QOgO���-C z�O z o w r O � � H x W z r Q o w n o 0 K W •760 r qr ouc �..� wawNln lc lcN min �.mJWn �t7 o:naa �a�ln r H � � Nrvf lvl tvl l� E Q1nYo ZC217 Uq �zU EZQ1A rJw Q zJOHw w F 31' 2 eS3 KUZpV1-: VIGZHH CS oC 2 aC � J Ntn T iQ r �Q I r to Q rl., d'»OzwLLrZ O •.1-v m HO.-. _ . r <n W: -:O v12 wJY r�V jW ZQ ••��pC 0 V < Q q !-NJ �n .. �HtrJV��p�O v12 ,Fd4r ` u HO Ism Z ox xrzc••rw czuvlgLL In�JWo mn P baa �? � •wu.oadrm•.+QH rzWmv,w rH z ' U ..O H1ziC �LLK�a000 mCWOO���KHOHWH�p ZpZX OHO Nu C7 N 1/1w3E r100�WV Vutmg�00W4 OH � • MR i. d C'1 z •:'•i.n v ui to � ao of m itv SE Single Package R-41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model* ZJ049S09H4DZZ7 Quantity: 1 Tag #: AC- 9 System: ZJ049S09H4DZZ7 Cooling Performance Total capacity 50.0 MBH Sensible capacity 36.2 MBH Refrigerant type R-41 OA Seasonal Efficiency (at ARI) 15.00 SEER Efficiency (at ARI) 12.20 EER Ambient DB temp. 95.0 °F Entering DB temp. 80.0 °F Entering WB temp. 67.0 "F Leaving DB temp. 59.1 "F Leaving WB temp. 57.1 °F Power input (w/o blower) 3.51 kW Sound power 81 dB(A) Gas Heating Performance Entering DB temp. 60 "F Heating output capacity (Max) 97 MBH Supply air 1600 CFM Heating input capacity (Max) 120 MBH Leaving DB temp. 1161 "F Air temp. rise 56.1 "F SSE 81.0 % Stages 2 Supp Air Blower Performance Supply air 1600 CFM Ext. static pressure 0.6 IWG Unit static resistance 0.14 IWG Blower speed 868 RPM Max BHP of Motor (including service factor) 1.73 HP Duct location Bottom Motor rating 1.50 HP Actual required BHP 0.69 HP Power input 0.64 kW Elevation 0 ft. Drive type BELT Electrical Data Power supply 460-3-60 Unit min circuit ampacity 10.9 Amps Unit max over -current protection 15 Amps Dimensions & Weight Hgt 42 in. Len 89 in. Win 59 Weight with factory installed options 970 lbs. Clearances Right 12 in. Front 36 in. Back 36 in. Top 72 in. Bottom 0 in. Left 36 in. Note: Please refer to the tech guide for listed maximum static pressures on C usaF-�� 4 Ton • York Predator units are manufactured at an ISO 9001 registered facility and each rooftop is completely computer -run tested prior to shipment. Unit Features • Unit Cabinet Constructed of Powder Painted Steel, Certified At 1000 Hours Safi Spray Test (ASTM B-117 Standards) • Through -the -Curb and Through -the -Base Utility Connections • Full perimeter base rails with built in rigging capabilities • Hinged Access Panels • Slide -Out Condensate Drain Pan • Reciprocating Compressor • Single Stage Cooling • Solid Core Liquid Line Filter Driers • Microchannel Condenser Coil • 97 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat • Slide -Out Blower/1.5 HP Belt Drive Motor Assembly • Unit Ships with 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) with a Standard Filter Rack that will Accept up to 4" Filters • Replacement Filters: 4 - (24" x 16"). Unit accepts 2" or 4" wide finers. • Single Point Power Connection • HACR Circuit Breaker/Disconnect • Non -Powered Convenience Outlet • Phase Monitor • Dry Bulb Low Leak Economizer w/Barometric Relief and Hoods (Bottom or Horizontal End Return Only) • Short Circuit Current: 5kA RMS Symmetrical Standard Unit Controller: Simplicity Control Board • Safety Monitoring - Monitors the high and low-pressure switches, the freezestats, the gas valve, if applicable, and the temperature limit switch on gas and electric heat units. The unit control board will alarm on ignition failures, safety lockouts and repeated limit switch trips. BAS Controller • Simplicity SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Warranty • One (1) Year Limited Warranty on the Complete Unit • Five (5) Year Warranty - Compressors • Fifteen (15) Year Warranty on Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger unitary sines moi vi a.a.0 Information is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/2014 Single Package R41 OA Air Conditioner Project Name: #10535 North Andover, MA Unit Model #: ZJ049S09H4DZZ7 Quantity: 1 Tag * AC- 9 System: ZJ049S09H4DZZ7 Factory Installed Options ZJ049S09H4DZZ7 Product Identifier: Heat Type and Nominal Heat Capacity: 1HG0415 - Hail Guard Kit (50.0 lbs) uary xros wm v�a.a.0 Additional Options: 15.0 SEER / 12.2 EER 97 MBH Output Stainless Steel, Two Stage Gas Heat 2" Pleated Filters (MERV 7) Microchannel Condenser Coil Phase Monitor Simplicity® SE Controller with Gateway to BACnet MS/TP (Programmable to Modbus or N2) Protocol with Discharge Air Sensor, Return Air, and Outside Air Sensor Composite Drain Pan Field Installed Accessories mrohnaaon is subject to change without notice. Check local codes. Printed 12/04/201, A 0 0 2 COM1 V1�n.dJY ^bu �mm m T � mw ro�Z n N m m m W f 0 Y G -- u j N M T^ M01 Irl. CEO m� a0� a.o N N N n N N m n o J u v N N b M1 N m T m m e•1 O VI QI n IA ID 2 m b �tZ'J Nu " vl � 1.e`i pZ OWJ Wu O wO 9 Z� r '�Q V W3m W� KN ZW Z v HN Z H� p 6� OH rm v a In n In m m m a n .`"•� X H z a N N N N N Orr Nu � tJ^ m Z m W C w J>m ww uJmvl In oao� u Zau E� uQ p ti Za - a I/f Q= O 1Z'IvZIM � M M M r =Iu u T .J u SIT Q H W V p w 4 n OH�M1 3 n n nm Ufa jz ozHr x x m C N N N N N a 2 � � M .s-Qxvaj .Nnm� o 492E O r i 2 COM1 V1�n.dJY ^bu �mm m T � mw ro�Z n N m m m W f 0 Y G -- R d16. T^ M01 Irl. CEO m� a0� a.o A Q oc� my o C an j u M1 b �tZ'J Nu " vl � 1.e`i pZ OWJ Wu O wO 9 Z� '�Q V W3m W� KN ZW v HN Z H� p 6� OH rm X H z a Mm W b • H----_ Ww rW � C Ov Orr Nu � Z m W C w J>m ww uJmvl In oao� u Zau E� uQ p ti Za - a I/f Q= O Q H W V p w i�w t7xln�s � wr'>xga r Ufa jz MNr zeHCQlp,w� C o a ou,wrx C Q .s-Qxvaj .Nnm� o 492E i dwoln�a�nxMfclr.�� O O H O r H p M1 3 3 W pMWrWomioga a"'mlInl � p� .. ocw^,-,.-.�-, oao arzzrx-ww F --N g .�Wm 5 .. Z JOm Cw 00 ZK Z QVfwWW �.+ .=l m. -.w wt� roQrow pzHt71n Q Z ---0 y („� Q uNb O �.uuumO �s UHVfWdO OH>r-+C2J2 r ¢ o r JwH InzrH ao W 2QQ c' w pOJ d •>6p rinw Qr Vv'22 O V' Q cc ^ m b b W V f N b N m V lJ 1' d Q l7 O V f QQ l'l M U OZ S p Ol .. ru, "opFgg ^ ao ^� r� ZZsm»ozwgrinzz 88i� Nu � O�u�Qi vf� ••?NC2J}Om �V ��w OJNOx� z Z Iz-Iv Sri�r`"r •. o�v'o�u�v�mo �zb in��"Q We° o u o� °C � Z � •�roa K�_c�uln�W �Nw�MJWo�mmM mHZH�LLwmoo z� omoKzwM6op�m LLw.. oe rmo m`�ioo gln oHx uz o 3 F r bpr W U H U Inm�:r pOwQ m W a 0 Q j O"NM V V1 b n m OIC � 1s: a z 9 Al F% �f �s l s E� i? Date 2�1�.v�. TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING This certifies that ......8��... .... ........................................ I ................... N has permission to perform ....... ............... wiringin the building of ......... kf.! .............................................................................. at .............. ................................................... le .. :., ................... . North Andover, Mass. Fee..... .Lic.No.o* ...................... P I *� EWTR�11CAL2PECTOIR. Check # j r L —i l.ommonwea& of Maijac4wetti Official Use Only 2eparitmerrt of Jire Serviced Permit No. l Occupancy and Fee Checked BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS [Rev. 1/071 (leaveblank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code (MEC).. 527 CMR 12.00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) Date: 3I ()-I IT City or Town of: North Andover To the InsTectot• of Wires.- By ires:By this application the undersigned gives notice of his or her intention to perform the electrical work described below. Location (Street & Number) 350 Winthrop Avenue Owner or Tenant .Kohl's Department Stores Telephone No. 262-703-7000 Owner's Address N56 W 17000 Ridgewood Drive Menomonee Falls, WI 53051 Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit? Yes ® No ❑ (Check Appropriate Box) Purpose of Building Retail Kohl's Utility Authorization No. Existing Service Amps / Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrd ❑ No. of Meters New Service Amps / Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrd ❑ No. of Meters Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work: Cosmetic/Jewelry Department renovation including floor trenching receptacles lighting, & data communications. Completion oflhe.following table mai, be waived bi, the In ector of Wires. No. of Recessed Luminaires No. of Ceil: Sus P (Paddle) ) Fans No. of Total Transformers KVA No. of Luminaire Outlets 1 No. of Hot Tubs Generators KVA No. of Luminaires 10 Swimming Pool Above ❑ In- ❑ g rnd. rnd. o. o Emergency Lighting Batter Units No. of Receptacle Outlets 1 ] No. of Oil Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Switches No. of Gas Burners of No. InDetection and Initiatin Devices No. of Ran es g No. of Air Cond. Total Tons No. of Alerting Devices Heat Pump Number Tons KW No. of Self -Contained No. of Waste Dis osers P Totals: Detection/Alerting Devices No. of Dishwashers S ace/Area Heating KW P g Local ❑ Municipal ❑ Other Connection No. of Dryers Heating Appliances KW Sectio. o Devices or Equivalent No. of Water KW No. of No. of Data Wiring: Heaters Signs Ballasts No. of Devices or Equivalent 2 No. Hydromassage Bathtubs No. of Motors Total HP Telecommunications Wiring: No. of Devices or Equivalent 1. OTHER: Trenching of floor for floor receptacles, data and telephone. Attach additional detail if desired, or as required by the Inspector of Wires. Estimated Value of Electrical Work: $14,101 (When required by municipal policy.) Work to Start: 04/26/15 Inspections to be requested in accordance with MEC Rule 10, and upon completion. INSURANCE COVERAGE: Unless waived by the owner, no permit for the performance of electrical work may issue unless the licensee provides proof of liability insurance including "completed operation" coverage or its substantial equivalent. The undersigned certifies that such coverage is in force, and has exhibited proof of same to the permit issuing office. CHECK ONE: INSURANCE ❑ BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Specify:) I certify, under the pains and penalties of perjury, that the information on this application is true and complete. FiRM NAME: Coinmercial Technologies LIC. NO.: A] 7484 Licensee: David P. LeBlanc Signature LIC. NO.: F30352 (lfapplicable, enter "exempt"in the license number line.) Bus. Tel. No.: 800-582-6106 Address: 48 Davis Road, Millbury. MA 01527 Alt. Tel. No.: 508-250-2737 *Per M.G.L. c. 147, s. 57-61, security work requires Department of Public Safety "S" License: Lic. No. OWNER'S INSURANCE WAiVER: 1 am aware that the Licensee does not have the liability insurance coverage normally required by law. By my signature below, 1 hereby waive this requirement. I am the (check one) ❑ owner ❑ owner's agent. Owner/Agent Signature Telephone No. PERMIT FEE: $ 203 6q0 36�(. �n N 9 The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of IndustrialAccidents a , d I Congress Street, Suite 100 Boston, MA 02114-2017 www mass.gov/dia Workers' Compensation Insurance Affidavit: Builders/Contractors/Electricians/Plumbers. TO BE FILED WITH THE PERMITTING AUTHORITY. Applicant Information / Please Print Legibly Name (Business/Organization/Individual): Ce {h 41 ej,tr`d-+- t�C �rt o /G{i Information and Instructions Massachusetts General Laws chapter 152 requires all employers to provide workers' compensation for their employees. Pursuant to this statute, an employee is defined as "...every person in the service of another under any contract of hire, express or implied, oral or'written." An employer is defined as "an individual, partnership, association, corporation or other legal entity, or any two or more of the foregoing engaged in a joint enterprise, and including the legal representatives of a deceased employer, or the receiver or trustee of an individual, partnership, association or other legal entity, employing employees. However the owner of a dwelling house having not more than three apartments and who resides therein, or the occupant of the dwelling house of another who employs persons to do maintenance, construction or repair work on such dwelling house or on the grounds or building appurtenant thereto shall not because of such employment be deemed to be an employer." MGL chapter 152, §25C(6) also states that "every state or local licensing agency shall withhold the issuance or renewal of a license or permit to operate a business or to construct buildings in the commonwealth for any applicant who has not produced acceptable evidence of compliance with the insurance coverage required." Additionally, MGL chapter 152, §25C(7) states "Neither the commonwealth nor any of its political subdivisions shall enter into any contract for the performance of public work until acceptable evidence of compliance with the insurance requirements of this chapter have been presented to the contracting authority." Applicants Please fill out the workers' compensation affidavit completely, by checking the boxes that apply to your situation and, if necessary, supply sub -contractors) name(s), address(es) and phone number(s) along with their certificate(s) of insurance. Limited Liability Companies (LLC) or Limited Liability Partnerships (LLP) with no employees other than the members or partners, are not required to carry workers' compensation insurance. If an LLC or LLP does have employees, a policy is required. Be advised that this affidavit may be submitted to the Department of Industrial Accidents for confirmation of insurance coverage. Also be sure to sign and date the affidavit. The affidavit should be returned to the city or town that the application for the permit or license is being requested, not the Department of Industrial Accidents. Should you have any questions regarding the law or if you are required to obtain a workers' compensation policy, please call the Department at the number listed below. Self-insured companies should enter their self-insurance license number on the appropriate line. City or Town Officials Please be sure that the affidavit is complete and printed legibly. The Department has provided a space at the bottom of the affidavit for you to fill out in the event the Office of Investigations has to contact you regarding the applicant. Please be sure to fill in the permit/license number which will be used as a reference number. In addition, an applicant that must submit multiple permit/license applications in any given year, need only submit one affidavit indicating current policy information (if necessary) and under "Job Site Address" the applicant should write "all locations in (city or town)." A copy of the affidavit that has been officially stamped or marked by the city or town may be provided to the applicant as proof that a valid affidavit is on file for future permits or licenses. A new affidavit must be filled out each year. Where a home owner or citizen is obtaining a license or permit not related to any business or commercial venture (i.e. a dog license or permit to burn leaves etc.) said person is NOT required to complete this affidavit. The Department's address, telephone and fax number: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Industrial Accidents 1 Congress Street, Suite 100 Boston, MA 02114-2017 Tel. # 617-727-4900 ext. 7406 or 1-877-MASSAFE Fax # 617-727-7749 Revised 02-23-15 www.mass.gov/dia ACORO®a CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE l DATE (MM/DDIYYYY) 3/11/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: FAX PHONED Exb508-366-6161 A/C No: MACXINTIRE INSURANCE AGENCY INC E-MAIL ADDRESS: 11 W MAIN ST INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # S 1984284 WESTBOROUGH MA 01581-1936 INSURER A: SELECTIVE INS CO OF SOUTH CAROLINA 19259 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 INSURED INSURER B: SELECTIVE INS CO OF THE SOUTHEAST 39926 INSURER C COMMERCIAL TECHNOLOGIES INC. INSURER D 48 DAVIS RD INSURER E: MILLBIIRY MA 01527-1013 A INSURER F, COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MM/DD/YYYY POLICY EXP MM/DDIYYYY LIMITS X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE F OCCUR X S 1984284 5/25/2014 5/25/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED 100, 000 PREMISES Ea occurrence $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10,000 A PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 3,000,000 X POLICY 17x PE� LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OPAGG $ 3,000,000 $ OTHER: AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ Ea accident BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ANY AUTO ALL OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ Per accident NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS AUTOS A X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCURS 1984284 5/25/2014 5/25/2015 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE DED I X I RETENTION$ ZERO $ B WORKERS EMPLOY EMPLOYERS'TION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N WC 7955643 5/25/2014 5/25/2015 PER H STATUTE X ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEE.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ❑ N / A (Mandatory in NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) This Certificate of Liability Insurance was created by Selective on behalf of the agent. TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER is included as additional insured with respect to General Liability as required by written contract or agreement. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER 1600 OSGOOD ST BLDG 20 SUITE 2035 NORTH ANDOVER MA 01845 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2014/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 0- I 0 %CC?RL> AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: annITWINAI Ri=mApw-q -grwFnl ll F Paae 2 of 2 AGENCY NAMED INSURED MACRINTIRE INSURANCE AGENCY INC COMMERCIAL TECHNOLOGIES INC. POLICY NUMBER 48 DAVIS RD S 1984284 CARRIER NAIC CODE MILLBURY MA 01527-1013 SELECTIVE INS CO OF SOUTH CAROLINA 19259 EFFECTIVEDATE: 5/25/2014 DDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: Acogn 25 FORM TITLE: c:.RTT> n of •Tani .rTy TNG T nM JOB # ROHLS JOB LOCATION 350 WINTHROP AVE NORTH ANDOVER MA 01845 CORD 101 (2008101) © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD a f. co rn Cl D m rn rJ V t/1 Z C1 L7 --:� • � ri a 03 O s m o .f>: r.? —`$7 3 r, iti VIN n 4r _ �n MIM .z ..m ... LICENSEE._.IGNATUR Stephen G. Guarracino Operations Officer 11 Electrical C O M PAN Y, INC. 220 Broadway, Suite 303 • Lynnfield, MA 01940 Phone 781.581.3328 A Fax 781.581.3415 sguarracino@jmelectrical.com ♦ www.jmelectrical.com ®—a � N2 Date....������'.-. N- 3535 ........... TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING Cn :A/ This certifies that ) " f -� C CJ . has permission to perform 3 wiring in the building of ....... f .......................!�... . F .................................. / (r✓ < <' ��'�'f .+: ; North Andover, M�� at.......................................... ,,.... aFee.......?............ Lic. No.. ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR Check # 1 WHITE: Applicant CANARY: Building Dept. PINK: Treasurer 10 r � � r 0144 Tommonw alo of Massar4usetts w 19epttrtmettt of Public 4&ttfetg BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS 527 CMR 12:00 Office Use Only 'y Permit No. ✓ ,/J Occupancy & Fee Checked (leave blank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code, 527 CMR 12:00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) Date 1/9/02 City or Town of NORTH ANDOVER To the Inspector of Wires: The undersigned applies for a permit to perform the electrical work described below. Location (Street & Number) t W14-r14,e p P Floor _ Owner or Tenant KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE Tel. No Owner's Address Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit: Purpose of Building RETAIL Existing Service Amps _� Volts Yes IN No ❑ (Check Appropriate Box) Utility Authorization No. Overhead ❑ Undgrnd ❑ No. of Meters New Service Amps _� Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrnd ❑ No. of Meters Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work TERMINATE CONTROL WIRES INSTALLED BY THE JOB ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CONTROL WIRES FOR HVAC_ No. of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs No. of Transformers Total KVA No. of Lighting Fixtures Swimming Pool Above In- ❑ ❑ grnd. grnd. Generators KVA No. of Emergency Lighting No. of Receptacle Outlets No. of Oil Burners Battery Units No. of Switch Outlets No. of Gas Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Detection and No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Total tons Initiating Devices No. of Disposals No. of Heat Total Total Pumps Tons KW No. of Sounding Devices No. of Self Contained No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW Detection/Sounding Devices LocalMunicipal ❑ Other ❑ Connection No. of Dryers Heating Devices KW No. of No. of Low Voltage No. of Water Heaters KW Signs Ballasts Wiring No. Hydro Massage Tubs No. of Motors Total HP OTHER: INSURANCE COVERAGE: Pursuant to the requirements of Massachusetts General Laws I have a current Liability Insurance Policy includ- ing Comoleted Operations Coverage or its substantial equivalent. YES X NO C 1 have submitted valid proof of same to the Office. YES E NO ❑ If you have checked YES, please indicate the type of coverage by checking the appropriate box. INSURANCE ® BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Please Specify) DR2ANCTTR TNRURANCR Ar WTTry Estimated Value of Electrical Work $ 3 , 000 .00 (Expieati6n Date) Work to Start 1/11/02 Inspection Date Requested: Rough Signed under the Penalties of Perjury: FIRM NAME J •m• Electrical Co. , Inc. Licensee Paul A. Guarracino Signature Final WILL CALL NO, A 12563 NoE 21743 Address 220 BROADWAY, SUITE 303, LYNNFIELD, MA 01940 Bus. Tel. No. Alt. Tel. No. OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the Licensee does not have the insurance coverage or its substantial equivalent as re- quired by Massachusetts General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Owner Agent (Please check one) (Signature of /Tuner or Agent) Telephone No. PERMIT FEE $ 75.00 Notify Inspector for rough and/or final inspection. Permit must be obtained before commencing any, and all work in compliance with G.L.C. 141 & a:, applica- ble laws & ordinances is required and understood. X-6796 P. m 0 n m 0 m n O n D Z D IT v O Z n O 0 .2 Z X Z U) 0 m n 4 O M n O 0 - C� ---(- � q,�; 014f Tommonwento of Mnssac4usetts 19epartment of Public #alfetg BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS 527 CMR 12:00 E 7(,331 Office Use Only Permit No. 5 Occupancy & Fee Checked (leave blank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT -TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code, 527 CMR 12:00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) . Date 1/9/02 City or Town of NORTH ANDOVER ( To the Inspector of Wires: The undersigned applies for a p rmit to perform the electrical work described below. Location (Street & Number) N rt I'r > 7 Floor Owner or Tenant _ KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE Tel. No. Owner's Address Is.this:permit in•{c6njunctiori:wifh.-a�buildinb4Permit: • Ieto -• `�' Nii F'� ' (Che0k°Appropria#e`Box)' RETAIL- --- -- Purpose-of,Building..Utility Authorization No. - Existing Service ^ _Amps %_/ : olts Overhead F1 ''"U^ gmd ❑ ~-No. of Meters sR New Service Amps Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrnd ❑ No. of Meters Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work TERMINATE CONTROL WIRES INSTALLED BY THE JOB WIRES FOR HUC. s.. No. of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs No. of Transformers Total KVA No. of Lighting Fixtures. - Swimming Pool ;=Above In-KVA ❑ ❑ grnd.- grn& Generators No. of Emergency Lighting No. of Recpta�Cte Outlets, No: of Oil Burriers Battery Units No. of Switch Outlets No. of Gas Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Detection and No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Total. Bti tons Initiating Devices ` No. of Dis posals Heat Total Total No. o$umps Tons KW No. of Sounding Devices No. of Self Contained No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW Detection/Sounding Devices LocalMunicipal ❑ Other ❑ No. of Dryers Heating Devices KW Connection No. of No. of Low Voltage. No. of Water Heat s ; KW b_,-:.. �S,igns t, Ballasts. c , = $._: Wiring No. Hydro Massage Tubs No. of Motors Total HP OTHER: INSURANCE COVERAGE: Pursuant to the requirements of Massachusetteneral Laws I have a current Liability Insurance Policy includ- ing Com let d Operations Coverage or its substantial equivalent. YES � NO ❑ 1 have submitted valid proof of same to the Office. YES ❑, r If you have checked YES, please indicate the of covers e b checkin thea ro riate box. INSURAN C� BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Please Specify)- RTSANCTISe It SURANEE AG�ENG 111103 3,000.00 (Expiration Date) Estimated slue oflWork $ WILL CALL Work to S, rt �� r Inspection Date Requested: Rough Final Signed un Fdl�e, Penalt s�of Perjyyry: FIRM NAM j .ffi. f1C'Ctr1C' i Co. , Inc. , C. No. A 1203 Licensee au rraC no Signature C. NO. E 21143- 220 BROAD11AY, SUITE 303, LYNNFIELD, MA 01940 Bus. Tel. No. ` Address Alt. Tel. No. OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: 1 am aware that the. Licensee does not have the insurance coverage or its substantial equivalent as re- quired by Massachusetts General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Owner Agent (Please check one) Telephone No. PERMIT FEE $ 75.00 (Signature of Owner or Agent) Notify Inspector for rough and/or final inspection. Permit must be obtained before commencing any, and all work in compliance with G.L.C. is & a;, applica- ble laws & ordinances is required and understood. X-6796 m 0 n M n m n O m v N O Z n O i :� 1 r ._ � i ,� . - ,� � C t�. :� �� !`i `3 i A t` `t�Ejtl 3 `� m� Location - *� i Flo. Date It N0RTM TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER � O 4. F R Certificate of Occupancy $ Building/Frame Permit Fee $ .1 CNust Foundation Permit Fee $ Other Permit Fee ,C $ r TOTAL $ 17� Check # %.`,.? 3 3 c 1 5 �- 5 4 T Building lniPctor A t= M M O O o � U ZJER *,haF 0 v wi N � Q"'0 N O 4 Wo CA V, a an Cin 4�cd p� 0�0 C G •� O C N O O � 0 •� bA O � c '+ «3 A�wh-+. ori p $; A t= M M dt11 woo 0 Dec -11-01 11:12A a." m rn z n r �4 V r O z r r O 4 CD h m 4 m v N z w O Wmm `M T 0 (D. w� cr c ig R 9 ©0(A0K ..► -� , ' O m O O0 � OA. cn cQ �' °�• � mea 0 O 0 O .O =r :33 . ar to O � "* �D 3 .:; w 0 .�1 10 c"-tnp�tD 03 cog@ D Q. ii CD tto -0 CD ra o Q cn �• 0n w2,� 'O CL n y 3 Q tD 0 O V1, t�D (D 19 O N y C 1p (o- to O O Z) til -• 7 CD N � (D n 0 - OLzy c pj ca .. Q (i1 O �. :+ 0 CL UD to W. C V � o A O tD 0 ; ?moo=-0� Al �to M =01 � mea z �y 0 N O 1O-� .O =r :33 . ar to :7 �( 3 .:; w 0 10 c"-tnp�tD 03 cog@ CD tto -0 CD ra o flD tp 0n w2,� 'O M tD n y 3 Q tD O V1, t�D (D n O N y C 1p (o- to O O Z) til -• 7 CD N � (D n 0 - OLzy c pj s"°9(D .. Q (i1 O �. :+ 0 2 0 0 Cl 0 cv w ,-,1---� '.., 0OX> 0 c 3 7 0C:r� m Z CD o manic ..� 3 E c 3 a � w M iz CL S N m O a 0 CL A A Q P.01 o G) z z z T a °< m D 0 eft �y Cl 0 cv w ,-,1---� '.., 0OX> 0 c 3 7 0C:r� m Z CD o manic ..� 3 E c 3 a � w M iz CL S N m O a 0 CL A A Q P.01 o G) z z z T a °< m i o n n DOm 1 Z O CA) 3 m 4 Q co N O J = o Ul 3 cQ_ Qi -1 O sj- cn0 O = o n ➢ D a F= z v ➢ m Z Q- 0 Q 0 � (D '0oda o (p y ➢ z oOD a 1 • �o-� ga-x4 -s Sjg arp I January 4, 2002 Mr. Robert Nicetta Town of North Andover Building Department 27 Charles Street No. Andover, MA 01845 Re: Kohl's Department Store Dear Bob: Spencer Corporate Park 21 Dewey Street Spencer, Ma 01562 It was a pleasure speaking with you this morning and thank you for all of your input with regard to the signage for the above location. Enclosed please find our check in the amount of $78.00 for the permit fee. I understand that once you have received this check, you will have the actual permit issued and mailed to us. Again, thank you for your assistance. Should you have any questions or concerns, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, *- Judy Saxton Enclosure Phone: 508-885-0690 Fax: 508-885-0695 Email: Saxtonsign@aol.com Page i ot'l , ai ,aaAl. Now* file://A:\K\WC-007F.JPG 7/26/01 .4 ;I, file://A:\K\MVC-007F.JPG Page I of I 7/26/01 1� eop-11'0 TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER SYSTEM PUI14PING RECORD DATE: ( I SXSTEM C)WNER & ADDRESS SYS'f EM LOCATION j (example: [LIQ root of house) DATE OF PUNIPING:.Jd Z C.�►NTI'I'�' PUMPED�G ��LY,ONS CESSPOOL: NO YES SEPTICTANK: NO � YES NATURE OF SERVICE' ROUTINE L/ EMERGENCY OBSERVATIONS: COOED CONDITION FULL TO COVER HEAVY GREASE BAFFLES IN PLACE ROOTS LEAC.EiFIEL>D RUIV'BACK, EXCESSIVE SOLIDS FLOODED SOLIDS CAkRYOVER OTRER (EXPLAIN) ifi COMMENTS: CONTENTS TRANSV ERRED T0. L - J — T 2001 TOWN, OF NORTH ANDOVER SYSTEM PUMPING RECORD DATE: It —,2 7— U SYSTEM OWNER & ADDRESS al Cha, on n St, f l i �9 66_ 7( VS&f'LM LOCATION !,example: left front of house) if DATE OF PiillfFiNG:. / l ` / I- I �. UANTJ'i'�' PUMPED ? f�LDONS CESSPOOL: NO Vo"'YES SEPTIC' TANK* NO / YES NATTJRE OF SERVICE: 133—OU3"INE / EMERGENCY OBSERVATION. GOOD CONDITION HEAVY GREASE ROOTS EXCESSIVE SOIJDS SOLIDS CARRYOVER CO.MM)ENTS: CONTENTS TRANSFERRED '.r 4: FULL TO COVER BATTLES IN PLACE _ LEACHFILFLD RUNBACK FLOODED OTIIER (EXPLAIN) U�-c — 7 2001 T� Town of North Andover f NORT/, Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals so Community Development and Services Division 27 Charles Street " 0 < - North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 "Ss„Cw„sE% D. Robert Nicetta Telephone (978) 688-9541 Building Commissioner Fax(978)688-9542 Any appeal shall be filed Notice of Decision within (20) days after the Year 2002 date of filing of this notice in the office of the Town Clerk. Property at: 350 Winthrop Avenue NAME: Kohl's, Inc. DATE: 6/21/02 ADDRESS: 350 Winthrop Avenue PETITION: 2002-030 North Andover, MA 01845 HEARING: 6/11/02 The North Andover Board of Appeals held a public hearing at its regular meeting on Tuesday June 11, 2002 at 7:30 PM upon the application of Kohl's, Inc. for property at 350 Winthrop Avenue North Andover, MA, requesting a Variance for relief from Section 6, Paragraph 6.5 prohibiting internally lit signs within the B-3 Zoning District. The following members were present: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Upon a motion made by Ellen P. McIntyre, and 2nd by Scott A. Karpinski, the Board voted. to DENY the petitioner relief on the grounds that Section 6 is meant to be remedial and protective; and that the intent of the Bylaw as passed by Town Meeting is to eliminate internally lighted signs. Therefore, the Board voted to uphold Section 6, Paragraph 6.5. Voting in favor of the denial: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Decision2002-021 Town of North Andover Board of Appeals William J. S llivan, , Chairman �: ~ - r: - ter. -. . N =cu : !-r1 d D G f' rn�z0 M - _r N BOARD OF .APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLANNING 688-9535 Town of North Andover Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals Community Development and Services Division Heidi Griffin, Division Director 27 Charles Street D. Robert Nicetta North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 Barilding Commissioner Any appeal shall be filed Notice of Decision within (20) days after the Year 2002 date of filing of this notice in the office of the Town Clerk. Property at: 350 Winthrop Avenue Telephone (978) 688-9541 Fax(978)688-9542 NAME: Kohl's, Inc. DATE: 4/18/02 ADDRESS: 350 Winthrop Avenue PETITION: 2002-021 North Andover, MA 01845 HEARING: 4/9/02 The North Andover Board of Appeals held a public hearing at its regular meeting on Tuesday April 9, 2002 at 7:30 PM upon the application of Kohl's, Inc. for property at 350 Winthrop Avenue North Andover, MA, requesting a Finding from Section 6, Paragraph 6.5 prohibiting internally lit signs within the B-3 Zoning District. The following members were present: Robert P. Ford, Walter F. Soule, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Upon a motion made by George M. Earley and 2nd by Ellen P. McIntyre, the Board voted to allow the applicant to withdraw the petition without prejudice. Voting in favor: Robert P. Ford, Walter F. Soule, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Town of North Andover of Appeals Ro ert P. Ford, Acting Chairman Decision2002-021 V� BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLAIVNLNG 688-9535 Town of North Andover of µo RT11 , 2 . 6<:0 M 6 Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals 1 y - Community Development and Services Division ti 27 Charles Street " •�= ��•,. North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 "SsACHU D. Robert Nicetta. Telephone (978) 688-9541 Building Commissioner Fax (978) 688-9542 Any appeal shall be filed Notice of Decision within (20) days after the Year 2002 date of filing of this notice in the office of the Town Clerk. Property at: 350 Winthrop Avenue NAME: Kohl's, Inc. DATE: 6/21/02 ADDRESS: 350 Winthrop Avenue PETITION: 2002-030 North Andover, MA 01845 HEARING: 6/11/02 The North Andover Board of Appeals held a public hearing at its regular meeting on Tuesday June 11, 2002 at 7:30 PM upon the application of Kohl's, Inc. for property at 350 Winthrop Avenue North Andover, MA, requesting a Variance for relief from Section 6, Paragraph 6.5 prohibiting internally lit signs within the B-3 Zoning District. The following members were present: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Upon a motion made by Ellen P. McIntyre, and 2" a by Scott A. Karpinski, the Board voted to DENY the petitioner relief on the grounds that Section 6 is meant to be remedial and protective; and that the intent of the Bylaw as passed by Town Meeting is to eliminate internally lighted signs. Therefore, the Board voted to uphold Section 6, Paragraph 6.5. Voting in favor of the denial: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M Earley and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Decision2002-021 Town of North Andover Board of Appeals � Q L A&- �JL '- William J. S llivan, Chairman C On .: U-1 bn�ry� GrrIor i — � ':0 rnj`z N BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLANNING 688-9535 Town of Noah Andover tiORTH Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals Community Development and Services Division := a 27 Charles Street' ° �.9 North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 SsgcwusE 0 D. Robert Nicetta Telephone (978) 688-9541 Building Commissioner Fax (978) 688-9542 Any appeal shall be filed Notice of Decision within (20) days after the Year 2002 date of filing of this notice in the office of the Town Clerk. Property at: 150 Old Farm Road NAME: Ravi and Sarita Kanjolia DATE: 6/21/02 ADDRESS: 150 Old Farm Road PETITION: 2001-019 North Andover, MA 01845 HEARING(s): 7/10/01,11/13/01, 6/11/02 The North Andover Board of Appeals held a public hearing at its regular meeting on Tuesday, June 11, 2002, at 7:30 PM upon the application of Ravi and Sarita Kanjolia, 150 Old Farm Road, North Andover, MA requesting a dimensional Variance from Section 7, Paragraph 7.3 for relief of a side setback in order to construct a 2 car garage at street level in the R-2 zoning district. The following members were present: William J. Sullivan, Walter F. Soule, Scott A. Karpinski, and Ellen P. McIntyre. Upon a motion made by Walter F. Soule and 2°d by Ellen P. McIntyre, the Board voted to GRANT a dimensional Variance for relief of the right side setback of 16.5' in order to construct a one car garage according to the Variance Plan of Land, [for] applicant Ravindra Kanjolia, by Michael J. Sergi, PLS #33191, Christiansen & Sergi, 160 Summer Street, Haverhill, MA 01830, dated 6/6/02, and the Front Elev. Plan by G. Bruno Associates, Architectural Designers, 28 Berkeley Road, N. Andover, MA 01845 drawn by JB, dated 6-6-01, revised for a one car garage, June 2002. Voting in favor: William J. Sullivan, Walter F. Soule, Scott A. Karpinski, and Ellen P. McIntyre. The Board finds that the applicant has satisfied the provisions of Section 10, paragraph 10.4 of the Zoning Bylaw and that the granting of this variance will not adversely affect the neighborhood or derogate from the intent and purpose of the Zoning Bylaw. Furthermore, if the rights authorized by the Variance are not exercised within one (1) year of the date of the grant, it shall lapse, and may be re-established only after notice, and a new hearing. Furthermore, if a Special Permit granted under the provisions contained herein shall be deemed to have lapsed after a two (2) year period from the date on which the Special Permit was granted unless substantial use or construction has commenced, it shall lapse and may be re-established only after notice, and a new hearing. Town of North Andover Board of Anr)eals. William J. S llivan, Chairm& - --_ c Decisions2001-019 C-) > rri BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLA?kyG 688-95 5 • Town of North Andover Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals Community Development and Services Division 27 Charles Street North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 D. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner Any appeal shall be filed Notice of Decision within (20) days after the Year 2002 date of filing of this notice in the office of the Town Clerk. Property at: 137 High Street Telephone (978) 688-9541 Fax (978) 688-9542 NAME: Patricia A. Sciacca DATE: 6/21/02 ADDRESS: 137 High Street PETITION: 2002-019 North Andover, MA 01845 HEARING: 4/9/02,6/11/02 The North Andover Board of Appeals held a public hearing at its regular meeting on Tuesday, June 11, 2002 at 7:30 PM upon the application of Patricia A. Sciacca,137 High Street, North Andover, MA requesting a dimensional Variance from Section 7; Paragraph 7.3 and Table 2 for relief of rear and front (Furber Ave.) setbacks of a comer lot and from Section 7, Paragraph 7.1 and Table 2 for lot area to construct a proposed addition; and a Special Permit from Section 9, Paragraph 9.1 for the extension of a non -conforming structure on a non -conforming lot within the R-4 Zoning District. The following members were present: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Scott A. Karpinski, Ellen P. McIntyre, George M. Earley, and Joseph D. LaGrasse. Upon a motion made by Robert P. Ford and 2d by Ellen P. McIntyre, the Board voted to allow the petitioner to WITHDRAW HER PETITION WITHOUT PREJUDICE. Voting in favor of the withdrawal: William J. Sullivan, Robert P. Ford, Ellen P. McIntyre. Scott A- Karpinski, George M. Earley, and Joseph D. LaGrasse Decision2002-019 Town of North Andover Board of Appeals, William J. Sur, Chairman N _ BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLANNING 688-9535 Locations r No. 0 Date 9 iZ - Q3 TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER 0.s Certificate of Occupancy $ ��s;�•�,.5 <� Building/Frame Permit Fee $ Foundation Permit Fee $ Other Permit Fee,<!,Aly$ TOTAL ®® $ Check # `�7 %� FILE 'i 67, J Building Inspectod/ G Location–, �//v—tl7rC/1 No. Date C>-,- NR,. TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER + r Certificate of Occupancy $ �'�s''••°''<� JAS Mus Building/Frame Permit Fee $ Foundation Permit Fee $ u+r f oug, 'Y'/ Other Permit Fee 7o r Mo $ rrJ0f' �� TOTAL $ ,2 d /9 % a� �( Check # Building Inspector TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER BUILDING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION TO CONSTRUCT REPAIR, RENOVATE, CHANGE THE USE OR OCCUPANCY OF, O DEMOLRISH BUILDING OTHER THAN A ONE OR TWO FAMILY DWELLING �,. � -2 Section for Official Use Onl"� ��=:: �,��'�' �c ,... kz:a' BUILDING PERMIT , ER: \\ DATE ISSUED: �-� CONTROL SIGNATURE: CONSTRUCTION ��/ I -+ Buildin Commissioner/Inspector of Buildings Date e �'ay! 1.1 Property Address: 1.2 Assessors Map and Parcel Number: Z Bso LA!�6� ww- Map Number Parcel Number 1.3 Zoning Information: 1.4 Proper Dimensions: Zoning District Proposed Use Lot Area Frontage ft 1.6 BI DING SETBACKS (ft) Front Yard Side Yard Rear Yard Required Provide R ed Provided R red Provided 1.7 Water Supply M.G.L.C.40. 54) 1.5. Flood Zone Information: 1.8 Sewerage Disposal System: Public ❑ Private ❑ Zone Outside Flood Zone ❑ Municipal On Site Disposal Siem l7 2.1 Owner of Record amu nt) Address for Service: 4AA 0'JUN - ) �i !j!7 f -L L- - Signature Telephone BUAWM 2.2 Authorized Agent 77IL ��tJU 7S G!'4��P?I1W `.� 1'�o1A (i�.L c7Z�OS N rint Address for Service: - l) 7,91- qAx Signat Signatu Telephone 3.1 Licensed Construction Supervisor Not Applicable ❑ Z s-� ��.. t-'1 /� oZZ'1 1 G6 D � (o 382 11-epli Address License Number oM�ua / --Z9- 0 1 Licen o sor: Expiration Date -40' -191 rgn Telephone 3.2 Registered Home Improvem IContractor Not Applicable ❑ Company Name'. Registration Number Address Expiration Date Signature Telephone 1, 0- k4tTU'to }Rori"Q of -ice (?0A;%yKP:8j (4 as Owner/Authorized Agent Hereby declare that the statements and information on the foregoing application e tr& and accurate, to the best of my knowledge and belief. Signed under the pains and penalties of perjury U Print Name 6 • Z5 .01 Signature o er/Age t Date Item Estimated Cost (Dollars) to be 1 ) ' a r Completed by applicant permit 1. Building . p �V t (a) Building Permit Fee N Multiplier 2 Electrical (b) Estimated Total Cost of Construction from (6) j p (o 3 Plumbing Building Permit fee (a) x (b) Al O/j/ 4 Mechanical (HVAC) 5 Fire Protection 6 Total (1+2+3+4+5) Check Number ,'�Yi I£' y A f'tir b �Z,� ;y1N4 `(1 "':k IMy I$9Y ib l i'E. C{ Yi'� :''i)fi h' ( f 4y.W�.. 'i• {{yy �:,4Rc��;t. '1-�R N} .>�J ll ,: t\, tT.hZ ! S"t }`er Mrr�+� : i)SS..,k <FLL Y. idY )j;��}. \ fIG(y p la M. tk✓f X b! i-' is 1 \ ':�'7M1Q, +s:Y r,4�}I 5 YJ r `Y•"�s h}1 �),.' �'fi "1�1yyy..� fit} { } i1%p -!3 tiCeryCSX Si..F).} . M )M—' r. :� 'Y ny�,t..N. e tCw.:. 7 Y,Ya f< `z`�,}','Yt �h,. �+ ''i,'5F `�.r ).u�4� ,c'..;} i r' 3 3'Y+1�';r7 ) s k'F �SaMf CFE 1 l W 1-i t n Yy v. 1bSS iS.C.�` �"s t 2 f a. st.v,iv4a i 1'f f .zb Y\t w.5\14'Y.`M1CV{.Y 4 ii+'R'w"Y NO. OF STORIES SIZE BASEMENT OR SLAB SIZE OF FLOOR TIMBERS iST 2 No 3RD SPAN DEMENSIONS OF SILLS DEMENSIONS OF POSTS DIMENSIONS OF GIRDERS HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION THICKNESS SIZE OF FOOTING X MATERIAL OF CBIMNEY IS BUILDING ON SOLID OR FILLED LAND IS BUILDING CONNECTED TO NATURAL GAS LINE g d Eat y ,�j-s.'�du� •CA: ;r }F;t't N.a4.3 w, i Y X3 Yq t.. i SECTION 4 WORMS Workers Compensation Insurance affidavit must be completed and submitted with this application. Failure to provide this affidavit will result in the denial of the issuance of the building permit. Si ned affidavit Attached Yea ....... No ....... ❑ SEC >CION S, PROFMOVAL 0 C ' C 1 UCT XPi SER'�'JCCES Ft?B S Ii IIIl� ANiQ ST iii+ #Y3 ES ' Tb CONSZ11L11iGTIti1V C(3l1 KOI. pi lA� finR i16 't%i�tTA i It M4 % D F 5.1 Registered Architect: . I Name: Address Signature J Name: Address: Signature Name: Signature Telephone Total Telephone Area of Responsibility Registration Number Expiration Date Not applicable ❑ Registration Number Expiration Date Name Area of Responsibility Address Registration Number Signature Telephone F Expiration Date Name Area of Responsibility Address • , , Registration Number Signature Telephone Expiration Date O� Not Applicable ❑ in Chaffee of New Construction ❑ Existing Building 0. Repair(s) ❑ Alterations(s) ❑ Addition ❑ Accessory Bldg. 0 Demolition Other ❑ Specify Brief Description of Proposed Work: ✓ .��1✓''1Z.1.dfZ- �T'1O1�tT1�� � �S nJCa' ��.�1» �S ��OII� '—TO I�I�IA�� N �w►_ s'09 �.uffZi4,�.t� E �F,Gh�y.Lc/cvbL ��;�`�Z�GiOI,STJ�r-�s� A-2 A-5 0 A-3 0 ❑ lA IB USE GROUP Check as applicable) CONSTRUCTION TYPE A Assembly ❑ A-1 ❑ A4 ❑ A-2 A-5 0 A-3 0 ❑ lA IB ❑ ❑ B Business ❑ 2A 2B 2C , 0 ❑ ❑ C Educational ❑ F Factory N F-1 0 F-2 ❑ H High Hazard ❑ 3A 3B ❑ ❑ IInstitutional ❑ 1-1 0 1-2 0 I-3 ❑ M Mercantile ❑ 4 ❑ R residential 0 R-1 ❑ R-2 0 R-3 ❑ 5A 5B ❑ ❑ S Storage ❑ S-1 ❑ S-2 ❑ U Utility M Mixed Use S Special Use ❑ ❑ 0 Specify: Specify: Specify: COMPLETE THIS SECTION IF EXISTING BUILDING UNDERGOING RENOVATIONS, ADDITIONS AND OR CHANGE IN USE Existing Use Group: Existing Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: Proposed Use Group: Proposed Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: DIME Builders & Construction Managers DIMEO CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Established in 1930 Christopher P Romano Senior Project Manager 75 Chapman Street (401) 781-9800 x272 Providence, Rhode Island 02905 www.dimeo.com (401) 461-4580 Fax cromano@dimeo.com k� L . � �� .p s K O c) r i, iNIV1 U 1JV 1 1\L' LL' t10L' I. M1XLY1 INSTRUCTIONS. This form is used to verify that all -necessary approval / permits from Boards .and Departments having jurisdiction have been obtained. This. does not relieve the applicant and or landowner from compliance with any applicable requirements. �r■■■rrrrr■■■r■rr■rr■■■r■r■rrrr■■■■■.■■■■r■r■.■r■■■■■■■■■■■■..r■■■r■■■�■■■■ APPLICANT '1 ��'^ ( '-�`r her. ot�t:S �l �++��-n PHONE Qo 1 -191 `12,00 i ASSESSORS MAP NUMBER z"(. LOT NUMBER ?1 iSUBDIVISION LOTNUMBER -' STREET �� STREET NUMBER 35D �'�■.r.■.rr..r■r..... ■.rrrrr■■rrrr■rr■.■.r■•■r■r■.■.■.■.■rrrr..r..r.r.rrrr■ OFFICIALESE ONLY . Ism own ■■■r.r.■ONE MEN ■ MMM Susan ■r'rrr- son man ■. MEN ■r.■ ago anon man ■■ monsoons. ■. rr■.■. ONQtiENDATIONS OF TOWN AGENTS ■.��■.r■�rrrrr.rrrrrr.r.rrrrr.rrrrrrrr■■.rr..rrr.r.r.■rrrr ■".■rr.r■■r■..rs s a DATE APPROVED U Z C SER VATION ADNDNISTRATOR DATE REJECTED c , colvSlvi)fENtS��-e a r DATE APPROVED TOWN PLANNER DATE REJECTED COIvIIvIENT'S DATE APPROVED FOOD INSPECTOR -'HEALTH DATE REJECTED DATE APPROVED. SEPTIC INSPECTOR - HEALTH DATE REJECTED COMIvIENTs PUBLIC WORKS - SEWER / WATER CONNECTIONS _ DRIVEWAY .—Iy-a FIRE DEPAR' COMMENTS DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED RECEMD BY BUILDING INSPECTOR DATE Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands j WPA Form 3 - Notice of I � ntent Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 A. General Information 1. Applicant: Kohl's Departmer Name N56 W17000 Rid( Mailing Address Menomonee Falls City/Tom , Inc. Drive E -Mail Address DEP File Number: Provided by DEP North Andover Town WI 53051 State Zip Code Phone Number Fax Number (if applicable) 2. Representative (if any): Vanasse Han en Brustlin, Inc. Firm Gene Crouch Contact Name ,rouch@vhb.com 101 Walnut Street, P.O. Box 9151 E -Mail Address Mailing Address Watertown City/ Town MA 02471 617 924.1770 State Zip Code Phone Number 617) 924-2286 Fax Number (if applicable) 3. Property Owner (if different from applicant): Delta & Delta Realty Trust Name 875 East Street Mailing Address Tewksbu City/Town MA 01876 4. Total Fee: State Zip Code $525.00 (from Appendix B: Wetland Fee Transmittal Form) 5. Project Location: 350 WinthropStreet Street Address North Andover 26 & 27 City/Town Assessors Map/Plat Number 6, 8, 9, 27, 30, 31 Parcel /Lot Number 6. Registry of Deeds: Essex County 1278 310 Endrd Book Page Certificate (if Registered Land) orm3.doc • rev. 7/3/01 Page 1 of 8 1' Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands ' WPA Form 3 - Notice of Intent Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 A. General Information (cont.) 7. Summary of Project Impacts: a. Is any work being proposed in the Buffer Zone? ® Yes If yes, how many square feet? 16,777 Square Feet DEP File Number: Provided by DEP North Andover Town b. List the impacts of proposed activities on each wetland resource areas (temporary and permanent impacts, prior to restoration and mitigation): Resource Area Size of Impact (e.g., sq. ft.) Bordering Land Subject to Flooding 25, 205 (temporary) B. Project Description 1. General Project Description: The proposed work consists of the rehabilitation of the exsisting Bradlee's store to accommodate a Kohl's Department Store. The work includes improving the front facade, upgrading the entrances to the building repaving the portions of the parking lot in front of the building, and pavement striping. 2. Plan and/or Map References: See attached list Title Title wpaform3.doc • rev. 7/3/07 Date Date Page 2 of 8 RON RISK SERVICES Fax:617-457-7777 Jul 3 2001 12:14 P.02 ... ... .. ..... ACORD. , ow" 07/03/01 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED ASA MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER- THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. PRODUCER Aon Risk Services, inc. of massachu3ett3 99 High Street Boston MA 02110 USA INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED INSURER A; Travelers Indemnity Co. of IL Dimeo Construction company 75 Chapman Street INSURFAM Charter Oak Fire Ins Co INSURER C: FroVidance KI 02905 USA INSURER b; INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTKM DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUBPOR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THEPOLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN 15 SUBJECTTOALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, AG( REGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE SEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR 91TR TYrE OF INSURANCE rOLICY NUMBER POLE EFFICTIVR POLICY EXPIRATION DATB(MWMYY) DATI(MIMUMVY) LIMITS CENERAL LIABILITY CO-1070II81 Dimeo GeAcral LiAb, 12/31/00 12131101 EACH OCCURRENCE $110Q01000 FTRE DAMAGE(Any one Gro) $300,000 X COMXWCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADS FX 1 occult MEPEXP (Aar oro oomon) $5.000 PERSONAL it AI)v INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGOREGATE $2,000,000 LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRO- POLICY 0 ificr [K] LOC PRODUCTS- COMF/OP AGG $2,000,000: AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO 810-107DI17A Automobile Liability 12/31/00 12/31/01 COMBINED SINOLBLIMIT (En zabdonQ 91, 000, 000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS Ire P—) HIRIMI AUTOS BODILY INJURY NON OWNED AUTOS (Poraodd!rt) PROPERTY DAMAGE (Peraodd!rl) GARAGI LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OndERTHAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AVQ A EXCESS; LIABILITY 7 1 OCCUR ri CLAIM MADE CUP-107D8108 Umbrella 12/31/00 12/31/01 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGWArE 35,000,000 DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION D WORKEN COMPENSA'nOM AND DE-1071)1as12/31/00 12131/01 X IWC STATU- OTR. EMPLOVIRSILIABMITY Diihso Work comp ITORY LIMITS I E.L.BACRACCIMNT $500,000 E.L. DISEASE-POLICY LMI $500,000 B.L. DISEASE-LA EMPLOM $500,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPE)tATION!VLOCATIONSNMCLESIEXCLusIONS ADDED By ENDORSEMENT/SF&OAL PROVISIONS Certificate holder is additional insured with respect to work performed by or on behalf of the named inured at Kohl's, North Andover. SHOULD ANY Of THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLM BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUINO COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR To MAIL Town of North Andover 50 DAYSWRI[TTENNOTICE TO CERTiFICATEHOLDERNAMEDTOTHELEFT, Attn: Mr, D. Robert Nitetta PVT FAILURS TO DO 50 SKU OSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY Building Commissioner OF ANY KIND r 27 Charles Street AUTH North Andover MA 01e45 USA cate No Certif, 240000059138 Holder Id Iffier I Kohllell.Andover J/ce PanUnw�eu�na�1 o�./f/lao,ac1 uoel�a BOARD OF BUILDING REGULATIONS License: CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR Number: CS 066382 Birthdate: 07/28/1961 Expires: 07/28/2001 Tr. no: 788 Restricted To: 00 CHRISTOPHER P ROMANO _ 24 GARDNER ST«�+ SEEKONK, MA 02771 Administrator Town of North Andover � l-" 16 ae Q - Building Department o 27 Charles Street North Andover Massachusetts 01845 z`' .^ (978) 6$8-9545 Fax. (978) 688-9542 "A°9 C.C. .0 .1 7a �R�ren i-? - t5 DEBRIS DISPOSAL FORM In accordance with the provisions of MGL c 40 s 54, and a condition of Building permit# (o� the debris resulting from the work shall be disposed of in a properly licensed solid waste disposal facility as defined by MGL cl 1, s150a. The debris will be disposed of in /at: �• 25.01 Date NOTE: A demolition permit from the Town of North Andover must be obtained for this project through the Office of the Building Inspector. The Common weaTtli of MdssM&usetts Department of Imittslrial Accidents Office of /nNstiYMONS 600 Washington Street Boston, Mass. 02111 Workers' Compensation Insurance Affidavit city phone # I am a homeowner performing all work myself. f1 I am a sole proprietor and have no one working in any capacity I am an employer providing workers' compensation for my employees working on this job. [;y1 am a sole proprietor, neral contra , or homeowner (circle one) and have hired the contractors listed below who have the following workers' compensation polices: Failure to secure coverage as required r Section 25A of NIGL 152 can lead to the imposition of criminal penalties of a fine up to 51,500.00 and/or one years' imprisonment as well as it .es i e form of a STOP WORK ORDER and a fine of $100.00 a day against me. I understand that a copy of this statement may be for a to the Offic of Investigations of the DIA for coverage verification. I do hereby ce fy send a and pen 'es of perjury that the information provided above is true and correct Signatur Date Print -name Ci}SZI`om Phone# --._A401_1 91 gfSM official use only do not write in this area to be completed by city or town official city or town: permit/license # r'7Building Department []Licensing Board C] check if immediate response is required ❑Selectmen's Office 0Heaith Department contact person: phone #; 00ther (revised 3/95 PIA) KKE ARCHITECTS - MASSACHUSETTS, P.C. 300 First Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55401 612-339-4200 FAX 612-342-9267 KOHL'S North Andover, Massachusetts KKE No. 01-04-4863-01 May 14, 2001 DEMOLITION SPECIFICATIONS ED AOC, cc >9 p No. 9661 y z W y Oyu `�O 0f .0, Gre ollenkamp, AI Registration Number: 9661 ,. SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the existing building or structure indicated on the Drawings to be removed, and necessary to accommodate new construction B. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations 1.02 RELATED DIVISIONS A. Division 15 - Mechanical: For demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. B. Division 16 - Electrical: For demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A10.6-1990, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 241-1996, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations C. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI) 1. RFCI-WP-88 (Revised 1990), Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings (with Addendum; undated) 1.05 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and be removed from Project site. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to the Contractor prior to performing demolition: 1. Two copies of the proposed demolition work providing a detailed sequence of demolition and removal of materials; 2. Permit for demolition work, and; 3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the demolition work, including the Environmental Protection Agency. C. Perform the demolition work in accordance with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Prior to beginning demolition operations, meet at Project site with a qualified representative of the demolition firm, and other entities concerned with demolition. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant, and to the Owner and the Architect. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening predemolition conference. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. KKE©02070/0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r' SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions I . Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of areas and structures to be demolished. a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes, will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 2. Access: Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Hazardous Materials a. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. b. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect for direction. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. B. Environmental Requirements 1. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 2. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to control dust and dirt in the air. 3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and schedule demolition operations and new general construction work with the Contractor. B. Adjacent businesses will remain open and in operation during normal business hours. The Contractor will review the proposed demolition schedule with the landlord. Do NOT proceed with demolition operations until schedule has been reviewed and approved by the landlord and the Contractor. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours advance notice of unavoidable interruptions in existing utilities service and other services, a part of the adjacent businesses' normal operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the selective demolition work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I . Notify the Contractor and the Architect immediately upon encountering unexpected concealed conditions and, except in an emergency, before the encountered conditions are disturbed. B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. If necessary, and prior to removal, engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. KKE©02070/0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities 1. Protect and maintain existing utility lines which are to remain in service, in a manner to avoid interruption of these lines. a. If uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are encountered during demolition, consult Engineer immediately for procedural instructions. Cooperate with Owner, and public and private utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. b. If interruption of utilities is unavoidable, obtain written authorization of the utility owner prior to commencement of Work. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to the utility owner. 2. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. B. Ensure minimum interference with road, streets, driveways, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain regular traffic flow around the site unless otherwise directed. C. Provide temporary barricades, canopies, fences, railings, platforms, lights, sheds, and similar temporary construction, required to protect the workmen and others from injury due to the demolition work. Provide free and safe passage of persons to and from buildings and facilities which are to remain. D. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. E. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. F. Cover and protect furnishings and equipment that have not been removed. G. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. H. Provide dust -tight partitions between areas where demolition work is being performed and areas which are finished or in use. I. Provide fully enclosed waste chutes with tight joints. Support multi-level chutes, if any, at each floor. Provide water spray or fully enclose the discharge end to prevent noticeable dust dispersal. J. Provide and maintain temporary shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. K. Maintain fire protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. Instruct employees in the following: 1. Location of the fire alarm box and telephone; and the manner of summoning the Fire Department without delay in the event of fire. 2. Use of fire extinguishing equipment. 3. Maintenance of fire protection equipment in serviceable condition properly located and identified so that it will be available for immediate use. L. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General 1. Comply with the Drawings, which clearly establish limits of required demolition work. The Drawings represent specific demolition to be performed. 2. Remove existing construction only, which is indicated on the Drawings to be removed. KKE©02070/0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3. When demolition involves multiple levels, proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 4. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 5. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 6. Remove each item completely including means of attachment. Remove bolts, screws, nails, clips, other fasteners, mastics and adhesives, blocking, furring, framing, and grounds. 7. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 8. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 9. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 10. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 11. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner's requirements for using and protecting elevators and stairs, if any, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not remove doors and windows for the purpose of removing debris, without written permission from the Owner. 2. Keep stairways and fire escapes unobstructed and available for use at all times. C. Miscellaneous 1. Mass Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power -driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 2. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. 4. Glass and Glazing: Remove individual lites without breaking unless unavoidable. 5. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. a. After floor coverings are removed, thoroughly remove adhesives by mechanical process or a combination of mechanical and chemical processes such that when completed, floors are ready to receive new floor coverings whether scheduled or not. b. Chemical process if used, shall not interfere with subsequent bond of adhesives used for new floor coverings. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. General: Remove materials resulting from the demolition work from the site in such a manner as to avoid creating a nuisance. Dispose of materials from the site on a daily basis at no additional cost to the Owner. Take possession of salvageable material and equipment and promptly remove from the site unless otherwise designated herein or shown on the Drawings to be reinstalled or retained by the Owner. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At no cost to the Owner, promptly repair damage to property of the Owner which is to remain in use and to adjacent facilities resulting from demolition operations. 1. Patching and repair work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. 2. Resulting work shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable and where not specified, work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. KKE©02070/0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3. Patch existing construction to match. Examine existing surfaces to be patched before proceeding with the work. Report each condition where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, to the Architect and do not proceed until the Architect has issued instructions. B. Clean adjacent facilities of dust, dirt and debris resulting from demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work. C. Leave each area broom clean upon completion of the demolition work. D. Remove dust -tight partitions at Substantial Completion, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. E. Leave in-place temporary barricades, banners and other safeguards which provide safety to persons. END OF SECTION 5 KKE©02070/0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Town of North Andover Office of the Zoning Board of Appeals Community Development and Services Division William J. Scott, Division Director 27 Charles Street D. Robert Nicetta North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 Building Commissioner MEMORANDUM Telephone (978) 688-9541 Fax(978)688-9542 Items required for Demolition Permit — 350 Winthrop Avenue, North Andover: Demo Permit Application Section 2 — Property Ownership/Authorized Agent -- Must be signed by owner of record. Section 10a — Owner Authorization — To be completed when owners agent or contractor applies for Building (DEMO) Permit — Must be signed by owner of record. Insurance Certificates of Liability insurance must b e supplied naming the Town of North Andover as Co -Insured. Copy of Construction Supervisor's License must be supplied. BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUIL-DING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLANNING 688-9535 ✓ 06/07/2001 16:44 REAL ESTATE & STORE PLNG 4 914014614580 NO.681 PO4 RMA.INC. 1 978 851 4962 1 Fax:1-9797851-4962 Apr 19 2p01 1537 Retail Mans8ement & Development 881 Ust street Towkibury, MA 01876 TELEFAX TRANSMrrTXL [;[IP Day: Dste.all 4,Li Time: From: 17 I I F" No. C* GA • o r Pax No. (978) 8814962 Number of Pages to Follow; 414& If ftm is any problem with this transmies cN 09 (978) 851»0200 . -.•+�...� fir_- - ���.�•�!• :�:r�.�. '1S .o'ar '�.�'A:R'7..•s•. �:.•:.iC.� r •�7�YIi71'd..�7:Y1'Gsr �... �,r� _ 1 . I _ � irr � ■ w rte+ r.���..�..�. �...—.w....... -rte •-.. � �� ..- . — w.ww•^-• �rr•.� rw�wr..rw'.�w.....rr..y �r..w�.�rr.rr .. rrr••ywr•ww�rrw •r..•.w..M1YY.�.�.rr�.M.•.��' ywrrrbwr w.rry.�..r•+rr.�r.�r.✓y r r��• r •..r r.�.��. r.w. M.��.-.,..M M..,+..� 71•..�....i.�..�.rMHY►��p.•�r.I.�...�r....��..�.w��.tir .r .-.— ..•Mrr�•.r�r1M.a.'ti•..� �r•..� I -' 06/07/2001 16:44 REAL ESTATE & STORE PLNG 4 914014614580 RMD,INC. Fax:1-978-851-4962 Apr 19 2801 15:37 P,02 KO 11:9 4 A* 9, 2001 NO. 691 Telemachus Daamulas T asee of Delta & Delta R©dty Trust C/o Su=ar Donau, Pep,. Rimed L, Blum=tbal, B4- Slly= m and Ku&cb, P.C. so Stanifard Sit., Suite 1003 Fi`o�n,`IMa0211A ,.., .,a _ .... ,ti..... .. _.... ._ ._. •,M.,...... . i Re: Form Bradleos' locadou is North Andover, Ms. To whom it may concern: finalaaed please fiad 2 copies of a drawing depiaduo the bUdor elevatiou.i b11s.is planning to mcarporate into,its plans and specificatioaa for thc'rc�ovatioftii Will soon be . -uadartaking et.20 folsacr Bradlaes' .location tet'eranced,abova Also =*wAas a cdcw and materislboard psovidi:lg saraplee' o€tho tlWarisia;.and colors ftt-wsll be utflizcd Qu .. buildiug`� e+attoriot. • •.:... , • ; , ... � .. , . , , our lease provides dust Ws obtain the cor mt of the �a Iovd (wbich is not -to be utlawmobly witbhold) to p Mmaed altcratioas to the exterior of the building. We are pmvidiri8 you We information now so that you My indicate Your acnseat to the a earanee_ marsrialB and colors we are proposins. If you era.9 aetca®aut, thc�► will ba incotporatod into the Apel plans and specificatiou that our arctltwU prepare for the pmjoct and submit %rbuildusg permit. Please Wiaatt your CO=mt to those m Utior olemearta by sigaiug a copy of thin latter and sor WnS it to me by in at 262.703.9105. Yf you have airy qucsdons, you may sorted sae at 262-703-2058 or by a -mail at At we point in tib. 80bj.ot Wobtaiaing au Ime"My permits, Kcbj'o plana co commence its demolition of the interior of the preaaisos not later than 7/1/01 and its construction of improvements not later than 811/01. Comb uctiqu will be completed in time to permit a stead operJq of the new kohl's store in April, 2042. We look forward to woridng with you ad upadeacing a smcoth and officirc t comtruction prows. Sincerely, pm a� David DeVoa Director of 9tarc P1atlairlg �N��'s( o>�.w �.t CORFORAn OFFICES a MG W17000 MWi8WO0A DRM O WWNOMONU F , WI$ WSW 33051 • (U3) 703-7000 f1i� ccs KKE KKE ARHITECTS - MASSACHUSETTS, INC. 300 First Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55401 612-339-4200 FAX 612-342-9267 PROJECT MANUAL for KOHL'S - NORTH ANDOVER North Andover, Massachusetts KKE No. 01-04-4863-01 May 18, 2001 Architecture Planning Interior Design COPYRIGHT O 2001 KORSUNSKY KRANK ERICKSON ARCHITECTS, INC. CL O Q J C1 m COPYRIGHT O 2001 KORSUNSKY KRANK ERICKSON ARCHITECTS, INC. KOHL'S - NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS ARCHITECT KKE ARCHITECTS -MASSACHUSETTS, P.C. SUITE 500 300 FIRST AVENUE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55401 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AMBROSE ENGINEERING, INC. W67 N222 EVERGREEN BLVD., SUITE 106 CEDARBURG, WI 53012 DOCUMENT 00002 CERTIFICATION PAGE ED Aqc o No. 9661 y o`' �FA�IH OF J P G. ROBERTSTECKEL E KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C 1 KKE0900 DOCUMENT 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 Title Page 00002 Certification Page 00003 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00120 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders With Attachment 1. Substitution Request Form 00220 Geotechnical Data CONTRACTING REOUIREMENTS 00700 General Conditions of the Contract 00800 Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS 01010 01070 Summary of Work Abbreviations and Symbols 01220 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01700 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02070 Selective Demolition 02220 Structure Excavation and Trenching 02523 Exterior Concrete Flatwork, Curbs and Gutters 02591 Bituminous Paving Repair 02810 Irrigation System 02831 Chain Link Fences 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05310 Steel Deck 05400 Lightgage Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 1 KKE0900 DOCUMENT 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 07270 Firestopping 07530 Elastic Sheet Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08114 Hollow Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 08356 Double -Acting Impact Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08710 Finish Hardware 08745 Handicap Automatic Entry Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard 09290 Glass Fiber Reinforced Cement Shapes 09300 Tile 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09530 Acoustical Insulation 09545 Sanitary Wall Paneling 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring and Accessories 09680 Carpeting 09893 Silicone -Emulsion Masonry Coating System 09900 Painting 09960 Vinyl Wall Covering DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 Metal Toilet 10200 Louvers and Vents 10260 Wall and Corner Guards 10820 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11160 Loading Dock Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12690 Floor Mats DIVISIONS 13 through 16 Not Used DOCUMENT 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS END TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n I� r� DOCUMENT 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The "Instructions to Bidders", AIA Document A701, 1987 Edition, is hereby made a part of this Project Manual by reference, except as amended or supplemented by Document 00120 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. END OF DOCUMENT I KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 0 1.01 GENERAL DOCUMENT 00120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Each Bidder shall carefully examine the site of the Project and the Bidding Documents. The Bidder shall become familiar with the location of the work, transportation facilities, kind and character of soil and terrain, kind of facilities required, and other matters that may affect the cost and time of completion of the Project. The Bidder must become familiar with Federal, State, County, and City laws, ordinances, codes, taxes and other matters which affect those engaged or employed on the work or the materials or equipment used. No allowances will be made in behalf of the Contractor, after the Contract Agreement is signed, for errors or negligence in determining these conditions. 1.04 ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to �I Bidders", AIA Document A701, 1987 Edition. Where an Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Dimeo Construction Company Clause contained in the Instructions to Bidders is modified or deleted by these Supplementary 75 Chapman Street Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or F-} (401)781-9800 Clause shall remain in effect. (401) 461-4580 FAX 1.02 ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS A. Add Paragraph 1.10: 1. In the third line of Subparagraph 3.2.2, change the word "seven" to "five working". 1.10 Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701 applies to Bidders and Sub -bidders. 1� {� 1.03 ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS date for receiving Bids will be subject to the Architect's decision and at no additional cost to the A. Add to Subparagraph 2.1.1: C. Paragraph 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS No allowance will be made for Bidder's failure to fully understand the requirements of the Contract 1. Add to Subparagraph 3.3.1: Documents. B. Add to Subparagraph 2.1.3: Each Bidder shall carefully examine the site of the Project and the Bidding Documents. The Bidder shall become familiar with the location of the work, transportation facilities, kind and character of soil and terrain, kind of facilities required, and other matters that may affect the cost and time of completion of the Project. The Bidder must become familiar with Federal, State, County, and City laws, ordinances, codes, taxes and other matters which affect those engaged or employed on the work or the materials or equipment used. No allowances will be made in behalf of the Contractor, after the Contract Agreement is signed, for errors or negligence in determining these conditions. 1.04 ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Paragraph 3.1 COPIES 1. Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 in its entirety and substitute: 3.1.1 Bidding Documents are available from the General Contractor: Dimeo Construction Company 75 Chapman Street Providence, RI 02905 (401)781-9800 (401) 461-4580 FAX ATTN: Steve Rutledge B. Paragraph 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1. In the third line of Subparagraph 3.2.2, change the word "seven" to "five working". 2. Add to Subparagraph 3.2.2: Conflicting requirements brought to the Architect's attention subsequent to five days prior to the date for receiving Bids will be subject to the Architect's decision and at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Paragraph 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Add to Subparagraph 3.3.1: Where several materials are specified under the same heading, selection shall be at the option of the Bidder. Where materials or products are specified accompanied with the phrase "Approved Substitution", or similar verbage, the Bidder may submit materials or products for approval in accordance with Subparagraph 3.3.2. 2. In the third line of Subparagraph 3.3.2, change the word "ten" to "seven working". KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. Add Clause 3.3.2.1 to Subparagraph 3.3.2: .1 Submit each request for substitution (one material or product per form) on the Architect's "Substitution Request Form" (either duplicated from the Project Manual or available from the Architect's office) together with a self-addressed, self -stamped envelope. Submittals not accompanied by this form properly filled in and endorsed, will be discarded without review. NO EXCEPTIONS. Requests for substitution will be returned in the self-addressed, stamped envelope provided, at the Architect's earliest convenience. D. Paragraph 3.4 ADDENDA 1. Delete Subparagraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute: 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to the General Contractor only. 1.05 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES A. Delete Article 4 in its entirety. 1.06 ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS A. Delete Article 5 in its entirety. 1.07 ARTICLE 6 - POST -BID INFORMATION A. Delete Article 6 in its entirety. 1.08 ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND A. Delete Article 7 in its entirety. END OF DOCUMENT 2 K.KE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 TO: KKE ARCHITECTS 300 FIRST AVENUE NORTH SUITE 500 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55401 (612) 339-4200 (612) 342-9267 FAX PROJECT: Kohls - (City and State) SECTION NO. SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? YES NO B. Does the substitution affect other trades? YES NO C. Does the manufacturer's guarantee differ from that specified? YES NO D. If you indicated "YES" to Items A, B or C above, attach a thorough explanation on your company letterhead. E. If there are other major differences between proposed substitution and specified product, attach a thorough explanation on your company letterhead. F. The proposed substitution was used within the last 12 months on the following project: Project Name Location Architect Telephone No. G. Has the proposed substitution been used on a Kohl's project within the last 24 months? YES NO If yes, which Kohl's project? All questions must be answered. Incomplete forms will not be reviewed. The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted By: Signature Firm Address Date Phone �-' Fax n v For Use By Design Consultant: ❑ Accepted ❑ Accepted As Noted ❑ Not Accepted ❑ Received Too Late By Date Remarks �j DOCUMENT 00220 GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Geotechnical Report 1. Sub -surface investigations have been made and reports prepared by GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc., No. 150483.00, dated April 17, 2001. 2. Copies of the report of sub -surface exploration including the log of test borings are available for review in the Architects office and the Contractor's office. B. Purpose and Conditions of Use 1. The information on soil data was obtained primarily for use in preparing the foundation design. However, Contractor and Subcontractors shall draw their own conclusions therefrom. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner, or the Architect for subsoil quality or conditions. Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for verifying their own conclusions. 2. Boring information is provided in good faith solely for the purpose of placing the Contractor and Subcontractors in receipt of information available to the Owner, and they shall be responsible for conclusions which they draw therefrom, since the Owner does not guarantee continuity of the conditions indicated at the boring locations. 3. The report also contains information on general site preparation, and may include a recommendation for asphaltic concrete paving. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Contractor and Subcontractors are expected to make their own investigations, to examine the site and records of the Owner's investigations, and then decide for themselves the character of materials to be 1 encountered. Prior to bidding, bidders may make their own subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves as to site and subsurface conditions but such subsurface investigations shall be performed only under arrangements approved in advance by the Architect. C G END OF DOCUMENT KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1 A TJ CBM GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT KOHL'S TAKEOVER OF BRADLEES DEPARTMENT STORE NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS PREPARED FOR: Kohl's Corporation ' N56 W17000 Ridgewood Drive Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53051 r , PREPARED BY: GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. N4140 Duplainville Road Pewaukee, Wisconsin 53072 April 17, 2001 GZA File No. 150483.00 Copyright© 2001 GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. JL_ GZA Engineers and GeoEnvironmental, Inc. scientists April 17, 2001 File No. 150483.00 Kohl's Corporation `'. N56 W17000 Ridgewood Drive Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53051 � GZ� N4140 Duplainville Road Pewaukee ,J Wisconsin 53072 r 262-691-2662 FAX 262-691-9279 http://tvww.gza.net Attention: Mr. David Cleary Subject: Geotechnical Engineering Report Kohl's Takeover of Bradlees Department Store North Andover, Massachusetts Dear Mr. Cleary: In accordance with our proposal dated March 14, 2001, GZA GeoEnvironmental (GZA) is pleased to present this Geotechnical Engineering Report for the above -referenced project. This report summarizes the results of our geotechnical study, including subsurface exploration data, interpretation of subsurface conditions and recommendations for geotechnical aspects of design and construction. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. Please do not hesitate to call with any questions. Very truly yours, GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. 1 11), k U-60*Al" ill W. Kussmann "" Geotechnical "Geotechnical Engineer vk�A�a — Mary B. 41all, P.E. Associate Principal Attachments cc: Mr. John Osborne, P.G. (GZA) J/400-499/150483/00/noandov.doc q, Y�� S en W. Nicoson, P.E. Senior Project Manager CopyrightD 2001 GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. l_J An Equal Opportunity Employer M/FN/H r' GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT KOHL'S TAKEOVER OF BRADLEES DEPARTMENT STORE NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 71 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 SUMMARY 1 GZX1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES ,.. C S 2 2.0 BACKGROUND 2 2.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS 2 2.2 PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT 3 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS 3 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3 4.1 TOPSOIL 4 4.2 SAND AND SILT 4 4.3 CLAYEY SILT 4 4.4 GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS 4 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES 5 6.0 GEOTECHNICAL CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 5 --- r 6.1 FOUNDATIONS 5 6.2 FLOOR SLAB 6 6.3 BUILDING AND SLAB SETTLEMENTS 6 r7 ,mn 6.4 SEISMIC DESIGN 7 6.5 EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS 7 r: 6.6 ASPHALT PAVEMENT 7 6.7 UTILITIES 8 r; 6.8 SITE PREPARATION AND CONSTRUCTION 8 r 6.8.1 Site Preparation 8 6.8.2 Slab -On -Grade and Pavement Subgrade Preparation 8 6.8.3 Foundation Preparation 9 4 1 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT KOHL'S TAKEOVER OF BRADLEES DEPARTMENT STORE NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 6.8.4 Construction Adjacent to Existing Building 9 6.8.5 Reuse Of On -Site Materials As Fill 10 r2ft 6.8.6 Placement and Compaction of Fill 10 6.8.7 Construction Dewatering 11 6.8.8 Excavation Slopes and Shoring 11 7.0 ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDED WORK 12 FIGURES Figure No. 1 Site Location Map Figure No. 2 Exploration Location Map APPENDICES Appendix A Limitations Appendix B Soil Boring Logs Appendix C Recommended Earthwork Gradations ii 1.0 INTRODUCTION In accordance with our proposal dated March 14, 2001, this Geotechnical Engineering Report ("Report") presents the results of a subsurface exploration program and the 3 geotechnical engineering recommendations made by GZA GeoEnvironmental (GZA) for the proposed Kohl's takeover of the existing Bradlees Department Store located at 350 Winthrop Avenue in North Andover, Massachusetts ("Site"). A storefront renovation will be constructed as part of the takeover. The approximate Site location is shown on Figure No. 1. GZA was retained by Kohl's Corporation (Kohl's) of Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin to complete this work. GZA retained GZA Drilling, Inc. (GZAD) of Brockton, Massachusetts as a subcontractor to perform test borings as part of the subsurface exploration program. This Report is subject to the Limitations presented in Appendix A. 1.1 SUMMARY Our key findings and recommendations for the proposed Kohl's renovation of Bradlees Department Store are: 1. The majority of the soils encountered on the Site consist of natural sand and silt overlying natural clayey silt. Soils with a high silt content can be easily disturbed by construction activities; care should be given to minimize disturbance to the soils during construction. 2. Groundwater was encountered during the exploration program at depths as high as 7 feet below existing ground surface upon completion of drilling. Based on these depths to groundwater encountered while drilling, significant groundwater control measures are not anticipated. 3. Spread footings supported on the undisturbed, natural sand and silt, clayey silt, or compacted Structural Fill are suitable for support of the building. Where the sand and silt soils are encountered at the proposed footing bearing elevations, the soils should be overexcavated a minimum of 1 foot and replaced with Granular Fill after the resulting subgrade is compacted to the value specified for below foundations. The recommended maximum net allowable bearing pressure is 2.0 tons per square foot (tsf). 4. We recommend the floor slab be constructed as a slab -on -grade. A 6 -inch thick base course of Sand and Gravel Fill should be provided for support of the slab. 1 li J �l 1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES The purpose of this study was to explore subsurface conditions within the footprint of the C proposed renovations and develop geotechnical engineering recommendations for foundation design and construction and for limited Site improvements immediately adjacent ' to the proposed renovation. To achieve these objectives, GZA has performed the following G� tasks: • Coordinated a subsurface exploration program, including layout of the proposed boring locations; LJ • Observed drilling activities and reviewed soil samples from the explorations; l J • Identified geotechnical engineering issues related to the project, performed engineering analyses to address these issues and developed engineering recommendations; and • Prepared this report summarizing our findings from the exploration program and laboratory testing and presenting our recommendations for the proposed design and construction.-' 2.0 BACKGROUND 2.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS t, The existing Bradlees Department Store is located at 350 Winthrop Avenue in North Andover, Massachusetts. The proposed renovation will be along the front (east) side of the existing Bradlees Department Store. A Site Location Map is provided as Figure No. 1. At the time of exploration, the majority of the Site was covered with asphalt or concrete pavement. Several landscape planter areas containing a few small bushes also existed along , the front of the building. Information regarding the type and depth of the existing foundations was not available at the time this report was prepared. Overall, the Site grades are generally flat, varying approximately 1 to 2 feet in the area of the proposed renovation. Elevations referenced in this Report were estimated by hand in the field, and are relative to the existing finished floor elevation of the Bradlees Department Store, which was designated an arbitrary elevation of 100.0 feet. , 2 t J 2.2 PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT Based on the Site Plan provided by Kohl's, the proposed project will consist of a new entryway and facade for the building, including new foundations. We assume that the proposed finished floor elevations will approximately match the existing floor elevations. A maximum wall load of 2 kips per lineal foot and a maximum column load of 25 kips per lineal foot are anticipated for new spread footings and a maximum additional column load GZXof 45 kips is anticipated for the existing foundations based on the information provided by the project structural engineer, Ambrose Engineering, Inc. (Ambrose) of Cedarburg, Wisconsin. It is GZA's understanding that the remainder of the Site will generally remain as is, and that no significant re -paving or reconstruction of asphalt paved parking areas are proposed. 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS GZA retained GZAD as a subcontractor to perform two test borings on March 26, 2001, for the proposed renovation. The test borings were generally drilled at locations suggested by Kohl's, however, slight relocation was necessary due to the configuration of existing Site features. The approximate boring locations are shown on Figure No. 2. Test borings were advanced utilizing hollow -stem augers. Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) were performed and split -spoon soil samples were collected at 2.5 -foot intervals to depths of 10 feet and at 5 -foot intervals between a depth of 10 feet and the termination depth of the borings. Each of the test borings were advanced to an approximate depth of 20 feet below existing ground surface. A GZA engineer observed the explorations and prepared boring logs from the recovered split -spoon samples. The borings were located in the field by GZA using tape measurements from existing Site features. Elevations at the boring locations were estimated by hand measurements, relative to the existing finished floor elevation of the Bradlees Department Store, which was designated an arbitrary elevation of 100.0 feet. The boring logs are provided in Appendix B. 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The subsurface profile beneath the Site in the vicinity of the test borings typically consists of topsoil, underlain by brown to grayish -brown sand and silt, underlain by natural, gray, clayey silt. The different soil strata are described below in descending order from the ground surface. 3 4.1 TOPSOIL Approximately 4, 5 to 2.5 feet of dark brawn organic topsoil :was encountered at the surface at the test borings. Note that the borings were performed in the landscape planters adjacent to the existing store. The remainder of the Site in the vicinity of the proposed renovation is pavement or sidewalk. CrIft4.2 SAND AND SILT Sand and silt I soils: were encountered beneath the topsoil in the test borings to depths ranging from about X3.5 to 7 feet below existing ground surface, This stratum appears to be natural based on the samples obtained in the borings and absence of materials which may suggest it is fill. This stratum is estimated to be about 2 to 4.5 feet thick," Based on visual , classifications, the soils typically consisted of grayish -brown, fine to medium sand and silt, with between 5 to 10 percent gravel and sand. These sand and silt soils can be described as loose to medium -dense, with SPT N -values ranging frorih' 7 to 1g blows per foots Based on visual classification, the soil is classified as SM according to the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). 4.3 CLAYEY SILT :_, Clayey siltwas encountered beneath the sand and silt extending to at least the termination depths of the borings. Based on visual classifications, this stratum typically consisted of brown and gray mottled to gray, clayey silt, which can be described as medium stiff to very stiff, with SPT N -values ranging from 23 to 56 blows per foot;'and pocket penetrometer readings ranging from 0.75 to 3.5 tons per square foot (tsf). Based on visual classification, the soil is classified as CL -ML according to the USCS. MI 4.4 GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS Groundwater was encountered in the borings at depths ranging from 13.6 to 14.3 feet below existing ground surface while drilling and at a depth of 7 feet below existing ground surface in boring B-1 after a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 hours. Due to the ` limited time on -Site, a water level reading after an extended stabilization time was not recorded in boring B-2. , Given the low permeability of the cohesive soils and the limited groundwater stabilization time in the boreholes, the observed water levels may not be representative of the static ` levels. In addition, it should be recognized that fluctuations in the groundwater level will occur due to variations in precipitation, temperature and other factors different from those . 4 at the time the measurements were made. Therefore, groundwater levels encountered during construction may be higher than those observed during the explorations. To evaluate static groundwater levels further, we would recommend groundwater observation w wells be installed and monitored. Groundwater observations are noted on the boring logs included in Appendix B. zJ r' 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES The following geotechnical issues were considered when assessing foundation and Site development options and developing design and construction recommendations: • Suitable bearing materials with respect to proposed foundations, slabs and loads; • Construction of the proposed renovation adjacent to the existing structures and utilities; and • Re -use of Site soils. Each of these issues are discussed further and recommendations are provided below. 6.0 GEOTECHNICAL CONCLUSIONS AND RECOM1 MNDATIONS Based upon the subsurface conditions encountered at the Site, our understanding of the proposed project and the results of our geotechnical analyses, GZA provides the following r r^ geotechnical engineering recommendations for the design and construction of the proposed renovation for Kohl's takeover of the existing Bradlees Department in North Andover, Massachusetts. 6.1 FOUNDATIONS . � We recommend the building columns an&,Joa&be4r1ng walls be supported an cox venttohal t._.. spread footing foundations bearing directly on suitable soil: Suitable bearing soil consists of the undisturbed, clayey silt soil, or compacted Granular Fill over the sand and silt. Unsuitable soil, including organic soil, loose soil, or soil that is disturbed by construction activities or allowed to degrade due to weather or other conditions, should be removed from within the influence zone of the proposed footings and replaced with Granular Fill. ' The influence zone is defined as a line projected outward and downward from the edge of ' footings on a slope of 1 -horizontal to 1 -vertical. Unsuitable soil should be removed in accordance with recommendations provided in Section 6.8.3. The recommended gradation F L J for Granular Fill is presented in Appendix C. 5 in Spread footing foundations should be designed using a maximum net allowable bearing pressure of 4 kips per square foot (2 tsf j, in general accordance with section 1804 of the t r Massachusetts State Building Code (MSBC). New continuous footings should not be less than 24 inches wide and new isolated footings not less than 36 inches wide, regardless of Exterior building footings in heated areas should be founded at least 4.0 feet below the lowest adjacent exterior grade for frost protection and interior footings in heated areas should be placed a minimum of 18 inches below the top of the surrounding floor slab, in accordance with section 1806 of the MSBC. 6.2 FLOOR SLAB We recommend building Awor slabs be constructed as slab -on -grade wollowing proper subgrade preparation. The slab -on -grade floor should be supported on compacted Sand and Gravel Fill base course, overlying suitable natural soils or compacted Granular Fill. A minimum base course thickness of 6 inches should be provided. It is recommended that the 1 slab -on -grade be constructed such that it is not structurally connected to, or resting upon perimeter walls or column footings in order to limit differential settlement effects. 6.3 BUILDING AND SLAB SETTLEMENTS For foundations designed and constructed in accordance with the recommendations contained herein, total settlement of the renovation is expected to be less than 1 inch and differential settlements less than '/i -inch. The majority of settlement is expected to occur during construction. 0 calculated bearing pressure. CIZXBased on our understanding of the proposed foundation loads, additional loading will be applied to existing footings in the area of the proposed renovation. Because these new loadings could potentially cause additional settlements, we recommend increasing the footing size proportionally for the additional load, so the bearing pressure of the existing , footings would not appreciably increase, thereby helping to limit additional settlement. These footings should be evaluated by a structural engineer to determine their suitability for supporting the additional loads. If the new bearing pressure is greater than 2 tsf, or ` } significantly higher than the current bearing capacity, underpining or redesigning the footings should be considered. For eccentrically loaded footings, the footing area should be r l determined in accordance with the guidelines presented in the design manual entitled, "Foundations and Earth Structures, NAVFAC DM -702," dated May 1986, by the Department of the Navy. Exterior building footings in heated areas should be founded at least 4.0 feet below the lowest adjacent exterior grade for frost protection and interior footings in heated areas should be placed a minimum of 18 inches below the top of the surrounding floor slab, in accordance with section 1806 of the MSBC. 6.2 FLOOR SLAB We recommend building Awor slabs be constructed as slab -on -grade wollowing proper subgrade preparation. The slab -on -grade floor should be supported on compacted Sand and Gravel Fill base course, overlying suitable natural soils or compacted Granular Fill. A minimum base course thickness of 6 inches should be provided. It is recommended that the 1 slab -on -grade be constructed such that it is not structurally connected to, or resting upon perimeter walls or column footings in order to limit differential settlement effects. 6.3 BUILDING AND SLAB SETTLEMENTS For foundations designed and constructed in accordance with the recommendations contained herein, total settlement of the renovation is expected to be less than 1 inch and differential settlements less than '/i -inch. The majority of settlement is expected to occur during construction. 0 6.4 SEISMIC DESIGN The natural soils at this Site are not considered susceptible to liquefaction in accordance with criteria outlined in sections 1612.0 of the MSBC. Based on Standard Penetration Test results and classifications of the existing Site soils, the Site is considered a type S1 soil site in accordance with section 1612.4 of the MSBC. Therefore, the recommended S -factor for seismic design is 1.0. 6.5 EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS Exterior concrete slabs should be constructed over 8 inches of compacted base course consisting of compacted Sand and Gravel Fill. The recommended gradation for Sand and Gravel Fill is presented in Appendix C. Concrete sidewalks should bear on a minimum 6 - inch thickness of compacted Sand and Gravel Fill base course overlying prepared subgrade. Proper drainage should be provided in these areas to avoid damage from frost action. 6.6 ASPHALT PAVEMENT Based on discussions with Kohl's, it is our understanding that alterations to existing asphalt pavement will be minimal, however, where local repairs or replacement from construction activities are required, the following are the minimum pavement section recommendations. Minimum Flexible Pavement Material Thickness (inches) Material Light Duty Heavy Duty Area Area Asphaltic Concrete Top 1.0 1.5 Course Asphaltic Concrete 1.5 2.0 Binder Course Base Course (Sand and Gravel Fill, 8" 10" refer to Appendix C If extensive removal and replacement of the existing pavement is to be undertaken, we recommend additional explorations and/or laboratory testing of the Site soils to evaluate pavement section thicknesses for reconstruction. 7 6.7 UTILITIES Underground pipes and utilities should be placed on bedding in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where %-inch Crushed Stone is used in wet conditions, the stone should be wrapped in geotextile fabric for separation. Trench backfill should be placed in loose lifts not to exceed 12 inches (6 inches in areas GzXwhere hand -operated vibratory compaction equipment will be used) and should be compacted in accordance with the specifications provided in section 6.8.6 of this Report. 6.8 SITE PREPARATION AND CONSTRUCTION 6.8.1 Site Preparation All topsoil or loose subgrade soils and any other deleterious materials or existing surface structures (concrete and asphalt pavements) within the proposed renovation area should be removed prior to slab -on -grade construction. Excavations must be adequately dewatered and sloped back or properly supported for stability and safety in accordance with OSHA requirements as a minimum. 6.8.2 Slab -On -Grade and Pavement Subarade Preparation Following stripping of the surface materials and excavation to proposed subgrades, the exposed subgrades for slab -on -grade and pavement construction should be proofrolled. The proofrolling should be performed prior to fill placement using a static roller weighing approximately 10 tons (compaction of granular soils shall be done in vibratory mode). The subgrade and proofrolling should be observed by a representative of GZA. Any loose, soft, or wet areas which appear wet or unstable, should be undercut. Overexcavation, which may be required as the result of the proofrolling, should be performed based on evaluation of the conditions by GZA. Resulting overexcavations should be backfilled with compacted Granular Fill in building areas and General Fill in parking areas, as described in Appendix C. Where existing Site grades must, be raised for slab -on -grade and pavement construction, the subgrades can be raised using Granular Fill in building areas and General Fill in parking areas, as described in Appendix C. We recommend that utilities located within the area of the proposed renovations be relocated and trenches be backfilled with compacted Granular Fill. The Granular 8 Fill should be placed and compacted in accordance with the procedures presented in Appendix C. 6.8.3 Foundation Preparation Where the sand and silt stratum is encountered at proposed bottom of footing, this material should be over -excavated 12 inches below the bottom of footing and Ga replaced with compacted Granular Fill. The resulting subgrade from the overexcavation should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of a Modified Proctor value prior to placing any Granular Fill. Where other overexcavations are required to remove unsuitable soils, the overexcavations should be backfilled with compacted Granular Fill. The lateral limits of all overexcavations should extend beyond the footing limits a distance equal to the thickness of Granular Fill below footing. Alternatively, a lean mix concrete may be used to backfill the excavations to proposed bottom of footing elevations in lieu of Granular Fill. The lean concrete mix should have a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 1,000 pounds per square inch. Where existing grades require fill placement to bottom of proposed footing, the fill should consist of compacted Granular Fill with lateral limits as described above. The Site soils, which will be exposed at subgrade levels, will be susceptible to disturbance particularly in the presence of excess moisture. We recommend final excavation to subgrade be performed with a smooth -edge bucket to limit disturbance. All loose, disturbed soil should be removed. The period of time the subgrade is exposed should be minimized; footings should be placed immediately after the subgrade is properly prepared. Excavations should be backfilled as soon as possible after footing construction to limit exposure to precipitation. Foundation subgrades must not be allowed to freeze either prior to or after footing placement. 6.8.4 Construction Adjacent to Existing�Buildinu r Based on our understanding of the project, it is anticipated that Site preparation will include some demolition at the front portion of the building where the renovation is r to be located. Any buried foundations, slabs, or other structures encountered within the limits of the proposed renovation and utilities should be removed in their entirety if located beneath proposed foundations and a minimum of 1 foot below the bottom r of the proposed slabs. f The type and depths of the existing foundations were not available at the time this Report was prepared. If the existing foundations are spread footings the proposed r 9 footings must be placed at a depth below the existing footings, underpinning of the existing footings may be required and further analysis by GZA should be performed to properly implement special construction measures. To help prevent undermining of the existing footings, excavations should not be performed within a zone defined by a line extending outward and downward from the base of the existing footing on a slope of 2-hoizontal to 1 -vertical. CrZ% 6.8.5 Reuse Of On -Site Materials As Fill Based on the visual observations of soil samples collected, the natural, clayey silt soils are not expected to meet the requirements for Sand and Gravel or Granular Fill, but may be suitable for reuse as General Fill. If the clayey silt soils are suitable for General Fill, it should be noted that clay and silt soils are very susceptible to strength degradation in the presence of moisture. Where they are properly placed and compacted, the fill should be protected from moisture and excess construction traffic in order to avoid disturbance. Where disturbance occurs subsequent to placement and compaction, the disturbed material should be removed, reworked and recompacted, or other suitable material used in its place. The existing sand and silt soils are not expected to meet the requirements for Sand and Gravel, therefore, importing off -Site materials will be necessary for fill in areas where these soils will be required. The sand and silt soils may meet the requirements for Granular Fill, however, these materials should be evaluated at the time of construction to determine their suitability. 6.8.6 Placement and Compaction of Fill `-- We recommend that a geotechnical engineer observe overexcavation and filling activities and proof -rolling of the subgrade to adjust/modify proof -rolling procedure and prevent the potential deterioration of the subgrade due to excessive proof - rolling. Fill should be placed and compacted in maximum loose lift thicknesses of 6 to 12 inches, as appropriate for the compaction equipment used and to achieve the minimum degree of compaction recommended below. All fill, including base course materials and backfill in overexcavations, should be compacted to a minimum degree of compaction relative to the maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test, ASTM D-1557. 10 Fill Area Percent of Maximum Dry Density Below Foundations; Below Slab -on -Grade Base Course; 95 and Slab -on -Grade Base Course Pavement Base Course; and Within 2 Feet Below 95 Pavement Base Course More Than 2 Feet Below Pavement Base Course; and 92 Behind Retaining Walls in Landscape Areas Below Landscape Areas 90 Placement of fill on frozen subgrades shall not be allowed. Properly placed and compacted fill shall be protected from freezing. 6.8.7 Construction Dewatering Groundwater was encountered during drilling at depths ranging from 13.6 to 14.3 feet, and upon completion of boring B-1 at a depth of 7.0 feet. Therefore, it is anticipated significant construction dewatering will not be required for shallow footing construction. If minor seepage is encountered, a system of filtered sumps should be adequate to control water encountered. For deeper excavations (i.e. new utilities), more comprehensive dewatering methods would be anticipated to facilitate construction. Roof drains and surface water should be diverted away from open excavations and prevented from accumulating on exposed subgrades. 6.8.8 Excavation Slopes and Shoring For this Site, the natural soils encountered in our exploratory investigation are considered to be Type C when applying the OSHA regulations. OSHA recommends a maximum slope inclination of 1.5 -horizontal to 1 -vertical for Type C soils. If any excavation, including a utility trench, is extended to a depth of more than 20 feet, it will be necessary to have the side slopes or excavation support system designed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Massachusetts in accordance with OSHA requirements. All exposed excavation slope faces should be protected against the elements. The soil to be penetrated by the proposed excavations may vary across the Site. (� Our preliminary soil classification is based solely on the materials encountered in the subsurface explorations and should be confirmed in the field during construction. � 11 !_ J n As an alternative to temporary slopes, vertical excavations can be temporarily shored. The Contractor or the Contractor's specialty subcontractor would be responsible for the design of the temporary shoring in accordance with applicable _ regulatory requirements. J 7.0 ADDITIONAL RECONIMNDED WORK -I GzX I Quality control of fill material use and placement is an important issue for the success of the ` recommendations presented herein. It is recommended that GZA be retained to provide ~� observation and inspection of these services during construction. GZA's involvement during construction will also allow for evaluation of actual conditions exposed during excavation versus anticipated conditions and promote prompt response for any necessary modifications. w� t. 6,x.Jl e. . LI , 3 }Y 12 FIGURES t i 1-1 F L-3 m l_7 2003 GZL Geolnvlronmental, Inc. CD 0 mm o$ 02 o� 0 0 00 m� 0a Q 0 S N N ND ?� v 07 010 O �m -Do m 300 o -%c m3> >,m m CLm 0600 ,Grt4 W O� SSC A a a 0 0 � o 0 0 � 0 0 ? 9.-D ooaoFCDa 0 aws 00-a �o 5. 5 ,0 ma °m aQ w`� c Cr 5. COD. atr s rno`x o Q� x %o n� o a� f ao 0� =o a� a� n0 o c m c .a rn 0 0 0 0-0 .:3+ o 00 10 '� o o 0.0 0 So00&v w :9 O C- C) m m ►-` z m Cl o z 0 o � co 0 0 E L�3 Li Li A L -j L3_ IIIIIIIIIIII 111111111111 IIIII1111111111111 IIII11111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIII1111111111 I I I I I t I I I I I I I l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I l I t IIIIIIIIII1111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIII11111111111 I I I I t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IIIIIIIIIIII1111111111111111 Illlllllllllllltllllllllllll q Aj I l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l t l l l l l l l IIIIIIIII111111111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MEESE NO, Em PROPOSED KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE BRADLEES TAKEOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS ON monsoon m D m x to z O m D r m x N z G7 m D r 0 m m X DN Z Z a) V) 0 -1 r- 0 m M (n OOX Ovvi C)0 REV. NO. DESCRIPTION BY I DATE PROJ MGR: WWK OPERATOR: BWS SCALE 1 =100 DESIGNED BY: WWK REVIEWED BY: SWN DATE: 4/17/2001 XPLORATION LOCATION MAP 0 50' 100' 200' cizx I GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. N 4140 DuplainvIle Road • Pewaukee, Nleconeln 53072 Phone (252) 691-2662 0 Fax (202) 691-9279 www.gmcom X N z � D— 11 • � X I it D D q Aj I l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l t l l l l l l l IIIIIIIII111111111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MEESE NO, Em PROPOSED KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE BRADLEES TAKEOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS ON monsoon m D m x to z O m D r m x N z G7 m D r 0 m m X DN Z Z a) V) 0 -1 r- 0 m M (n OOX Ovvi C)0 REV. NO. DESCRIPTION BY I DATE PROJ MGR: WWK OPERATOR: BWS SCALE 1 =100 DESIGNED BY: WWK REVIEWED BY: SWN DATE: 4/17/2001 XPLORATION LOCATION MAP 0 50' 100' 200' cizx I GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. N 4140 DuplainvIle Road • Pewaukee, Nleconeln 53072 Phone (252) 691-2662 0 Fax (202) 691-9279 www.gmcom APPENDIX A Limitations GEOTECHNICAL LIMITATIONS Explorations 1. The analyses and recommendations submitted in this Report are based in part upon J the data obtained from subsurface explorations. The nature and extent of variations between these explorations may not become evident until construction. If variations f f, then appear evident, it will be necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this Report. 2. The generalized soil profile described in the text is intended to convey trends in subsurface conditions. The boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been developed by interpretations of widely spaced explorations and samples; actual soil transitions are probably more erratic. For specific information, refer to the boring logs. 3. Water level observations have been made in the drill holes at times and under ( conditions stated on the boring logs. These data have been reviewed and interpretations have been made in the text of this Report. However, it must be noted that fluctuations in the level of the groundwater may occur due to variations i in rainfall, temperature and other factors occurring since the time measurements were made. Review 4. In the event that any changes in the nature, design, or location of the proposed building are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this Report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this Report modified or verified in writing by GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc. (GZA). It is recommended that this firm be provided the opportunity for a general review of final design and specifications in order that earthwork and foundation recommendations may be properly interpreted and implemented in the design and specifications. Construction 5. It is recommended that this firm be retained to provide soil engineering services during construction of the excavation and foundation phases of the work. This is to observe compliance with the design concepts, specifications, and recommendations W 10 and to allow design changes in the event that subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to start of construction. LO Use of Report 6. This Report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Kohl's Corporation for Gaspecific application to the Kohl's proposed takeover and renovation of the Bradlees Department Store located in North Andover, Massachusetts in accordance with ` generally accepted soil and foundation engineering practices. No other warranty, express or implied, is made. 7. This soil and foundation engineering report has been prepared for this project by GZA. This Report is for design purposes only and is not sufficient to prepare an accurate bid. Contractors wishing a copy of the Report may secure it with the understanding that its scope is limited to design considerations only. W ,_J GZ� '. I APPENDIX B Soil Boring Logs PROPOSED KOHL'S BRADLEES TAKEOVER DEPARTMENT STORE RENOVATION 14140 D%AablvMc Road NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS 'ewaukee, Wisconsin 53072 Page No. File No. Chocked By: OnlingCo. GZA Dn'Iting, Inc. Caning Sampler Groundwater Readings Foreman Norm Stuttard Type HSA Split -Spoon Date Time Depth Casing Stab. Time rZA Rep. Ron Kubiak LDJO.D. 41�"LD. 13 8"LD. 3 Ol —12-4Opm 14.3' 18.0' 5 min. )ate start End Hammer Wt.---1-4—OT— --379'01 2.05 7.0' out 1.5 lis. tion See Pon Location Plan mmy HaFall 30" GS. Elw. 100.0 Datum Ex. Fmriehed Floor Other 'E P T H A L S O N W G S Sample Inf nation Sample tion & Classification. Generalized Stratum Description O T E S OVMRoadings No. Pen./ Ree. Depth t- Blows/6" Field Pocket' Penetrometer 5 10 Er 1s ' 20 25 1 3" TOPSOIL TOPSOIL 1.5' ND ND ND ND ND S-1 24/12 1.0 -3.0 1-8-10-12 9" Medium -dense, grayish -brown, fine to medium SAND and SILT, trace Gravel, trace Clay, moist (possible Fill) (SM) GRAYISH- BROWN SAND AND SILT 3.5' (POSSIBLE FILL) to very am gray, clayey SILT, moist (CL -ML) Stiff to very 56% gray, clayey SILT, moist (CL -ML) Medium-stA gray, clayey SILT, wet (CL -ML) Mediumiw gray, clryey SILT, wet (CL -ML) GRAY, CLAYEY SILT 20.0' S-2 24/17 4.0-6.0 13-12-11-37 IStiff S-3 24/18 8.0 -10.0 12-22-22-21 2.0 S-4 24/17 13,0-11,0 6-8-16-18 0.75 S-5 24/20 19.0-20.0 7-14-18-19 0.75 BOTTOM OF BORING AT 20.0' Nota: 1. Stratification linea represent approidmate boundaries between soil types, transitions may be gradual. Water level readings haw been made at tiara and under conditions stated. Fluctuations of groundwater may occur due to factors other than those present at the time measurements were made. 2. Feld toting results represent total organic vapor levels, referenced to a benzene standard, measured in the headspace of sealed and sample jun using a PE PHOTOVAC Model 2020 (10.6 eV). Results m pati per mullion by vohmm (ppmv). ND indicates nothing detected (a0.1 ppmv) 3. Ground surface elevation was estimated using a hand Level relative to emting finished floor elevation. Existing finished floor elevation was given an arbitrary elevation of 100 feet 4. USCS elaui5cations are based on visual classifies tion of retained sal samples. GZ� GZA GeoEnvlrommnemtal, Ise. 1/13018ilNAND LOG F B-1 GZA GeoEmvironmental, Inc. FAgi°eera/Sclentlsts PROPOSED KOHL'S BRADLEES TAKEOVER Bormg No. B-2 DEPARTMENT STORE RENOVATION Page No. 1 of 1 N4140 Duplaimille Road NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS Filc No. Checked By: 150483.00 WWK/SWN Pcwaukoo, Wisconsin 53072 Drilling Co. GZA Drilling, Inc. Casing Sampler Groundwater Readings Foreman Norm Stuttard Type HSA S -SP -n Date Time Stab. Time GZA Rep. Ron Kubiak LDJO.D. 41/4" LD. r3/9'11). 3 O1 —1,45vm 13.6 18.0' 10 min. Date Start End Hammer Wt. 140 Location See Exploration Location Plan Hammer Fan 30" .. , GS. Elev. 100.0 Datum Ex. Finished Floor Other E A L Sample Information 0 P S O Field FRET Generalized T T N W Pen / Depth Penetrometer Sample Stratum E H G S No. Rec. t Blo W6" tion d: Classification Description S OVM R 8" TOPSOIL TOPSOIL S -i 24/10 .1.0-3.0 1-2-3-5 ND 251 2" Loose, grayish -brown, fine SAND and SILT, trace to little Clay, moist (possible fill) (SM) GRAYISH- 4.0-6.0 RAYISH-4.0-6.0 1-2-5-12 Lowe, grayish -brown, fine SAND and SILT, BROWN SAND ND nate to little Clay, moist (possible fill) (SM) AND SILT -------------- --- 7.0_-------- ND m , 9.0-10.0 18-25-31-37 3.5 Very stiff brown and gW mottled, elryaysy SILT, I oist (CL -ML) tttttttttt 11 GRAY, CLAYEY 13.0-15.0 5-9-14-16 1.25 sW gray, clayey SILT, wet (CL -ML) SILT ND c , 18.0 - 20.0 7-12-11-18 1.75 Stiff gray, clayey SILT, wet (CLML) ND 20AY BOTTOM OF BORING AT 20.0- sQi , !t 1. Stratification linea represent approximate boundaries between soil types, transitions may be gradual. Water bvcl readings haw been made at tuna and under conditions stated. Fluctuations of gn m dwata may occur due to factors other dist those present at the time measurements were made. 2. Field tesdag results represent total organic vapor levels, referenced to a benanc standard, measured in the headspaof sealed sod aample,jm ming a PE PHOTOVAC model 2020 (10.6 eV). Results in parts per million by volume (ppmv). ND indicates nothing decocted (a0.1 ppmv). 3. Ground surface elevation was csdnuted using a hand level relative to stating finished floor elevation. Existing finished floor elevation was given an atbhnffy elevation of 100 feet. 4. USCS classifications ane based on visual classification of retained wil samples. G� GZA GeoEnvlronmental, Inc. ItI504 AND 1,00 B-2 APPENDIX C Recommended Earthwork Gradations 0 APPENDIX C RECOMMENDED USE AND GRADATION REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL MATERIALS Proposed Kohl's Bradlees Takeover Department Store Renovation North Andover, Massachusetts USE OF FILL MATERIALS Granular Fill: As backfill in overexcavations, below foundations, below pavement and slab base course, and as fill to raise grades below foundations. Sand and Gravel Fill: As pavement and slab base course, or as fill in wet areas. General Fill: Greater than 3 feet below pavement and as fill below landscape areas. GRADATION REQUIREMENTS Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer By Weight 2/3 of loose lift thickness 100 No. 10 30-95 No. 40 10-70 No. 200 0-15 C-1 Gn APPENDIX C (Continued) Sand and Gravel Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish, and other ` deleterious or organic matter. Sand and Gravel Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer By Weight ** 100 '/i Inch 50-95 No. 4 40-75 No. 40 10-35 No. 200 0-8 ** Four inches (4") where placed below slab and pavement; elsewhere, two-thirds (2/3) the loose lift thickness General Fill shall be natural soil free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. The maximum particle size shall be 2/3 of the loose lift thickness except in the top 12 inches of fill, which shall have a maximum particle size of 3 inches. General Fill shall be classified as GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, or CL in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D-2487). General Fill shall be reviewed and approved by an experienced engineer prior to use on -Site. C-2 DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, Articles 1-14, is hereby made a part of this Project Manual, by reference, except as amended by Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions. The above stipulated General Conditions as amended by the Supplementary Conditions apply to work executed in each of the Specification Divisions, 1 through 14, the Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical work, and the design/build Fire Protection work. E! E., E E D Ell CKKE0900 END OF DOCUMENT I KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.01 GENERAL A. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the n Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where an Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause contained in the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause �j shall remain in effect. I j 1.02 ARTICLE 1- GENERAL PROVISIONS iJ A. Paragraph 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1. Add Clause 1.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 1.1.3: .1 Use of the word "furnish" shall mean "to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for installation"; use of the word "install" shall mean "to place in position for service or use"; and use of the word "provide" shall mean "furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use"; use of the words "as indicated" shall mean "as indicated, shown or noted on the Project Drawings"; use of the words "as specified" shall mean "as specified in the Project Specifications or as specified on the Project Drawings". jB. Paragraph 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1. Add to Subparagraph 1.2.3: In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 2. Add to Subparagraph 1.2.4: �I Wherever a provision of a Section of the Specifications conflicts with any agreements or regulations in force among members of a Trade Association, Union, or Council, which regulates or distinguishes what work shall or shall not be included in the work of any particular trade, the Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflicts without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. n 3. Add Subparagraphs 1.2.6 and 1.2.7 to Paragraph 1.2: �—' 1.2.6 Standard specifications, rules, codes, instructions, recommendations and references referred to in the Project Specifications shall be the latest edition unless specific edition is specified. If �r standard specifications are revised prior to completion of any part of the work to which such f revisions would pertain, the Contractor may, if approved by the Architect, perform such work in LJ accordance with the revised specifications. Standard specifications, except as modified in the Project Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though included in the Project Specifications. 1.2.7 Sections of Division I - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the Specifications, and the design/build Fire Protection work. 1.03 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER A. Paragraph 2.1 DEFINITION 1. Supplement Subparagraph 2.1.1: a. "Owner", as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean: Telemachus Demoulas, Trustee of Delta & Delta Realty Trust c/o Sumner Darman, Esq., Richard L. Blumenthal, Esq. Silverman and Kudisch, P.C. 50 Staniford St., Suite 1003 Boston, MA 02114 b. "Tenant", as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean: Kohl's Department Stores, Inc. El KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 .l The Contractor shall review specified construction and installation procedures E J (including those recommended by manufacturers) prior to implementation and shall advise the Architect in writing (1) if the specified procedures deviate from good construction practice, (2) if following the procedures will affect warranties and (3) 9 of objections the Contractor may have to the procedures. t'0 .2 If the Contractor is uncertain as to the interpretation or design intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible to request in writing an interpretation from the Architect, in accordance with Subparagraphs 4.2.11 and n 4.2.12. B. Paragraph 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 1. In Subparagraph 3.3.1, delete the last 2 lines beginning with the words "unless Contract Documents". C. Paragraph 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 1. Add Subparagraph 3.4.3 to Paragraph 3.4: 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications (Division 1 of the Specifications). it .1 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3, the Contractor: LJ KKE0900 (a) represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; �+ (b) represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified; f (c) certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts, and excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and (d) will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 2 M KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS B. Paragraph 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 1. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute: 2.2.5 The Architect will furnish the Contractor with one (1) set of reproducible Contract Documents free of charge for execution of the Work. The Contractor is responsible for r reproduction of these Contract Documents and associated costs. 1.04 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR A. Paragraph 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 1. Add Clause 3.2.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.2.1: .1 The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material v and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages or delay resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. If the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work, performs any construction activity without knowing it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, their sole remedies shall be governed by the procedures and terms for Contractor's claims against the Owner provided under Paragraph 4.3. 2. Delete Subparagraph 3.2.3 in its entirety and substitute: 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, submittals accepted pursuant to Paragraph 3.12, and the general design intent reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. .l The Contractor shall review specified construction and installation procedures E J (including those recommended by manufacturers) prior to implementation and shall advise the Architect in writing (1) if the specified procedures deviate from good construction practice, (2) if following the procedures will affect warranties and (3) 9 of objections the Contractor may have to the procedures. t'0 .2 If the Contractor is uncertain as to the interpretation or design intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible to request in writing an interpretation from the Architect, in accordance with Subparagraphs 4.2.11 and n 4.2.12. B. Paragraph 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 1. In Subparagraph 3.3.1, delete the last 2 lines beginning with the words "unless Contract Documents". C. Paragraph 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 1. Add Subparagraph 3.4.3 to Paragraph 3.4: 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications (Division 1 of the Specifications). it .1 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3, the Contractor: LJ KKE0900 (a) represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; �+ (b) represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified; f (c) certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts, and excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and (d) will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 2 M KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Lj D. U E. ¢� 1J C F L C I c 2. C '71 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Paragraph 3.5 WARRANTY 1. Add Subparagraph 3.5.2 to Paragraph 3.5: 3.5.2 Manufacturer's product warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of general warranty obligations. Paragraph 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 1. Add Subparagraph 3.7.1.1: .1 The Owner will make application for and pay for all the fees required to cover the SAC charges and the WAC charges. Paragraph 3.8 ALLOWANCES 1. Add the following to the end of Clause 3.8.2.3: except when installation is specified as part of the allowance in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications). G. Paragraph 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1. In the fourth line of Subparagraph 3.12.6, change the word "approved" to "reviewed"; and in the last line change the word approved to "accepted". 2. In the third line of Subparagraph 3.12.8, change the word "approval" to "acceptance"; and in the last line change the word "approval" to "acceptance". 3. In Subparagraph 3.12.11, delete the words "calculations and". H. Paragraph 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. Add Subparagraph 3.14.3 to Paragraph 3.14: 3.14.3 Altering or cutting of structural members will not be allowed without written approval of the Architect. 1.05 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Paragraph 4.1 ARCHITECT 1. Supplement Subparagraph 4.1.1.: a. "Architect", as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean: KKE Architects -Massachusetts, P.C. Suite 500 300 First Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55401 (612)339-4200 (612)342-9267 FAX Add Subparagraph 4.1.5 to Paragraph 4.1: 4.1.5 The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages, delays, defects or deficiencies in the Work. B. Paragraph 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 1. Add to Subparagraph 4.2.2: The Contractor may not rely upon the Architect's periodic site visits or reports to the Owner as confirmation that the Work is being performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Add to Subparagraph 4.2.4: Direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor that affect the performance or administration of the Work shall be made or confirmed in writing, with copies to the Architect. In the first line of Subparagraph 4.2.7, delete the words "approve or" and "other"; and in the last sentence change the word "approval" to "acceptance". EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C. 1.06 A. rV C. 1.07 01 N. F, DOCUMENT 00800 �I SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Paragraph 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 1. Add the following to the end of the first sentence of Subparagraph 4.3.3: whether or not the effect has been determined in terms of time or money. ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS u Paragraph 5.1 DEFINITIONS 1. Add Clause 5.1.1.1 to Subparagraph 5.1.1: .1 Wherever the term "Subcontractor(s)" appears in the Contract Documents, it shall also mean material and equipment suppliers, and shall extend to them the same contractual responsibilities and rights afforded Subcontractors. f e� Paragraph 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK �y 1. In the third line of Subparagraph 5.2.1, between the words "Contract" and "shall", add: but not later than 15 days from the Contract Date, Add Clauses 5.2.1.1 and 5.2.1.2 to Subparagraph 5.2.1: .1 If adequate data on a proposed manufacturer or an installer is not available, the Architect may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. .2 Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements { of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must ;J conform to such requirements. Paragraph 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 1. Delete Subparagraph 5.3.1 in its entirety and substitute: 5.3.1 By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to consent to, and be bound to the Contractor by, the terms of the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall be required to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and J responsibilities which the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights and limitations on liability of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor. Each subcontract agreement shall provide that the Subcontractor's rights, remedies �n and redress shall obtain solely against the Contractor (or the Contractor's bonding company, if any) in the same manner and with the same conditions as the Contractor has rights, remedies and redress against the Owner. n I 2. Add Subparagraph 5.3.2 to Paragraph 5.3: J 5.3.2 The Contractor shall supply copies of each subcontract agreement to the Owner and to the Architect before the Subcontractor is permitted to commence Work. ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK Paragraph 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 1. Add Subparagraph 7.2.3 to Paragraph 7.2: 7.2.3 The Architect's signature on a Change Order indicates only that the Architect acknowledges h the Owner's and Contractor's mutual acceptance of the items outlined in Subparagraph 7.2.1 and its subsequent Clauses. Paragraph 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 1. Add Subparagraph 7.4.2 to Paragraph 7.4: 7.4.2 The Architect may issue a written order authorizing such minor changes in the work without the Owner's or Contractor's signature. 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r� �1 1. Add Clause 9.3.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.1: Li 9.3.1.3 Until the Work is complete, the Owner will pay 90 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Fees shall be paid without any retainage at any time. T Upon Substantial Completion, the Owner may reduce the total amount retained to 5 percent of the Contract completed. Such retainage as then determined, will be continued until completion of all work and acceptance by the Owner. END OPTIUN�D 2. Add Clauses 9.3.3.1, 9.3.3.2 and 9.3.3.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.3: (`I .1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to observe provisions in the lien laws of the Ei state and furnish papers, when necessary, for the protection of the interests of the Owner. .2 The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, along with each request for payment (except the first), receipted bills or partial or final (as the case may be) lien releases y covering all material used and subcontracts performed in connection with this L Contract through the date of the current billing. .3 Should the Contractor fail to do this, request for payment by the Contractor will not be certified. Before final payment will be made, the Contractor shall furnish final waivers of lien, covering all materials used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract. Partial and final lien waivers should be shown in actual amounts. No waivers for $1.00 or such token amounts will be allowed. G DKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS a_s 1.08 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Paragraph 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT OPTION A 1. Add Clause 9.3.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.1: i 9.3.1.3 Until the Work is 50 percent complete, the Owner shall pay (blank) percent of the amount U due the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time the Work is 50 percent complete and thereafter, the Architect will authorize remaining partial payments to be paid in full. Fees shall be paid without any retainage at any time. If the progress of the Work and the manner of its completion do not remain satisfactory to the Owner or, if the surety withholds its consent, or for other good and sufficient reasons, the full Contract retainage may be reinstated. OPTION B 1. Add Clause 9.3.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.1: 9.3.1.3 Until final payment, the Owner shall pay (blank) percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. For each Work category shown to be 50 percent or more complete in the Application for Payment, the Architect will, without reduction of previous retainage, certify any remaining progress payments for each Work category to be paid in full. Fees shall be paid without any retainage at any time. If the progress of the Work and the manner of its completion do not remain satisfactory to the Owner or, if the surety withholds its consent, or for other good and sufficient reasons, the full Contract retainage may be reinstated. OPTION C 1. Add Clause 9.3.1.3 Subparagraph 9.3.1: to 9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay (blank) percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Fees shall be paid without any retainage at any time. OPTION'D. �1 1. Add Clause 9.3.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.1: Li 9.3.1.3 Until the Work is complete, the Owner will pay 90 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Fees shall be paid without any retainage at any time. T Upon Substantial Completion, the Owner may reduce the total amount retained to 5 percent of the Contract completed. Such retainage as then determined, will be continued until completion of all work and acceptance by the Owner. END OPTIUN�D 2. Add Clauses 9.3.3.1, 9.3.3.2 and 9.3.3.3 to Subparagraph 9.3.3: (`I .1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to observe provisions in the lien laws of the Ei state and furnish papers, when necessary, for the protection of the interests of the Owner. .2 The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, along with each request for payment (except the first), receipted bills or partial or final (as the case may be) lien releases y covering all material used and subcontracts performed in connection with this L Contract through the date of the current billing. .3 Should the Contractor fail to do this, request for payment by the Contractor will not be certified. Before final payment will be made, the Contractor shall furnish final waivers of lien, covering all materials used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract. Partial and final lien waivers should be shown in actual amounts. No waivers for $1.00 or such token amounts will be allowed. G DKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 M DOCUMENT 00800 U SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Paragraph 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 1. Add Clause 9.8.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.8.2: If the status of completion of the Work requires reinspection by the Architect prior to issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor's claims on initial inspection, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect's compensation amount for reinspection services from the final payment to the Contractor. Paragraph 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 1. Add Clause 9.10.1.1 to Subparagraph 9.10.1: .1 If the status of completion of the Work requires reinspection by the Architect prior to issuance of final Certificate for Payment due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor's written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect's compensation amount for reinspection services from the final payment to the Contractor. Delete Subparagraph 9.10.2 in its entirety and substitute: 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner, and (6), Construction Record Drawings as described in 9.10.2.1. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish at the Contractor's expense a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees. Construction Record Drawings: Significant changes incorporated in the Project construction which differ from the original Contract Drawings shall be indicated on reproducible sepias of Contract Drawings furnished by the Architect, and/or shop drawings as appropriate. Indicate on each drawing (Contract Drawings and shop drawings used for this purpose) in the space provided at the bottom of each drawing (those furnished by the Architect), the following: CONSTRUCTION CHANGES HAVE BEEN INCORPORATED ON THIS DRAWING or CONSTRUCTION CHANGES WERE NOT REQUIRED ON THIS DRAWING Date By (Project Manager) A survey, prepared and certified by a registered land surveyor locating the improvements on the land, describing and showing the land and all easements (by document number), encroachments and other encumbrances thereon (including without limitation all parking areas and means of access), and showing all setbacks and other physical matters affecting the title and use of the land and improvements, shall also be submitted. E rl Li i-� fl ;I 1 Li J 11 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 j L� 1.10 ? A. LJ C KKE0900 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Paragraph 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 1. In Subparagraph 10.1.2, delete the last 4 lines beginning with the words "or in accordance". Paragraph 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1. Add to Clause 10.2.1.3: The Contractor shall send notices, make necessary arrangements and provide services required for the care of gas mains, water pipes, steam pipes, sewer pipes, telephone and telegraph conduits, cables, and other equipment or property, assuming responsibility and paying costs for which the Owner may be liable. The Contractor shall consult the Public Service Companies' records to determine the locations and extent of utilities. Existing services shall be maintained without interruption unless new services are provided. 2. Add Clause 10.2.4.1 to Subparagraph 10.2.4: .1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS Paragraph 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 1. Add Clauses 11.1.1.8 and 11.1.1.9 to Subparagraph 11.1.1: .8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverage as applicable). Independent Contractors' Protective. Products and Completed Operations. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. Contractual including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. Owned, non -owned and hired motor vehicles. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. .9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims -made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2. 2. Add Clause 11.1.2.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.2: .1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law: Worker's Compensation a. State: Statutory b. Voluntary Compensation (by exempt entities): Same as State Workers Compensation C. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoremen, harbor work, Work at or outside U.S. Boundaries): Statutory d. Maritime: e. Employer's Liability: $ Each accident $ Disease, Policy limit $ Disease, Each employee f. Benefits required by union labor contracts: As applicable KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2. General Liability (including Premises -Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a. Bodily Injury: $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate b. Property Damage: $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate C. Products and Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of year(s) after final payment and the Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to the Owner on an annual basis during the aforementioned period. d. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: X (Explosion) C (Collapse) U (Underground) e. Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage): Bodily Injury: $ Each Occurrence Property Damage: $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate f. Personal Injury (with Employment Exclusion deleted, if applicable): $ Aggregate g. If the General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such General Aggregate shall be not less than $ . Policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this Project only: Yes No 3. Umbrella Excess Liability: $ Over primary insurance $ Retention 4. Automobile Liability (owned, non -owned, hired): Bodily Injury: $ Each Person $ Each Accident Property Damage: $ Each Occurrence 8 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3. Add to Subparagraph 11.1.3: If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable. 4. Add Clause 11.1.3.1 to 11.1.3: .1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of coverage required by Subparagraphs 11.1.1, 11. 1.2 and 11.1.3. The Contractor R—� shall furnish to the Owner copies of endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. B. Paragraph 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 1. Delete the last two sentences of Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. j t a. Bodily Injury: . $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate b. Property Damage: $ Each Occurrence $ Aggregate C. Paragraph 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE OPT�IUN A 1. Add to Clause 11.3.1.1: r. The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. 2. Add to Clause 11.3.1.3: This property insurance is written with a deductible of $ per occurrence with a deductible aggregate of $ OPTION B j I 1. Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.1 by deleting "Unless otherwise provided, the "the Owner" and substitute Contractor." 2. Add to Subparagraph 11.3.1: The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 3. Delete Clauses 11.3.1.2 and 11.3.1.3. 4. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.4. 5. Delete Subparagraph 11.3.6 and substitute: 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner 2 certified copies of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each containing those endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 6. Modify Subparagraph 11.3.7 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" at the end of the first sentence. ` KKE0900 9 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 7. Modify Subparagraph 11.3.8 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" as fiduciary; except that at the first reference to "Owner" in the first sentence, the word "this" should be substituted for "Owner's". 8. Modify Subparagraph 11.3.9 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. 9. Modify Subparagraph 11.3. 10 by substituting "Contractor" for "Owner" each time the latter word appears. END OPTION B D. Paragraph 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 1. Delete Paragraph 11.4 in its entirety: 1.11 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT j A. Add Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14: n 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Ij 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. rl 1�14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: .1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders. t 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. ri END OF DOCUMENT KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 U SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Document 00700 - General Conditions B. Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions C. Section 01300 - Submittals D. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services E. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout �J 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work described in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings and all work necessary to complete I I finish of the work as described or shown is to be executed in a thoroughly substantial and workmanlike manner. All work shall be done by persons who are thoroughly experienced in their particular trade or / crafts. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING OUT WORK A. A licensed surveyor shall be retained by the Contractor to locate all general reference points and establish building locations on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting these reference points. B. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall lay out their own work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements of buildings, utilities, and other work executed by them. They shall lay out all work from dimensions given on plans. They shall take measurements and verify dimensions of existing work, if any, that affect their work or to which their work is to be fitted. They alone shall be responsible for the correctness of all measurements and shall verify all grades, lines, levels, elevations, and dimensions shown prior to commencing work. C. Contractor and Subcontractors shall consult Drawings and plan work so that excavated material, new building materials, etc. are not placed where they will interfere with the work of others. E, nKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 u 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Project shall include all construction work shown on the Drawings and specified herein including, but not necessarily limited to general, mechanical, electrical, and fire protection work. B. The Project consists of the selective demolition and remodeling of an existing Bradlees Store, into a J 1 single -story Kohl's retail store located in the Shawsheen Village Shopping Center, at 350 Winthrop Ll Avenue, in North Andover, Massachusetts. C. The Project has a gross area of approximately 93, 600 s.f. D. The fire protection work is on a designibuild basis, and shall conform with the design criteria provided by Kohl's. E. Work performed by others under separate contract with Kohl's: 1. Flooring a. Porcelain tile, setting and grouting materials. b. Carpeting 2. Fixturing F. Definitions and Abbreviations (If shown on the Drawings) 1. Flooring Contractor: Under contract with General Contractor to furnish and install flooring unless otherwise specified. Kohl's will furnish carpet and porcelain tile (including setting and grouting materials) for installation. 2. Fixture Contractor: Under contract with Kohl's to furnish and install fixtures. 3. GCFGCI: General Contractor furnished, General Contractor installed. 4. TFFCI: Tenant (Kohl's) furnished, Fixture Contractor installed. 5. FCFFCI: Fixture Contractor furnished, Fixture Contractor installed. n L 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS A. Document 00700 - General Conditions B. Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions C. Section 01300 - Submittals D. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services E. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout �J 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work described in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings and all work necessary to complete I I finish of the work as described or shown is to be executed in a thoroughly substantial and workmanlike manner. All work shall be done by persons who are thoroughly experienced in their particular trade or / crafts. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING OUT WORK A. A licensed surveyor shall be retained by the Contractor to locate all general reference points and establish building locations on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting these reference points. B. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall lay out their own work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements of buildings, utilities, and other work executed by them. They shall lay out all work from dimensions given on plans. They shall take measurements and verify dimensions of existing work, if any, that affect their work or to which their work is to be fitted. They alone shall be responsible for the correctness of all measurements and shall verify all grades, lines, levels, elevations, and dimensions shown prior to commencing work. C. Contractor and Subcontractors shall consult Drawings and plan work so that excavated material, new building materials, etc. are not placed where they will interfere with the work of others. E, nKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 u SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK n 3.02 CLARIFICATION OF INFORMATION LJ1 A. Should it appear that the work intended to be described, or any of the matters relative thereto, are not In the event of a discrepancy between this Section and portions of the Mechanical or Electrical sufficiently detailed or explained on the Drawings, or in the Specifications consult the Architect for such further drawings or explanations as may be necessary, and conform to the same as far as they shall be consistent with original Drawings. In the event of any questions arising with respect to the true meaning outlined in this Section shall take precedence. of the Drawings and Specifications, reference shall be made to the Architect whose decision shall be final (�- and conclusive. In no case shall any work proceed in uncertainty.. B. is intention n It the of the Specification and the Drawings to provide a job complete in every respect. The contractor(s), insofar as the quality and the progress of the work are concerned. Contractor and Subcontractors are to be responsible for this result and to turn over the Project in C. complete operating condition regardless of whether the Drawings and Specifications cover every individual item in minute detail. C. In the inconsistency between Drawings schedule, all items pertinent to their contract including conduits, outlets, sleeves, boxes and other case of an and Specifications or within either Document not �J clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance {� with the Architect's interpretation. sleeves penetrating construction work shall be coordinated with the Contractor. D. Certain schedules of materials, diagrams of mains and risers accompany the Drawings in order to F accommodate the Contractor and Subcontractors and to avoid a confusing amount of lettering on the 0 Drawings. They are intended to be used in conjunction with the Drawings and Specifications, but are not trade may arrange to have boxes or other forms set at locations where piping or other material is to pass to be interpreted in any manner as modifying or restricting such Drawings or the Specifications. Schedules of materials or room finishes are furnished as a convenience only, and there is no guarantee t that any schedule includes all of the work or materials required by the Drawings and Specifications. L, 3.03 CORRELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. In the event of a discrepancy between this Section and portions of the Mechanical or Electrical Specifications relative to responsibilities in the correlation of the work of various trades, conditions outlined in this Section shall take precedence. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the entire work of the Project including the work of the design/build n contractor(s), insofar as the quality and the progress of the work are concerned. C. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall be required to furnish and install in accordance with the progress schedule, all items pertinent to their contract including conduits, outlets, sleeves, boxes and other materials and equipment to be built into work performed or to be performed by others. Location of all {� sleeves penetrating construction work shall be coordinated with the Contractor. D. In the event timely delivery of sleeves or other materials cannot be made and to avoid delay, affected trade may arrange to have boxes or other forms set at locations where piping or other material is to pass through or into slabs, walls or other work. Upon subsequent installation of sleeve or other material, the t trade requiring same shall arrange to fill around them with materials as required by Contract. Labor costs only, thus resulting from filling about sleeves, shall be borne by trade responsible for installation of sleeves or other materials at no extra cost to Owner. E. All curbs or blocking required for mechanical equipment, hatches, conduit passing through a roof shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. All base flashing, metal cap, or counter flashing required by ducts, pipes or conduits passing through a roof shall be furnished and installed by trade responsible for u same. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for making weathertight all joints about pipe sleeves, conduits and such in exterior walls, but it shall be the responsibility of the trade who provides the sleeve to make weathertight the joint within the sleeve, between the sleeve (or box) and material or item therein contained. G. Concrete bases or curbs required for mechanical, electrical or air conditioning equipment are included in t architectural specifications. All anchor bolts, templates and such shall be furnished by the trade j supplying the equipment. J H. The Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Details are drawn to scale but are not generally dimensioned. The Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall verify all dimensions shown on the Architectural Drawings by actual measurement on the job. Subcontractors shall verify the equipment to be furnished under their requirements with other trades, or refer the matter to the Contractor for decision. Dimensions on Drawings and notes indicating dimensions shall be strictly complied with. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. The Architect reserves the right to make slight changes in the piping runs, ductwork or location of equipment without additional cost to the Owner. Changes may be necessary due to unforeseen structural interference or interference of other piping and equipment. I. Items noted "N.I.C." (Not In Contract), "By Owner", or "Existing" shall not be included in contract, but provision shall be made by respective trades to allow installation of items noted. All finishes of floors, bases, wainscots, walls and ceiling behind, under and/or over these items shall be included in the Contract unless otherwise noted. KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 3.04 MEASUREMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE OF PRECEDING WORK �j A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall verify all measurements of the building for their particular class of work and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. B. No extra charges or compensation will be allowed on account of the difference between actual t -j dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. Before starting any operation, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall examine work performed by others to which their work adjoins or is applied and will report to the Architect conditions that will prevent satisfactory accomplishment of the Contract. C. All defects in surfaces or construction prepared by one trade to receive work by other trades shall be reported in writing to Architect, who shall instigate remedial action on such defects. Commencement of work by a trade on a surface or construction shall imply acceptance of such surface or construction. D. Failure to notify the Architect of deficiencies or faults in preceding work will constitute acceptance thereof and waiver of any claim of its unsuitability. r 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK A. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of their work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of others shown upon, or reasonably implied by Drawings and Specifications for the completed structure, and shall make good after them as Architect may direct. Costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by those responsible therefor. Do not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work and do not cut or alter the work of others without the consent of Architect. Leave all necessary holes in walls, chases etc. required for any of the mechanical work or electrical work, provided these are accurately located before the execution of the work by the appropriate Subcontractor. Cutting required by Subcontractors and not shown on the general plans shall be done by them. Patching and repairing of the finished work made necessary by cutting in this Contract shall be done by the Contractor and paid for by the Subcontractor requiring such work. Damage to the structural members of the building by the Subcontractor shall be made good at the Subcontractor's expense. The Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Architect before cutting, drilling or driving anchors into columns or post tensioned slabs. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall at all times protect all work from damage by rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains, or sewers, and all other water that may or could be admitted to the Work. Provide all pumps, other equipment and closers to provide this protection, and do all pumping necessary to keep the Work free of water. B. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for closing openings in walls or roof made by them, which would admit water to the building. C. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall provide protection of the work against weather, rain, wind, storms, frost, cold, or heat so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury and damage. D. All work on the roof shall be done over planking or other substantial protection to spread construction L loads and to isolate traffic from the roof surface. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall provide their own protection when working on the roof. El 1 1 KKE0900 END OF SECTION KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS I� L� 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Abbreviations and symbols used on the Drawings and in the Specifications can be grouped in 3 basic categories: 1. Abbreviations of reference standards. 2. Abbreviations of words and phrases. 3. Symbols. J , 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS OF REFERENCE STANDARDS A. When abbreviations of reference standards appear on the Drawings, or in the Specifications, they shall 1 represent technical societies, institutions, associations, governmental agencies and publications in accordance with the following list: AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACRI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ADC Air Diffusion Council AFI Air Filter Institute AGA American Gas Association AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association A.I.A. American Institute of Architects AIA American Insurance Association AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee L AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASA American Standards Association ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ATI Asphalt Tile Institute AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA AWPB American Wood Preservers Association American Wood Preservers Bureau AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America BRI Building Research Institute CABRA Copper and Brass Research Association CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute U CS U.S. Commercial Standards CTI Cooling Tower Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FHA Federal Housing Administration KKE0900 1 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS na FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division, Association of Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies FMIA Factory Mutual Insurance Agency FPL Forest Products Laboratory FS Federal Specifications u FSIWA Federation of Sewage and Industrial Waste Associations FTI Facing Tile Institute GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America i GTA Glass Tempering Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association IBRM Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society MAC Masonry Advisory Council MIA Marble Institute of America ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturers LJ NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA Pamphlet No. 70) Li NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. n NFC National Fire Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFPA National Forest Products Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NHPMA Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association NPA National Particleboard Association NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSC National Safety Council NSF National Sanitation Foundation %—' NSSEA National School Supplies and Equipment Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. F1 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association I OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration tJ PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc. PS Product Standard, U.S. Dept. of Commerce RIS Redwood Inspection Service RTI Resilient Tile Institute FIT SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SBC State Building Code SBI Steel Boiler Institute SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SMFMA Sprayed Mineral Fiber Manufacturers Association, Inc. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Lf SPR Simplified Practice Recommendations, U.S. Dept. of Commerce SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SWFPA Structural Wood Fiber Products Association SWI Sealant and Waterproofers Institute TCA Tile Council of America TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturing Association KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association TPI Truss Plate Institute UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code USCGS U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS OF WORDS AND PHRASES A. Abbreviations of words and phrases applicable to this Project; other than listed above for reference standards, shall be as shown on the Drawings. 1.04 SYMBOLS A. Symbols representing construction materials and equipment applicable to this Project shall be as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION d 3 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C CPART 1 - GENERAL C c c C Q if E, C C SECTION 01220 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project meetings, including, but not limited to: 1. Construction Conferences a. Predemolition b.. Preinstallation/preapplication 2. Progress meetings 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02070 - Selective Demolition B. Section 07530 - Elastic Sheet Roofing C. Section 09893 - Silicone -Emulsion Masonry Coating System 1.03 CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES Schedule and administer predemolition/preinstallation/preapplication conferences at the Project site prior to each construction activity which requires coordination with other construction and are specifically identified in the Specifications. Conduct other similar meetings at the Contractor's discretion. Attendees: As specifically identified in the Specification Sections identified in Article 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS; others as requested by the Contractor. I . Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each predemolition/preinstallation/preapplication conference. 2. Record significant discussions, and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. 3. Do not proceed with the demolition/installation/application if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer monthly construction progress meetings throughout progress of Work. B. Make physical arrangements, prepare agenda, and distribute notice of each meeting to participants, and to Architect/Engineer, 4 days in advance of meeting date. C. Preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within 3 days after meeting to participants, to entities affected by decisions at meetings, with 2 copies to Architect/Engineer. D. Location of Meetings: Contractor's field office. E. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, Subcontractors, and suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Owner, Architect/Engineer, professional consultants may attend as appropriate. F. Minimum Agenda 1. Approval of minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used n KKE0301 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION SECTION 01220 PROJECT MEETINGS 2 KKE0301 KOHL' S/01-04-4863-01 C C PAR T 1 -GENERAL n 1.01., SUMMARY �-' A. B. r-, C. SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog number or by reference to recognized industry standards. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review by the Architect and Kohl's. Design data for design/build portions of the Work shall be submitted to Kohl's and the Architect for NA review. 1., The Architect will not approve design data for design/build portions of the Work including Owner (tenant) fixtures, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and fire protection, work. D. E. 0 El C Design data for design/build fire protection shall also be submitted to Kohl's insurance carrier. Make all submittals of shop drawings, samples, requests for substitution, and other similar items, in strict accordance with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. Contractor agrees that shop drawings submittals processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept; that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Architect, the Contract Documents shall control and be followed. RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS Contractual Requirements for Submittals: General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Individual Submittals Required: Pertinent Sections of these Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Preparation 1. Prepared by qualified detailer. 2. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Scale Required 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the items, their method of connection to the Work and the adjacent surfaces or materials. C. Type of Prints Required 1. Submit all shop drawings in the form of one sepia transparen blackline prints of each sheet. Blueprint submittals withou acceptable. ---- 2. Information submitted in a size that is reproducible b} be submitted in sepia form. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE A. Preparation 1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: a. Delete information which is not applicable to pr( b. Supplement standard information to provide add, 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, sche and other standard descriptive data. a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent mate b. Show dimension and clearances required. C. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 0 KKE0900 F. G. n 1.02 A. B. f`t C. 0 El C Design data for design/build fire protection shall also be submitted to Kohl's insurance carrier. Make all submittals of shop drawings, samples, requests for substitution, and other similar items, in strict accordance with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. Contractor agrees that shop drawings submittals processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept; that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Architect, the Contract Documents shall control and be followed. RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS Contractual Requirements for Submittals: General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Individual Submittals Required: Pertinent Sections of these Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Preparation 1. Prepared by qualified detailer. 2. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Scale Required 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the items, their method of connection to the Work and the adjacent surfaces or materials. C. Type of Prints Required 1. Submit all shop drawings in the form of one sepia transparen blackline prints of each sheet. Blueprint submittals withou acceptable. ---- 2. Information submitted in a size that is reproducible b} be submitted in sepia form. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE A. Preparation 1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: a. Delete information which is not applicable to pr( b. Supplement standard information to provide add, 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, sche and other standard descriptive data. a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent mate b. Show dimension and clearances required. C. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 0 KKE0900 n SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS nl d. Show wiring diagrams and controls where applicable. B. Number of Copies Required J� 1. Submit the number of copies which are required to be returned plus 2 copies which will be retained by the Architect. 2. Where copies are required for inclusion in closeout documents, submit these in addition to the requirements specified above. f1 2.03 SAMPLES A. Preparation I . Office samples sized to clearly illustrate: a. Functional characteristics of product or materials, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. b. Full range of color samples, except when specific color(s) are specified. n 2. Field samples and mock-ups, when shown on the Drawings or specified in a particular Section: 1_J a. Erect at Project site at location acceptable to Architect. b. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finished work. C. Remove as directed, unless specific Section allows incorporation in the Work after acceptance. B. Accuracy of Sample j- y 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, all samples shall be of the precise article L J proposed to be furnished. C. Number of Samples Required 1. Submit all samples in the quantity which is required to be returned plus one which will be retained by the Architect. 2. After review, approved samples may be used in construction of Project. 2.04 COLORS A. General 1. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to the Architect for his review and selection. B. Comparative Analysis 1. Unless all available colors and patterns have identical costs, identical performance characteristics, and are identically suited to the installation, completely describe the relative costs and capabilities of each. 2.05 SUBSTITUTIONS ` A. Architect's Approval Required 1. The Contract is based on the materials, equipment, and methods described in the Contract Documents. E 2. The Architect will consider proposals for substitutions of materials, equipment, and methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required by the Architect to evaluate the proposed substitution. 3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this Work by the Architect. B. Approvals 1. Where the phrase "Approved Substitution", "Equal Approved" or similar verbage occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material, equipment or methods will be approved as equal by the Architect unless the item has been specifically approved for this Work by the Architect. n \The decision of the Architect shall be final. J `ability of Specified Items Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available to time for installation during n \ierly and timely progress of the Work. } KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 �'f U SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 2. In the events specified item or items will not be so available so notify the Architect prior to receipt p � fy P P of bids. 3. Costs of delays because of nonavailability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by the Contractor, shall be the responsibility of that Contractor. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS A. Inspections and Test Reports 1. Classify each as either "shop drawing" or "product data" depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for this Project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at r point of production; process accordingly. I� L , B. Warranties 1. In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies for the Architect's use plus additional copies where required for maintenance manuals. 2.07 PROJECT DESIGN/BUILD SUBMITTALS t A. Preparation 1. Prepare complete and accurate drawings and accompanying data including but not limited to: a. Plans b. Details C. Schedules 2. Drawings shall be signed by a registered engineer, registered in the state in which the Project is located. NO EXCEPTIONS. C 10 r El C B. Scale Required 1. Plans and details shall be drawn to scales compatible with the Architectural Drawings for ease in coordination. C. Types of Prints Required 1. Submit drawings and accompanying data in the form of one sepia transparency of each sheet plus 2 blueline or blackline prints of each sheet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Prior to submittal for Architect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material, including the following procedures: a. Determine and verify all field dimensions and conditions, catalog numbers, and similar data. b. Coordinate as required with all trades and with all public agencies involved. C. Secure all necessary approvals from public agencies and others; signify by stamp or other means that all required approvals have been obtained. d. Clearly indicate all deviations from the Contract Documents. B. Grouping of Submittals 1. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items. 2. The Architect may reject partial submittals as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.02 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled installation to allow sufficient time for reviews, securing necessary approvals, possible revision and resubmittal, placing orders, and securing delivery. 2. In scheduling, allow at least 8 full working days for the Architect's review following his receipt of the submittal. 11 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS !I B. Delays Li 1. Costs of delays occasioned by tardiness of submittals by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of that Contractor. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS `► A. General 1. Consecutively number all submittals. 2. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal, in duplicate, showing the date of transmittal, Specifications Section or Drawing Number to which the submittal pertains, brief description of the material submitted, notification of deviations from Contract and the company name of the originator of the submittal. B. Resubmittals 1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal; indicate by reference to previous submittal that this is a resubmittal. 3.04 PROCESSING OF PROJECT DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical and Fire Protection Subcontractors shall prepare their design data and r� then transmit it to the Contractor. Li B. Upon receipt of these submittals, the Contractor shall stamp, sign and transmit them as follows: 1. Typically send sepia and one blueline (or blackline) print to Kohl's and one blueline (or blackline) print to the Architect. ri 2. In addition to the above, send one sepia of Fire Protection design data to Kohl's insurance carrier at the following address: Industrial Risk Insurers n C. Processing of design/build shop drawings is specified in Article 3.05. !� 3.05 PROCESSING OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Each Subcontractor shall prepare, review and approve each submittal and then transmit it to the U Contractor. B. Upon receipt of a submittal from a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall review submittal and proceed as h i follows: y 1. If submittal is complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents, he will stamp, sign and transmit it to the Architect and Kohl's. 2. In the case of Structural shop drawings or product data, the Contractor, following his review, t1 I stamping and signing, shall transmit the submittal directly to the Consultant and send a copy of the letter of transmittal to the Architect. LJ 3. If the submittal is incomplete or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall stamp the information "REJECTED" and return it to the Subcontractor for resubmission. The Contractor shall send a copy of the letter of transmittal to the Architect. Dl 4. In the case of design/build fixture, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and fire protection shop drawings, the Contractor shall proceed as specified above except that these shop drawings shall be for the Architect's information only and no formal approval is required by the Architect. n a. The burden of approval is upon the Contractor. 1 b. The Architect may respond to design issues, material or product selection at his discretion. 0 C. Upon receipt of a submittal from the Contractor, the Architect shall review, stamp, mark, initial, and date !� each submittal as follows: 1. "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN": This indicates that the submittal meets Contract Document u requirements, the design intent, and the Architect has no objections to any of the information included with the submittal. The submittal can be distributed by the Contractor. 2. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED": This indicates that the is in h i submittal essentially acceptable y terms of Project requirements and design intent, but some minor aspect is incorrect, the Architect has indicated a color or finish selection, or other comments have been added to the submittal. Resubmittal is not necessary; the submittal can be distributed and utilized as is. "AMEND 3. AND RESUBMIT": This indicates that major corrections are required to the submittal, it may also indicate that a few changes of major significance need to be made. In this case, the fri LJ submittal shall be returned to the Subcontractor through the Contractor. The Subcontractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. u KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 17 u SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 4. "REJECTED - SEE REMARKS": This indicates that the submittal is unacceptable. Reasons may include unacceptable manufacturer, incorrect model or product, or incomplete submittal as defined herein. The Architect shall note the reason for rejection and the submittal shall be LI returned to the Subcontractor through the Contractor. The Subcontractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. (�l D. Upon receipt of a submittal from the Contractor, the Consultant shall review and forward each submittal { as follows: 1. If the submittal is acceptable, the Consultant shall stamp, sign, date, and forward it to the Architect for his review as described in Paragraph 3.04.C. Ell 2. If major corrections are required or the submittal is unacceptable, the Consultant shall indicate the objections, return the submittal to the Subcontractor through the Contractor, and send a copy of the submittal to the Architect so that he is aware of the reasons for the Consultant's actions. The Subcontractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. E. When a submittal is returned by the Architect and resubmittal is not required the Contractor shall: 1. Review submittal for Architect's/Consultant's comments and take appropriate action indicated. 2. Complete field verifications not possible during earlier review described in Paragraph 3.01.A. 3. Initial and date submittal again to verify his acceptance and/or resolution of Architect's/Consultant's comments. 4. Distribute submittal as specified in Article 3.06. 3.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Shop Drawings shall be reproduced by the Contractor from the final, processed submittal bearing the Architect's review stamp, or in the case of design/build shop drawings, the Contractor's review stamp. B. The Contractor shall distribute reproductions of shop drawings to the following: 1. Subcontractor who prepared submittal (verify number of copies required) 2. Job site file 3. Other affected Subcontractors 4. Suppliers or fabricators L C. The Contractor shall retain the processed shop drawings for the record. D. Distribute samples and copies of product data which carry the Architect's review stamp as directed by the Architect. E3.07 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK A. The manufacture or construction of any pieces of equipment, device, or other item for which shop drawings, product data, or samples are required to be furnished, shall not commence prior to complete Lprocessing of the appropriate submittal. B. The Contractor or any Subcontractor who proceeds without a submittal bearing the Architect's stamp, or in the case of design/build submittals, the Contractor's review stamp, does so at his own risk. Architect shall maintain the right to reject work or materials provided without proper prior submittal. END OF SECTION C E, �1 U KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C L C SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS KKE SUBMITTAL REVIEW STAMP PROJECT SHOP DRAWING REVIEW NO. REVIEW FOR COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. REVIEW CONDUCTED PER AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AND PROJECT MANUAL SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN ❑ d MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED ❑ AMEND & RESUBMIT ❑ REJECTED — SEE MARKS ❑ n L C r L C El r L a DATE KORSUNSKY KRANK ERICKSON ARCHITECTS, INC. Explanation of terminology used on KKE review stamp: 1. "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN": This indicates that the submittal meets Contract Document requirements, the design intent, and the Architect has no objections to any of the information included with the submittal. The submittal can be distributed by the Contractor. 2. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" : This indicates that the submittal is essentially acceptable in terms of Project requirements and design intent, but some minor aspect is incorrect, the Architect has indicated a color or finish selection, or other comments have been added to the submittal. Resubmittal is not necessary; the submittal can be distributed and utilized as is. 3. "AMEND AND RESUBMIT": This indicates that major corrections are required to the submittal; it may also indicate that a few changes of major significance need to be made. In this case, the submittal shall be returned to the Subcontractor through the Contractor. The Subcontractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. 4. "REJECTED - SEE REMARKS": This indicates that the submittal is unacceptable. Reasons may include unacceptable manufacturer, incorrect model or product, or incomplete submittal as defined herein. The Architect shall note the reason for rejection and the submittal shall be returned to the Subcontractor through the Contractor. The Subcontractor shall correct and resubmit as specified herein. 6 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C C C 11 r C C C C C SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the service of an Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to the Architect to perform specified services and testing. 1. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Related Requirements in Other Documents of the Project Manual: 1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract. C. Related Requirements Specified in Other Sections: 1. Other Division 1 Sections - General Requirements.. 2. Section 02220 - Structure Excavation and Trenching. 3. Section 02523 - Exterior Concrete Flatwork, Curbs and Gutters. 4. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 5. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. 6. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. 7. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 8. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329 -95c, "Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or of Materials Used in Construction". C. Meet basic requirements of ASTM D3740-96, "Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction". D. Authorized to operate in the State in which the project is located. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during tie most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. F. Testing Equipment I . Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards. b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor. Provide qualified personnel after due notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities of deficiencies of work or products. D. Promptly submit 5 copies of written report of each test and inspection to Architect. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. CI KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of test and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. E. Perform additional tests as required by Architect, or Owner. 3.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or expand on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 3.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and to manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of product test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Pay for additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with Contract Documents. I. Pay for additional inspections, sampling and testing to verify the adequacy of work performed without prior notice, without proper supervision, and when contrary to standard construction practices. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Ell El U n iJ E n J DI iJ F1 U ;I iJ u n J ,1. J 11 11 LJ Ila El PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary facilities and utilities required for the execution of the Work. B. From start of construction, Owner will provide temporary utilities and facilities including: heat, light, ventilation, electricity, toilets, and water as may be required to carry out work specified. The Owner will not however, extend these utilities and facilities beyond their existing locations at the start of L j construction, and such extensions and other upgrades in service required to perform the Work shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor. C. Unless otherwise specified herein, temporary facilities not listed above shall be provided, maintained and paid for by the Contractor and on completion of the Project the Contractor shall remove these temporary facilities from the premises. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS �j A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1. Contractor may use Owner's toilet facilities adjacent to construction area, for use of all Contractor's mechanics at site. Maintain Owner's toilet facilities in continuously clean and sanitary condition. Coordinate use with Owner. j 1 2. If Owner's forced air type permanent heating system is used during construction, replace all filters, +{- and vacuum all return air ducts clean prior to Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 TEMPORARY OFFICE C 11 A. The Contractor shall establish a temporary office within the existing building for the safekeeping of drawings, records and supplies. This office shall be for the use of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. Coordinate location of office with Owner. B. Telephone: In the temporary office, the Contractor shall provide and maintain a telephone. This telephone shall be provided until the Work is completed. It shall be for the use of individuals performing all or any portion of the Work and the Architect/Owner. All long distance calls shall be paid for by the caller. C. At the conclusion of the Work, rooms and spaces used as a temporary office shall be cleaned and restored to their condition at the start of occupation, except those which are part of the remodeling. 2.03 TEMPORARY ACCESS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating, providing and maintaining all temporary access to the construction site where such access will not interfere with the progress of the Work or the Owner's normal operations. Verify location with Owner. The temporary access shall be adequate to sustain the loads to be carried and shall be maintained in a useable condition at all times. 2.04 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, barricades, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, runways, derricks, chutes and the like, as required for proper execution of the Work. Such apparatus, equipment and construction shall be as required by all State and local laws applicable thereto. B. Install a temporary construction fence with lockable gates, and locked or otherwise secured barricades at all points of access to the Work. C. Maintain existing means of egress from the building(s) throughout the construction period. Verify methods with the local Building Official. EKKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2.07 SIGNS JA. No signs, billboards or other advertisements shall be erected on the premises without the permission and approval of the Architect. B. The Contractor shall erect Architect's sign where directed and return to Architect at completion of project. C. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary signs required for the performance of the Work such as Office", "Men", "Women", "Danger", "High Voltage", etc. 2.08 FIRST AID FACILITIES U A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate first aid facilities and clearly visible signage identifying location of said facilities. 1 2.09 TEMPORARY CONTROLS �--� A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the following protection/control: 1. Site access. SECTION 01500 lJ 3. Dust control. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 4. Protection of adjacent property. n i TEMPORARY CONTROLS 2.05 TEMPORARY STORAGE 7. Security. A. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall provide storage sheds as their needs may require located n PART 3 - EXECUTION within the temporary construction fence. Subcontractors shall coordinate the location of their sheds with "LJ, the Contractor. All temporary structures shall be removed before final acceptance of the Work. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment, or if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use "hard -service" cords where exposed to LJ abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide ' exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. 2.07 SIGNS JA. No signs, billboards or other advertisements shall be erected on the premises without the permission and approval of the Architect. B. The Contractor shall erect Architect's sign where directed and return to Architect at completion of project. C. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary signs required for the performance of the Work such as Office", "Men", "Women", "Danger", "High Voltage", etc. 2.08 FIRST AID FACILITIES U A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate first aid facilities and clearly visible signage identifying location of said facilities. 1 2.09 TEMPORARY CONTROLS �--� A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the following protection/control: 1. Site access. 2. Fire protection. lJ 3. Dust control. 4. Protection of adjacent property. n i 5. Fences and barricades. 6. Traffic/parking control. 7. Security. 8. Site safety. PART 3 - EXECUTION u Not Used END OF SECTION J KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 I C C El El C C C P C SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and administrative procedures for closing out of the Work. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING A. Contractor shall at the time of Substantial Completion of the Project conduct final inspection of sight - exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of accessible concealed spaces. 1. Remove paint, putty and labels from all glass and wash and polish all glass surfaces. 2. Replace, at Contractor's own expense, all damaged, broken and scratched glass. 3. Remove all marks, stains, soil or dirt from all painted, tiled or decorated work. 4. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. 5. Clean all fixtures and equipment and restore to original finish. 6. Clean and polish all hardware. 7. When space in the building is used as a shop, storage area, etc., the Contractor will be held responsible -for repairs, patching, and cleaning arising from such use. 8. Thoroughly clean all plumbing fixtures, removing all plaster, paint, stickers, rust stains, and other foreign matter or discoloration, leaving every part in an acceptable condition and ready for use. 9. Thoroughly clean all heating and related equipment, leaving every part in a first class condition. 10. Clean all surfaces of all coils, fan housing, fan wheels, and clean or replace air filters, leaving the installation in first class condition. 11. Wash and otherwise clean lighting fixtures. B. Cleaning Standards: The standard of acceptability of cleaning operations shall be equivalent to a professional janitorial cleaning service. 1. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning. C. Refer to the individual specifications sections for additional cleaning requirements for the work specified. 3.02 FINAL INSPECTION A. Submit written certification to the Architect that Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. Architect will make inspection with reasonable promptness. If Work is incomplete or defective, Architect will notify Contractor to remedy deficiencies. C. Upon renotification of completion, Architect will reinspect Work and, when acceptable, issue Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.03 MANUALS A. Manuals: Where manuals are required to be submitted covering items included in this Work, prepare all such manuals in durable plastic binders approximately 8 1/2" by 11" in size and with at least the following: 1. Identification on, or readable through, the front cover stating the general nature of the manual; 2. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual furnishing immediate information as to location in the manual of all emergency data regarding the installation; 3. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved; 4. Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost, and name and address of nearest vendor of parts; 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued; 6. Copy of the final Shop Drawings with all data concerning all changes made during construction. C' KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT B. Extraneous Data �1 1. Where contents of manuals include manufacturer's catalog pages, clearly indicate the precise items included in this installation and delete or otherwise clearly indicate all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. C. Number of Copies Required 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect or stipulated in the pertinent Section of n these Specifications, deliver one copy of the Manual to the Owner and one copy to the Architect. I. I 3.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. When the Architect has determined that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit his final Application for Payment to U the Architect together with the following: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706. n 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A. fi,Jf 3. Contractor's lien waiver in the full amount of the Contract Sum. 4. Lien waivers from all Subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and major material suppliers who have furnished material for the work under contract with the Contractor or a Subcontractor. The lien n waivers shall be in the full amount of the contract involved. 5. Consent of surety to final payment on Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, AIA Li Document G707. 6. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: a. Certificates of Inspection from all required agencies and departments. DI b. Certificate of Occupancy. 7. Construction Record Drawings. 8. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel 9. Warranties and Bonds. 2 END OF SECTION ?-I A rl LJ F) iJ n u' LJ n LJ KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C Yn U C C C U Q n G C 0 C 0 c SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the existing building or structure indicated on the Drawings to be removed, and necessary to accommodate new construction B. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations 1.02 RELATED DIVISIONS A. Division 15 - Mechanical: For demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. B. Division 16 - Electrical: For demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A10.6-1990, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 241-1996, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations C. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI) I . RFCI-WP-88 (Revised 1990), Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings (with Addendum; undated) 1.05 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and be removed from Project site. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit thefollowing to the Contractor prior to performing �+— 14;n"- 1. Two copies of the proposed demolition work provii removal of materials; 2. Permit for demolition work, and; 3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experience( material and extent to that indicated for this Proj( B. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of gover demolition work, including the Environmental Prt C. Perform the demolition work in accordance with E D. Predemolition Conference. Prior to beginning dem representative of the demolition firm, and other em and agreements and furnish copy to each participan 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to con', and procedures related to selective demolition. 1 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction 2. Review structural load limitations of existing 3. Review and finalize selective demolition sche personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to 4. Review requirements of work performed by ot. selective demolition operations. KKE0101 C i SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION B. Adjacent businesses will remain open and in operation during normal business hours. The Contractor 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS operations until schedule has been reviewed and approved by the landlord and the Contractor. A. Existing Conditions U 1. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of areas and structures to be demolished. a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes, will be maintained by i-1 Owner as far as practical. 1 U 2. Access: Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used ! i Li facilities. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without Lid written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Hazardous Materials It is hazardous be n a. not expected that materials will encountered in the Work. I b. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; r immediately notify Owner and Architect for direction. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. n B. Environmental Requirements I . Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. n 2. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to control dust and dirt mi the air. �J 3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and schedule demolition operations and new general construction work with the Contractor. B. Adjacent businesses will remain open and in operation during normal business hours. The Contractor will review the proposed demolition schedule with the landlord. Do NOT proceed with demolition operations until schedule has been reviewed and approved by the landlord and the Contractor. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours advance notice of unavoidable interruptions in existing utilities service and other services, a part of the adjacent businesses' normal operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used n PART 3 - EXECUTION ! i Li 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the selective demolition work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Notify the Contractor and the Architect immediately upon encountering unexpected concealed r conditions and, except in an emergency, before the encountered conditions are disturbed. B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective n demolition required. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or �J design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. necessary, and prior to removal, engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to *mine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of \tion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. erform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition �vvit ies. KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3.02 PREPARATION y� A. Existing Utilities �L}l 1. Protect and maintain existing utility lines which are to remain in service, in a manner to avoid 1. Location of the fire alarm box and interruption of these lines. without delay in the event of fire. a. If uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are encountered during 2. Use of fire extinguishing equipmem demolition, consult Engineer immediately for procedural instructions. Cooperate with 3. Maintenance of fire protection equil. Owner, and public and private utility companies in keeping services and facilities in so that it will be available for immed operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. b. If interruption of utilities is unavoidable, obtain written authorization of the utility owner L. Protect construction indicated to remain agai, prior to commencement of Work. Provide temporary services during interruptions to permitted by Architect, items may be remove o existing utilities as acceptable to the utility owner. demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in thei► 2. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, complete, at no additional cost to Owner. f removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. B. Ensure minimum interference with road, streets, driveways, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. Do not A. General close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways without permission from authorities having Cjurisdiction. Maintain regular traffic flow around the site unless otherwise directed. Drawings represent specific demolition to C. Provide temporary barricades, canopies, fences, railings, platforms, lights, sheds, and similar temporary 2. Remove existing construction only, which construction, required to protect the workmen and others from injury due to the demolition work. Provide free and safe passage of persons to and from buildings and facilities which are to remain. D. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. E. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. F. Cover and protect furnishings and equipment that have not been removed. G. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. C H. Provide dust -tight partitions between areas where demolition work is being performed and areas which are finished or in use. I. Provide fully enclosed waste chutes with tight joints. Support multi-level chutes, if any, at each floor. Provide water spray or fully enclose the discharge end to prevent noticeable dust dispersal. J. Provide and maintain temporary shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpera,' movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required durine K. Maintain fire protection facilities in servi- the following: 1. Location of the fire alarm box and without delay in the event of fire. 2. Use of fire extinguishing equipmem 3. Maintenance of fire protection equil. so that it will be available for immed L. Protect construction indicated to remain agai, permitted by Architect, items may be remove o demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in thei► complete, at no additional cost to Owner. f 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION n C Ly � A. General 1. Comply with the Drawings, which clearly y�� �• a� Drawings represent specific demolition to 2. Remove existing construction only, which EKKE0101 w X B. Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner's requirements for using and protecting elevators and stairs, if t J any, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. n 1. Do not remove doors and windows for the purpose of removing debris, without written permission J from the Owner. 2. Keep stairways and fire escapes unobstructed and available for use at all times. C. Miscellaneous f7 1. Mass Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to v remain and at regular intervals, using power -driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 2. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 19 3. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, v using power -driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. 4. Glass and Glazing: Remove individual lites without breaking unless unavoidable. 5. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations n in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. ; y a. After floor coverings are removed, thoroughly remove adhesives by mechanical process or a combination of mechanical and chemical processes such that when completed, floors are ready to receive new floor coverings whether scheduled or not. b. Chemical process if used, shall not interfere with subsequent bond of adhesives used for new floor coverings. I DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS n General: Remove materials resulting from the demolition work from the site in such a manner as to avoid creating a nuisance. Dispose of materials from the site on a daily basis at no additional cost to the Owner. Take possession of salvageable material and equipment and promptly remove from the site unless otherwise designated herein or shown on the Drawings to be reinstalled or retained by the Owner "kurning: Do not burn demolished materials. \nosal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. AND CLEANING n E the Owner, promptly repair damage to property of the Owner which is to remain in use and cilities resulting from demolition operations. L* and repair work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of �Ived. �rk shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable and where work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. n J 4 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 LJ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ID 3.m demolition i When de o involves multiple levels, proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. il—I 4. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 5. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. LJ 6. Remove each item completely including means of attachment. Remove bolts, screws, nails, clips, other fasteners, mastics and adhesives, blocking, furring, framing, and grounds. f-1 7. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, I i such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. n 8. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. r l 9. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 10. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 11. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. r B. Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner's requirements for using and protecting elevators and stairs, if t J any, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. n 1. Do not remove doors and windows for the purpose of removing debris, without written permission J from the Owner. 2. Keep stairways and fire escapes unobstructed and available for use at all times. C. Miscellaneous f7 1. Mass Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to v remain and at regular intervals, using power -driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. 2. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 19 3. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, v using power -driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. 4. Glass and Glazing: Remove individual lites without breaking unless unavoidable. 5. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations n in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. ; y a. After floor coverings are removed, thoroughly remove adhesives by mechanical process or a combination of mechanical and chemical processes such that when completed, floors are ready to receive new floor coverings whether scheduled or not. b. Chemical process if used, shall not interfere with subsequent bond of adhesives used for new floor coverings. I DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS n General: Remove materials resulting from the demolition work from the site in such a manner as to avoid creating a nuisance. Dispose of materials from the site on a daily basis at no additional cost to the Owner. Take possession of salvageable material and equipment and promptly remove from the site unless otherwise designated herein or shown on the Drawings to be reinstalled or retained by the Owner "kurning: Do not burn demolished materials. \nosal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. AND CLEANING n E the Owner, promptly repair damage to property of the Owner which is to remain in use and cilities resulting from demolition operations. L* and repair work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of �Ived. �rk shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable and where work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. n J 4 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3. Patch existing construction to match. Examine existing surfaces to be patched before proceeding with the work. Report each condition where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, to the Architect and do not proceed until the Architect has issued instructions. B. Clean adjacent facilities of dust, dirt and debris resulting from demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work. C. Leave each area broom clean upon completion of the demolition work. D. Remove dust -tight partitions at Substantial Completion, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. E. Leave in-place temporary barricades, banners and other safeguards which provide safety to persons. END OF SECTION 5 KKE0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 0 C, PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING C 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation excavation and backfill. B. Trench excavation within building and extending 5 feet outside of building footprint, and backfill. n C. Installation of perimeter insulation where waterproofing does not occur. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION EKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. 1.03 Perimeter insulation is specified in Section 07210. L RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS A. Document 00220 - Geotechnical Data CB. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: For granular fill below interior building slab -on -grade. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Ell A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Test Reports a. Soil tests as specified in Article 3.06. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. B. Provide protection for persons and property in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 241-1989, Safeguarding LBuilding Construction and Demolition Operations. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING C, A. Schedule backfill and compaction of soils placed against waterproofed foundations if any, with the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. In general, fills shall be clean friable earth, sand, or clays of low plasticity, free of organic material, ice, C' cinders, trash, rubble and stones greater than 6" in diameter, unless otherwise specified in the Geotechnical Report. B. Perimeter Insulation: Refer to Section 07210. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SITE A. Site clearing, excavation and soils correction has been or will be completed under a separate contract. B. Examination of Site and Records 1. Examine the site, the Drawings and records of existing subsurface soil conditions, including subsurface explorations available through the Architect, to determine the conditions under which the work will be performed. Subsurface soil investigation data, including records of test borings are made available or information only and are not guaranteed to represent all subsurface conditions that will be encountered. The existing construction shown, and soil investigation data represent all conditions known to the Owner. Formulate conclusions as to the subsurface conditions and remove materials to the design subgrades shown. C. Protection of Utilities 1. Protect existing service lines and related structures encountered in the excavation work. Where E. such lines and structures have been undermined due to the excavation work, provide suitable supports. If damaged during excavation, repair such lines and structures, or arrange for their repair with the proper authorities or companies at no additional cost to the Owner. E EKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING Dust Control 1. Use necessary means to control dust on and near the work if such dust is caused during performance of the work, and if resulting from the condition in which the site is left. 2. Thoroughly moisten surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on site. E. Earth Retainage 1. Take every precaution to guard against movement and settlement of existing construction, and provide earth retainage necessary in connection therewith. 2. Be responsible for the design, and adequacy of earth retainage required. Design shall be reviewed by a Structural Engineer. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavated granular soil may be used as backfill subject to the requirements of Article 2.01 and the Geotechnical Report. Unsuitable materials shall be deposited and spread on the site as directed, or removed from the site and disposed of without additional cost to the Owner. B. The surface of the ground shall be properly sloped to prevent water from running into excavated areas. Excavated areas shall be kept reasonably dry at all times. Accumulated water shall be removed by pumping for such a period of time and as required to allow the construction work to proceed. C. Excavate to the lines and elevations required. Side forms are required for concrete work unless omission of forms is requested, and approved, in writing, by the Architect. Where omission of forms is approved, bear the cost of additional concrete volume required beyond the minimum profiles and dimensions of the structure as detailed. Where forms are required, excavations shall be made sufficiently large to permit placing and removal of forms, installation of utilities and their inspection. D. Excavations shall not be carried below elevations shown on the Drawings without the written approval of the Architect. E. Footing and slab subgrades shall be approved by the testing laboratory before proceeding with their construction. Bottoms of footings shall be founded on competent, undisturbed soil or compacted structural fill at elevations shown on the Drawings. F. Subgrades of footings shall be level and clean of all loose rock, dirt and debris and free of standing water prior to acceptance for pouring concrete. G. When suitable bearing soil is encountered at the subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings and the excavation is made to greater depth, the footings and foundation walls shall be extended to the lower elevation or concrete fill shall be installed by the Contractor as directed by the Architect without additional cost to the Owner. H. If latent soil conditions are encountered at the subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings as determined by the Soils Engineer, the Soils Engineer may direct the removal of the unsuitable soil and extension of the footings and foundation walls or the installation of suitable compacted earth fill, or concrete fill.. Payment for such authorized additional work shall be made in accordance with agreed upon unit prices or lump sum cost set forth in a written order. I. Weathered rock shall be such material as can be removed with conventional excavation equipment, not requiring drilling or blasting. In the case of disputes as to definition, the Soil Testing Laboratory shall make final judgement. J. The Contractor shall provide frost protection for existing footings and bottom of excavation. 3.03 TRENCHING General 1. Perform trenching required for the installation of items where the trenching is not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications. 2. Make trenches open vertical construction with sufficient width to provide free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed item as required for caulking, joining, backfilling, and compacting. 3. Depth a. Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Drawings. b. Where elevations are not shown on the Drawings, trench to sufficient depth to give a minimum of fill above the top of the service as recommended by the appropriate Engineer. 4. Correction of Faulty Grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below proper elevation, backfill with approved material and then compact to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade meeting the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n ;1 11 ;I LJ i� C C C El I C E, C C C SECTION 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING Trench Bracing a. Properly support trenches in strict accordance with pertinent rules and regulations. b. Brace, sheet, and support trench walls so that they will be safe and that the ground alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that existing improvements whether on public or private property, will be fully protected from damage. C. If damage to such improvements occurs, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary, meeting the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Arrange bracing, sheeting, and shoring to eliminate stress on portions of the completed Work until the general construction has proceeded far enough to provide sufficient strength. Removal of Trench Bracing: Exercise care in the drawing and removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing, and timbering to prevent collapse or caving of excavation faces being supported. Grading and Stockpiling Trenched Material a. Control the stockpiling of trenched material to prevent water running into the excavations. b. Do not obstruct the surface drainage but provide diversion of storm and waste waters into existing gutters, other temporary drains, or surface drains. 3.04 PERIMETER INSULATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. After completion of foundation walls and removal of forms, clean the excavation of trash and debris before placement of perimeter insulation and backfill. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces using spot adhesive as necessary to temporarily hold insulation in place, butting panels tightly together. B. Materials for fills shall consist of approved material, as specified in Article 2.01, obtained from the required excavation and approved material as may be required from off the site. C. Place fill materials in horizontal loose layers and spread, mix and place as to produce a uniform thickness of material. Placement shall start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to the finished grade. D. No fill material shall be placed on areas where free water is standing, on frozen subsoil areas, or on surfaces which have not been tested and approved by the Soils Engineer. E. Maintain symmetrical backfill loading and compact each layer with mechanical tampers or other approved equipment. In placing backfill take special care to prevent wedge action, eccentric loading and overloading of the structure by equipment used in compacting the backfill material and to prevent damaging the walls. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to the maximum Proctor densities at optimum moisture as recommended in the Geotechnical Report. G. Material shall not be compacted when the moisture varies more than plus or minus 2 percent from the optimum moisture content. A uniform moisture content will be required throughout the layers of fill material. Wetting or drying manipulation shall be required if necessary to accomplish this. Suspend compaction operations when, in the Soils Engineer opinion, satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions. H. In lieu of drying by manipulation of soil containing excessive moisture, if approved by the Soils Engineer, employ hydrated lime, monohydrated lime or similar ingredients to reduce the plasticity index, or improve workability. Such ingredients shall be applied in a manner and quantity as recommended by the testing laboratory. 3.05 SOILS CONSULTANT A. Excavating, filling and backfilling operations shall be under the direction of a soils consultant employed by this Subcontractor. Soils consultant shall be acceptable to the Architect. B. Soils consultant shall determine the suitability of fill materials, acceptance of compacted fill layers and direct the removal of unsuitable materials. C. Soils consultant shall verify the load bearing capacities of soils encountered at the design elevations. If the bearing capacities are below the design loads, do not proceed with the foundation work until corrective measures have been determined by the Architect. D. Soils consultant shall determine the adequacy of drainage ditches and pumping equipment installed to maintain a reasonably dry building site. E. Comply with the instructions of the soils consultant who shall cooperate with the soils engineer in the performance of their duties. F. Testing laboratory shall provide a technician in attendance during filling and compaction operations to perform tests specified. The technician shall be under the direction of the soils consultant. EKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Type and frequency of field tests shall be determined by the testing laboratory and the soils consultant. Unless otherwise determined, minimum testing shall be as follows: I. Field density tests shall be performed for every 2500 s.f. of each layer of compacted fill, or portion thereof. 2. Field density tests shall be performed for every 1001.f. of compacted backfill, or portion thereof. 3. Bearing capacities of soils relative to design loads shall be verified. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 t✓► A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of 100 -foot or less radius. B. Form Coating: A commercial product to facilitate stripping without staining or damaging concrete or impairing future concrete treatment. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185-94, flat sheets as shown on Drawings. 1. Accessories: Provide supports to hold wire mesh in proper position while concrete is being placed. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-97, Type I, normal Portland cement; uniform gray color, from single C source. 1. Fly ash is NOT allowed for exterior concrete exposed to view. E. Aggregates (Typical): All fine and coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33-93. 1. Fine Aggregates: Natural or artificial, hard clean sand. 2. Coarse Aggregates: Crushed stone, size 57. F. Water: Potable. G. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260-95, "Air Mix" (The Euclid Chemical Co.) "MB -VR" or "Micro Air" (Master Builders); "Darex" (W.R. Grace & Co.); "Sika AER" (Sika Chemical Corp.); add only to normal portland cement concrete to meet requirements specified for air content. H. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound (For Curbs and Typical Sidewalks): Water emulsified white pigmented resin curing compound, ASTM C309-97, Type 2, Class B. rLi KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02523 EXTERIOR CONCRETE CFLATWORK AND CURBS PART 1- GENERAL j� l ; �! 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sidewalks and stoops. B. Manually placed concrete curbs. a C. Machine placed concrete curbs and integral gutters. D. Granular fill below exterior concrete work specified herein. E. Formwork. E F. G. Reinforcing. Backfilling against completed work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS EA. Section 02220 - Structure Excavation and Trenching. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Mix Design: Concrete mix design, including report on design strength test. 2. Test reports on placed concrete: a. Tests of materials, or review of test reports available from suppliers. E b. Field tests as specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Walks and curbs on public property shall comply with all laws, rules and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over such work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING CA. Deliver, handle and store material at the job site in such a manner as to prevent damage. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project (� Ili site. PART2-PRODUCTS M 2.01 MATERIALS t✓► A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of 100 -foot or less radius. B. Form Coating: A commercial product to facilitate stripping without staining or damaging concrete or impairing future concrete treatment. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185-94, flat sheets as shown on Drawings. 1. Accessories: Provide supports to hold wire mesh in proper position while concrete is being placed. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-97, Type I, normal Portland cement; uniform gray color, from single C source. 1. Fly ash is NOT allowed for exterior concrete exposed to view. E. Aggregates (Typical): All fine and coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33-93. 1. Fine Aggregates: Natural or artificial, hard clean sand. 2. Coarse Aggregates: Crushed stone, size 57. F. Water: Potable. G. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260-95, "Air Mix" (The Euclid Chemical Co.) "MB -VR" or "Micro Air" (Master Builders); "Darex" (W.R. Grace & Co.); "Sika AER" (Sika Chemical Corp.); add only to normal portland cement concrete to meet requirements specified for air content. H. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound (For Curbs and Typical Sidewalks): Water emulsified white pigmented resin curing compound, ASTM C309-97, Type 2, Class B. rLi KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02523 EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK AND CURBS I. Preformed Fiber Joint Filler: ASTM D1751-83(1991), "Fiber Expansion Joint Filler, Code 1390" (W.R. Grace & Co.); "Fibre Expansion Joint (W.R. Meadows Inc.); or "Flexcell" (The Celotex Corporation), nonextruding, for expansion joints which are to be sealed. J. Joint Sealer: Hot poured rubber asphalt type, "Para -Plastic" (W.R. Grace Co.); "Hi -Spec" (W.R. Meadows); or approved substitution. K. Granular Fills: Well graded sand or gravel. 1. Non -Frost Susceptible Fill: For use below exterior concrete paving within 5 feet of the building shall consist of non -frost susceptible granular soils to frost depth. 2.02 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. The testing laboratory shall design the mix for the concrete to obtain a strength, as determined by test cylinders, at least 15 percent higher than specified. B. The adequacy of the design shall be verified by tests on standard cylinders; 2 tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days, in accordance with ASTM C39-93, and C192-95. C. The testing laboratory shall submit the copies of the mix design and the test results to the Architect for approval before any concrete is placed. D. Cement content shall be in accordance with the following minimum requirements: 1. Design Strength Cement Content psi sacks/cu. yd. 4000 5.5 E. Ready -Mixed Concrete shall conform with ASTM C94-96. F. The mixture shall contain no more water than is necessary to produce concrete which is workable and plastic within the limits specified herein for slump. The amount of water and proportion of mortar to coarse aggregate shall be the least which will produce uniformly dense concrete, free from aggregate pockets or honeycomb. Corrections shall be made for the amount of moisture contained in the aggregates and allowances shall be made for absorption of moisture by the aggregates during the period of mixing and handling. A uniform consistency shall be maintained continuously. Mixture shall contain 5 to 7 percent air entrainment. NO CALCIUM CHLORIDE shall be used. G. The consistency shall be determined by the method specified in ASTM C143 -90a. H. In general the slump shall be not less than 3" nor more than 5" for concrete which is not compacted by vibration; and not less than 2" or more than 4" for concrete which is compacted by vibration. In each of the above cases, slumps outside of the limits named may be used when satisfactory workability cannot be obtained within such limits and the slump is approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to fine grading, the rough grade shall be tamped or rolled until thoroughly compacted and shall be constructed true to grade and cross section. B. Fine grading and filling shall be performed using sand, or other granular subbase, uniformly graded. Subgrade shall not be built-up under forms after forms are in place. Subgrade shall be tested with an approved template. High spots shall be lowered and low spots raised. Subbase shall be compacted and leveled to grade. C. Wet the prepared subgrade to ensure a moist condition when concrete is placed. D. Subgrade shall not be built-up under forms after forms are in place. Subgrade shall be tested with an approved template. High spots shall be lowered and low spots raised. Subbase shall be compacted and leveled to grade. E. Set, brace, and secure edge forms and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. F. Install welded wire fabric in accordance with ACI 301-89, Articles 5.7.4, and as specified herein. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least 1 (one) full mesh and lace splices with 16 gage wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1� 17 n I v n C c C C C C C El r SECTION 02523 EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK AND CURBS 3.03 FORMS FOR MANUALLY PLACED CURBS A. Curb forms shall be carefully set to alignment and grade and to conform to the dimensions of the curb. All forms shall be held rigidly in place by the use of steel or wooden stakes placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. The forms on the front of the curb shall not be removed less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for back of curbs shall remain in place until the face or top of the curb has been rubbed and finished. In no event shall forms be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction. Forms shall be cleaned thoroughly each time they are used and coated with a light oil as often as necessary to prevent the concrete from adhering. 3.04 MANUALLY PLACED CURBS A. Concrete shall be placed in the forms to the specified depth in 6" layers and thoroughly consolidated by tamping and spading so that there are no rock pockets at forms, and mortar entirely covers top surfaces. The surface of the top of the curb shall be edged with the proper edging tool and floated and finished with a smooth wood float or a concrete rubbing block until it is true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Ample water shall be used during the finishing operations. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until all blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The face of the finished curb shall be true and straight, and the top surface of curbs shall be of uniform width, free from humps, sags, or other irregularities. When a straightedge 10 ft. long is laid on the top or face of the curb, the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" from the edge of the straightedge, except at grade changes or curves. All visible surfaces and edges of the finished curb shall be free of all blemishes and form and tool marks and shall be uniform in color, shape, and appearance. B. Expansion joints and contraction Joints shall be provided in all curbs, and shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curbs, as specified herein and as shown. 1. Contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete immediately after removal of the forms and as a part of the finishing operation. Contraction joints shall generally be formed to the full depth of the concrete, using 1/8" thick removable inserts cut and shaped to the cross-section of the curb. a. Provide contraction joints not to exceed 10'-0" o.c. 2. Expansion joints shall be formed by means of the specified type preformed filler material 1/2" thick, cut and shaped to the cross-section of the curb. Expansion joints shall be provided in curbs at the ends of all returns and directly opposite the expansion joints of abutting concrete pavement, and unless otherwise shown shall be of the same thickness as the joints in the pavement. a. Provide expansion joints not to exceed 30'-0" o.c. 3.05 MACHINE PLACED CURBS A. Place and form concrete to the required shape with an approved type of extrusion machine capable of producing a finished product meeting the standards for dimension, quality, workmanship and appearance as would be achieved with fixed -form construction specified in Article 3.03 unless otherwise specified herein. B. Expansion joints and contraction joints shall be provided in all curbs, and shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curbs, as specified herein and as shown. 1. Contraction joints shall be formed in the wet concrete by cutting a groove 2" in depth in all exposed surfaces using an approved cutting tool having a blade 1/8" wide. 2. Expansion joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete as specified above for manually placed curbs. 3. Joint spacing shall be as specified above for manually placed curbs. 3.06 F.LATWORK A. Screed concrete surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. B. Finishing 1. Float surface with power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular surface. 2. Sidewalks shall receive a broom finish applied generally perpendicular to the direction of travel. KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02523 EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK AND CURBS Provide non -slip abrasive on all exposed concrete ramps. Embed the non -slip material in the concrete surface with the final troweling in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Unless otherwise directed the amount of abrasive shall be 1/4 lb. per s.f. After curing, lightly work surface of concrete with a steel brush, or abrasive stone, and water to expose the abrasive aggregate. C. Control Joints 1. Locate maximum 5'-0" o.c. or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Saw cut 1/8" x 1/3 the slab depth, or; 3. Form by cutting slab with steel "T" bar 1/3 the slab depth. D. Expansion Joints I . Install expansion joint material behind curb at abutment to sidewalks, curb returns, adjacent structures and maximum 60'-0" o.c. in sidewalks and platforms. 2. Place top of expansion joint material 1/2" below curb or slab surface. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE DURING HOT AND COLD WEATHER A. During cold weather, equipment and materials shall be provided to maintain a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. in the freshly placed concrete during the curing period. No frozen materials or materials containing snow or ice shall be used in the mix. No dependence shall be placed on salt or other chemicals for the prevention of freezing. No concrete shall be placed on frozen subgrade. B. During hot weather, suitable precautions shall be taken to avoid drying of the concrete prior to finishing. Windbreaks, sunshades, covering, fog sprays, etc. shall be used as required, or directed by the Architect. Concrete deposited in hot weather shall have a placing temperature not greater than 80 degrees F., and shall be maintained at a temperature not greater than 90 degrees F. during the curing period. 3.08 CURING A. The surface of the newly placed concrete shall be wetted if it becomes dry before the curing material is placed, The water shall be applied as a fine spray so that it will not mar or injure the surface. The top and edges of the concrete shall not be unprotected for a period of more than 1/2 hour at the time the forms are removed. B. Curing shall be maintained for at least 72 hours and may be accomplished by wetting and covering with wetted burlap, impermeable paper, polyethylene sheeting, or in lieu of wetting and covering, by membrane spray. 1. Apply liquid membrane curing compound at the rate of 150 s.f. of surface curing area per gallon. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. Following curing period, seal all joints with hot poured concrete joint sealer specified in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Testing laboratory shall make the following inspections and tests: 1. Test materials for compliance, or review available test reports. 2. Verify Contractor's mix designs. 3. Perform tests on placed concrete in accordance with ACI 301-89 and the following: a. Perform compression strength test for each 25 c.y. of concrete, or fraction thereof on specimens taken at point of discharge from the truck immediately before placing. Make a minimum of 1 (one) strength test for concrete placed in 1 (one) day. A set of specimens for a test shall consist of 4 standard 6 x 12 cylinders. b. 4 additional concrete cylinders shall be made during a placement which requires temporary heating. These cylinders shall be left in the enclosure in same environment as concrete placed. Perform tests as specified above to verify adequacy of temporary heating system. C. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143-90a. Furnish slump cone at the site. Perform a minimum of 1 (one) test per set of cylinders. d. Test for air -entrainment in accordance with ASTM C173 -94a, or ASTM C231-97. Furnish and maintain equipment for testing air content at the site. Perform a minimum of 1 (one) test per set of cylinders of air entrained concrete. Concrete samples tested for slump shall not be used for air -entrainment tests. 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 D. it Li D, Fl I J SECTION 02523 EXTERIOR CONCRETE n FLATWORK AND CURBS ! J B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, foregoing tests indicate concrete strengths below those required, or D visual defects indicate concrete of poor quality has been placed, additional tests shall be made and reported as directed by the Architect at the expense of the Contractor. 3.11 BACKFILLING c A. After the concrete has been cured, the spaces along the edges of the walks, miscellaneous flatwork and curbs shall be backfilled to the required elevation with material approved by the Architect. The material shall then be compacted until firm, and the surface neatly graded, with allowance made for topsoil. cEND OF SECTION � C c C c c C c C c c c. c c n 5 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Lj C PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Repair of isolated areas of existing asphaltic concrete paving. B. Base course. C. Hot -mixed asphaltic concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS BITU108 PAVING REPAIR El A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Mix Designs: Furnish mix designs and supporting test data for asphaltic mixtures. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS j A. Environmental Requirements: Make repairs only when weather conditions are favorable and when l� adverse weather conditions are not forecast within the 12 hours following completion of repairs. 1. Apply tack coats only when ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F., and when temperature C has not been below 35 degrees F., for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet. 2. Construct asphalt surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F., and when asphalt base is dry. Asphalt base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 degrees F., and rising and when aggregate base is dry. C, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. Paving shall be hot plant mix asphaltic concrete. B. Base course aggregate, and binder and surface course asphalt materials shall be identical to those used in the existing paving insofar as practicable. C. Tack Coat: ASTM D977-91 emulsified asphalt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which bituminous paving repairs are to be made and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sawcut edges of existing paving and remove loose materials from areas to be repaired, down to subgrade. B. Proofroll subgrade to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Repair unstable sections. Remove, reshape, or provide sufficient material where necessary to provide required thickness of base and bituminous areas. 3.03 BASE COURSE AND TACK COAT A. Apply aggregate base course to the required thickness (match existing) and compact. B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of existing paving and to abutting concrete surfaces. 3.04 ASPHALT A. General: Place hot -mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness to match existing. C B. Rolling: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 1. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 2. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 BTTUIVIINSUS PAVING REPAIR 3. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling with second rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. 4. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and the course has attained recommended maximum density. 5. After finish rolling, erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled and attained its maximum degree of hardness. 6. Compact surface course to 95 percent of the maximum Marshall dry density. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repaired surfaces shall provide proper drainage such that no moisture collects or ponds on newly placed asphalt. Rework areas which do not meet this criteria. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove asphalt and related materials from adjacent construction and leave areas broom clean. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL C 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Irrigation system for planter beds adjacent to building. B. Irrigation system design. C. System shall include furnishing and installing piping and fittings, valves, quick coupling valves, sprinkler heads, controllers and miscellaneous fittings, accessories, and equipment needed for a complete and operating system. System shall operate in an efficient and satisfactory manner according to the workmanlike standards established for quality sprinkler irrigation. 1. The completed system shall provide automatic irrigation covering 100 percent of shrub beds adjacent (tangent) to building unless otherwise shown. D. Maintenance Service: Irrigation Subcontractor shall provide the following services after the installation and acceptance by the Owner: 1. Perform 1 (one) Fall system winterization. 2. Perform 1 (one) Spring system start-up. 3. Items of work not covered by the 1 (one) year corrective period shall be charged to the Owner at the contractors regular service rates. C1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DIVISIONS A. Section 02900 - Landscaping B. Division 15 - Mechanical: For building stub out, meter and vacuum breaker. C. Division 16 - Electrical: For power to system controller. 1.03 SUBMITTALS CA. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, installation, operating and maintenance instructions. r1 2. Shop Drawings: Complete system design with each component identified. L 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be installed according to applicable codes and ordinances of the city and National C Electrical Code. Permits required shall be obtained and paid for by the Irrigation Subcontractor. B. The work of this Section shall be done by a firm regularly engaged in, and specializing in this work, with a minimum of 5 years experience in the type of work shown and specified. C C. 1.05 Entire irrigation system shall be coordinated with the Landscape Subcontractor. EXTRA MATERIALS AND PARTS LIST A. Provide 2 extra complete heads of each type used, one complete valve of each size used, and special tools and equipment needed to operate and maintain the system. This equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the work. B. Provide 2 copies of the parts list and manufacturer's catalog showing performance, weight, quality and [, PART 2 functions of each item of equipment installed. - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS CA. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. B. The Toro Co. CPART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION CA. Examine the areas and conditions under which underground sprinkler system is to be installed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 3.02 PREPARATION A. The Irrigation Subcontractor is responsible for locating underground obstacles. It is not represented that the Drawings show all sewers, water lines, gas lines, telephone lines and other underground obstacles. Exercise caution to prevent damage to existing facilities during the progress of the construction work, taking care to locate same, where possible, in advance of the actual work. The Architect will render assistance in the matter of determining the location of existing utilities by making available such maps, records and other information as may be accessible to the Architect, when requested to do so, but the accuracy of such information will not be guaranteed. The Irrigation Subcontractor shall make good all damage to existing utilities resulting from this installation. If the Contractor, in the layout of the work, encounters any pipe, underground utility, or structure, the location of which has not been furnished by the Architect, he shall bring such conditions to the attention of the Architect for his determination of the method to be used to remove or bypass such obstructions. 3.03 SERVICE A. Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide: 1. Appropriate size Type K copper line (stub out) to 6" outside of the building. Coordinate location with Irrigation Subcontractor. 2. Separate meter and vacuum breaker. B. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide: 1. 120 volt electrical current shall be provided to a junction box adjacent to the controller. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All pipe lines shall be installed in the locations and of sizes indicated on the final Shop Drawings. Piping shall be laid accurately to line and grade with full bearing uniformity on the trench bottom. B. Over -excavation shall be backfilled and carefully tamped to provide smooth and firm bearing for laying irrigation pipe and sleeves. Trench bottom must be smooth and free from protruding rocks or boulders. C. Install Class 160 PVC pipe sleeves under drives and sidewalks and extend 12" (minimum) beyond the edge of such construction. 1. Coordinate irrigation sleeve installation with General Contractor. 2. Sleeves shall be sized and placed appropriately to accommodate irrigation system piping. D. Interior of piping shall be kept clear of foreign matter before installation and shall be kept clean by means of plugging or capping ends after placement in trenches. E. Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed at directional changes (When using bell ring pipe only). F. Minimum depth of cover shall be at least 18" for the main and at least 10" for lateral lines. G. Excavations shall be filled with fine earth materials, free from rocks, debris and other unsuitable material. No stone or boulders larger than 3" in diameter shall be allowed within 6" of the pipe. Backfill shall be tamped in 6" layers and trench left flush with adjacent finish grade after compacting to the original density of the soil. H. Pipe shall be snaked in trench sufficiently to permit expansion and contraction. I. Pipe lines installed by means of a pipe puller shall be tamped. J. Provide 3/4" brass valve inside the building to winterize the system by the blowout method. 3.05 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Automatic controller shall be the type and model recommended by the manufacturer for the use intended and shall include at least the following features: 1. 0-60 minute variable station timing. 2. 14 day programmable. 3. 24 hour clock. 4. Automatic/manual switch. 5. Rapid advance. 6. Fuse protection. B. All 120 volt and control wires shall be placed in conduit. Arrangement of the controller and conduit shall be neat in appearance and adjacent to the wall. Electrical wires shall be installed in accordance with city, state, and national codes. 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Li M �1 i 17 Li A. Sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular to finish grades unless otherwise specified. B. Sprinkler heads adjacent to walls, curbs or other paved areas shall be set to grade. EC. Install new valves as may be required for the proper control of the piping systems in which they are incorporated. 3.08 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION L,' A. Remote control valves or gate valves shall be installed in a valve box. B. Valve boxes shall be installed on a suitable base for proper foundation of box and easy leveling of box to proper grade. Valve boxes shall be provided with proper length and size extension to bring the valve box level with the finish grade and so the bottom of the valve box is a minimum of 2" below the bottom of Ethe valve. C. The interior of the valve boxes shall be left free of dirt and debris and the entire length of the pipe and valve in the valve box shall be free and clean and level with the bottom of the valve box. E D. If the holes where pipe enters the valve box are excessively large so that dirt will fall in around the pipe, plug the hole with leak proof material. E. Location of irrigation system heads, piping and valves shall be flagged or marked to avoid damage during completion of the landscaping work. C3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. When the main line or sections of the main line, laterals, swing joints and valves have been installed, the C system (or section) will be thoroughly flushed. The system (or section) will then be pressurized by means of a hydrostatic test at 120 psi. The test period shall be for 2 hours. B. Joints and connections shall be pressure tested and checked for leaks before being covered up. Make necessary corrections before burying. E3.10 CLEANING AND FLUSHING SYSTEM A. After pipe, fittings, and valves have been installed and connections made to the water source, flush pipes C several times until free from rocks, dirt, trash, pipe shavings and debris before installing heads. After the pipe has been thoroughly flushed start installing the heads with the water running, beginning with the one nearest the valve and working towards the ends of the laterals forcing the water and debris left in the pipe to be forced out the last head connection. After the heads have been installed, the system is to be used several times before final inspection. The heads shall be cleaned or replaced if necessary before final Cinspection. 3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. The Irrigation Subcontractor shall make final cleanup of all parts of the system before final acceptance. This cleanup shall include removal of construction materials and equipment, and in general preparing of the site in an orderly and finished appearance. B. Remove from the site, rock and extra dirt resulting from the performance of this work and restore the site Cto its appearance prior to beginning irrigation work. r KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM C3.06 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION A. Electric wire shall be installed in the pipe trenches whenever possible. Wire shall be placed underneath �I the pipe. B. Wire shall be bundled together every 20 feet with electrical tape. Expansion joints in the wire shall be provided by making a 12" loose coil. n C. Control or hot wire shall be of one color (black) and all common or ground wire shall be of another color (white). D. Wire connections to control valves and splices shall be made using "Moistite" wire connectors and potting compound. E. Wire connections at control valves and splices shall be left with sufficient slack so that in case of repair the valve bonnet or splice may be brought to the surface without disconnecting the wires. F. Electrical lines shall be wrapped with poly safety ribbon. 3.07 VALVES AND SPRINKLER HEADS Li A. Sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular to finish grades unless otherwise specified. B. Sprinkler heads adjacent to walls, curbs or other paved areas shall be set to grade. EC. Install new valves as may be required for the proper control of the piping systems in which they are incorporated. 3.08 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION L,' A. Remote control valves or gate valves shall be installed in a valve box. B. Valve boxes shall be installed on a suitable base for proper foundation of box and easy leveling of box to proper grade. Valve boxes shall be provided with proper length and size extension to bring the valve box level with the finish grade and so the bottom of the valve box is a minimum of 2" below the bottom of Ethe valve. C. The interior of the valve boxes shall be left free of dirt and debris and the entire length of the pipe and valve in the valve box shall be free and clean and level with the bottom of the valve box. E D. If the holes where pipe enters the valve box are excessively large so that dirt will fall in around the pipe, plug the hole with leak proof material. E. Location of irrigation system heads, piping and valves shall be flagged or marked to avoid damage during completion of the landscaping work. C3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. When the main line or sections of the main line, laterals, swing joints and valves have been installed, the C system (or section) will be thoroughly flushed. The system (or section) will then be pressurized by means of a hydrostatic test at 120 psi. The test period shall be for 2 hours. B. Joints and connections shall be pressure tested and checked for leaks before being covered up. Make necessary corrections before burying. E3.10 CLEANING AND FLUSHING SYSTEM A. After pipe, fittings, and valves have been installed and connections made to the water source, flush pipes C several times until free from rocks, dirt, trash, pipe shavings and debris before installing heads. After the pipe has been thoroughly flushed start installing the heads with the water running, beginning with the one nearest the valve and working towards the ends of the laterals forcing the water and debris left in the pipe to be forced out the last head connection. After the heads have been installed, the system is to be used several times before final inspection. The heads shall be cleaned or replaced if necessary before final Cinspection. 3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. The Irrigation Subcontractor shall make final cleanup of all parts of the system before final acceptance. This cleanup shall include removal of construction materials and equipment, and in general preparing of the site in an orderly and finished appearance. B. Remove from the site, rock and extra dirt resulting from the performance of this work and restore the site Cto its appearance prior to beginning irrigation work. r KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. The Irrigation Subcontractor shall school at least 2 of the employees, who will be maintaining the irrigation system, in operating and maintaining the system. This will include the operation of the controllers and valves, how to most effectively use the system, maintenance on equipment including removal and replacement of valve and controller components. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES PART 1 -GENERAL E1.01 SECTION INCLUDES l A. Interior chain link fence. u! 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Show layout of fencing, dimensions, height, footings, sizes of members, G. connections, etc. 2. Samples: 6" x 6" piece of chain link fabric in mesh size specified with closed loop terminations on one border of sample. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE L A. Installer shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in installing similar fencing, which shall be H. confirmed in writing and accompanied by a list of installations. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's original packaging with tags and labels intact. Handle and store materials in such a manner as to avoid damage. Damaged or otherwise unsuitable material when so �I J. ascertained shall be immediately removed from the job site. PART2-PRODUCTS to tubular end, corner and pull posts. 2.01. MATERIALS Wire Ties: For tying fabric to line posts, use minimum 9 gage aluminum or steel wire ties for tubular A. Galvanized Pipe: ASTM A53-96. posts spaced 14" o.c. For tying fabric to rails and braces, use 9 gage aluminum wire ties spaced 24" o.c. B. Galvanized Coating: Galvanized coating on fabricated parts and roll -formed shapes, ASTM A123 -89a or Touch -Up Coating: Corrosion resistant liquid compound containing 95 percent zinc in the dried film, ASTM A653-96; on accessories ASTM A153-95. "Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound" (ZRC Products Co./(617) 328-6700). C. End, Corner and Pull Posts 1. 2-7/8" o.d. schedule 40 galvanized pipe weighing 5.79 lbs. per lin. ft. j D. Line Posts (10 ft. max. spacing) L 1. 2-3/8" o.d. schedule 40 galvanized pipe weighing 3.65 lbs. per lin. ft. E. Top, Bottom and Intermediate Rails 1. 1-5/8" o.d. schedule 40 pipe weighing 2.27 lbs. per lin. ft. Furnish in manufacturer's standard C lengths, of approximately 21 ft. with couplings approximately 6" long for each joint, one coupling in each 5 to have expansion spring. Provide means for attaching top, bottom and intermediate rails securely to each corner, pull and end posts. Rails shall form continuous brace from end to r1 end of each run of fence. u! F. Post Bracing Assembly 1. 1-5/8" o.d. galvanized pipe weighing 1.80 lbs. per lin. ft. and 3/8" diameter rod with adjustable take-up (for diagonal truss). G. Chain Link Fabric 1. Galvanized Wire: ASTM A392-96. 2. Size: 9 gage, 2" mesh typical. 3. Top bottom fabric have loop and of shall closed terminations. L H. Post Tops: Pressed steel, or malleable iron, designed as a weathertight closure cap (for tubular posts). Provide one cap for each post. Provide tops which permit passage of top rail. I. Stretcher Bars: One piece lengths equal to full height of fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16" x 3/4". Provide one stretcher bar for each end post, and 2 for each corner and pull posts. J. Stretcher Bar Bands: Heavy pressed steel straps, to be spaced not over 15" o .c. to secure stretcher bars to tubular end, corner and pull posts. K. Wire Ties: For tying fabric to line posts, use minimum 9 gage aluminum or steel wire ties for tubular posts spaced 14" o.c. For tying fabric to rails and braces, use 9 gage aluminum wire ties spaced 24" o.c. L. Touch -Up Coating: Corrosion resistant liquid compound containing 95 percent zinc in the dried film, "Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound" (ZRC Products Co./(617) 328-6700). C, KKE0900A KOHLS/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fences to comply with ASTM F567-93 and as specified herein. B. Weld posts to steel channel surround at base of mezzanine. Secure posts to steel bracing at bottom chord of steel joists. Provide slip connection to eliminate transfer of roof loads to fence components. C. Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. D. Install fabric taut and tie to posts, and rails. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. 1. Thread stretcher bars through fabric and secure to posts with metal bands spaced not over 15" o.c. 2. In securing fabric use U-shaped clip or wire, securely fastened around pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Tack weld fabric to steel channel at base of mezzanine. 3. Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900A KOHLS/01-04-4863-01 J e U A. Plantings shall be maintained by this Subcontractor for a period of 30 days after acceptance. Maintenance shall include necessary watering, weeding, and spraying, to assure healthy vigorous growth. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Organic or Chemical Fertilizers: As recommended by the Landscape Subcontractor based on a review of the existing subgrade soils. B. Weed Killer: Type recommended by State Agriculture Department. C. Mulch: Washed round riverbed gravel 3/4" - 1-1/2" diameter. D. Weed -Control Barriers: Woven, needle -punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a non -woven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz per sy. E. Plant Materials: Plant materials shall conform to the type and size indicated on the Drawings and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from plant diseases and insect pests and their eggs, and shall have normal, healthy root systems. Measurements, such as spread, ball size, number of canes, quality designations, etc., shall be in accordance with the latest edition of "American Standards for Nursery Stock." 1. Substitutions will be permitted only when plants are not acceptable and with the authorization of the Architect to provide for the use of the nearest equivalent, size and variety of plants. Requests for price adjustments due to substitutions will be submitted in writing to the Architect or Owner for approval along with a request for use of the substitution. RKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES a A. Plants B. Topsoil r j C. Related materials 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.03 Section 02810 - Irrigation Systems ASSURANCE QUALITY -� A. All plants will be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at the place of growth before digging, or upon delivery, for quality, size, and variety. Such approval shall not impair right of rejection at project site during progress of the work, for size, condition of balls, roots, latent defects or injuries. Rejected plants are to be removed promptly from the Project site. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver plant materials properly labeled for identification and store in shade protected from weather. B. Plant material is to be delivered in closed vehicles with the entire load properly covered in transit for protection from drying winds. They shall be planted immediately upon delivery. No plant shall be bound with rope or wire in a manner that would damage the bark or break the branches. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS f i A. Environmental Requirements 1. Plant only under favorable weather conditions during the Spring and Fall per local practices. (� I� 1.06 WARRANTY + A. Plants set during the Spring planting season shall be guaranteed for 1 (one) full growing season. Plants set in the Fall shall be guaranteed through the full growing season of the following year. B. Owner/Architect will inspect the plants at the end of the warranty period. Plants that are dead or not in satisfactory growth shall be removed and be replaced during the next normal planting season at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The warranty shall not cover damage or loss by vandalism and by acts of neglect on the part of the Owner. 1.07 MAINTENANCE J e U A. Plantings shall be maintained by this Subcontractor for a period of 30 days after acceptance. Maintenance shall include necessary watering, weeding, and spraying, to assure healthy vigorous growth. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Organic or Chemical Fertilizers: As recommended by the Landscape Subcontractor based on a review of the existing subgrade soils. B. Weed Killer: Type recommended by State Agriculture Department. C. Mulch: Washed round riverbed gravel 3/4" - 1-1/2" diameter. D. Weed -Control Barriers: Woven, needle -punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a non -woven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz per sy. E. Plant Materials: Plant materials shall conform to the type and size indicated on the Drawings and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from plant diseases and insect pests and their eggs, and shall have normal, healthy root systems. Measurements, such as spread, ball size, number of canes, quality designations, etc., shall be in accordance with the latest edition of "American Standards for Nursery Stock." 1. Substitutions will be permitted only when plants are not acceptable and with the authorization of the Architect to provide for the use of the nearest equivalent, size and variety of plants. Requests for price adjustments due to substitutions will be submitted in writing to the Architect or Owner for approval along with a request for use of the substitution. RKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING Plants designated "BB" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root systems necessary for the full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be securely wrapped with burlap and bound with cord. No balled and burlapped plant shall be planted if the ball is cracked or broken. Bare roots shall be handled in a manner that the roots are protected at all times. F. Topsoil: Friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4", free of or reasonably free of subsoil clay lumps stones and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other extraneous and toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil for landscape work is not available at site and must be furnished as specified. 2. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at Project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well -drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4"; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION r] L._!. A. Examine the soils, surrounding construction and the conditions under which landscaping work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. fl 3.02 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Mix fertilizers and other soil amendments (if any) with topsoil at recommended rates. Delay mixing fl fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. L 1. For tree pit or trench backfill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site. 2. For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to planting, or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 3.03 GROUND COVER AND PLANT BED PREPARATION A. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6". Remove stones larger than 1-1/2" in any dimension, and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous materials. DI B. Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately one half the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of t-1 planting soil mixture. LJ 3.04 PLANTING A. Pits for trees and shrubs shall be excavated as part of this work. Subsoil dug from pits, trenches and beds shall be disposed of by the Subcontractor. B. The Subcontractor is responsible for planting to correct grades and alignment and plants shall be set so that, when settled, they will bear the same relation to finish grade as they did before being transplanted. No filling will be permitted around trunks and stems. Roots of bare rooted plants shall not be allowed to mat together, but shall be spread and arranged in their natural position and have planting mixture worked in among them. Broken and frayed roots shall be cut off. C. The plant pits shall be completely covered with a 3" layer of mulch. Plant pits shall be thoroughly soaked before planting. When the plant has been properly set, the pit shall be backfilled with planting mixture, gradually filling, tamping and settling with water. No soil in a frozen or muddy condition shall be used for backfilling. A ring of soil shall be formed around the edge of each plant to hold water. After each watering beds shall be raked and left in complete and finished manner. D. Surround plantings with mulch. I . Install 1 (one) layer of weed -control barrier directly below mulched areas lapping edges and ends 3" minimum, allowing no gaps in coverage. 2. Install rock mulch in parking islands and shrub beds surrounding building to a depth of 3". 3. Do trunks not place mulch against or stems. �1 b KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 0 i I, C Ell C �-1 C D t'1 1.� r SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING E. Upon completion of planting, trees and shrubs shall have been pruned and injuries repaired. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead and injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots from transplanting. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit and shape of the plant. Cuts shall be made flush leaving no stubs. Paint cuts over 3/4" in diameter with tree paint. F. Guying and staking shall be completed immediately after planting. Guy trees 3" and over in caliper and stake trees under 3" in caliper. Maintain guys and stakes until the end of the guarantee period. The trunks of deciduous trees shall be wrapped with standard tree wrap from the ground up to the first branch with 50 percent overlap. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Inspection of the planting will be made jointly by the Subcontractor and Architect at the completion of planting. Plants which are not in a healthy, growing condition shall be removed and replaced with plants of like kind, size and quality as originally specified before the close of the next planting season. 1. Replace dead and dying plants with original plant and planting mixture during guarantee period at no cost to Owner. a. Replacement plants shall be warranted and maintained for an additional period of 1 (one) year. Warranty is limited to 1 (one) replacement per plant. Replacement stock shall meet Specifications and quality of original stock. 2. Repair damage to lawns and other plants during replacement at no cost to Owner. B. Remove trash and excess materials from Project site. C. Maintain paved areas in clean condition. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Occupancy of the Project shall not relieve the Subcontractor of any of the obligations outlined in these Specifications. B. Landscaped areas shall be protected by the Subcontractor against traffic damage, erosion, or other use by erecting barricades or temporary fencing immediately after seeding is completed and by placing warning signs of a type approved by the Architect on various areas. These barricades, or temporary fencing, and signs shall be maintained until the lawns are well established. C. Upon final acceptance of the Work specified herein the Subcontractor shall remove barricades or temporary fences, unless otherwise directed. D. At the end of the warranty period, the Subcontractor shall remove guying, staking, wrapping, and saucers from the site. END OF SECTION E, KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK `J PART 1- GENERAL F7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES LKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Formwork for building concrete. B. Form ties and accessories. 1� 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. j C. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Formwork shall comply with "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" ACI 347R-88. B. Design criteria/construction tolerances shall comply with ACI 301-89. C. Anchor bolt tolerances shall comply with AISC Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design F7 "Code of Standard Practice" June 10, 1992, Paragraph 7.5. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Wood Form Sheathing 1. Finish No. 1 (Concealed Below Grade Concrete) : 3/4" exterior plywood, B -B Concrete Form Class II, PS -1-83. r2. Finish No. 2 (Exposed Non -Architectural concrete): Same as for Finish No. 1. 3. Finish No. 3 (Smooth Concrete): 3/4" exterior type, resin coated plywood, High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I, PS -1-83. B. Form Ties: Internal disconnect, or snap type, leaving metal no closer than 1" from surface of concrete or a hole no larger than 3/4" in diameter. 1. For finishes other than Nos. 1 and 2, ties shall be coil or snap -in type with plastic cones. C. Form Coating: A commercial product to facilitate stripping without staining or damaging concrete or impairing future concrete treatment. D. Chamfer Strips: 3/4" vinyl type with or without nailing flange No. 622 or 612 (Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.); No. CS -3/4 or CSN -3/4 (Vinylex Corp.). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR FORMWORK �j { A. Forms shall conform to shape, lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings, be designed to resist the pressure and weight of the concrete, be properly tied and braced or shored so as to maintain position and shape, and be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete. Forms shall be designed and constructed to facilitate easy removal without damage to exposed surfaces, and to provide smooth concrete surfaces free of off -sets. Corners shall be true to lines and profiled as detailed. Form joints which will be exposed to view shall be kept to a minimum and shall be located symmetrically within each modular unit. B. Before reinforcing steel is set, wood forms shall be coated with an approved non -staining form oil, or wet r-, with water (Except in freezing weather). Metal forms shall be coated with an approved non -staining rust preventive form oil. Stained forms shall not be used. C. Provide temporary openings to facilitate cleaning and inspection immediately before depositing concrete. D. Form material is subject to Architect's approval before construction of forms. Forms for exposed concrete may be reused only if the surfaces have not absorbed moisture and have not splintered, warped, discolored, stained, rusted or peeled, subject to the Architect's approval. E. Exposed corners shall be chamfered unless otherwise shown. Where corners are chamfered, polyvinyl chloride or neoprene extruded comerstrips shall be inserted in the forms. Corners which abut masonry walls shall not be chamfered. Splices and joints in chamfer strips shall be in accordance with the instructions. Llmanufacturer's F. Place bulkheads where end of days work requires a joint in a wall, beam or slab. Reinforcing steel shall extend through the bulkhead. Joints shall be keyed for 1/2 of the member thickness unless otherwise directed. Location of bulkheads shall be approved by the Structural Engineer. LKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 END OF SECTION 9 L1 l� U F U f.I JI^ L y 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 �1 �n SECTION 03100 —' CONCRETE FORMWORK G. Form openings in concrete as shown on the Drawings or required by other trades to accommodate their work. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms. H. Set and build into the Work the anchorage devices and other imbedded items required for other work that ?7 is shown on the Drawings attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Coordinate location and ►J placement with other trades. 3.02 FORM REMOVAL A. Removal of forms and shoring shall be in accordance with ACI 318-89. I -' B. Exercise special care when removing forms from exposed concrete surfaces. C. Results of job -cured cylinders per ASTM C31-96 shall be used as evidence that concrete has obtained required strength to allow removal of formwork. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be designed, constructed and maintained, and concrete shall be placed so as to ensure completed concrete work within the tolerance limits set forth in ACI 347R-88. Li 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check the lines and levels of the completed formwork before concrete is placed, and make whatever i l _l corrections or adjustments to the formwork necessary to correct deviations from the specified tolerances. B. Check formwork during the placement of the concrete to ensure that the forms, shores, tie rods and clamps have not been moved from the established line, level and cross section by concrete pouring methods and equipment. v END OF SECTION 9 L1 l� U F U f.I JI^ L y 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 �1 L EPART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". In case of fabricating errors, do not re - bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. Reinforcing steel shall be of the yield strength specified or scheduled on the Drawings. B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with the following defects will not be permitted in the work. 1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bend and kinks not indicated on Drawings and final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting and other causes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or r ; destroy bond with concrete. 1 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Steel reinforcing bars. B. Welded wire fabric. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: For reinforcing in masonry walls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS �-► A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and placing drawings for reinforcing steel, conforming with the ACI SP -66(88). Include bar bending diagrams and construction joint locations. LJ 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The reinforcement work shall conform with the following except when in conflict with the building code in force; in such event the building code will govern. 1. Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301-89. 2. Detailing Manual, ACI SP -66-88. 3. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318-89. r 4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice MSP 1990. L- 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING rl A. Properly label bars with weatherproof tags to facilitate identification. B. Store reinforcing steel on supports above ground level. Keep covered with tarpaulins if there is a delay in use. Immediately remove damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, from the site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 0 2.01 MATERIALS A. New -Billet Steel Bars: ASTM A615 -96a, Grade 60, unless otherwise shown. 1. Comply with ACI 301-89, Article 5.4.1 and CRSI MSP 1-90, Chapter 7 for fabrication tolerances. 2. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars. N 3. Use bending procedure which does not damage steel. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185-94, flat sheets as shown on Drawings. C. Accessories: Provide bar supports and other accessories necessary to hold bars in proper position while concrete is being placed. r"> 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". In case of fabricating errors, do not re - bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. Reinforcing steel shall be of the yield strength specified or scheduled on the Drawings. B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with the following defects will not be permitted in the work. 1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bend and kinks not indicated on Drawings and final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting and other causes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or r ; destroy bond with concrete. 1 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place reinforcement according to the approved placement drawings. Use sufficient bar supports, ties, anchors and other accessories to hold bars securely in place. ►'4 1. Splice reinforcing bars only where indicated on the Drawings. } a. Splices shall be lapped unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 LJ 2. Provide sufficient numbers of supports and of strength to carry reinforcement. Do not place n reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 3. Where chairs and other accessories are in contact with the formwork of exposed concrete, they shall be stainless steel legged, or plastic tipped unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Install welded wire fabric in accordance with ACI 301-89, Articles 5.7.4, and as specified herein. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least 1 (one) full mesh and lace splices with 16 gage wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly (� over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in V either direction. C. Field Adjustments: Adjust bar locations to avoid interference with inserts, sleeves and other reinforcing. When adjustment exceeds 25 percent of spacing within the plane or 1 (one) bar diameter perpendicular to the plane of the reinforcing, the layout shall be reviewed by the Structural Engineer. 1. No bars shall be placed while concrete is being poured. 2. No bars shall be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete, unless where D. specifically indicated. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades to ensure that reinforcing is in proper place and that pipes, sleeves, conduit, anchors, bolts, flashings, caulking grooves, slips and other inserts of other trades to be cast into concrete are securely placed before concrete is placed. E. The testing laboratory shall review reinforcing prior to placing concrete. Notify testing laboratory of intent to place concrete at least 5 working days prior to placing. u 3.03 TOLERANCES f� A. Reinforcing shall be protected by the following minimum thicknesses of concrete, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1. Concrete against ground without forms: 3" (bars) 2. Concrete against ground without forms: 2" (mesh) 3. Concrete against ground with forms: 2" 4. Concrete exposed to weather: 2" 5. Slabs not exposed to ground or weather: 3/4" 6. Columns and beams not exposed to ground or weather: 1-1/2" 7. Walls not exposed to ground or weather: 1" B. Place welded wire fabric or temperature reinforcing for slabs -on -grade at the center of the slab. C. Place welded wire fabric on slab form at the center of slab. END OF SECTION t� KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 LJ A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: r' 1. Aggregate test reports and mix designs shall be submitted to the Architect and the Structural Engineer in duplicate for approval at least 14 days prior to placing concrete. Submit mix designs with appropriate historical data required by ACI 301 to meet minimum strength requirements. Do NOT begin concrete production until approval of mix designs has been received. 2. Compressive strength test reports as specified in Article 3.12. } 3. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description for proprietary products specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. A. SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete materials. B. Patching and repairing. C. Curing and sealing. D. Grout. E. Moisture barrier. F. Granular cushion below slabs. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS A. Document 00220 - Geotechnical Data: For compaction requirements for granular fill below interior floor slabs. C� B. Section 02220 - Structure Excavation and Trenching. C. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. D. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. E. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: For grout for bond beams, lintels and reinforced masonry F. construction. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 2.01 G. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. A. H. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. I. Section 07900 - Sealants. source. t B. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: r' 1. Aggregate test reports and mix designs shall be submitted to the Architect and the Structural Engineer in duplicate for approval at least 14 days prior to placing concrete. Submit mix designs with appropriate historical data required by ACI 301 to meet minimum strength requirements. Do NOT begin concrete production until approval of mix designs has been received. 2. Compressive strength test reports as specified in Article 3.12. } 3. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description for proprietary products specified. FKKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. A. The concrete work shall conform with the following except when in conflict with the building code in force; in such event the building code shall govern. 1. Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI 117-90. 2. Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301-89. 3. Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction, ACI 302, 1R-89. 4. Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete, ACI 304R-89. 5. Hot Weather Concreting: ACI 305R-89 when maximum daily temperature exceeds 85 degrees F. or rapid drying conditions exist. (Evaporation rate exceeds 0.15 lb./s.f./hr., per Figure 2.1.5). 6. Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting: ACI 306.1-87 when freezing conditions or mean daily temperature below 40 degrees F. is encountered. 7. Standard Practice for Curing Concrete, ACI 308-81 (Revised 1986). 1.05 8. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318-89. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store material at the Project site in such a manner as to prevent damage. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Wrapped, or bundled material shall bear the name of the manufacturer and the product. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when so determined shall be immediately removed from the Project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-97, Type I normal Portland cement; or Type III (High -early strength cement) if approved by the Structural Engineer. Cement shall be uniform in color and from a single source. t B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618-97, Type C or F. FKKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Aggregates 1. For normal weight concrete exposed to weather, aggregates shall be: a. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed and graded conforming to ASTM C33-93, Class Designation 5S. b. Fine aggregate shall be natural sand conforming to ASTM C33-93. 2. For all other normal weight concrete, aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33-93. 3. Coarse aggregate shall be nominal maximum sizes indicated below, conforming to ASTM C33-93, Table 2: a. Footings: 1-1/2" b. Slabs less than 2" thick and fill for masonry: 3/8". C. All other members: 3/4". D. Water: Clean, free from deleterious substances. E. Admixtures: Concrete admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494-90 (Water Reducing) or ASTM C260-95 (Air Entraining), produced by recognized manufacturers, subject to Architect's approval. 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: "Air Mix" (The Euclid Chemical Company) "MB -VR" or "Micro Air" (Master Builders Technologies); "Darex" (W.R. Grace & Co.); "Sika AER" (Sika Chemical Company); add only to normal portland cement concrete to meet requirements specified for air content. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: Type A, containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions added during manufacture, "Eucon WR -75" (The Euclid Chemical Co.); "WRDA with Hycol" (W.R. Grace & Co.); "Pozzolith" 122N or 344N (Master Builders Technologies); "Plastocrete" (Sika Chemical Company). 3. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Type D, when high temperatures, placing, or humidity conditions dictate, "Daratard HC" (W. R. Grace & Co.); "Eucon Retarder -75" (The Euclid Chemical Co.); "Pozzolith 100-XR" (Master Builders Technologies); "Plastiment" (Sika Chemical Company). 4. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: Type E containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions when increased initial set is required without corrosive effect on metals "Accelguard 80" (The Euclid Chemical Co.); "Dara Set Accelerator" (W. R. Grace & Co.); "Pozzutec 20", (Master Builders Technologies). 5. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Type F or G "Eucon 37" (The Euclid Chemical Co.); "Pozzolith" 40ON (Master Builders Technologies); "Sikament" (Sika Chemical Co.). 6. Calcium chloride SHALL NOT BE USED, except as allowed in the manufacturing of the admixture specified. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: (Epoxy type), 100 percent solids, "BurkEpoxy LV" (The Burke Co.); "Duralbond" (Dural International Corp.); "Euco Epoxy #452", (The Euclid Chemical Company); "Concresive Liquid LPL" (Master Builders Technologies); "Epobond" (L & M Construction Chemicals Co.); or "Sikadur Hi - Mod" (Sika Chemical Co.). B. Patching and Surfacing Compound: (Epoxy type), 100 percent solids, "BurkEpoxy Mortar" (The Burke Co.); "Flexocrete" (dry,or damp surface), (Dural International Corp.); "Euco Epoxy #460 Mortar" (dry or damp surface), (The Euclid Chemical Company); "Epopatch" (L & M Construction Chemicals Co.; "Concresive 1470" (dry or damp surface), (Master Builders Technologies); or "Sikadur Lo -Mod Mortar" (dry or damp surface), (Sika Chemical Co.). C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171 -97a. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. D. Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C309-97, Type 1, VOC-compliant, water- based acrylic sealer, for use on vertical and horizontal surfaces, guaranteed not to affect bond of applied finishes, "Dress & Seal WB" (L&M Construction Chemicals Co.); "Aqua Cure VOX" (Euclid Chemical Co.); "Kure -N -Seal W" (Sonneborn Building Products Division, ChemRex, Inc.). E. Liquid Concrete Hardener and Dustproofer: "Lapidolith" (Sonneborn Building Products Division, ChemRex, Inc.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. F. Joint Materials 1. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751-91; non -extruding type, fiber with asphalt binder. 2. Building Paper: ASTM D226-97; Type I (No. 15), asphalt -saturated, non -perforated felt. KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 I� L.! D, J SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. Grout: Non -shrink, non-metallic, non-gaseous type, pre -mixed grout complying with CRD -C 621-88, "Burke Non -Ferrous, Non -Shrink Grout" (The Burke Co.); "Euco N -S" (Euclid Chemical Co.); "Duragrout" (L&M Construction Chemicals Co.); "Set Grout" (Master Builders Technologies). H. Waterstop: Self -adhering, self -healing, pre -molded, flexible joint material, "Water Stop RX" L+(CETCO/formerly American Colloid Co.). 1. Moisture Barrier: Fungi resistant polyethylene sheet conforming to PS 17, not less than 6 mil thick and sealed with adhesive -backed polyethylene tape. J. Granular fills shall consist of well graded sand or gravel meeting approval of Soils Consultant as specified in the Geotechnical Report. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING CONCRETE A. General 1. Employ the services of an independent testing laboratory to test the proposed aggregate, and to design concrete mixes for each type of concrete required. 2. The mixes shall be designed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 3.9. The approved mix designs shall be used as long as aggregate characteristics and proportions remain unchanged. Upon significant changes in aggregate or proportions, prepare new mix designs. B. Concrete Strengths: Refer to Structural Drawings. C. Fly ash when used as a partial replacement for cement shall not exceed 15 percent of the cement content by weight; use only 60 percent of the fly ash when calculating maximum water -cement ratio and minimum cement content. 1. Fly ash may be used for interior concrete and concrete elsewhere if concealed. 2. Fly ash is NOT allowed for exterior concrete exposed to view. D. Provide air entrained concrete for exterior work including platforms and slab -on -grade by adding air - entraining admixture to the normal portland cement concrete mix. The total air content shall be 6 percent + 1 percent. Maximum water to cement ratio shall be 0.45 for air -entrained concrete, unless mix design data shows otherwise. E. Concrete shall be ready mixed conforming with ASTM C94-96. Alternate procedures or methods shall be approved in writing by the Architect or Engineer prior to use. F. Slump shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C143 -90a as follows: 1. 3" but not more than 4" in field: For footings and walls. 2. 3-1/2" but not more than 5" in field: For slab -on -grade and over metal forms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. The concrete shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades to allow reasonable time to set sleeves, inserts and other accessories, which must be in position before concrete is placed. In general, +—► electrical conduits which do not exceed 2" in diameter (o.d.) shall be placed between the upper and lower third of the thickness of the concrete in which it is embedded. Conduits in concrete shall not be placed closer together than 3 diameters on centers, except at points of crossing and at cabinet boxes. B. Install moisture barrier, under all interior concrete slabs, sandwiched between prepared subgrade and granular fill. Lap joints not less than 6" and seal with adhesive -backed polyethylene tape. 1. Avoid construction traffic both wheeled and pedestrian type across moisture barrier after installation insofar as practicable to avoid damage to moisture barrier. 2. After careful examination of the moisture barrier, repair tears, holes and punctures in moisture barrier with same tape used to seal seams, then place granular fill over moisture barrier. 3. Compact granular fill as recommended in the Geotechnical Report. 5 IV1 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Deposit concrete in uniform, horizontal layers not more than 24" deep work around all reinforcing and in corners of forms. Properly spade and puddle by use of rods, shovels and hand spades, and agitate by means of internal and/or external vibrators to obtain densest possible concrete without over -vibrating to the point where segregation results. Deposit concrete continuously until completion of each section or unit. 1. Concrete transported by truck mixer or agitator shall be completely discharged within 90 minutes (60 minutes for hot weather concreting) after water has been added to the cement. 7 �6 UKKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 I� SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix. Should extra water be Ell required before depositing the concrete, the Contractor's Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize the addition of water. Any additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the trip ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where extra water �'4? is added to the concrete, it shall be mixed thoroughly for 30 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. Water may be added at the site only once to each batch. B. Exercise care in placing of concrete and when locating welded wire fabric reinforcement during placing ry of concrete to avoid damage to moisture barrier. C. Clean construction joints and moisten just before placing additional concrete. b. Floor flatness and levelness shall be determined in accordance with ASTM El 155-96 D. In hot weather, to prevent the development of high temperatures in fresh concrete, concrete shall be 1) For floors which are scheduled to receive thin set tile, vinyl or rubber flooring, and protected in accordance with ACI 305R-89. s� E. In cold weather, concrete shall not be placed when temperature is, or is predicted to be within the 1) SOV: 35. following 48 hours, below 40 degrees F. unless proper provisions have been made for heating and 2) MLV: 24. protecting concrete in accordance with ACI 306.1-87. F. Slabs on grade shall have formed joints as required, and be placed in strip sequence unless otherwise n shown on the Structural Drawings or approved by the Structural Engineer. Minimum of 24 hours shall a) Flatness elapse between the placing of adjacent units. Provide construction points between units in accordance 1) SOV: 25. with the typical details shown. h G. Provide adequate runways, chutes, and other means of conveying concrete in place. Use chutes or n LJ tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than 5 feet is required. j 3.03 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Finish Numbers: The finishes required on concrete surfaces may be identified as follows:( 1. Finishes for Formed Surfaces �J a. Finish No. 1: For below -grade concrete against which backfill will be placed and above grade concrete which will not be exposed to view. b. Finish No. 2; Exposed Non -Architectural Concrete: For concrete surfaces exposed to view in service and utility spaces and surfaces to be covered by other finishes. C. Finish No. 3: (Smooth Concrete): For all concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view. 2. Finishes for Slabs: Refer to ACI 302.1R-96. a. Definitions 1) Specified Overall Value (SOV): Specified goal for tolerances. 2) Minimum Local Value (MLV): Minimum acceptable localized value. b. Floor flatness and levelness shall be determined in accordance with ASTM El 155-96 measured within 24 hours. 1) For floors which are scheduled to receive thin set tile, vinyl or rubber flooring, and floors which will be exposed to view in decorated spaces. a) Flatness 1) SOV: 35. 2) MLV: 24. b) Levelness 1) SOV: 25. 2) MLV: 17. 2) For floors which are scheduled to receive carpet. a) Flatness �1 1) SOV: 25. 2) MLV: 17. h b) Levelness LJ 1) SOV: 20. 2) MLV: 15. C. Unless otherwise noted concrete slabs shall receive a power steel troweled finish. Final hand troweling shall be required to remove imperfections left by troweling machines, and to bring the surface to a dense, smooth finish. t 1) Where ceramic tile is specified for thin -set installation, follow troweling immediately with a fine broom finish. J d. Finish concrete slabs to proper elevations to ensure that all surface moisture will drain freely to floor drains, and that no puddle areas exist. It is the intent of the elevations shown KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 D 3.04 PATCHING OF CONCRETE A. Finishes No. 1 and No. 2 1. Apply epoxy type bonding agent and patch all form tie holes, aggregate pockets, honeycomb and i� defective areas as required with 1:2 portland cement -sand mortar. B. Finish No. 3 1. In addition to patching as specified for Finish No. 1, remove all fins, form joint marks, rough spots and other defects by grinding or rubbing with a carborundum stone, until these defects and rough areas are completely removed and surfaces are free from imperfections so as to present a 1 dense, smooth, uniform finish. s 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect concrete work from drying out by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene film, polyethylene -coated burlap, or a coating of approved membrane curing compound, unless otherwise specified herein. Curing methods are subject to Architect's approval. Perform slab curing as soon as possible after final finishing operations are complete, and in any event within 2 hours. When forms are removed from formed concrete, exposed concrete surfaces shall be wet with water immediately and kept moist until application of curing compound. 1. Moisture -Cover Curing a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Extend cover material over edges of slab and secure. Seal around all penetrations in slab. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. b. Use this curing process for Stockroom floors; and elsewhere at Contractor's option. 2. Compound Curing a. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall occurring within 3 r 1 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during +U, curing period. b. Curing compounds if used shall be compatible with floor finishes subsequently applied or installed. �1 C. Do NOT use film -forming membrane curing compounds on floors scheduled or otherwise j shown to receive concrete hardener and dustproofer. U 3.06 SEALING CONCRETE A. Typical: Apply 2 coats of curing and sealing compound (one coat if initially membrane cured) to floors scheduled to receive floor coverings. 3.07 HARDENER AND DUSTPROOFER A. Apply 2 coats of hardener/dustproofer to Stockroom floors in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. rl 1. As the second coat is drying, wait for the uniform appearance of white crystals, flood the floor with water, and buff with a commercial floor buffer using a 3MTM or similar abrasive pad. Continue buffing until the floor acquires a patina or polish and the whiteness is gone. .a 3.08 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work, anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. 3.09 GROUTING A. Grout structural base and bearing plates as soon as practical and before significant load is placed on 1 bearing members. Mix, place and cure grout in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 5 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE on the Drawings to create this situation. During the finishing operations, the Contractor shall pay particular attention to this criterion, and shall make all efforts to obtain this. Cost of corrections to provide for this positive drainage will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.04 PATCHING OF CONCRETE A. Finishes No. 1 and No. 2 1. Apply epoxy type bonding agent and patch all form tie holes, aggregate pockets, honeycomb and i� defective areas as required with 1:2 portland cement -sand mortar. B. Finish No. 3 1. In addition to patching as specified for Finish No. 1, remove all fins, form joint marks, rough spots and other defects by grinding or rubbing with a carborundum stone, until these defects and rough areas are completely removed and surfaces are free from imperfections so as to present a 1 dense, smooth, uniform finish. s 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect concrete work from drying out by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene film, polyethylene -coated burlap, or a coating of approved membrane curing compound, unless otherwise specified herein. Curing methods are subject to Architect's approval. Perform slab curing as soon as possible after final finishing operations are complete, and in any event within 2 hours. When forms are removed from formed concrete, exposed concrete surfaces shall be wet with water immediately and kept moist until application of curing compound. 1. Moisture -Cover Curing a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Extend cover material over edges of slab and secure. Seal around all penetrations in slab. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. b. Use this curing process for Stockroom floors; and elsewhere at Contractor's option. 2. Compound Curing a. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall occurring within 3 r 1 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during +U, curing period. b. Curing compounds if used shall be compatible with floor finishes subsequently applied or installed. �1 C. Do NOT use film -forming membrane curing compounds on floors scheduled or otherwise j shown to receive concrete hardener and dustproofer. U 3.06 SEALING CONCRETE A. Typical: Apply 2 coats of curing and sealing compound (one coat if initially membrane cured) to floors scheduled to receive floor coverings. 3.07 HARDENER AND DUSTPROOFER A. Apply 2 coats of hardener/dustproofer to Stockroom floors in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. rl 1. As the second coat is drying, wait for the uniform appearance of white crystals, flood the floor with water, and buff with a commercial floor buffer using a 3MTM or similar abrasive pad. Continue buffing until the floor acquires a patina or polish and the whiteness is gone. .a 3.08 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work, anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. 3.09 GROUTING A. Grout structural base and bearing plates as soon as practical and before significant load is placed on 1 bearing members. Mix, place and cure grout in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 5 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE M 3.10 JOINTS J A. Control Joints in Slabs -On -Grade 1. Crack control joints shall be wet sawed within 4 to 8 hours of slab pour to a depth of 1/4 of the r't overall slab depth. 2. Clean resulting joint and reapply curing protection to freshly cut surfaces. B. Construction Joints in Slabs -On -Grade 1. Saw cut construction joints as specified above for control joints and reapply curing protection to r} I cut surfaces. u 2. Provide suitable grooves and keyways as shown on the Drawings. 3. Locate joints as shown on the Structural Drawings. C. Perimeter Isolation for Slabs -On -Grade and Steel Columns lJ 1. Install fiber board joint material full depth of slab where interior slabs -on -grade abutt walls unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Install building paper full depth of slab where interior slabs -on -grade abutt columns. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing laboratory shall make the following tests: I . Perform compression strength tests on concrete specimens taken from the forms immediately after L j placing. Perform a compression strength test for each pour in excess of 4 c.y. of each class of concrete but in no case less than 1 (one) test per day. Make 1 (one) additional set of cylinders for each additional 50 c.y. (or fraction thereof) of concrete in excess of the first 25 c.y. of concrete - poured in a day. Each set of specimens shall consist of 4 standard 6 x 12 cylinders taken in u accordance with ASTM C31-96. Tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C39-96. a. Test one cylinder at 7 days, 2 cylinders at 28 days, and hold the remainder if further tests are required. The average of the 28 day cylinders shall meet or exceed the 28 day design strength. b. In cases where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified or the strength of the laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet the requirements of ACI 318, Section 5.6, for evaluation of concrete strength, the Architect shall have the right to order compressive and flexural test specimens taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM C42-94, load test according to ACI 318, Chapter 20, or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength of the concrete. Such test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. n 2. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143 -90a. Furnish slump cone at the site. Perform a minimum of I test per set of cylinders. a. Concrete pumped -in-place shall be tested for slump at the time of placement at the discharge end. j b. Concrete exhibiting slump exceeding that specified shall be rejected and removed from the site as directed by the testing laboratory. 3. Perform air -entrainment tests in accordance with ASTM C173 -94a, or ASTM C231-97 as j I applicable. Furnish and maintain equipment for testing air content at the site. Perform a U minimum of 1 (one) test per set of cylinders of air entrained concrete. Concrete samples tested for slump shall not be used for air -entrainment tests. 4. Test concrete temperature hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, when 80 degrees F. and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 5. Perform flatness and levelness tests in accordance with ASTM El 155-96. Perform 1 (one) test (flatness and levelness) for each 10,000 s.f. of concrete placed but not less than 1 (one) test for each scale of allowable floor variation specified. Test areas shall be selected at the Architects discretion. Tests shall be conducted within 24 hours of slab placement. Results of these tests shall be made available not later than the end of the day the tests were performed. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, foregoing tests indicate concrete strengths below those required, or visual defects indicate concrete of poor quality has been placed, additional tests shall be made and �r reported as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Until this portion of the work is completed, remove water in the areas of construction that may interfere with the proper performance of the Work. Provide sumps, pumps, wellpoints, electric power and attendance required; furnish on a 24-hour basis, if necessary. 6 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. No concrete shall be placed without the permission of the Architect when the outside air temperature is above 80 degrees F. or is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. If permission is granted, the concrete shall be placed and cured according to the requirements of ACI 305R-89 "Hot Weather Concreting". C. During freezing and near -freezing weather, concrete shall be protected from freezing, and minimum temperatures shall be maintained for curing in accordance with ACI 306.1-87, "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting". Do not place on frozen ground and in forms containing ice, snow or frost. END OF SECTION 7 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES '--' A. Mortar and grout for: 1. Brick, concrete unit masonry, and stone veneer. l 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: For installation. I 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description of cement, color pigments, and lime. 2. Samples: Colored mortar samples for exterior masonry work exposed to view for preliminary selection. 3. Test Reports: Test reports on cement and mortar indicating compliance with specified standards. 4. Mortar Design Mix: For property specification and off-site preblended dry mortar (each type if more than one type used) submit a laboratory design mix conforming to the specification requirements utilizing the materials proposed for the work. a. Indicate mix design proportions by weight of all materials. �1 b. Indicate laboratory tests for compression strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C109-95. 5. Grout Design Mix: Submit aggregate test reports and mix designs to the Architect and the Structural Engineer in duplicate for approval at least 14 days prior to placing grout. Submit mix designs with appropriate historical data required by ACI 301 to meet minimum strength requirements. Do NOT begin grout production until approval of mix designs has been received. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing CMU and Brick Masonry Mortar I . Determine or certify proportions of ingredients for mix design by independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C270-97. 1 2. Test mix design prior to beginning construction of CMU and brick masonry walls. 3. The 7 day compressive strength test of the laboratory mix design must exceed the specified 28 day design compressive strength. 4. Prepare mortar test cubes in accordance with ASTM C270-97 for Laboratory Tests. B. Testing CMU Grout 1. Determine or certify proportions of ingredients for mix design by independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C476-95, for each type of grout. 2. Test mix design prior to beginning construction of CMU walls. 3. The 7 day compressive strength test of the laboratory mix design must exceed the specified 28 day design compressive strength. 4. Prepare rectangular test specimens in accordance with Article 3.03 of this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING L� A. Accept delivery of material only in an undamaged condition; handle and store above ground and under C weather -tight cover. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excessive temperature changes. Stockpile aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials. Remove damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when so determined from the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-97, Type I, gray and white non -staining. Masonry cement is NOT allowed. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207-91(1992), Type S, containing no air entrainment. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144-93, natural sand. For joints 1/4" thick, or less, 100 percent shall pass No. 8 sieve and 95 percent shall pass the No. 16 sieve. KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT D. Color Pigments: Pure, chemically inert, unfading and alkali -fast, inorganic, finely ground and specially prepared color pigments, or aggregates for use in masonry mortars "True Tone Mortar Colors" (Davis Colors, a Subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc.); "DCS Mortar Colors" (DCS Color & Supply Co., Inc.); "Concentrated Mortar Colors" (Solomon Grind -Chem Service, Inc.). 1. Colors a. Brick 1) Base and Bands: Refer to Color Legend on Drawings. 2) Field: Natural, no color pigment added. 3) Existing (if any): Match mortar color. b. Concrete Block: Natural, no color pigment added. C. Stone Veneer: Match mortar color. Lj D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404-95; use of blast furnace slag is not permitted. Maximum coarse aggregate size, 3/8". n E. Water: Clean, free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies and organic materials. F. Admixtures shall not be used in mortar, unless approved by the Architect. 2.02 MORTAR SPECIFICATION A. Mortar Proportions by Volume Specification: ASTM C270-97 and as modified herein: Mortar Portland Hydrated Lime Aggregate Ratio (Measured in Damp, Loose Conditions) M 1 1/4 Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than the sum of the separate volumes of cementitious materials. S 1 Over 1/4 to 1/2 N 1 Over 1/2 to 1-1/4 B. Mortar Property Specifications: ASTM C270-97 and as modified herein. Average laboratory tested compressive strengths at 28 days, ASTM C109-95; Portland cement -lime mortars: Type Compressive Water Retention Air Content Aggregate Ratio Strength Min. % Max. % (Measured in Damp, Loose Conditions M 2500 psi 75 12 Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3-1/2 times S 1800 psi 75 12 the sum of the separate volumes of cementitious materials. N 750 psi 75 12 2.03 MIXING A. Mix cementitious materials and aggregate in a mechanical batch mixer for at least 3 minutes and not over 5 minutes with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency. Re -temper mortar to replace water lost by evaporation, but not after mortar has begun to set. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. B. For colored Portland cement mortar use the minimum quantity of color pigments to produce desired result. Premix color with the Portland cement in large controlled quantities. 2.04 MIXES - GROUT FILL A. Grout fill is for concrete masonry unit bond beams, lintels, and reinforced cells with reinforcing bars and embedded plates. 1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2. Slump: 6" minimum, 8" maximum. 3. Use coarse grout when grout space is greater than 4" in both directions. 4. Coarse and fine grout: Conform to ASTM C476-95. 5. Do not use air -entrainment admixtures. KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 II L1 h n Lj I ij n C C C F! L C C C C C r, 11 SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MORTAR USES A. Type M: Walls in contact with earth and walls below grade. B. Type S: Load-bearing walls and exterior walls above grade. C. Type N: Interior nonload-bearing walls. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 04200 for installation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General requirement for testing shall be as specified in Section 01410. Specific test and inspection requirements shall be as specified herein. B. Test mortar in accordance with ASTM C780-96 1. Perform tests on mixed mortars for each type of mortar and for each day mortar is used to determine consistency in compressive strength and not compliance with laboratory compressive strength requirements. 2. For off-site prepared preblend dry mortars, select random dry samples from each delivery, prepare laboratory controlled samples, and test for design compressive strength and consistency in compressive strength. 3. Test each specimen sample at 3 days, 7 days and 28 days. C. Test the water-soluble alkali content of the cement used in the mortar in accordance with ASTM C 114-97, or suitable certification furnished by the manufacturer of the cement, to establish that total water-soluble alkali content does not exceed 0.05 percent of the alkalies present. D. Grout Tests 1. Prepare and test 3" x 3" x 6" rectangular grout specimens in accordance with ASTM C1019 -89a(1993). 2. A 7 day strength test and two 28 day strength tests will be required for every 30 or less cubic yards of each type of grout placed each day. A strength test shall be taken as the average of the strengths of two 3" x 3" x 6" rectangular grout specimens made from the same sample of grout. 3. One slump test in accordance with ASTM C143 -90a will be taken from each set of test specimens. E. Strength level of grout will be considered satisfactory if the averages of 2 consecutive 28 day strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual 28 day strength test result falls below the specified ultimate compressive strength by 500 psi or more. END OF SECTION KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C C, PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES �--' A. Concrete block masonry materials. B. Brick masonry materials. C. Stone masonry materials. D. Masonry ties, anchors and reinforcement. E. Membrane flashing and weeps. SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Fill for masonry bond beams, lintels, and reinforced unit masonry is specified in Section 04100. B. Loose steel lintels are specified in Section 05500. n C. Hollow metal door and borrowed light frames occurring in masonry walls are specified in Section 08114. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. CJ1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for ties, anchors, joint reinforcement, and joint materials. 2. Samples a. Furnish 5 bricks of each type proposed, through range of color. b. At least one brick shall represent the worst condition that brick delivered to the site and incorporated in the work will exhibit. C. Furnish one smooth faced block face shell. 3. Test Reports a. Reports on prism tests for moisture -cured concrete masonry units. b. For each type of brick indicating: 1) Compressive strength. 2) 24-hour cold water absorption. [U 3) 5 -hour boil absorption. 4) Saturation coefficient. 5) Initial rate of absorption (suction). C 11 g7, C. Submit field test reports for tensile bond strength (between face brick and mortar) in exterior walls and compressive strength of bearing walls. 4. Certification: Written certification that ties, anchors and joint reinforcement, comply with requirements specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules regulations and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. B. The faces of unit masonry to be exposed shall be of uniform texture and free of chips, cracks and other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished work. C. Mock -Up: Before starting exterior masonry work, construct a sample wall panel minimum 4 feet long and 3 feet high incorporating all exterior masonry units specified, and representing the proposed color range (brick), texture, bond, mortar color and joint treatment, and workmanship for approval by the Architect. 1. Erect sample panel facing Southwest or West in direct sunlight. 2. Clean sample panel prior to review. 3. Panel shall not be a part of the finished work, but shall remain at the Project site protected during the work and removed when directed, or upon completion of the work. D. Where masonry construction is indicated on Drawings and where required by code to have fire resistant construction, provide masonry materials and methods in manner to obtain the necessary rating. CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A A. Concrete Masonry Units SECTION 04200 -� Loadbearing: ASTM C90-97, Type I. UNIT MASONRY 2. Nonloadbearing: ASTM C129-97. ' 4 3. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 4. A. Deliver and handle materials to prevent damage. Store face brick and packaged material above ground on f—t a. Standard smooth face: 8" x 16" wood pallets or blocking and protect from the weather until used. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable b. Thicknesses shall be as shown or required by code. material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1) Galvanized steel plate shall conform to ASTM A123 -89a and galvanized steel wire 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Brick Masonry Units: ASTM C216-97, Grade SW, Type FBS A. When the outside air temperature is below 40 degrees F., or expected to fall below 40 degrees F., comply New Brick Selections: Refer to Color Legend on Drawings. with recommended practice for cold weather masonry construction set forth by the International Masonry Brick Infill: Match existing. penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 4 exposed threads. Industry All -Weather Council and BIA Technical Notes 1, (March, 1992). r 1 B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in an ambient air finished work. attachment. temperature of 99 degrees F. in the shade with a relative humidity of less than 50 percent. �► J PART 2 -PRODUCTS 5. 2.01 MATERIALS ;~J A. Concrete Masonry Units LJ 1. Loadbearing: ASTM C90-97, Type I. D. Ties, Anchors and Reinforcing 2. Nonloadbearing: ASTM C129-97. ' 4 3. Weight Classification required. 4. a. Standard Weight: Not less than 125 pcf. Face Appearance and Face Size (Nominal) providing 3-5/8" vertical adjustment and 3/16" diameter galvanized steel triangular tie of a. Standard smooth face: 8" x 16" suitable lengths for brick veneer to metal stud attachment, No. DW- IOHS (Hohmann & b. Thicknesses shall be as shown or required by code. 1) Galvanized steel plate shall conform to ASTM A123 -89a and galvanized steel wire shall conform to ASTM A641-92, Class 3. B. Brick Masonry Units: ASTM C216-97, Grade SW, Type FBS J 1. New Brick Selections: Refer to Color Legend on Drawings. 2. Brick Infill: Match existing. penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 4 exposed threads. 3. Provide solid brick units with finished ends where cores of brick would be exposed to view in the galvanized steel triangular tie of suitable lengths for brick veneer to steel column finished work. attachment. 4. Provide special shapes where necessary. 5. Faces of brick units shall be free of cracks and other imperfections detracting from their appearance when viewed from a distance of 10 feet for rough brick and 12 feet for smooth brick. i1 C. Stone Masonry Units: Provide random sizes and colors which resemble existing field stone, as required LJ for infill walls. D. Ties, Anchors and Reinforcing 1. Adjustable Wall Ties ' 4 a. 3/16" diameter galvanized steel wire ASTM A82 -95a, 2 piece, rectangular type, length as !� required. b. Screw -on type consisting of 14 gauge galvanized steel anchor plate with strap offset providing 3-5/8" vertical adjustment and 3/16" diameter galvanized steel triangular tie of f� suitable lengths for brick veneer to metal stud attachment, No. DW- IOHS (Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.) 1) Galvanized steel plate shall conform to ASTM A123 -89a and galvanized steel wire shall conform to ASTM A641-92, Class 3. 2) Provide corrosion resistant cadmium plated fasteners for securing anchor plates to steel studs through sheathing. Fasteners shall conform to ASTM C954 -96a, except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer. Length as required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 4 exposed threads. C. Weld -on type consisting of 1/4" diameter galvanized steel wire, 9" long, with offset for galvanized steel triangular tie of suitable lengths for brick veneer to steel column 4 attachment. 1) Galvanized steel wire shall conform to ASTM A641-82(1991), Class 3. d. Refer to Subparagraph 6 below for combination joint reinforcement/tie system. Corrugated Metal Ties: Hot -dipped galvanized steel ASTM A153-95, B-2, 1.5 oz., minimum 7/8" wide, 22 gage and 7 long. Rigid Anchors: 1/4" thick, galvanized steel bars ASTM A123 -89a, 1" wide, with 3" bends at ends, 24" long (For bonding intersecting walls). n KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 U IN 1-' SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 4. ReinforcingBars: Billet steel deformed bars shall conform t - o ASTM A615 96a, Grade 60. Locate in walls and tie as indicated on Drawings. 5. Joint Reinforcement: Ladder, or truss type, fabricated from cold drawn steel wire ASTM A82 -95a, galvanized ASTM A153-95, B-2,1.5 oz., minimum No. 9 gage deformed side rods with 9 gage cross -rods, or diagonals, at 16" o.c. Width shall be 2" less than wall thickness. Provide prefabricated corners and tee sections. Provide 3 side rods for cavity walls. Cross -rods and diagonals for cavity walls shall be crimped to form drips. 6. Joint Reinforcement/Tie System: Joint reinforcement as specified above with galvanized eye section (receiver) welded to reinforcement at 16" o.c. and adjustable galvanized pintle section (tie). E. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Expansion or Control Joint Filler Strips: Strips shall be cross -shaped in section, wide flange type, resistant to oils and solvents. a. Expansion joints shall be closed cell neoprene conforming to ASTM D1056 -97a, Class RE41. b. Control joints shall be rubber conforming to ASTM D2000-96, 2AA-805 with a durometer hardness of 80 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240-97. C. Where sash block are not available, provide closed cell neoprene sheet material C conforming to ASTM D 1056-97a, Class RE41 x full width of masonry unit less depth of joint sealant and backer rod. 2. Membrane Flashing: 30 mil thick plastic flashing, "Nervastral HD 30" (Nervastral, Inc.); "BFG Vinyl Water Barrier', 30 mil thickness (The B.F. Goodrich General Products Company) "Wascoseal Type 30" (York Mfg. Inc.). 3. Bituminous Plastic Cement shall conform to ASTM D4586-93, Type I. 4. Weeps a. For Building Walls With Cavities: non-organic rope type, minimum 12" long. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION '—' A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which unit masonry work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not f 1 proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. {1 ► 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Review installation procedures and coordinate with other work that must be integrated with masonry. 3.03 GENERAL ERECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all masonry construction aligned, plumb and true in required layout, making straight level courses, unless otherwise specifically indicated. Construct masonry to full thickness as shown with masonry units of sizes as noted and specified, using whole units wherever possible. Cut masonry neatly by power -saw to obtain sharp edges without damage, as approved for providing required bond pattern and proper fit at all adjoining items. Build -in items furnished by other trades, and leave accurate a openings necessary for subsequent installation of other work, in a manner to maintain required strength and appearance of masonry construction. 1. Fill solidly around conduit and sleeves passing through masonry, with mortar. 2. Build -in all loose steel lintels, provide minimum 8" bearing and bed lintels in mortar. 3. Provide threaded steel anchors where indicated to be built into masonry construction for attachment of work by other trades. Conform to requirements of ASTM A307-94, and include nuts with hardened washers where required, as approved. Provide minimum 1/2" shank diameter by 10" length with pigtail end, where size and type are not indicated on Drawings. All anchors shall be hot -dip galvanized where used in exterior -exposed construction. 4. Grout hollow metal frames in masonry walls solidly with mortar. Perform grouting without clogging holes, boxes, and spaces, required for the proper installation, and operation of hardware. 5. Mortar solid all collar joints between brick and concrete block masonry units in composite walls systems. 6. Do not install flashing and other materials between brick and block units in composite walls system. Brick and block shall be bonded together by mortar. CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C. 3.04 A. SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY Cold Weather Construction 1. Comply with recommended practice for cold weather masonry construction set forth by the International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council and as specified herein. a. When the temperature of dry masonry units is below 20 degrees F., they shall be heated so they are above 40 degrees F. at their time of use. Overheating shall be avoided. b. Masonry shall be placed only on sound, unfrozen foundations free of ice and snow. C. All newly completed masonry shall be maintained above 32 degrees F. for at least 48 hours where Type I Portland cement is used in the mortar and grout, and for at least 24 hours where Type III Portland cement is used. Hot Weather Construction When ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or 90 degrees F. with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, perform masonry construction in accordance with the following requirements: a. Store materials in a cool, shaded location. b. Cover aggregate stockpiles with plastic sheet tom retard the evaporation of moisture. C. Cool reinforcing steel, metal accessories, wheelbarrows, mixers and mortar boards by flushing with water. d. Wet high -suction brick. e. Increase water content of mortar and grout as needed, without compromising the required strength. f. Spread mortar beds no more than 48" ahead of masonry and set units within one minute of spreading mortar. g. Cover walls to retard evaporation. h. Schedule work to avoid hottest part of the day. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Brick Masonry 1. Aesthetic Characteristics Brick Bonds 1) Field: 1/3 running bond. 2) Base: 1/3 running bond. 3) Bands: Single course, end-to-end. 4) Brick Infill: Match existing. 2. Lay brick masonry units with mortars of types and strengths specified. Install each masonry unit with full mortar coverage on all adjoining ends, backs, and bearing surfaces, as required to provide completely solid bed joints, head joints and collar joints. Mortar shall not be slushed into joints between units after laying. Keep voids clean and unobstructed of mortar and debris, including expansion joints, control joints, chases and similar spaces. 3. Lay brick masonry units with solid mortar joints of uniform 3/8" width, unless otherwise shown. While setting mortar is still damp, firmly compact as required to obtain uniform concave -tooled joints at exposed surfaces. 4. For cavity walls lay brick in wythes with cavity as shown. Build in flashing. Turn flashing up 6" at ends to form dams above and below openings in walls. Lap ends of flashing sheets 6" but not more than 12" and cement„ together. Keep cavity clear of mortar. Provide weep holes at 24 o.c., unless otherwise shown, by inserting a rope wick in bottom of head joints above flashing. Weeps shall be cut flush with exterior face of brick and be laid horizontally at the bottom of the cavity fully extended. Keep weep holes, ties and area above flashing free of mortar droppings. 5. Mortar solid all collar joints between brick and concrete block masonry units in composite walls system. Do not install flashing in this system. B. Concrete Block Masonry I . Hollow units shall be laid with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Webs shall also be bedded in courses of piers columns, and pilasters, and in the starting course on footings and solid foundation walls. Solid units shall be laid with full head and bed joints. 2. Lay concrete masonry units with solid mortar joints of uniform 3/8" width and tool exposed joints and below grade joints concave as specified above for brick masonry; other concealed joints unexposed to view may be cut flush. C. Stone Masonry 1. Lay stone units as specified for brick, except joint widths shall match existing mortar joints between stone units. Match overall appearance of adjacent stone wall surface, insofar as size and color distribution is concerned. n LJ n� u [' iJ r1 Li U D, jl �I eu �7 0 U KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2 C El r C C C C C c C SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. E. General Mortar Uses 1. For Types M, S and N mortars, refer to BIA 8A, September 1988, and NCMA "TEK" Series No. 2013, 1989. 3.05 PLACING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide joint reinforcement in horizontal joints of masonry construction at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise shown. Place reinforcement to provide continuous reinforcement with corner and "tee" sections at wall intersections, and splice reinforcement together by lapping side bars a minimum of 6" at adjoining ends of lengths. Stop reinforcement 2" away from both sides of vertical control joints. At openings in walls, place additional reinforcement in bed joint of courses above and below openings and extend at least 24" beyond each side of opening. Anchor ties shall be spaced to support not more than 2 s.f. of wall area. B. Where flexible anchorage to steel framing is required, secure anchor plate with strap offset to steel framing to allow for the insertion of triangular, or web ties. Anchor ties shall be spaced to support not more than 2 s.f. of wall area. C. Where masonry partitions supported on slabs on grade abut masonry walls supported on foundations and footings, provide an expansion joint at the face of the structurally supported wall and anchor the partition with adjustable wall ties spaced 24" o.c. vertically. D. Use corrugated ties specified for anchoring stone veneer to concrete block back-up. Anchor ties shall be spaced to support not more than 2 s.f. of wall area. E. Do not use metal reinforcing and ties having loose rust and other coatings, including ice, which will reduce or destroy bond. 3.06 PLACING VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned and secured against displacement from locations specified on the Drawings. B. Reinforcement shall be positioned prior to grouting. C. Placement of reinforcement shall meet the tolerances specified in the governing code. 3.07 CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Construct control joints for concrete block walls using concrete sash block, and space control joints not over 30 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Construct expansion joints for brick masonry walls using soft joint, sealant filled. Space expansion joints as specified above for concrete block walls and elsewhere in accordance with BIA 18A, December, 1991. C. Control joints and expansion joints shall be free of mortar droppings. 3.08 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, and work supported by, concrete unit masonry. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. 3.09 JOINING OF WORK IN NEW MASONRY A. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set and totally set, the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned, roughed and lightly wetted to obtain satisfactory bond. Loose masonry units and mortar shall be removed. B. If it is necessary to "stop off' a horizontal run of masonry, it shall be done only by racking back one half a unit length in each course. Toothing will be permitted only for the joining of new masonry to existing masonry. 3.10 BOND BEAMS A. Masonry bond beams shall be formed of units having the cells filled solidly with 3,000 psi concrete and provided with reinforcing bars scheduled. i 1. Reinforcing shall overlap a minimum of 48 bar diameters at splices. 2. Non-structural bond beams and reinforcing shall be interrupted at expansion joints and control joints. 3. Structural bond beams shall continue through control joints. UKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 a SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY n 1 3.11 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Unit masonry construction shall be within the following tolerances: n 1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises: a. 1/4" in 10 feet 1 , b. 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20 feet install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. U� n 2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines: Point -up joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly a. 1/4" in any story or 20 feet maximum. b. 1/2" in 40 feet or more. nn f' 3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal reveals and L._i other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4" in any bay or 20 feet. b. 1/2" in 40 feet or more. iJ 4. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls and partitions: a. 1/2" in any bay or 20 feet. b. 3/4" in 40 feet or more. flush off loose mortar and dirt. Scrub down wall with stiff fiber brush and a solution of 1/2 cup of 5. Maximum variation in cross-section dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on Drawings: a. Minus 1/4" by washing off cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean, pressurized water. Acid cleaning of masonry will NOT be permitted. Verify cleaning procedure with unit masonry and mortar b. Plus 1/2" 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prism Tests: Perform prism tests on Type I concrete masonry units in accordance with ASTM E447-97. 1. Tests shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory. 2. Before construction, a set of 5 prisms shall be constructed under the observation of the approved testing agency. 3. During construction, provide 2 sets of 3 units for every 5,000 s.f. of wall area that requires full inspection. a. Hollow concrete masonry units, 3/8" mortar joints, grouted with 3,000 psi masonry grout. b. Hollow concrete masonry units with 3/8" mortar joints. rj 3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained and otherwise damaged, {� and if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and 1 , install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. U� B. During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for installation application of caulking and sealant compounds. C. During the progress of the work, wipe off excess mortar as the work progresses. Dry brush at the end of each day's work. D. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, dry clean to remove large particles of mortar using wood paddles and scrapers. Use chisel or wire brush if required. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Scrub down wall with stiff fiber brush and a solution of 1/2 cup of trisodium phosphate and 1/2 cup of household detergent dissolved in 1 (one) gallon of water. Rinse walls by washing off cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean, pressurized water. Acid cleaning of masonry will NOT be permitted. Verify cleaning procedure with unit masonry and mortar manufacturers before beginning. E. At the conclusion of masonry work, remove scaffolding and equipment used in the work, clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove same from premises. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction against wetting by rain, snow and ground water, and against soilage and intermixture with earth and other types of materials. B. During erection, at the end of each day's work, during a shutdown, and during adverse weather conditions, cover tops of walls with strong non -staining waterproof membrane. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. Extend cover 24" down both sides and secure in place. I I'D KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 D SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 1. WALLS LEFT UNPROTECTED OR IMPROPERLY PROTECTED WILL BE SUBJECT TO REJECTION, SUBSEQUENT REMOVAL, AND REPLACEMENT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. C. Protect masonry work from damage. Brace walls as necessary during construction. Protect against staining. D. Protect masonry work from excessive changes in temperature when protective shelters are removed. Changes in temperature of the masonry shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 degrees F. in any 1 (one) hour, and 50 degrees F. in any 24-hour period. END OF SECTION 7 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 El SECTION 05120 J�1 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel elements of the structural steel frame essential to support the design loads. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Anchor bolts and embeds for anchoring structural steel to concrete are installed under Section 03300. B. Anchor bolts and embeds for anchoring structural steel to masonry are installed under Section 04200. CA. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: For grouting of base plates, and installation of anchor bolts and embeds for anchoring structural steel to concrete. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: For installation of anchor bolts and embeds for anchoring structural steel to masonry. C. Section 05210 - Steel Joists. D. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. C1.04 E. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Description of shop primer. 2. Shop Drawings: Complete fabrication and erection details and schedules. a. Shop Drawings shall have been thoroughly checked by fabricator before being submitted for review. Review is precautionary measure only and shall not relieve fabricator of full responsibility for correctness of materials, sizes, dimensions and details. b. If structural sections and other details indicated on Drawings cannot be readily obtained, substitution of sections and other details of equal strength which conform to requirements of design may be made only if approved. C. Fabrication shall not proceed until shop drawings have been reviewed. Fabrication, assembly and erection shall conform to reviewed shop drawings. d. Shop Drawings shall be signed by a registered structural engineer, registered in the state where the project is located_. �1 ( l� 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: At least 5 years of successful experience in fabrication of structural steel similar to the size and difficulty of this Project. B. Erector Qualifications: At least 5 years of successful experience in the erection of structural steel. C. Comply with AISC Manual, Ninth Edition 1989. 1. "Specification for Structural Steel Building - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design". D. Comply with AISC Manual Seventh Edition 1970. 1. "A Guide to the Shop Painting of Structural Steel". 2. "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel". E. "General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars for Structural Use", ASTM A6 -96b. F. Welding shall comply with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code - Steel" AWS D1.1-92. G. "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High Strength Steel Bolts" as approved by the 1.06 Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling. Identify pieces with suitable mark conforming to erection drawings. B. Deliver structural steel to the Project site and store to avoid damage and distortion of material. Material damaged due to mishandling shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not perform welding below 0 degrees F. Preheat material to be welded and maintain interpass temperatures as required. ', 1 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Take field measurements as required to verify and supplement dimensions shown on Drawings. 3.01 ERECTION B. SECTION 05120 �,J distorted or otherwise damaged; and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration. STRUCTURAL STEEL B. Confer with other trades and procure necessary templates and other information required to establish C. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using not less than the minimum fillet as specified PART 2 - PRODUCTS r� D. Provide anchor bolts and embedded plates for anchoring structural steel to supporting concrete and u 2.01 MATERIALS masonry as soon as possible. Furnish templates as required. A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36-96, and as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Structural Tubes: ASTM A500-93, Grade B. '--' C. Welding Electrodes: AWS Specifications, Serial Designation A233 (E-70). D. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325-97. n E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Threaded rod stock, ASTM A307-94. f� F. Shop Coat Paint: Fabricators standard rust -inhibiting primer containing no lead -bearing components and L, meeting current Federal and State regulations concerning lead in paint, and similar to #4080 Red Oxide Zinc Chromate Primer (Hentzen Coatings, Inc.); for interior, normally dry environment. -) 1. For more severe exposure than those specified above and for architecturally exposed steel, submit n proposed primer with shop drawings. U G. Bituminous Coating: ASTM D1187-97 asphalt emulsion. H. Welded Headed Studs: ASTM A108-95. 7. Bearing ends of columns and trusses shall be milled or sawed for true bearing on base and bearing u 2.02 FABRICATION A. Take field measurements as required to verify and supplement dimensions shown on Drawings. 3.01 ERECTION B. Material shall be properly marked and match -marked where field assembly is required. The sequence of �,J distorted or otherwise damaged; and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration. shipments shall be necessary as to expedite and minimize the field handling of material. B. Confer with other trades and procure necessary templates and other information required to establish C. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using not less than the minimum fillet as specified C. Burning shall not be used to form holes, enlarge holes or to otherwise modify connections. No member by AWS. shall be altered in field unless approved in writing by Engineer. D. Provide anchor bolts and embedded plates for anchoring structural steel to supporting concrete and ;J KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 masonry. Furnish detailed plans showing exact locations of all bolts to be built into concrete and masonry as soon as possible. Furnish templates as required. E. Connections 1. Field connections shall be bolted, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Field welded connections shall be used only where specifically shown on Drawings or with Structural Engineer's approval. 2. Shop connections may be welded or bolted with high strength bolts at fabricator's option. Shear connections shall be welded or bolted with high strength bolts. f� 3. High strength bolts shall be installed in strict compliance with AISC Specifications and ASTM L, requirements for installation of bolts. 4. Field and shop welds shall be by certified welders only. Certificates should be available for inspection by Architect. n 5. Connections not specifically shown shall fully develop critical load for member being connected. 6. Bolts where used shall have cut washers under nuts and no threads allowed to bear on parts being connected. 7. Bearing ends of columns and trusses shall be milled or sawed for true bearing on base and bearing plates. Rough bearing ends shall not be used. 2.03 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Steel shall be cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt and foreign matter before application of shop coat of paint. f j B. Paint structural steel with 1 (one) smooth coat of primer specified. Apply 2 coats on surfaces not accessible after erection. C. Shop coat shall result in a 2 mil (minimum) dry film thickness. D. Steel items to be embedded in concrete shall not receive shop coat. Steel to receive field welded connections of primary structural importance shall not receive shop coat of paint but shall be painted in field instead. E. Hand clean and solvent clean unpainted and damaged shop coat areas and touch-up with a compatible f -1 shop coat primer. F. Apply 2 heavy coats of bituminous coating to steel surfaces in contact with soil. +J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION u A. Material stored at the Project site shall not exceed design loads on structures so the members will not be distorted or otherwise damaged; and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration. B. Confer with other trades and procure necessary templates and other information required to establish number, size and location of holes or other details necessary for attachment of items to structural steel. C. Burning shall not be used to form holes, enlarge holes or to otherwise modify connections. No member shall be altered in field unless approved in writing by Engineer. 2 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 El El C C C C G C C C C SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL D. Temporary bracing throughout erection and construction shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of loads to which structure may be subjected including equipment and operation of same. Wherever piles of material, erection equipment and other loads are carried during erection, proper provisions shall be made to safely support these abnormal loads. E. Members shall be cut neat, square and should be erected true and flush without twists and open joints. Light drifting to draw holes together may be used. Reference should be made to codes and specifications listed in this Section under Quality Assurance which govern fabrication, details, erection and workmanship. Responsibility for errors in fabrication and for proper fitting of various members shall be assumed by the structural steel fabricator. F. Column bases shall be set on steel shims. Grouting of column bases is specified in Section 03300. G. Steel exposed to view shall be free of surface imperfections and ground off to true surfaces. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. H. Install welded headed studs to beams, as indicated, after steel deck has been installed. 3.02 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Testing laboratory will make inspections and perform tests in accordance with the following: 1. Verify that certification of welders is current (not older than 1 (one) year prior to time welding work is to be performed). 2. Visually inspect welds. In addition to visual inspections, where so shown on the Drawings, perform radiographic magnetic particle and ultrasonic inspections. Conform to the latest edition of American Welding Society Specifications. 3. Test shop bolted connections by checking at least 2 bolts per high strength bolted connection with a calibrated torque wrench for tension at least 5 percent higher than that shown, or as required by ASTM A325-97, by the method as outlined in the "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High Strength Steel Bolts". Tension after nuts are retorqued shall be at least equal to that shown, or as required by ASTM A325-97. 4. Test field bolted connections by checking at least 2 bolts of every second high strength bolted connection with a calibrated torque wrench for tension at least 5 percent higher than that shown, or as required by ASTM A325-97, by the method as outlined in the "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High Strength Steel Bolts". 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. After erection, bolts, field welds, and scratched and abraded areas shall be properly cleaned and touched - up with the same paint used for the shop coat. END OF SECTION PKKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS El PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel joists. B. Bridging. r_1 C. Joist accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS C A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Specifications and design data. 2. Shop Drawings: Show joist layout and layout of welded studs at composite joists, details of bearing, anchorage, bracing, etc. 3. Design Calculations: Submit calculations stamped by a licensed structural engineer who certifies that the joists have been designed in accordance with SJI standard specifications. a. This submittal is waived if fabricator is an SJI member, except submittals for special joists C and composite joists shown on the Drawings, and joists which require revisions due to increased mechanical loads and other loads shown on the Drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel joists shall be standard prefabricated units of a member manufacturer of the Steel Joist Institute. In lieu of the foregoing, nonmember manufacturers shall submit certification by independent Structural Engineer that the joists to be furnished conform to the Steel Joist Institute's Standard specification and load tables, and that composite joists have been designed for loads indicated. B. Steel joists manufactured of light gage cold -formed steel are acceptable for installations requiring field welds to the top chord member only when the Contractor submits certification that the type and method of field welding will satisfy structural requirements, including diaphragm shear requirements, for floor �1 and roof assemblies. IU C. The design, fabrication, and erection of steel joists shall be in accordance with the "Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Open Web Steel Joists/Longspan Steel Joists" of the Steel Joist Institute, latest edition, except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. f -t D. Welding shall comply with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code - Steel" AWS D1.1-92. ► �' 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING r -y A. Deliver, store and handle joists as recommended by SJI specifications. Exercise care to avoid damage through rough handling during hauling, unloading, storing and erecting. Joists shall not be dropped, and overstressed. Store joists above grade. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36-96, or high-strength steel as specified by Steel Joist Institute. B. Welding Electrodes: AWS Specifications. C. Accessories: Provide applicable accessories necessary to complete the installation, such as but not limited to side and end wall anchors, headers, horizontal or diagonal bridging, extended ends, full bottom chord extensions, joist bearing plates, anchor bolts, and government anchors. D. Shop Paint: Rust inhibitive paint complying with Steel Joist Institute Specifications of latest adoption. C+ 2.02 A. FABRICATION Fabricate joists in accordance with SJI standard specifications and load tables. Fabricate composite joists in accordance with joist manufacturer's design, and loads indicated. B. Top chords shall be designed as continuous members subject to direct and bending stresses, in Caccordance with the standard specifications. 1 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS C. Camber joists in accordance with the standard specifications. D. Steel joists shall be of type shown. E. Minimum bearing for joists shall be 2-1/2" on steel and 4" on masonry. Minimum bearing for composite joists shall be as indicated by joist manufacturer. F. Size, type, and spacing of bridging shall be in accordance with Steel Joist Institute recommendations, unless otherwise shown. G. Joints of steel joists shall be made by arc -welding. Connections at ends of members shall be proportioned to develop actual design stress but not less than 50 percent of the allowable design strength of the members. H. Ceiling extensions for joist ends shall be furnished where suspended ceilings occur below joists. I. Thoroughly clean joists and accessories and apply a shop coat of paint specified to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.50 mils. Do not paint composite joists which receive welded headed studs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Field welded and bolted connections shall be in accordance with SJI standard specifications for type of joist used. B. Where joists are supported on steel members they shall be connected by welding unless otherwise shown. C. As soon as joists are erected they shall be permanently fastened in place and bridging completely installed before the application of loads. Bridging shall be continuous, and anchored to end walls and beams. D. After erection of joists touch-up welds and surfaces where shop paint has been abraded and where improperly applied, with same paint used for shop coat. E. Install welded headed studs to composite joists, as indicated by joist designer, after steel deck has been installed. F. Thoroughly clean rust from composite joists exposed to view, and field apply a coat of paint specified to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.50 mils. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900D n u r� ,i U n f+ u El 2 u KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 tJ SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK CPART 1 -GENERAL r-1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel roof and floor deck. B. Decking accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. C1.03 B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Description of decking and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Show decking layout, openings required for other parts of the Work, support of decking at openings and sheet metal accessories. C1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform with the following: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural (1980), and specifications. CMembers" 2. American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" D1.3-92. 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution". B. Welding operators employed to execute welding, shall be previously qualified by test as prescribed in the American Welding Society's "Standard Qualification Procedure" or by such other tests as governmental agencies having jurisdiction may prescribe. Welds shall be made only by operators who are qualified to 1 perform the type of work required, as evidenced by their passing the above prescribed tests. Tests i completed earlier than 12 months prior to their employment on the work shall not be acceptable. Assume �+ all costs in connection with operator certification. n 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING LA. Deliver, store and handle the metal decking to avoid damage. Store sheets and related decking materials so that they are not in contact with the ground, and so that they are properly supported, covered and kept ry dry. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed Lfrom the Project site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vulcraft Division, Nucor Corp. B. 2.02 Wheeling Corrugating Division, Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Co., Inc. MATERIALS A. Steel Sheets 1. Carbon steel sheets, ASTM A611-96, Grade C. 2. Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheets, ASTM A653-96, Grade A. B. Shop Finishes �? 1. For roof deck, oven cured prime coat standard with the deck manufacturer, and compatible with L fireproofing specified (if any). 2. For corrugated floor deck, zinc coating conforming with ASTM A653-96 and FS QQ-S-775d, Type 1, Class e. 2.03 DECK TYPES A. Corrugated Floor Deck: Fabricated of zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheets of size and gage shown on the Drawings; one of the following: 1 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 1. Composite floor deck "VL" (Vulcraft). 2. Tensilbond (Wheeling). 3. Units shall have 2" end laps and nesting side laps. B. Wide Rib Roof Deck: Fabricated of carbon steel sheets of size and gage shown on the Drawings; one of the following: 1. Type B (Vulcraft, a Division of Nucor Corp.). 2. Type BW (Wheeling Corrugating Division, Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Co., Inc.). 3. Structural diaphragm action shall be provided by the steel roof deck. The deck and its welded attachment to the structure shall resist working load shears as shown on the Drawings, with a safety factor not less than 2.25 to 1. a. Heavier gage deck requiring less extensive diaphragm welding to resist the prescribed shears may be substituted subject to the Architect's approval and providing there is no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Units shall have 2" end laps and nesting side laps. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet metal accessories shall be of the same material and finish as the deck, unless otherwise shown or specified. Sheet metal accessories include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Hanger slots and strips. 2. Transition plates. 3. Cover plates for gaps not covered by deck units and to cover welding access holes. 4. Closure plates at edge of deck, where required. 5. Sump pans at roof drains (14 gage). B. Welding washers are required for 24 gauge and lighter sheets; furnished by deck supplier. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the supporting work and conditions under which metal decking is to be erected and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the metal decking and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, final Shop Drawings and erection layouts. Place decking units on the supporting steel, align and adjust to final position before permanently fastening. Unless otherwise shown, units shall span 3 or more support spacings. B. Side lap fastening by welding or screws, is required at panel laps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated. Unless otherwise shown, minimum side lap fastening shall be by welding, at 3 feet o.c. for roof deck and 5 feet o.c. for floor deck. C. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown. D. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units and to cover welding access holes. E. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. F. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12" o.c. with at least 1 (one) weld at each corner. Cut opening in roof sump bottom to accommodate drain size indicated. G. Touch -Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. 1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. 3. In areas where shop -painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces. r u n LJ n Li 11 'I u It n U 11 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 E SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All welds and side lap fasteners shall be inspected by a qualified testing agency prior to touch-up painting. END OF SECTION 3 KKE0900D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C SECTION 05400 LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING L PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Ell C C C El C A. Nonbearing steel studs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard: For 20 gage and lighter nonbearing steel studs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Product information and installation instructions for each item of lightgage framing and accessories. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned and not detailed in manufacturer's product data. a. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for proper installation. b. Include design calculations for all exterior wall and soffit systems developed by a professional engineer employed by the lightgage metal framing supplier and signed by that engineer, who is registered in the state where the Project is located. Indicate locations, materials, sizes, gages, spacing and fastening. 1) Framing members, accessories, and fastenings indicated on the Structural Drawings are minimum sizes and maximum spacings only, and are subject to change in accordance with the lightgage metal framing engineer's final design. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs in accordance with AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". B. Design Criteria 1. Wind loads in accordance with the governing state or local Building Code. C. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire -resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. D. For interior, full height, partition framing attaching to the underside of structure, ensure compliance with UL2079 for cyclic movement. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles; fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protected with suitable waterproof coverings if stored outdoors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. For Steel Framing 1. Clark Steel Framing 2. Consolidated Steel, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Unimast, Inc. B. For Accessories 1. Steel framing manufacturers specified above 2. The Steel Network, Inc. EKKE0301 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2.02 SYSTEMS A. B. 2.03 A. 2.04 it SECTION 05400 Li LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING General: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, and as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. Manufacturer's standard non-bearing steel studs of size, shape and gage as determined by manufacturer's registered engineer. MATERIALS For 16 -gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A653-96, A570-96, or A611-96. For 18 -gage or lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A653-96, A570-96, or A611-96. Finishes 1. Provide galvanized finish complying with ASTM A653-96 for minimum G-60 coating on metal framing and components, for exterior wall and roof applications. 2. Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop -applied red -oxide, zinc -chromate, or other similar rust -inhibitive primer, for interior framing. FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage and distortion. B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify Contractor in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations and as specified herein. B. Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. 1. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or powder -driven fasteners, or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. 2. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing and as required for non -plumb walls, warped surfaces and similar requirements. 3. Where stud system abuts structural columns and walls including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners or supporting structure. 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls and partitions are indicated to support work requiring attachment to the wall and partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case. 5. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. 6. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4'-6" o.c. unless design requires stricter spacing. Fasten at each intersection. C. Field Painting: Touch-up shop -applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION KKE0301 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 `! LJ n 15 n LJ C SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS EPART 1 - GENERAL C C C El C C C C iM C 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, and plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other Sections of these Specifications; including but not limited to: 1. Pipe bollards 2. Loose lintels 3. Channel frames 4. Stairs and ladders B. Fasteners. C. Protective primers and coatings. D. Grout for installation of materials and products specified herein. E. Prefabricated metal products specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Material description and installation instructions for products. 2. Shop Drawings: Layout and detail of each miscellaneous metal item shown and specified. 3. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete and masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver iron and steel fabrications to the Project site and store to avoid damage and distortion of materials. Material damaged due to mishandling shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Identify pieces with suitable mark for easy location. C. Deliver products in their original wrappings or cartons clearly marked for identification and bearing manufacturers name, and model or part number if applicable. Store protected from damage and the elements. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36-96. B. Steel Plates to be Bent or Formed Cold: ASTM A203-93. C. Cold -finished Steel Bars: ASTM A108-95. D. Steel Pipe: Welded or seamless, ASTM A53-96, black and hot dipped galvanized. E. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed ASTM A500-93, or hot -rolled ASTM A501-93. F. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653-96. G. Checkered Plate: FS QQ-F-461 C (1), Class 1. H. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307-94, Grade A, galvanized. I. Welding Electrodes: AWS Specifications. J. Ferrous Metal Primer: SSPC 13-64; FS TT -P-86, Types II; FS TT -P-615 Type II; as appropriate for the environmental conditions and compatible with finish painting systems specified. K. Galvanized Primer: FS TT -P -641d. L. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion ASTM D1187-97. M. Hydraulic Cement: "Porok" (Hallemite Company) "Rocktite" (Hartline Products Co. Inc.); "Five Star Instant Grout" (U.S. Grout Corporation); or "Dam -It" (Euclid Chemical Co.). N. Prefabricated Steel Treads and Landings: Welded steel bar grating with closed ends, plain bearing surface and bent checkered plate nosings, type GW (McNichols Co.); or approved substitution. I . Bearing bar size as required by design. 2. Tread and landing sizes as shown on the Drawings. 3. Factory applied temporary coating for interior applications. 4. Galvanized for exterior applications. PKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 X SECTION 05500 u METAL FABRICATIONS nn 'I 2.02 METAL FABRICATIONS Li A. General M 1. Fabricate and assemble loose items in the shop and, if necessary, mark to ensure proper installation at the Project site. Disassemble for shipment only to the extent required by shipping limitations. 2. Ease exposed edges of steel shapes. 3. Join parts with hairline contact, flush and smooth with adjacent surfaces, using concealed welds �J �J and fasteners where possible. Where exposed fastenings are unavoidable, countersink screws and bolts. Grind exposed weld areas smooth to match and blend with finished surfaces. 4. Weld in accordance with the recommendations of the AWS. a 5. Exterior steel and iron fabrications shall be hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication, unless size is impractical, in which case individual components shall be galvanized. B. Metal Railings n 1. Provide railings of design and dimensions shown, located where shown or required for safety. I Fabricate with flush welded joints and fittings for bends, wall returns, cap tees and crosses. J 2. Railings shall be capable of supporting a minimum load of 200 pounds applied in any direction. C. Handrail Brackets 1. For steel pipe handrails, provide cast iron handrail brackets with factory applied paint finish, No. 950 (Quality Hardware Mfg. Co.); or approved substitution. 2. Provide proper fastening device for type wall installation shown on the Drawings. Furnish hex head bolts for anchoring into wall sleeves. Furnish acorn style nuts for threaded studs. D. Ladders 1. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate vertical steel ladders with 3/8" x 2-1/2" steel rails spaced 24" apart, and with 3/4" round steel rungs extending through the center of the rails, with connections plug -welded and ground flush. Space rungs 12" o.c. Provide angle brackets 4" x 8" x 3/8" x 3" long to hold ladder 7" away from walls. a. Extend the rails at the top of ladders where shown, elsewhere as required. b. Coat the top surface of each rung with a safety aluminum oxide, abrasive using epoxy adhesive. E. Construct steel stairs in arrangements indicated for various locations. In general, stairs shall conform to the types as indicated and specified in the Metal Stairs Handbook of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers and as detailed on the Drawings. Stairs shall be capable of carrying a live load of 100 lbs. per s.f. 1. Fabricate stairs with steel channel stringers, and treads and landings as specified below. a. Exterior stair treads and landings shall be bar grating with checkered plate nosings. F. Miscellaneous Framing and Support LJ 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete work. n 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. n 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise shown, U space anchors 24" o .c. and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/4"x 8" steel straps. G. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on a masonry and concrete construction, made flat, free form warps and twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. H. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and �J �J smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. I. Loose Lintels: Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings in masonry walls unless otherwise a detailed, including openings for mechanical and electrical work. Loose angle lintels and lintel beams shall be detailed for a minimum bearing of 1" per foot of span, but not less than 8", unless otherwise indicated. 2 KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 c N C C LI C SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS Rough Hardware: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel iron shapes as required for framing and supporting wood work, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete and other structures. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.03 PRIMING AND PROTECTIVE COATING A. Clean ferrous metal in accordance with applicable requirements of SSPC-SP1 (Solvent Cleaning) followed by cleaning with applicable requirements of SSPC-SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning). B. Apply specified primer to ferrous metal surfaces by brush or spray to dry film thickness of 2 mils. C. Galvanize products as shown or specified in accordance with ASTM A123 -89a, and A385-80(1996) as applicable. D. Paint galvanized surfaces with 1 (one) coat of specified primer, by brush or spray application. E. Paint miscellaneous metal work which is to be in contact with but not fully embedded in concrete and masonry with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Also coat dissimilar metals which are or will be in contact with one another with such paint. Coating shall not extend onto surfaces which will be exposed. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which metal fabrications are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instruction and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete and masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, throughbolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry and similar construction. 3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitation. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat and screwed field connections. 4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and galvanize, and touch-up exposed areas with same material as used for shop coatings. Apply by brush or spray as specified for shop coatings. END OF SECTION aKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY CPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary rough carpentry including scaffolding, runways, rubbish chutes, enclosures, guardrails, barricades and ladders. C B. Blocking, roof curbs, nailing strips, grounds, anchors, furring and framing. C. Rough hardware. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Certifications a. Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained, and conformance with applicable standards. C b. Preservation Treated Wood: Submit certification for water -borne preservative that moisture content was reduced to 19 percent maximum, after treatment. C. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Submit certification by treating plant that fire -retardant treatment materials comply with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed Cthrough finished surfaces. d. In lieu of written certifications specified above, each uncut piece of lumber and plywood provided shall be stamped with the appropriate designation for each treatment required. C1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grading Rules 1. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform with Product Standard PS 20-94, "American Softwood Lumber Standard". Grading rules of the following associations shall also apply to materials produced under their supervision: a. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc. (NELMA) b. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) 2. Plywood shall conform to the following: a. Softwood Plywood 1) DOC PS 1-95, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood". (—j 2) DOC PS 2-92, "Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels". Lb. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1-1993, "Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood". C B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies I . Fire Hazard Classification: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., for treated lumber and plywood. 2. Preservative Treated Lumber and Plywood: American Wood Preservers Association, Quality C Mark. 3. Pressure Treated Material: American Wood Preservers Association Standards. 4. Span Tables: National Forest Products Association. 5. Working Stresses: National Forest Products Association, National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Design Values for Wood Construction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery to Project site, place materials in area protected from weather. B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering, providing adequate air circulation and ventilation. C. Seasoned materials shall not be stored in wet or damp areas. D. Protect fire -retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. E. Protect sheet materials from corners breaking and damaging surfaces, while unloading. PART 2 - PRODUCTS C2.0.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Dimensions Ca. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. rKKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by the American Lumber Standards committee and the rules writing agencies. 2. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum at time of permanent closing -in of building or structure, for lumber 2" or less nominal thickness. 3. Surfacing: Surface 4 sides (S4S), unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Grade: Standard grade and better. 5. Species: Any species of specified grade. B. Plywood 1. Exterior graded plywood where used as a backing material in exterior construction: CDX. 2. Interior graded plywood, except in moisture areas: A -C INT -APA. 3. In interior areas where moisture is present: CDX. C. Fire -Retardant Treated Wood 1. Lumber: AWPA C20-93. 2. Plywood: AWPA C27-93. D. Preservative Treated Wood 1. Waterborne Salt Preservatives for Painted, Stained, and Exposed Natural Wood Products a. Lumber: AWPA C2-93. b. Plywood: AWPA C9-93. E. Rough Hardware: Zinc coated steel unless otherwise shown or specified 1. Bolts: FS FF -B -575C. 2. Nuts: FS FF -N -836C. 3. Expansion Shields: FS FF -B -561C. 4. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF -B -561C. 5. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B -588C. 6. Wood Screws: FS FF -S -111C. 7. Nails and Staples: FS FF -N -105B(3). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which rough carpentry work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Frame wood members to a close fit, set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in accordance with the Drawings. Cut and fit framing, blocking, and similar items to accommodate other work. B. Pressure -Treated Wood Products 1. Provide pressure -treated wood for all framing, blocking, furring, nailing strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete and in conjunction with gravel stops and roofing. 2. Provide fire -retardant treated wood for concealed blocking and for exposed lumber and plywood in habitable space. C. Anchors and Rough Hardware 1. Provide rough and miscellaneous hardware work shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise required to complete the work. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner, true and firm in every respect. 2. Fastenings for wood bucks, blocking, and similar items, to masonry and concrete, shall be metal of types and spacing best suited to conditions. Hardened steel nails, expansion screws, toggle bolts, self -clinching nails, metal plugs or similar fastenings shall be used. Wood plugs and nailing blocks are not acceptable. Wire ties shall not be used. 3. Nails, spikes, bolts, anchors, screws, joist anchors, toggle bolts, expansion bolts, strap anchors, government anchors, and similar fastenings. shall be required for adequate construction of the particular parts of the work. Such items shall be aluminum, brass or galvanized, or otherwise rustproofed for exterior work. r7, I LJ iJ J 7 �r IN KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 'LJ SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY D. Grounds, Blocking, Nailers, and Furring 1. Construct grounds, blocking, nailers, furring, and other similar items where shown on the Drawings and where otherwise necessary for the attachment of work of other trades. E. Roof Related Wood Blocking 1. Anchor blocking to metal decking and framing as detailed with 1/2" bolts set a maximum of 4'-0" o.c. 2. Where blocking is more than 6" wide, anchor with 1/2" bolts set at 2'-6" o.c. and stagger alignments. 3. Where blocking is required on roof deck, build-up, shim, or cut as required to set top of blocking flush with the top of the adjacent insulation. 4. Cover wood blocking with temporary waterproof covering until permanent flashing is installed. F. Plywood Sheathing for Walls 1. Install with face grain perpendicular to direction of framing. 2. Allow minimum space 1/16" between end joints and 1/8" at edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels; double these spaces under wet or humid conditions. 3. Fasten 6" o.c. along panel edges and 12" o.c. at intermediate supports with non -corrosive screws. END OF SECTION 3 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C EPART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY B. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20-94, "American Softwood Lumber Standard". C1. Typical: Ponderosa Pine, Idaho White Pine, Sugar Pine or Northern White Pine. CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Millwork fabrication and installation. B. Miscellaneous products specified herein. C C. 1.02 Installation of products specified elsewhere. PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Wood doors are specified in Section 08210. B. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08710. C. Toilet partitions are specified in Section 10160. D. Corner guards are specified in Section 10260. E. Toilet accessories are specified in Section 10820. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Section 07900 - Sealants. C C. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.04 SUBMITTALS CA. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptions, installation and operating instructions of completely assembled manufactured items other than wood millwork fabricated under this Section. 2. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations and details of all wood millwork, indicating materials, C species of wood, applied finishes, matching of panels, arrangement, profiles, thicknesses, construction fastenings blocking clearances, assembly and erection details, built-in hardware and necessary connections to other work. C3. Samples: Swatches of plastic laminate selected. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Custom woodwork shall comply with the applicable requirements of the AWI Quality Standards C established by the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING C A. Protect materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver materials until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations which could damage, soil and deteriorate materials, have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen C circumstances, materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specified for installation areas. C. Receive and store finish hardware. Properly sort, tag, and file tags. C1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install finish carpentry work until interior concrete and masonry work, and other wet operations are complete, the building is adequately ventilated, and proper temperature and humidity conditions can Cbe maintained during and after installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hardwood lumber for transparent finish shall be clear, with no visible defects, and well matched for color and grain. (� l . Interior exposed millwork and trim shown on the Drawings as hardwood shall be vertical grain Red Oak. B. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20-94, "American Softwood Lumber Standard". C1. Typical: Ponderosa Pine, Idaho White Pine, Sugar Pine or Northern White Pine. CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1-95, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood". D. Particle board shall conform to the requirements of Interim Standard for Mat -Formed Wood Particle Board by the National Particle Board Association, Type 2, Density A (high density) and Class 2. E. Plastic Laminate: General purpose Type GP 50, complying with NEMA Publication No. LD -3-1995, including latest revisions. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Pionite Decorative Laminates b. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2. Colors and Patterns: As shown on the Drawings. F. Solid Surfacing Material: Homogenous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or 6, without a precoated finish, "Corian" (DuPont Polymers); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 1. Size: 1/2" thick. 2. Color: "Black Quartz" selected from the "Jewel" Series. 3. Sealant: "G.E. Silicone #1700" (General Electric). a. Color: Clear or transparent. G. Closet Hardware 1. Hanging Rod: Stainless clad tubing, 1-1/16" O.D., No. 660 (Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.). 2. Rod Flanges: Cast steel with bright chrome finish, No. 735 (Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.). 3. Center Hanger: Adjustable steel with bright chrome finish, No. 767 (Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.) for use when hanging rod exceeds 72" in length. 2.02 FABRICATION A. In general millwork shall be fabricated in the shop in largest units possible and delivered to the Project site for installation. Where necessary to fit units at the Project site, allowance shall be made for cutting and fitting. B. Not all details of millwork are shown on the Drawings. The fabricator shall utilize the most advantageous manufacturing processes to achieve the quality of millwork indicated herein by reference to AWI Quality Standards. C. Fabricate standing and running trim in accordance with AWI Section 300, Custom Grade, including closet hook strips and miscellaneous trim. D. Fabricate plastic laminate veneered millwork in accordance with AWI, Section 400, Premium Grade. 1. Provide balancing or back-up sheet for plastic laminate veneered tops and other concealed surfaces. E. Fabricate solid surfacing lavatory tops in accordance with WIC Section 17D, Premium Grade. 1. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop -applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surfacing manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, sealants, fabrication and finishing. F. Closet shelving shall be fabricated from particleboard or plywood with glued solid lumber edge bands in accordance with AWI Section 600, Custom Grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which finish carpentry work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify measurements at the building and provide necessary closures and trim to fit the items enclosing walls. Provide other trades with information necessary for proper completion of related work. B. Condition work to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 LJ M 1 n I w J D, Ill _1 !1 J I CSECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Work shall be installed by experienced finish carpenters only. Work shall be erected plumb, true and square in a substantial manner. Finished work shall be neatly installed, free of slivers, open joints, hammer and tool marks. Blind nail finished work insofar as possible, and set surface nails. n L 2. Woodwork: Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop -fabricated or shop -cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best over-all advantage, when installing job assembled woodwork items. �j 3.04 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Trim and Mouldings: Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10 feet. For longer runs, use only 1 (one) piece less than 10 feet in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members. Cope at returns and mitre at corners. 1. Attach securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. 2. Nailing: Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nail Cheads for filling. 3. Anchoring: Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. C B. Preparation for Finish: Clean woodwork and fill nail holes in preparation for finishes specified under Painting Sections of these Specifications. Where woodwork is to receive a transparent finish, use matching wood filler. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK CA. Attach items to floors and walls and anchor by concealed bolts or wood screws into inserts on floors and to grounds on walls. Provide grounds as necessary. Trim and finish cabinets with scribe members for a neat and finished installation. Furnish hardware as specified. Equip each cabinet door with cabinet C hinges, magnetic catch and pull. Mount each drawer on drawer slides and provide with a pull. Install adjustable standards and supports for adjustable shelves. Where items specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the items specified, subject to approval. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF VANITY TOPS AND COUNTERTOPS A. Attach vanity tops and countertops securely to blocking and provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and in - counter soap dispensers, if any. Smooth cut edges of cutouts in plastic laminate work and coat with waterproof coating or adhesive. Scribe tops to walls. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS C A. Hang doors with hardware specified. Provide clearances at jambs and heads not to exceed 1/8" and at bottoms not to exceed 3/8", except where indicated to be undercut or where required to clear thresholds. B. Install doors to operate easily and close accurately against stops without binding or rubbing the frame. Doors shall engage positively with the strikes when doors are closed with moderate force. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF FINISH DOOR HARDWARE A. Apply finish hardware as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit lock and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before finishing of doors. Reinstall hardware after finishing of doors is completed. Upon completion, adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware. 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION A. Install such items as toilet partitions, toilet room accessories, miscellaneous specialties, and other items furnished by others requiring fasteners, cutting, trimming, and scribing of furnished materials or finished substrate. C 1 . Install plumb, level, true and straight. 3 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Install according to manufacturer's printed instructions and in accordance with recommendations under the respective Sections. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 7 LJ EPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Perimeter insulation. B. Rigid polystyrene insulation, except roof insulation. C. Blanket fiberglass insulation. r1 D. Vapor barrier. E. Safing insulation. U F. Adhesives and other means of securing insulation in place. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Ell A. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation and Finish System: For insulation included in this system. B. Section 07530 - Elastic Sheet Roofing: For roof insulation included in this system. C. Section 09530 - Acoustical Insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and recommended installation instruction for each type insulation, adhesive and fastener. 2. Test Reports: Independent testing laboratories reports stating compliance with ASTM Specifications for each type rigid polystyrene insulation. a. Test reports shall be dated within 6 months of the product manufacture date. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver insulation to the Project site prior to the time of its installation. Handle and store material to prevent damage. Store under cover and above ground. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. B. Do not allow insulation to become wet, soiled, and covered with ice and snow. Protect rigid insulation from exposure to high ambient temperatures, excessive exposure to sunlight, and contact with hot surfaces and materials (in excess of the safe temperature below the melting point indicated by the manufacturer). �1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Perimeter Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board, 1.6 lbs. pcf density (minimum), complying with ASTM C578-95, Type IV, thickness as shown on the Drawings. B. Rigid Insulation: Expanded polystyrene board, 0.9 lbs. pcf density (minimum), complying with ASTM C578-95, Type I, thickness as shown on the Drawings. C. Blanket/Batt Insulation: Unfaced fiberglass blankets/batts complying with ASTM C665-95, Type I, thickness as shown on the Drawings. D. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethylene film, clear or natural color; for use when concealed by gypsum wallboard and other rigid substrates. E. Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid mineral fiber blanket, 4.0 lbs. pcf density complying with ASTM C612-93, Class 1 and 2. F. Adhesives where required as recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation. G. Other materials, such as fasteners and retainers, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of building insulation, shall be as selected by the Subcontractor or material supplier subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION C3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the supporting structure, the substrate, and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A PKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review safety precautions, proposed operating procedures and environmental requirements with the Contractor and with the manufacturer's or supplier's representative before proceeding with the installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be covered unless otherwise shown. C. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces using spot adhesive as necessary to temporarily hold insulation in place, butting panels tightly together. D. Install rigid wall insulation board retained by Z -furring and spot adhesive as necessary to temporarily hold insulation in place. E. Install blanket insulation in walls and soffits, friction -fit. F. Install vapor barrier over rigid wall insulation and over blanket insulation specified in Paragraphs E and F above. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor barriers over framing by lapping not less than 2 studs. Fasten vapor barriers to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings and at lap joints. 2. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor barriers with cloth or aluminized tape of type recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer to create an air -tight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barrier. 3. Repair tears and punctures in vapor barriers immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor barrier material taped in place. G. Fill cracks and voids around frames and blocking, other voids in exterior walls and voids around wood curbs and blocking in and about the roof with loose insulation. Wedge in place, completely filling voids. H. Fill voids created by flutes in metal deck with safing insulation, where ceiling track runs perpendicular to flutes in fire rated wall construction and elsewhere as shown. END OF SECTION 2 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 7 t_+ F7 L n ri 7, u It 2 r] ei I C E, PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expanded polystyrene insulation. B. Acrylic modified cementitious finish system. C. Certain related flashing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B. Section 07900 - Sealants 1.03 SUBMITTALS SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall warrant the exterior insulation and finish system to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's Li 5 -year written warranty. Warranty shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dryvit Systems, Inc. h B. Sto Corp. KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Sample: T-0" x T-0" sample of each selected color and texture to be used. 3. Test Reports: Independent testing laboratories reports stating compliance with ASTM Specifications and this Specification for rigid polystyrene insulation. a. Test reports shall be dated within 6 months of the product manufacture date. 1.04 4. Certification: List of at least 3 completed projects of a similar nature if requested by the Architect. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be done by a firm specializing in this work, with a minimum of 2 years experience in the type of work shown and specified and approved by the manufacturer to install specified materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Finish materials shall be delivered to the Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers. Store products in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store insulation under cover and above ground. Do not allow insulation to become wet, soiled, and covered with ice and snow. Protect rigid insulation from exposure to high ambient temperatures, excessive exposure to sunlight, and contact with hot surfaces and materials (in excess of the safe temperature below the melting point indicated by the manufacturer). C. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Application of the system shall be in ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F. and rising, and on �► unfrozen surfaces. 1. For installation in temperatures less than 40 degrees F, supplementary heat shall be provided. > B. A minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F. shall be maintained for at least 24 hours after the installation of the system. Continue thereafter if necessary until materials have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the exterior insulation and finish system to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's Li 5 -year written warranty. Warranty shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dryvit Systems, Inc. h B. Sto Corp. KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 2.02 MATERIALS A. Surface Sealers: As recommended by the manufacturer for use over masonry surfaces prior to application of adhesives. B. Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer and designed to be compatible, both in bond strength and chemical structure, with the rigid insulation used and with the substrate to which it is adhered. C. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene, 0.9 lbs. pcf density (minimum) complying with ASTM C578-95, Type I except as follows: 1. Size: T-0" x 4'-0". 2. Thickness of the insulation board shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16". 3. Edges shall be square within 1/16" over the length of the board. 4. Less than 25 flame spread. 5. Aged or cured by air drying or kiln drying for periods recommended by the manufacturer, to avoid shrinkage after installation of finished system. D. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard, job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C150-97, Type I white or natural color; and system manufacturer's standard polymer -based adhesive designed for use indicated. E. Standard Duty Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced open weave glass fiber fabric made from twisted multi -end strands, specifically treated for compatibility with base and finish coat materials. F. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard factory -mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 1. Color a. No. 112 Sandalwood Beige (Dryvit) b. No. NA 00-0070 (Sto) 2. Texture: "Worm" finish. a. Quartzputz (Dryvit) b. StoLit 111.5 (Sto) 3. Final color and texture shall match approved samples. G. Water: Clean, free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies and organic materials. H. Field -finished Sheet Metal: Galvanized carbon steel sheets, ASTM A653-96 Commercial coating (1.25 oz./sq. ft.), 24 gauge, unless otherwise shown. 1. Primer: Standard zinc chromate primer. 2.03 MIXING A. Mix base and finish coats in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If necessary, add water to adjust workability. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from spatter and droppings by use of drop cloths, masking and similar methods. B. Install primed metal flashing at base of wall as shown on the Drawings, prior to installation of insulation board substrate. Refer to Section 07620 for installation requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install exterior insulation and finish system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Insulation Board 1. Beginning at the base of the wall, apply boards horizontally (running bond pattern) in a trowel applied adhesive (full board coverage) to the substrate. Apply sealers to masonry surfaces prior to applying adhesives when recommended by the manufacturer. Apply uniform pressure to board, butting points tightly to provide flush, level surface for ensuing work. LJ ID a� 0 hi U n L ILE r� [i KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 2. Form reveals shown, level, plumb, true, and with sharp 90 degree corners. C. Accessories: Install accessory items and expansion joints where shown in full bed of adhesive. D. Base Coat and Reinforcing Fabric: Trowel apply base coat to insulation board (full coverage) and immediately embed the reinforcing fabric in the wet base coat. Reinforcing fabric shall be continuous at corners and lapped at edges. Fabric texture shall telegraph through base coat yet be entirely coated. Edges and corners shall be smooth and clean, and entire application shall be free of wrinkles. E. Finish Coat: After base coat has cured (8 to 10 hours), trowel apply finish coat over base coat and reinforcing fabric and when initial set has occurred, perform desired final texturing to match approved sample panel. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove debris and rubbish resulting from this work, from the site and leave adjacent construction clean. END OF SECTION 3 KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r L SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING I U PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES w A. Firestopping floor and wall penetrations of fire -rated assemblies. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DIVISIONS A. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: For firesafing insulation. B. Division 15 - Mechanical: For sealing around openings and penetrations in fire rated assemblies caused by the work of this Division. C. Division 16 - Electrical: For sealing around openings and penetrations in fire rated assemblies caused by the work of this Division. rI 1.03 SUBMITTALS L A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Show material installation details including reinforcement, anchoring, fastening and supporting test reference. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE n A. Firestopping shall be performed by an installer with not less than 2 years of successful experience installing firestopping materials and systems specified. B. Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM E814 -94b testing for fire and hose stream exposure, and be listed as an approved material in Underwriter's Laboratories "Building Materials Directory" for use in f the applicable through -penetration firestop system. j C. Only one source (brand) of firestopping shall be used throughout the Work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and product identification. Reject damaged packages found unsuitable for use and remove from Project site. Store materials in clean, dry, ventilated area within temperature range of 40 degrees F. to 90 degrees F.. Protect from soiling and moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS n 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS L' A. Bio Fireshield, Inc. B. Electrical Products Division/3M C. Flame Stop, Inc. rI D. Hevi-Duty/Nelson E. Metacaulk, RectorSeal Corp. 2.02 SYSTEMS A. For reference purposes only Electrical Products Division/3M systems are specified herein. B. One part synthetic elastomer with intumescent properties in caulk, putty, strip, or sheet form as applicable and restricting collar, "Fire Barrier Caulk CP -25", "Putty 303", "Wrap/Strip FS -195", or "Composite Sheet C5-195", and "Fire Barrier Restricting Collar RC -1". C. Packing or Damming Material: As recommended by the firestopping system manufacturer. r PART 3 - EXECUTION L 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the firestopping work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate and penetration components of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, frost and other matter which would affect bond of the firestopping material. B. Protection: Provide ventilation to prevent localized build-up of fumes. Keep away from sparks and open flame. Provide fire extinguisher and post caution signs warning against smoking and open flame when working with flamable materials. C. Firestopping materials shall not be installed when material temperature is below 32 degrees F. Warm frozen materials to at least 32 degrees F. before applying. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping systems in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions to seal holes, cracks and voids in fire rated floors and walls, and prevent the transfer of flame, smoke and gas across fire -rated assemblies. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove material spills, runs and similar conditions from surfaces surrounding holes and voids and discard containers and rags, and other debris on a daily basis. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 t SECTION 07530 ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. New single ply, mechanically fastened, EPDM roofing system at building entry addition. B. Thermal barrier. C. Roof insulation for this system. D. Patching of existing mechanically fastened EPDM roofing where mechanical equipment is abandoned and removed. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS L A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: For roof related wood blocking and curbs. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. l 1.03 SUBMITTALS �s A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for system. 2. Shop Drawings a. Shop drawings shall be required prior to the pre -roofing conference and for final inspection of the warranted roof. Shop drawings shall be made by the roof membrane manufacturefor authorized representative. Shop drawings shall be approved and assigned a number by membrane manufacturer 1) Manufacturer's standard pre-printed details are NOT acceptable as shop drawings. 2) Free-hand sketches are NOT acceptable as shop drawings. 3) Roof membrane shop drawings shall include: Outline of roof and roof size, roof slopes, seam layout, location and type of penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, special details and bill of material. b. Approved installer shall supply roof membrane manufacturer with a record shop drawing for final inspection. Record shop drawings shall be approved and given a shop drawing number by roof membrane manufacturer 3. Certifications a. List of at least 2 similar completed installations using the elastic sheet roofing system r� specified for this Project if requested by the Architect. b. At completion of work, submit roofing and insulation manufacturer's certification that roofing system was installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 4. Test Reports: Independent testing laboratories reports stating compliance with ASTM Specifications for each type rigid polystyrene insulation. a. Test reports shall be dated within 6 months of the product manufacture date. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The installer shall be certified by the manufacturer of the elastic sheet roofing system, have not less than 5 years experience in the installation of elastic sheet roofing, and not less than 3 installations of a similar or larger size than the requirements of this Project, using the elastic sheet roofing system specified. B. The system as installed shall comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of the public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. C. Pre -Roofing Conference: Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at Project site with installer, roof membrane manufacturer's representative, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including Owner's insurer Architect, and Owner. Perform thorough review of details, materials and methods of installation, and warranty provisions. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening pre -roofing conference. D. Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by roof membrane manufacturer's representative, to determine that the roofing system has been installed in accordance with published specifications and final Shop Drawings. 1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened packages and containers. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. EKKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 la SECTION 07530 LJ ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING B. Do not deliver insulation to the Project site prior to the time of its installation. Handle and store material to prevent damage. Store under cover and above ground. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with t-1 requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not apply insulation and roofing materials when the roof deck is wet, and when frost, ice and snow is present on the deck. Allow surfaces to thoroughly dry before commencing work after rain, snoVand other conditions causing dampness. r� 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the elastic sheet roofing to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's 15 -year written warranty of water tightness. Manufacturer's warranty shall be fully paid by the roofing contractor ;J Warranty shall cover both labor and material, including that required to repair roof leaks caused by standing water on roofing membrane. Warranty shall be signed by the Contractor, installer and manufacturer. 1. The maximum peak gust wind speed shall be 72 mph. i B. The performance of the work of this Section shall not compromise warranties in efect (if any), for the h existing roofing system. C. This warranty does not apply to roofing repair work. ,J PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. For elastic sheet roofing membrane materials: 1. Carlisle Corp., Carlisle SynTec Systems Div. 2. Firestone Building Products Co. Div., Bridgestone/Firestone, Inc. 3. Omnova Solutions, Inc. (formerly GenFlex Roofing Systems) B. As a basis of quality and detailing, Carlisle Syntec Systems' roofing details are shown on the Drawings. Should referenced manufacturer's details be revised (updated) prior to installation and should details of other acceptable manufacturers differ from those shown and be required to obtain manufacturers warranty such details shall be submitted for review, and following approval, be incorporated in the Work at no additional cost to the Owner. T`t C. For Other System Components: As specified herein. 2.02 MATERIALS A. EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) sheet membrane 0.045" thick, reinforced, complying with i ASTM D4637-96, Type II, and conforming to the following minimum physical properties unless otherwise noted: 1. ASTM D751 - Tolerance on Nominal Thickness: t 10 percent 2. ASTM D751 - Breaking Strength: 90 Ibf 3. ASTM D751 - Elongation: 250 percent 4. ASTM D751 - Tear Strength: 10 lbf /� I 5. ASTM D1149 - Ozone Resistance: No cracks I 6. ASTM D573 - Heat Aging a. Breaking Strength 80 Ibf b. Elongation 200 percent (minimum) t"1 7. ASTM D2137 - Brittleness Temperature: -49 degrees F(maximum) 'u 8. ASTM D471 - Resistance to Water 4 percent (minimum) B. Base Flashing: 0.060" thick uncured EPDM, or manufacturer's standard flashing system. T7 C. Molded Pipe Flashing: Manufacturer's standard. ;J D. Adhesives and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard splice adhesive, inseam sealant, lap sealant, bonding adhesive, water -block seal, pourable sealer and night sealant. 2 T1 KKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 I� -s SECTION 07530 ry ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING f E. Fastening Strips Li 1. Securement: Reinforced EPDM membrane and plate. 2. Wall Flashing Termination Strip: Roof membrane manufacturer's 1" x 1/8" thick, 6063 aluminum bar, pre -drilled or punched for fasteners at 12" o.c. and free of burrs and sharp edges, as standard with the manufacturer. F. Seam Plates: Locking seam plates as recommended by the manufacturer G. Cover Board: Membrane manufacturer's recommended wood fiberboard, minimum 1/2", or glass mat water resistant gypsum substrate, minimum 1/4" thick, "Dens -Deck" (Geogia Pacific Corp.). H. Insulation: Expanded polystyrene, 1.35 pcf (minimum) complying with ASTM C578-95, 'Ype II, uniform thickness as shown on the Drawings. ,l--1 I. "Saddles" or "Crickets": Tapered polystyrene or perlite board as specified above, uniformly tapered at 1/4" per foot. L� J. Insulation Fasteners: Retainer plate and self -drilling, self -tapping screws as recommended by the manufacturer. r K. Thermal Barrier: Expanded perlite board, complying with ASTM C728-97, 3/4" thick, or glass mat water } resistant gypsum substrate, minimum 1/2" thick, "Dens -Deck" (Geogia Pacific Corp.). LJ L. Existing Roofing Materials: Match materials and component assembly insofar as possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION E3.01 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which elastic sheet roofing is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLING THERMAL BARRIER AND INSULATION � A. Apply thermal barrier products over steel decks. Butt edges of board tightly together Stagger joints minimum 12". B. Install insulation over the thermal barrier and fasten securely through steel deck with appropriate 1_s) mechanical fasteners and retaining plates in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and �L sSLL sssl to meet FM requirements specified. The insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around roof penetrations and projections. 1. Insulation shall be installed in 2 layers (where total insulation thickness exceeds 2" or if tapered F1 system is specified) with joints staggered between each layer i2. Insulation surface joints shall be 1/4" or less in width. Repair joints wider than 1/4" with LJ insulation. 3. In no event shall more insulation be placed on the surface to be roofed than can be covered with {-� roofing membrane prior to the onset of inclement weathe5 and termination of the day's work. L Insulation shall be protected from water at temporary termination during installation by suitable water cut-offs C. Install tapered insulation "saddles" or "crickets" where shown on the Drawings to provide proper roof drainage and to avoid ponding water D. Install cover board over insulation. Loosely butt cover boards. Stagger end joints 12" between rows. Fasten to roof deck in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLING MEMBRANE A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation of membrane, including fastening, seaming, 1 self -flashing, reinforcement (if any), surfacing and roof tie-ins. Cut sheets to the maximum size possible, in order to minimize seams and to accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across the shingled laps of the sheets. B. Lap sheets and bond joints by the seaming system recommended by the manufacturer Secure one edge of ttt i the sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the membrane splice and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck. Clean and prime splice areas, apply splice tape, and roll to ensure a watertight seam. Install 6" wide flashing strip over all field seam splice intersections and overlapped tape ends. Cover top edges of flashing strip and tape splices with uniform fillet of special sealant. C. Bond sheets to vertical surfaces at edges of the membrane and at penetrations through the membrane. Bond or clamp the membrane into rain drainage work as indicated. Apply matching adhesive tape where recommended to reinforce the attachment. EKKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07530 ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING D. Water cut-offs shall be made by extending the membrane beyond the insulation and setting the end of the membrane in 4" of plastic roofing cement. Temporary water cut-offs shall be removed prior to proceeding with the next work period, by cutting of that portion of the membrane that has been in contact with plastic roofing cement, and disposing of it. 3.04 INSTALLING FLASHING !.J A. Install flashing at intersections of roof with sloped and vertical surfaces, roof interruptions and r7l penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's currently published drawings, and final Shop Drawings, I consistent with job conditions. B. Extend base flashing up vertical surfaces not less than 8" and onto the horizontal roof surface not less than 3", except as otherwise shown on Drawings. T—r C. Place reinforced EPDM membrane strip over roof membrane in vertical plane and secure with aluminum plates fastened 12" o.c. or terminate edges of membrane with continuous aluminum bar fastened 12" o.c. Pre -drill expansion anchors and screws. Seal edge with lap sealant and water -block seal. 3.05 ROOFING REPAIRS AND PATCHING A. Perform roofing repair and patching in accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer's recommendations for conditions encountered. B. Installation shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of adjacent undisturbed roofing. I C. Completed repairs and patching shall not affect warranties in effect. 3.06 CURB INSULATION A. Apply 3/4" or thicker insulation to mechanical equipment unit curbs and to other curbs where insulation is not provided with the unit. 3.07 SPLASHBLOCKS A. Place splashblocks on roof as shown, oriented to provide positive drainage away from building face. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Inspect work thoroughly and make corrections immediately 3.09 PROTECTION A. The installer shall advise the Contractor and other trades of recommended protection for roofing so that the work will be without damage and deterioration (except for normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL �i 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal flashing and counterflashing. B. Metal copings, gravel stops, scuppers, and downspouts. C. Roof curbs. D. Metal flashing reglets, inserts, miscellaneous sheet metal items, and accessories. E. Related sealant work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Sealants: For sealant materials and installation requirements. f 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Typical details of formed configurations. 2. Samples: Two 3" x 6" samples of prefinished sheet metal manufacturer's standard colors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Sheet metal flashing and trim shall conform with the following: 1. Recommended practices contained in "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc., ((SMACNA) latest edition. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet materials to the job site packaged in manageable bundles, properly labeled for identification. Provide raised platforms and waterproof covers to protect the materials from contamination from dirt and debris. 1. Prefinished materials masked with factory applied protective film shall be stored protected from the sun's ultraviolet rays until ready for installation. 1.06 WARRANTY 1 A. The Contractor shall warrant the metal flashing and trim to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be for 2 years, and shall cover water infiltration behind and underneath the sheet metal work. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be �1 signed by the Contractor and installer. LB. The warranty on metal flashing and trim shall also be extended by the manufacturer's 20-ye4non- prorated written warranty against color fade, chalking and film integrity This warranty shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prefinished Sheet Metal: Galvanized carbon steel sheets, 24 gauge, factory primed and finished, (Berridge Mfg. Co.); "Una -Clad" (Copper Sales, Inc.); "Pac-Clad" (Petersen Aluminum Corp.); "ColorKlad" (Vincent Metals, Inc.). 1. Colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Provide color matched fasteners where fasteners are exposed to view 3. Provide color matched touch-up paint. B. Field -finished Sheet Metal: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper ASTM A653-96, G90 hot -dip Eli galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting, 24 gauge except as otherwise indicated. C. Solder: ASTM B32-96, 50-50 tin and lead. D. Flux: Rosin type. E. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion, ASTM D1187-97, Type I. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form metal flashing to configurations indicated on the Drawings. Follow standard recommended practices, unless otherwise shown or specified. I KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 f1, SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM U B. Fabricate and assemble units in the shop. Limit units to 24 feet in length. Where appearance is not a factor, work may be fabricated in 8 or 10 foot lengths. 1. Lock and solder intermediate joints of units. Form and solder corners. 2. Use flux specified, or use acid flux for pretinning and rosin flux for joining metal. Remove acid flux residue by neutralizing and scrubbing with ammonia or washing soda solution. Rinse with clean water. C. Fabricate joint cover plates 6" long minimum. Prefabricate corners, minimum 18" long in each direction. D. Counterflashing where shown shall be 2 -piece type. Receiver shall be minimum 1-1/2" deep, have a hooked end, and a locking slot, factory formed and requiring no malleting and bending to hold cap member. Cap member shall be formed to snap into receiver and provide positive spring action against T"1 base flashing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which roofing, flashing and sheet metal work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the n work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Ill 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the work with other work for the correct sequencing of items which make up the entire membrane system of weatherproofing and waterproofing, and rain drainage. It is required that the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight, and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erect members plumb, level and in line securely anchored and properly related to other parts of the V1brk. B. Protect metal surfaces which are to be in contact with dissimilar metals, with a coat of bituminous paint specified to prevent galvanic and corrosive action. Coating shall not extend onto exposed surfaces. C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Hold sheet metal joints apart 1/2" and place coverplates over joints embedded in sealant for entire width of coverplate. Fasten sheet metal to wood blocking with through 1" screws neoprene washers minimum penetration. Provide 1 (one) fastener located on the rear side (concealed side) of roof edge and parapet flashing, for each 10'-0" length or less, LJ and 1 (one) fastener located on the rear side of joint cover plates. D. Locate joints at roof edge and other work exposed to view with respect to control joints or other architectural features as indicated on the Drawings. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. F. For counterflashing, place reglets in raked -out mortar joints and wedge with lead plugs at 12" o.c. and furnish to masonry trade for installation. Snap cap member into reglet in such a manner as to produce r spring action pressure against base flashing. G. Where required to retain flashings, provide continuous cleat of metal specified. Lock free end of cleat into folded edge of sheet metal. H. Provide prefinished liners in open -face downspouts and other roof edge fabrications exposed to view from finished grade. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove protective plastic film immediately after installation of prefinished flashings and miscellaneous l�l fabrications. j B. Replace sections of prefinished flashing and trim, which exhibit abrasions on the face of surfaces exposed '-► to view from finished grade. 1. Field touch-up other marred and abraded surfaces with paint provided. in C. Remove all flux, scraps, and dirt immediately. Excess flux shall be neutralized with a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda and surface drenched with clean water END OF SECTION KKE0900A r1 ,j KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 ) LJ SECTION 07900 SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL n 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES t-' A. Sealants and calks. B. Cleaners, primers and sealers. �-y jL C. Joint filler and bond breaker. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION �-� A. Sealants for roof related sheet metal work. LB. Sealants for sealing perimeter of aluminum frames including aluminum entrances and storefronts, and aluminum windows. This sealant work is performed by the installer of each of these components to provide single source responsibility and consistency in sealants used. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Firestopping: For firestopping sealants. E. B. 1.04 Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard: For acoustical sealants. SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for each compound and filler. 2. Samples: Samples of each compound and filler for color selection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be done by a sealant installer with a minimum of 3 years experience in the type of work shown and specified. B. Select only sealing compounds of manufacturers who agree to have a qualified representative visit the { site at the beginning of the joint sealing work and periodically thereafter as necessary to ensure the proper installation of the sealing compounds. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store sealant and calking material at the job site to prevent damage. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Wrapped or bundled material shall bear the name of the manufacturer and the product. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants during rain, snow, and when temperatures are below, and above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. B. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range, so that sealant will not be subject to excessive elongation and bond stress at extremely low temperatures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealants 1. Sealant Sl: Multiple component, epoxidized polyurethane terpolymer, ASTM C920-95, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement): a. "Dynatrol II" (Pecora Corp.) b. "Sikaflex - 2c NS" (Sika Corp.) C. "Sonolastic NP 2" (Sonneborn Building Products Division, ChemRex, Inc.) d. "Dymeric" (Tremco, Inc.) C EKKE0201 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS 2. Sealant S2: One part, silicone, non -sag, ASTM C920-95, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement): a. "999-A Silicone Building & Glazing Sealant" (Dow Corning Corp.) b. "Construction 1200" (General Electric) C. "863" (Pecora Corp.) 3. Sealant S3: One part, silicone, mold and mildew resistant, ASTM C920-95, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement). a. "786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant" (Dow Corning Corp.) b. "Sanitary 1700" (General Electric) C. "863" (Pecora Corp.) 4. Sealant S4: Multiple component, *self -leveling polyurethane, ASTM C920-95, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 (25 percent movement). a. "Urexpan NR -200" (Pecora Corp.) b. "Sonolastic SL2" (Sonneborn Building Products Division, ChemRex, Inc.) C. "THC -900" (Tremco, Inc.) * Where slopes exceed one percent, use manufacturer's recommended slope grade or non -sag formula. 5. Sealant S5: One part, butyl ASTM C1085-91 (5 percent movement): a. "BC -158" (Pecora Corp.) b. "Butyl Sealant" (Tremco, Inc.) 6. Calking Compound C1: One part non -sag acrylic latex ASTM C834-95 (7-1/2 percent movement): a. "AC -20 (Pecora Corp.) b. "Sonolac (Sonnebom Building Products Division, ChemRex, Inc.) C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834" (Tremco, Inc.) 7. Colors: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. B. Joint Filler: Closed -cell expanded polyethylene rod, "Ethafoam" (Dow Chemical Co.); "Sonofoam Backer -Rod" (Sonneborn Building Products Division, of ChemRex, Inc.); or approved substitution. C. Joint Cleaner Primer and Sealer: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing and calking compound for the specific joint surface and conditions. D. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces and remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion and interfere with bond of compound so that surfaces are free of deleterious substances which might impair the work. Except as otherwise approved by the manufacturer, elastomeric sealants shall not be applied to joint surfaces previously treated with paint, lacquer, sealer, curing compound, water repellent and other coatings unless such coatings have been entirely removed. B. Prime surfaces in accordance with the instructions of the sealant manufacturer. C. Install bond breakers in locations and of type recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent bond of sealant to surfaces where such bond might impair the performance of the sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. I . Compounds shall not be installed below a temperature of 40 degrees F. unless the manufacturer specifically permits installation at a lower temperature. If job conditions require the installation of compounds below 40 degrees F. (or below the minimum installation temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer's representative and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure the satisfactory work. 2 KKE0201 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 L �I LJ C n I, F1 L -J G C El F1 L C 3.04 3.05 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS 2. Install rod stock in joints to receive sealant. Use proper size and shape pieces so that installed rod stock is compressed 25 percent to 30 percent and face of rod stock is at the required depth. Do not twist or braid rod stock. Carefully roll rod stock into the joint without stretching. 3. Confine compounds to joint areas shown. Use masking tape to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, and spillage and migration of compound out of the joints. Tool surface to shape shown or, if none is shown, to flush or slightly concave surface. Remove excess compound and clean adjoining surfaces as may be required to eliminate indication of soiling and migration. 4. Use power driven equipment wherever possible to install compounds to ensure uniformity of application and the highest quality of workmanship. 5. Use polyurethane sealants (Sealant S1) at the perimeter of window frames, door frames, miscellaneous frames, conditions where sealant is in contact with the exterior insulation and finish system, for wall construction, control and expansion joints, and architectural precast copings. 6. Use silicone sealant (Sealant S2) for sheet metal work. 7. Use silicone sealant (Sealant S3), mold and mildew resistant type for use around plumbing fixtures only. 8. Use self -leveling polyurethane sealant (Sealant S4) for expansion joints in pedestrian traffic bearing surfaces. 9. Use butyl rubber sealant (Sealant S5) for bedding thresholds and sill plates. 10. Use acrylic latex calking compound for interior applications only, except as follows: a. Do NOT use this material: 1) Where joint movement is expected in excess of the materials specified capabilities. 2) Where a sealant is otherwise shown or specified above for use. PROTECTION Protect joint sealant during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations and other causes so that they are without deterioration and damage at time of Substantial Completion. Cut out and remove damaged and deteriorated joint sealants immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealant installation with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. CLEANING Clean off excess sealants and sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION rKKE0201 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 CSECTION 08114 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush, hollow standard steel doors. B. Welded standard steel door frames and frames for sidelights and other interior glazed openings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS t,► A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: For building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction. B. Section 08210 - Wood Doors. W C. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, EXCEPT where more EJ stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI A 115 Series 82 on door and frame preparation. 2. American National Standards Institute/Steel Door Institute a. ANSI/SDI 100-91, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. ANSI/SDI At 51.1-1987, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. C. SDI 112-89, Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.04 SUBMITTALS f i A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: L1. Shop Drawings: Show type of door and frame for each opening, full scale sections of typical members, dimensioned elevations, anchors, reinforcements, and other required components. n jL► 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store doors and frames at the Project site to prevent damage. Do not receive doors before the building is enclosed. Remove wrappings or coverings upon arrival of doors at the Project site. Store the doors in a vertical position on blocking, clear of the floor and with blocking between the doors j to permit air circulation between the doors. Remove damaged and otherwise unsuitable doors and t—+ frames, when so determined, immediately from the Project site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured by the following companies complying with these specifications will be acceptable: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Corp. 3. Curries Co. 4. Mesker Door Co. 5. N.C.S. Mfg. Co. 6. Pioneer Builders Products Corp., Division CORE Industries, Inc. 7. Republic Builders Products 8. Steelcraft Mfg. Co. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36 -96. B. Steel Bars: ASTM A 108-95. C. Steel Plate: ASTM A283 -93a. EKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2.03 FABRICATION P w A. General 1. SECTION 08114 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES n D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366-96, commercial quality, cold rolled, stretcher leveled. u E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653-96, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. rn F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanized items to be built 5. into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153-95, Class C or D as applicable. H. Primer: Rust inhibitive type, gray, red or beige as standard with the manufacturer. 1. Door Silencers: Resilient, tamper-resistant plug, to reduce noise from interior doors closing against 6. frames, No. 64 (Glynn -Johnson); provide 3 for single doors and 4 for pairs of doors. Stick -on adhesive - backed silencers are NOT allowed. 2.03 FABRICATION P w A. General 1. Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames, and frames for wood doors as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with best shop practices. Make frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Take field measurements as required for coordination with adjoining work. u 2. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with corners square, unless otherwise shown. Set each member in proper alignment and relationship to other members with surfaces straight and in a true plane. 3. Reinforce members and joints with steel plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength. 4. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Mortise and reinforce doors and frames for hardware in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's instructions and templates. Drill and tap reinforcing to receive hinges, locks, strikes, closers, and other hardware requiring reinforcing. 6. Grades a. Grade Il - Heavy Duty, Model 1: Full flush design for interior doors - typical. b. Grade III - Extra Heavy Duty, Model 2: Seamless design for exterior doors - typical. !� B. Frames u 1. Provide combination type hollow metal door frames to be used as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles. 2. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate interior frames of 16 gage steel and exterior frames of 14 gage galvanized steel. 3. Fully weld frames with corners mitered and ground smooth. 4. Reinforce frames for doors of high frequency use (Locker rooms, vestibules, stairways, public toilet rooms, and similar areas) with two 10 gauge steel straps immediately above and below the top hinge in addition to standard reinforcement, conforming to the frame profile and welded to the frame. 5. Make provisions for door silencers on interior door frames; 3 for single frames and 4 for pairs of hinged doors. Install door silencers. Install temporary plastic plugs in frames scheduled to be I I filled with mortar or plaster to keep holes clear during construction, and ship door silencers loose for field installation. 6. Frame Reinforcing a. Cover Boxes: Provide for hardware cutouts. b. Hinge Reinforcements: 9 gauge, 1-1/2" x 9" long and welded to frame. C. Lock Strike Reinforcement: 16 gauge, 1-1/2" x 6" long. d. Closer and Holder Reinforcements: 12 gauge, 1-3/4" x 20" long welded to frame. e. Angle Floor Clips: 16 gauge welded to frames or shipped loose, and each drilled for two 3/8" anchors. 7. Furnish at least 3 metal anchors in each jamb of frames up to 84" high and one additional anchor for each 24" in height above 84", in shapes, sizes and spacing shown and required for anchorage into adjoining wall construction. Fabricate joint anchor of steel no lighter than gage used for the frame. 8. Except where frames are set in masonry, and in steel stud walls where studs extend to supporting construction above, equip frames with vertical steel struts, 3/8" x 2" minimum size, extending ' from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend top of struts at right angle for attachment to supporting construction above by bolting, welding or other suitable anchorage. Provide bolted attachment of struts to frame jambs to permit height adjustment during installation. 9. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. 10. Furnish removable steel spreaders attached at the bottom of 3 -sided frames. 11. Provide 18 gauge channel glazing stops for borrowed lites and sidelites. One stop shall be fixed and one stop shall be removable to facilitate glazing and re -glazing. 12. Mark frame number on the jamb of each frame in butt recess for identification at the job site. 2 KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 ,J SECTION 08114 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS n AND FRAMES C. Doors 1. Fabricate flush hollow metal doors with face sheets each formed of 18 gage steel for interior doors and 16 gage galvanized steel for exterior doors. Make doors 1-3/4" thick unless otherwise noted. Construct doors with small glazed and louvered openings similarly. Reinforce the face sheets with 20 gage interlocking vertical C-shaped or Z-shaped reinforcing members spaced not over 6" apart and spot welded to both face sheets, or reinforce with a continuous truss formed under core �- of sheet metal, not lighter than 28 gage, spot welded to both face sheets, or 2-3/4" horizontally and vertically over entire surface of both faces, or with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the door and laminated to both inside faces of the panels. Foam stiffened cores are NOT allowed. Provide continuous reinforcing members welded to face sheets at the top and bottom of door. For vertically reinforced doors, place cork, fiberboard, or mineral wool board, in the spaces between reinforcing members. Provide removable stops of 18 gage steel for glazed openings; fasten with oval head, counter -sunk screws at not more than 12" o.c. 2. Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous flush channel not less than 16 gage, n extending full width of door and spot welded to both faces. Provide exterior doors with flush channel top or top cap as standard with the manufacturer. Make both vertical edges of doors flush and bevel 1/8" in 2". 3. Provide clearances for hollow metal doors of 3/32" at jambs and heads, 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors and 3/8" at bottom where no threshold is required. Where a threshold is shown, provide 1/8" clearance above threshold. 4. Insulate exterior non -fire rated hollow metal doors with polystyrene or polyurethane at door manufacturer's option, inserted between vertical reinforcing. D. Fire Rated Doors and Frames 1. In addition to other requirements for hollow metal doors and frames specified herein, comply with the label requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, the National Fire Protection Association and applicable local codes. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 80 and UL Standard for Safety No. 63 for the class of door opening scheduled. a. Doors and frames shall bear the appropriate Underwriters Laboratories labels. b. Label shall state required fire -protection rating and maximum temperature rise rating. 1 1) Maximum temperature rise rating is required for doors protecting exit enclosures. LDoors only shall bear this label. C. Where pairs of doors are scheduled, provide door manufacturer's standard astragal identical in performance to the astragal used in the approved test assembly for the fire rating indicated or required. E. Door Louvers 1. Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 -gage cold -rolled steel set into 20 -gage steel frame. 2. Maximum opening area, including light openings, not over one-half door height or 40 percent of leaf area, installed 5" minimum from door edge. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING A. Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by solvent cleaning. B. Chemically pretreat surfaces with a phosphate compound to maximize paint adherence. Apply one coat of specified primer. Cover surfaces without runs, smears and bare spots. C. Paint inside surface of removable stops and the frame area covered by such stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Examine the substrate and conditions under which hollow metal work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final Shop Drawings and manufacturer's data, and as specified herein. 3 C' KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C. Door Installation 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100-91 and Paragraph 2.03.0 of this Section. 2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealants from exposed surfaces. �I B. Touch up welds, scratches and abraded spots with same paint as used for the prime coat. C. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. D. Remove debris from Project site. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0900A 0 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 E I SECTION 08114 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES n ,i B. Frame Installation i—' 1. Except for frames located at in-place concrete and masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. In masonry and concrete construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Frames shall be grouted full of mortar at jambs. Anchors shall be built into the n joints in masonry as walls are laid up. b. At in-place concrete and masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. C. Remove temporary plastic plugs and install door silencers after frames are filled. d. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. e. In stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open , steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. C. Door Installation 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100-91 and Paragraph 2.03.0 of this Section. 2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealants from exposed surfaces. �I B. Touch up welds, scratches and abraded spots with same paint as used for the prime coat. C. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. D. Remove debris from Project site. END OF SECTION 4 KKE0900A 0 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 E l Ls SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors. B. Pre -machining of wood doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: For installation of wood doors. 1 B. Section 08114 - Hollow Steel Doors and Frames: For frames for wood doors. C. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. u D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09900 - Painting. n 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Certificate of compliance with AWI and WDMA Standards referenced. 2. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, dimensions, and construction details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise specified herein, wood doors shall conform with publications Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) 6th Edition 1994, Section 1300 and Window and Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA) I.S.1-A(1997). B. Where shown as fire doors, doors shall conform with Underwriters Laboratories, standard, UL 10(b) for label indicated on Drawings or specified herein, face veneer shall conform with Section 3.11. Fabrication of doors shall permit installation in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 80. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors shall be stacked flat on pallets, separated from each other by non-absorbent spacers, and protective wrapped by the manufacturer and shall not be delivered to the Project site until building has been closed - in and is thoroughly dry. Doors shall be stored flat. Doors shall not be removed from manufacturer's protective packaging until painting and other interior finishing work has been completed. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable doors, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.06 WARRANTY �—' A. The Contractor shall warrant the wood doors to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by door manufacturer's warranty for life of original installation. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the door manufacturer. Warp in excess of that permitted by WDMA Industry Standard, and other defects which may affect the operation of the door, shall be considered a defect under the provisions of the warranty. The door manufacturer or door manufacturer's authorized representative shall be responsible for inspecting the installation of the doors before issuance of the warranty, and shall note on the warranty that the doors have been hung in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Core Doors t 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. I 2. Eggers Industries i 3. Marshfileld Door Systems, Inc. (formerly Weyerhaeuser Co.) 4. V.T. Industries, Inc. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Door Types 1. Flush, 5 -ply (7 -ply doors are NOT acceptable) solid wood core, hardwood veneered Premium Grade, AWI Quality Standards, Section 1300. �' KKE0101 I KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08210 'J WOOD DOORS C-1 1 u a. Cores: Particleboard core, Symbol PC -5 or glued block solid wood core, Symbol SLC -5; for fire rated doors, mineral core, Symbol FDI. b. Face Veneer rl 1) A Grade, Red Oak, plain sliced; grain shall run vertically, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2) Natural Birch, rotary cut; for opaque paint finish. C. Crossbands: Hardwood or engineered hardwood, 1/16" thick, extending full width of door. d. Edge Bands: Same species as face veneer, matched for color. e. Label Requirements: Fire doors B label 60 minute FDI; doors to bear labels. F1 B. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 -gage cold -rolled steel set into 20 -gage steel frame. LJ 1. Maximum opening area, including light openings, not over one-half door height or 40 percent of leaf area, installed 5" minimum from door edge. f�t �j C. Pre -Machining: Doors shall be pre -machined for mortise applied hardware. Comply with final hardware LJ schedules, door frame shop drawings, and hardware templates. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre- r machining. D. Refer to Section 08710 for hardware. LJ 1. Where pairs of doors are scheduled, provide door manufacturer's standard astragal identical in performance to the astragal used in the approved test assembly for the fire rating indicated or F1 required. i� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 06200 for installation. B. Refer to Section 09900 for sealing doors upon arrival at the Project site and for field finishing. END OF SECTION fl u n r� u n 2 KKE0101 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 { C F, PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 08305 ACCESS PANELS n A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access panels. I 1 B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. Li 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove doors and frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged, and replace with new assemblies. END OF SECTION I C' KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES �-' A. Access panels in exterior soffits. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION }rl U A. Inserts and anchoring devices for building in to surrounding construction. Z 1.03 SUBMITTALS i-� A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300. 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Material description and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Include details of each frame type, elevation of panel, design type, anchorage and accessory items. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dur -Red Products B. J.L. Industries C. Karp Associates, Inc. D. Larsen's Mfg. Co. E. Milcor F. Nystrom Building Products 2.02 MATERIALS A. Frames: 16 gage galvanized bonderized steel. B. Flush Panel Doors: 14 gage galvanized bonderized steel. C. Hinge: Concealed pin type, spring loaded to allow for door removal, set to open 175 degrees. D. Locking Device: Furnish flush, screwdriver -operated zinc plated steel cam latch of number required to hold nonfire-rated door in flush, smooth plane when closed. E. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for installation of access Ldoors. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete and ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction, unless �j otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange approximately 1" wide around perimeter of frame. 2. Finish assembly with manufacturer's factory -applied baked -on primer. C. Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary slightly from sizes �1 shown on Drawings or specified herein. 1. Size: 24" x 24". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION n A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access panels. I 1 B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. Li 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove doors and frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged, and replace with new assemblies. END OF SECTION I C' KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS EPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonfire-rated, insulated, overhead coiling steel service doors for daily use. v 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DIVISIONS n A. Section 08710 -Finish Hardware: For cylinders for keyed switch control. L B. Division 16 - Electrical: For power to motor operator. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The overhead coiling service door shall be designed to withstand minimum 20 psf windload. B. The overhead coiling service door shall be designed for maximum 25 cycles per day and an overall maximum of 50,000 cycles for the life of the door. j 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, recommended installation and operating instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Plan, elevation and details of door, and electrical connections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Doors furnished by approved manufacturers must comply with this Specification, U.L. requirements, National Fire Protection Association and ASTM. B. Installation shall be by a firm authorized by the manufacturer to install specified doors. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured by the following companies complying with these specifications will be acceptable. �t 1. The Cookson Company {l J 2. Cornell Iron Works 3. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Co., Inc. B. For references purposes only, Cookson products are specified herein. 1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: Curtain shall consist of interlocking slats formed from hot -dipped galvanized sheet steel. Bottom slat of curtain shall be reinforced with 2 steel angles, not less than 1/8" thick. Slats shall be LJ No. 44, flat, approximately 3" high x 7/8" thick, cosisting of a 22 gauge exterior face and 24 gauge interior face separated by 13/16" rigid insulation. Provide "Featheredge" safety edge at bottom of curtain to stop and reverse door upon contact with an obstruction. B. Guides: Manufacturer's guides shall consist of 3 galvanized steel angles, assembled with bolts to form a groove for the curtain. The exterior leg of each guide shall be equipped with continuous extruded vinyl snap -on weatherstrip. Wall angle shall have slotted holes to receive bolts or lag screws of size and at centers determined by the manufacturer for a secure installation. 1. Mounting shall be face -of -wall style. C. Brackets: Brackets shall be fabricated from steel plate designed to house ends of coils. D. Barrel: Barrel shall be not less than 6" diameter steel tubing, designed to limit maximum deflection to 0.03" per foot. Oil tempered torsion springs shall be capable of correctly counterbalancing weight of curtain. Springs shall be adjusted by means of an exterior wheel. E. Hood: Hood shall be fabricated from 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet and shall be formed to fit the 1 curvature of the brackets and attached securely to brackets. Hood shall fully enclose the barrel such that the barrel is completely concealed from view. Hood shall contain a waterproof canvas baffle to control air infiltration. F. Motor: Door manufacturer's belt drive operator, 1/2 hp, 3 phase. Motor shall be operated by key switch control, keyed to the building system. Refer to Section 08710 for cylinders. E. KKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS G. Finishes: "FinalCote" factory finished. 1. Curtain and hood shall receive "FinalCote" finish, consisting of hot dipped galvanized coating, bond coat, primer and polyester topcoat. a. Color: Tan. 2. Bottom bar, guides, brackets, and barrel shall receive a rust -inhibiting primer. a. Color: Bronze. 2.03 OPERATION A. Doors shall be operated by an electric motor with belt drive and roller chain sprocket reducer. Motor operator shall include a geared limit switch and an electrically interlocked emergency chain operator. Motor shall be medium duty rated, sized as required by the door. B. Motor shall be activated by 3 -button station from interior side only as specified herein. 1. Push button of 3 -button type marked "Open", "Closed", and "Stop"; located as shown, or directed. a. Stations shall be keyed type. b. Provide one station on interior side of each overhead coiling door. 2. Refer to Section 08710 for cylinders. C. Emergency chain operator shall be operable from the same side of the door that the keyed switch control is operated from. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount doors to substrate supported from steel tube columns in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and applicable U.L. requirements. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion, test operation of doors in the presence of the Owner's representative. Make necessary adjustments to ensure proper operation. B. Provide training to Owner's personnel in the proper maintenance of doors. END OF SECTION 0) KKE0401 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08356 DOUBLE-ACTING IMPACT DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Double-acting, aluminum clad, self-closing impact doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08114 - Hollow Steel Doors and Frames. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Door description, installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations and mounting details based on field measurements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of the doors shall be under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 DOOR TYPE A. Door shall be "Easy Swing", Model SCP -7 (Eliason Corp.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Door shall be double-acting, self-closing, medium use type, constructed of 3/4" solid core exterior grade plywood, and metal clad. Top panels 0.032" 6061-T6 aluminum alloy, satin anodized finish. Base plates 48" high, 18 gauge stainless steel both sides. B. Hardware: Manufacturer's stainless steel hinges providing swinging operation in both directions and 5" x 18" high jamb guards. C. Windows: Each leaf shall be provided with 3/16" thick, 9" x 14" vision panel of scratch resistant polycarbonate, set in black rubber molding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect doors and hardware complete, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion, test operation of doors in the presence of the Owner's representative; make adjustments as required. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES r1 AND STOREFRONTS j�--+ PART 1 -GENERAL A. The Contractor shall warrant, in writing, that the entrances and storefront will be free of faults and C defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except the warranty shall be extended by the manufacturer's 3 -year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall be signed by the Contractor, installer, and manufacturer. El KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glazed aluminum doors for manual operation. B. Glazed aluminum storefront. C. Aluminum flashing. D. Door hardware except cylinders. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Sealants are specified in Section 07900. B. Glass, spandrel panels and glazing materials are specified in Section 08800. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware 1. Door hardware for manually operated aluminum doors shall be provided by Section 08410 except cylinders which are provided by Section 08710. All hardware is listed in this Section 08710 for Cconsistency in selection and evaluation of hardware requirements. B. Section 08745 - Handicap Automatic Entry Door Hardware. SUBMITTALS r1.04 A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for each system. j-1 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate sections of typical members, dimensioned plans and elevations, anchors U and fasteners and their spacing, and full details of accessories required. a. Show glass thickness and glazing details. b. Show dimensions, installation and erection details, including connections, fasteners and welds. C. Provide scaled drawings as follows: 1) Plans and wall elevations at 1/2" = F-0". 2) Typical composite members at full scale. E3. Samples a. One 8" length of aluminum extrusion in the finish specified. Lk 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 4. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver entrances and storefront to the Project site clearly marked for proper identification. B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground, and protected from weather, construction activities, and other causes of damage. C. Materials shall be handled at the Project site to prevent damage. All damaged and otherwise unsuitable rmaterial `' 1.07 when so determined shall be immediately removed from the Project site. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant, in writing, that the entrances and storefront will be free of faults and C defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except the warranty shall be extended by the manufacturer's 3 -year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall be signed by the Contractor, installer, and manufacturer. El KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Failure of materials and workmanship includes excessive leakage and air infiltration, excessive deflections, faulty operation of entrances, deterioration of finish and construction in excess of normal weathering, and defects in other components of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Co., Inc. (National Account) B. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 SYSTEMS A. Storefront and Vestibule Framing 1. "Trifab Il" 451, nominal 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" system at exterior storefront and exterior vestibule framing. 2. "Trifab II" 450, nominal 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" system at interior vestibule framing and other interior walls. B. Doors: "350" medium stile. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Materials 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209-96. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221-96. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429-95. 4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B211 -95a. 5. Alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for the type of use and finish specified. 6. Thickness: As necessary to comply with structural and wind loading requirements, but not less than the following: a. Principal Extrusions: 0.125". b. Principal Formed Sheet Members: 0.125". C. Extruded Glazing Stops and Trim: 0.062". d. Formed Glazing Stops and Trim: 0.050". e. Sheet: 0.050". B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. 2. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners. C. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft stainless steel 26 -gage minimum, type selected by manufacturer for compatibility. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123 -89a. E. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123 -89a. F. Bituminous Coatings: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-PS 12, compounded for 30 -mil thickness per coat. G. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of either molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D2000-96 or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D2287-96. H. Aluminum Flashings: Smooth finish aluminum 0.062" (minimum thickness), 500S -H14 alloy with finish to match storefront system. I. Sill Plates: Provide manufacturer's standard sill plates. J. Refer to Section 07900 for sealant materials. K. Hardware: Refer to Section 08710 for finish hardware schedule. L. Refer to Section 08800 for glazing materials. n n U n Li 11 rl iJ i U J ID n LJ 1.2 11 n `J C n KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 u SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.04 FABRICATION B. Stile -and -Rail Type Aluminum Doors A. General 1. Coordination of Fabrication: Wherever possible, check the actual frame and door openings in the construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by Contractor and avoid delays of the work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate installation tolerances to ensure proper fit of door and frame units. 2. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile requirements, are shown on Drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. a. Details shown are based upon standard details by manufacturer indicated. 3. Prefabrication: To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. ,1 4. Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to C cleaning, finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64". (� 5. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. 6. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion. 7. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 8. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 9. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. B. Stile -and -Rail Type Aluminum Doors C CKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1. Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j -bolts, or fabricate with structurally welded joints, at manufacturer's option. 2. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass and panels, without disassembly of door stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non -removal. C. Non -Thermal Construction: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies, as shown, with either welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards, reinforced as necessary to support required loads. D. Finish: Fluoropolymer resin -based (70 percent Kynar) 1. 2 -coat system "Duranar" (PPG); or approved substitution; for framing. 2. 3 -coat system "Duranar XL" (PPG); or approved substitution; for doors. 3. Color: "Bone White". Verify with Kohl's. ,1 E. Performance Criteria C 1. Thermal Movement: Fabricate exterior components from manufacturer's stock systems which have been designed to provide for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F. 2. Wind Loading: Fabricate exterior components from manufacturer's stock systems which have been tested in accordance with ASTM E330-96 to withstand at least the following loadings: a. Uniform pressure of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward. 3. Weather Resistance: Fabricate exterior components from manufacturer's stock systems which have been tested to demonstrate permanent resistance to leakages as follows with test pressure differential of 10 percent of design loading (excluding operable door edges). a. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.06 cfin/sf of fixed area, at a test pressure of 6.24 lbs. psf; tested in accordance with ASTM E283-91. b. Water Infiltration: No uncontrolled water penetration at a test pressure of 9 lbs. psf; tested in accordance with ASTM E331-96. C CKKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the surrounding structure and the conditions under which the work is to be erected, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of aluminum framing systems. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp and rack of framing members doors, and panels. Anchor securely in place, separating aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provide weathertight construction. 1. Refer to Section 07900 for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed during installation of doors and frames. D. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and Section 08800 for glass and glazing work. E. Cooperate and coordinate with Electrical Subcontractor in installing low voltage wiring and reed switches in door frame heads for security requirements as required. F. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items, complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping. B. Clean completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from aluminum surfaces. C. Advise Contractor of protective treatment and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that doors and frames will be without damage and deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION n n f , 1 u n J n v t iJ !I LJ D, f! Li KKE0900A KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 u C C C c C C C C C C C SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish hardware. B. Cylinders for aluminum entrance locks. C. Thresholds and applied weatherstrips. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: For installation of door hardware scheduled herein. B. The following Sections include door hardware furnished by door manufacturer: 1. Section 08210 - Wood Doors 2. Section 08356 - Double -Acting Impact Doors C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefront: For furnishing of door hardware specified in Section 08710 for aluminum doors except cylinders. D. Section 08745 - Handicap Automatic Entry Door Hardware. E. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Partitions: For toilet partition hardware. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings and specified herein: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. A115.1, Specification for Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. b. A 115.2, Specification for Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. 3. Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" 4. National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA) a. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. b. NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Building Materials Directory. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: I. Hardware Schedule a. Provide hardware schedule list in "Hardware Groups" listing complete designation of every item required for each door opening. 1) List and describe each opening separately; except for hand, include doors with identical hardware in a single heading unless specified otherwise. Include door number, room designations, degree of swing, and hand. 2) List related details; include dimensions, door and frame material and other conditions affecting hardware. 3) List of hardware items; include manufacturer's name, quantity product name, catalog number, size, finish, attachments, and related details where applicable. b. Furnish catalog literature for hardware listed by manufacturers not included in the Architect's schedule. C. Number hardware groups same as numbers specified herein. If variation is required or desired by the scheduler use suffix letters with the numbers or similar method to keep scheduled numbers specified herein in sequence. 2. Furnish samples of hardware as may be required by the Architect. Samples shall be in the finish required, properly marked for identification and installation location in the Project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer even though several are indicated as acceptable manufacturers. 1 KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE B. Hardware supplier shall be an authorized distributor of manufacturers listed. Hardware work shall be done under the direct supervision of a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. C. Hardware supplier shall be responsible for thoroughly detailing the Project to assure that the items specified will properly function in the indicated locations. D. Furnish UL and Warnock -Hersey listed hardware for labeled openings and 20 minute openings in conformance with requirements for the class of opening scheduled. These requirements have precedence over this Specification where conflict exists. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware to the job site in manufacturer's original containers marked to correspond with the final hardware schedule for installation location, and store in dry surroundings. B. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the Project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. C. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or Project site) for installation. D. Furnish a copy of the final hardware schedule and pertinent hardware templates or template information to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. This Specification will consider as acceptable items manufactured by the following companies, providing they comply with the hardware listed in the schedule in every respect in terms of quality material, finish, grade, and function as determined by the Architect. A. Butt Hinges 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Hazer McKinney PBB Stanley a. 1279 Products Specified Acceptable 1. Butt Hinges Hager McKinney, PBB, Stanley 2. Exit Alarms Alarm Lock NO SUBSTITUTION 3. Locks Best NO SUBSTITUTION 4. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars Quality Hager, Hiawatha 5. Closers LCN NO SUBSTITUTION 6. Protective Plates Quality Hager, Hiawatha 7. Stops Glynn -Johnson Hager, Ives, Quality 8. Thresholds, Weatherstrips Reese National Guard, Pemko and Jamb Gaskets 9. Exit Devices Dor-O-Matic NO SUBSTITUTION 10. Observation Ives Device 2.02 MATERIALS A. Butt Hinges 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Hazer McKinney PBB Stanley a. 1279 T2714 PB81 F179 b. BB1279 TB2714 BB81 FBB179 C. BB1191 TB2314 BB51 FBB 191 d. BB1168 T4B3786 41381 FBB168 e. BB1199 T4133386 41351 FB13199 2. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows: a. Quantity 1) Two hinges per leaf for openings through 60" high. 2) One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30" in height, or fraction thereof. n U n U u M F�'. U tI LJ n Li 9 U n U 9 U ,I LJ D. n Li ri KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 ,J El �' KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08710 70 FINISH HARDWARE 3) Four hinges for Dutch openings through 90 high. b. Weight and Type 1) Standard weight, plain bearing hinge 1279 for interior openings through 36" wide without a door closer. 2) Standard weight, ball bearing hinge BB1279 for interior openings over 36" through 40" wide, and interior openings through 40" wide with a door closer 3) Standard weight, ball bearing hinge BB 1191 x NRP for exterior outswinging non- public entrance openings through 40" wide. 4) Heavyweight, four ball bearing hinge BB 1168 for interior openings over 40" wide, and public vestibule openings at exterior doors. 5) Heavyweight four ball bearing hinge BB 1199 x NRP for exterior outswinging public Li entrance openings and exterior outswinging non-public exterior openings over 40" wide. n C. Sizes 1) 3" x 3" for 1-1/8" thick doors. 2) 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" for 1-3/4" thick doors. 3) 5" x 5" for 2-1/4" thick doors. E, B. Exit Alarms 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: EAlarm Lock a. Model 260 b. Model 710 C. Model 732 2. Furnish exit alarm series and functions specified in the hardware schedule. C. Locks C 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Best a. 9K Series 2. Furnish lock types and functions specified in the hardware schedule, with the following provisions: a. Cylinders: 7 pin. C b. Backsets: 2 3/4". C. Strikes 1) Wrought box type for the inactive leaf of pairs of wood doors, and wood frames. 2) ANSI A 115.2 type for hollow metal doors and frames. 3) Lip length sufficient to protect trim, frame and inactive leaf. 3. Furnish knurled lever handles on doors to stairs other than exit stairs, loading platforms, stages, n jU4 boiler rooms, and other hazardous locations. D. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ouality Hager Hiawatha a. 1618" c-c 33G 523A b. 40 8 x 16 30S-8 x 16 200K C. 40 4 x 16 30S-4 x 16 200F 2. Where pulls, push plates, push bars or push-pulls are listed in the hardware schedule furnish: a. Pull 161 8": Interior and exterior doors. b. Push plates 40 8 x 16: Flush interior doors. C. Push plates 40 4 x 16: Flush exterior doors. El �' KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE n E. Closers `--' 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: LCN LJ a. 1460 b. 4110 n 2. Where closers are listed in the hardware schedule, furnish 1460 series unless other functions/series Ld are specified in the hardware groups. 3. Furnish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates and special shoes as may be required by the H. Thresholds, Weatherstrips, and Jamb Gaskets door and frame conditions. 4. Furnish integral cushion stop where indicated CUSH in the Hardware Groups. t—i 5. Furnish through bolt attachments for closers specified for mineral core doors. 6. Determine closer size in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for application on the n ' I room side of corridor doors, stair side of stair doors, and interior side of exterior doors. L j F. Protective Plates �J 1. Where protective plates are specified in the hardware schedule, furnish 16 gauge, 0.050" plates 2. Where thresholds are specified in the hardware schedule, furnish S205A thresholds unless detailed with the following dimensions: 3. Furnish F -797B head and jamb gaskets for all labeled doors in "one-hour" corridors. a. Width: 2" less than door width b. Height: 10" G. Wall Stops/Floor Stops n 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: U Glynn -Johnson Hager Ives Quality n a. 50W 236W 406 W307 b. WB11X 255W 443 417ES '� C. FB13 241F 436 331ES 2. Furnish a 50W Series wall stop, as applicable, for each door leaf except where wall stops WBI1X are specified in the hardware schedule. 3. Furnish an FB13 floor stop where doors do not swing against a wall and overhead stops or closers with integral cushion stops are not specified. H. Thresholds, Weatherstrips, and Jamb Gaskets 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Reese National Guard Pemko a. S205A 425 Alum 171A b. DS78C 130NS 315 -CR C. 323C 20ON 315 -CN ' I d. R201C 16AD 346C �- e. F -797B 5050 S88D f. S411A 952 R.517A 2. Where thresholds are specified in the hardware schedule, furnish S205A thresholds unless detailed otherwise, DS78 head and jamb weatherstrips, and 323 sweep strips, unless otherwise scheduled. 3. Furnish F -797B head and jamb gaskets for all labeled doors in "one-hour" corridors. I 2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Furnish hardware with screws, throughbolts and other fastenings suitable to assure permanent anchorage. n Where exposed, fastenings shall be countersunk oval -head type, (except use flat -head for hinges), and shall match finish of hardware being attached. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. L, Hardware shall not be attached with self -tapping screws and sheet metal screws. Door closers, closer arms, door holders, holder arms and door stops shall be secured to doors with plated head sex bolts with smooth head to exterior. Floor type stops and holders shall be fastened to the floor with machine screws n into expansion shields. jJ 1. Items for application to metal shall be furnished with machine screws. Items for application to concrete and masonry shall be furnished with machine screws and expansion shields. Items for application to wood shall be furnished with wood screws. Screws for items applied on gypsum M KKE0401 D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 J SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE board and plaster shall be sufficient) lo to provide solid connection to framing/backing /backin behind p Y g p g g the plaster and gypsum board. r1l 2. Exposed fastenings shall be finished to match the items fastened. Fastenings shall be the same JLC metal as the item fastened except that fastenings for aluminum items shall be brass or stainless steel. 3. Hardware and fastenings for application to fire doors shall be Underwriter's Laboratories or Warnock -Hersey approved and listed, as applicable. 2.04 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS A. Except where indicated otherwise in the hardware groups or herein, all hardware finishes shall be applied over base metals as specified in the table that follows: 1. Finish Schedule (except aluminum doors which are identified in the Hardware Groups). HARDWARE ITEM FINISH AND BASE METAL a. Butt Hinges 1) Exterior US32D on stainless steel 2) Interior US26D on steel b. Exit Controls US26D on brass or bronze C. Locks US26D on brass or bronze or US32D on stainless steel d. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars US32D on stainless steel C e. Closers (Typical) Sprayed AL on cast iron or aluminum f. Closers (Aluminum Entrances) Powder coat finish; color to match entrances g. Protective Plates US32D on stainless steel h. Wall Stops US26D on brass or bronze i. Thresholds Mill aluminum j. Weatherstrips and Clear anodized aluminum Sweep Strips k. Miscellaneous US26D on brass or bronze C2.05 KEYING A. All keying requirements will be accomplished by Best Lock Corporation directly with the Owner j� 1. Furnish keys specified herein. a. 2 Change Keys for each lock. b. 6 Masterkeys for each Master set. C. 2 Removable Core Control Keys. CPART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and L► recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto and into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re -install each item. CDo not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Set units level plumb and true to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, to maintain the label. D. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work. E. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways, and interior side of exterior F. doors. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitred corners and hair -line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. [� G. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and L anchors in accordance with industry standards. H. Mounting Heights 1. Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to the recommended mounting locations of the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. 5 KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 2. Install wall stops WB I IX to strike near top of doors, but not more than 78" from the finished floor Lj line; install wall stops 50W to engage knobs, levers and pulls. Deliver to the Owner one complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with the hardware. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper ILJ operation and function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite type if not specifically recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 1. Door closers, exit devices and electronics (if any) shall be checked by the hardware distributor for tJ proper operation. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes during the final adjustment of hardware. C. Clean hardware to restore the original finish. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE {� A. Furnish hardware items in the quantities indicated unless additional hardware is required for a complete and operable facility. Ensure completeness, proper function and proper application of hardware for each door. Refer to Drawing SSI for key and lock legend. GROUP 1 Doors 101 A, 101 B, 101 C (Exterior Doors) Offset Pivots (Kawneer) Closer 4041 (LCN) Drop Plates 4040 18G (LCN) Cylinder 1 E -72-C 181 Pulls CO -9 White Nylon (Kawneer) Threshold 425E (NGP) Sweeps C607A (NGP) u Exit Device* 1490EO (Dor-O-Matic), US28 Exit Device* 1490NL (Dor-O-Matic), US28 w/night latch and cylinder *See Elevations Sheet A3 for locations Refer to Section 08745 for automatic entry hardware GROUP 2 Doors 101 D, 101 E and 101 F (Interior Doors) Offset Pivots (Kawneer) Closer 4041 (LCN) Drop Plates 4040 18G (LCN) Cylinder 1 E -72-C 181 t1 Pulls CO -9 White Nylon (Kawneer) Threshold 425E (NGP) Exit Device* 1490EO (Dor-O-Matic), US28 Exit Device* 1490NL (Dor-O-Matic), US28, w/night latch and cylinder I 1 *See Elevations Sheet A3 for locations U Refer to Section 08745 for automatic entry hardware " rl KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 GROUP3 Butts (6) SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE Exit Alarm (2) E (See Key and Lock Legend) Cylinder (2) Closer (2) Threshold (2) Weatherstrip All sides of each leaf. Sweep (2) Rain Drip GROUP4 Butts Lock G (See Key and Lock Legend) Closer-CUSH GROUPS Butts Lock H (See Key and Lock Legend) Closer Stop GROUP 6 Butts Lock H (See Key and Lock Legend) Stop GROUP 7 Butts Lock H (See Key and Lock Legend) Closer Stop (Floor) GROUP8 Butts Lock G (See Key and Lock Legend) Weatherstrip (5050 4 sides) GROUP9 Door hardware by door supplier. Lock K (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 10 Butts Exit Alarm F (See Key and Lock Legend) Cylinder Closer-CUSH Weatherstrip Sweep Strip Rain Drip Observation Device 698 Ives 7 KKE0401 D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Butts Lock Closer Stop Observation Device Butts Lock Deadbolt Closer-CUSH Observation Device Butts Push Pull Closer Stop Butts Exit Alarm Cylinder Closer Stop Butts Exit Alarm Cylinder Closer Weatherstrip Rain Drip Threshold Sweep Strip Butts Latch Stop Closer Stop Threshold Butts Lock Closer Stop KKE0401 D SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE GROUP 11 G (See Key and Lock Legend) 698 Ives GROUP 12 G (See Key and Lock Legend) M (See Key and Lock Legend) 698 Ives GROUP 13 L (See Key and Lock Legend) L (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 14 F (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 15 F (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 16 J (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 17 S411A GROUP 18 S (See Key and Lock Legend) GROUP 19 (Not Used) 8 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE GROUP 20 Butts (6) Exit Alarm D (See Key and Lock Legend) Cylinder Closer (2) END OF SECTION 9 KKE0401D KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08745 HANDICAP AUTOMATIC ENTRY DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL C 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Handicap automatic entry door hardware and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DIVISIONS A. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. B. Division 16 - Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS u A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions, operation and maintenance manual. 3. Shop Drawings: Show locations of door controls, door operator, wiring, electrical requirements and exact door dimensions. E1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. Provide hardware system complying with ANSUBHMA A156.10-1991 or ANSIBHMA A156.19-1990. EB. C. The system must operate between -30 degrees F. and 130 degrees F. PART2-PRODUCTS C2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Operator 1. The Stanley Works, Access Technologies 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 3. National Accounts pricing and coordination contact is: j—1 Automatic Entrances of Wisconsin L' 1(800)776-7122, EXT 100 or 103 B. Controls C 1. Curran Engineering Co., Inc. 2.02 EQUIPMENT n A. Door Operating Equipment: Electro -mechanical system installed in a visible header, Stanley "Magic- { Access" door operator, visible application, for single in or outswinging door. L, 1. Aluminum Finish: Match aluminum entrances and storefront. E B. Public Door Controls 1. Storefront Jamb Mounted Control: Model CE -615 -SF push plate control; aluminum face plate with blue lettering and a red button; engraved with handicapped symbol, and "PUSH TO OPEN" below. 2. Guardpost Mounted Control: Stainless Model CE -911 -615 -SRC stainless steel guardpost and surface mounted control box; with similar controls and text specified for jamb mounted device; and providing radio controlled signal to door operator. C. Radio Receiver: No. 109930, C D. Provide wiring from door operating equipment to hard -wired public door controls. E. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide 115V, 60 Hz, 1 -phase, 15 amp supply to the door header and conduit for wiring between hard -wired public door controls and operating equipment. C2.03 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. The equipment shall be designed to handle aluminum entrance doors specified of the size shown on the Drawings. 1 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08745 HANDICAP AUTOMATIC ENTRY DOOR HARDWARE B. Opening Speed 1. The door shall be field adjustable so that opening speed to back check or 80 degrees shall be 3 seconds or longer as required in Table I of ANSIBHMA A156.19. 2. Opening speed to fully open shall be 4 seconds or longer. C. Hold -Open: The door shall be field adjustable to remain fully open for not less than 5 seconds and up to 30 seconds. D. Closing Speed 1. Doors shall be field adjustable to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 seconds or longer as required in Table I of ANSI/BHMA A156.19. 2. Doors shall be field adjustable to close from 10 degrees to fully closed in not less than 1.5 second. E. The force required to prevent a door from opening or closing shall not exceed 15 lbs./foot applied 1" from latch edge of the door at any point in the opening or closing cycle. F. In the event of a power failure, doors shall open with a manual pressure not to exceed 25 lbs./foot at a point 1" from the latch edge of the door. 2.04 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Push Plate Operation: Push plate on either side of door shall actuate the door and open slowly to back check (80 degrees) in 3 to 6 seconds and to fully open position in 4 to 7 seconds. They shall remain open with an adjustable setting between 5 to 30 seconds. After time delay, door shall close by a spring in the door operator from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 to 6 seconds and from 10 degrees to fully closed in 1-1/2 to 2 seconds. B. Manual: When power assist is on or off, door system shall operate equivalent to a #3 manual door closer from exterior doors. C. Hold Open: Door shall have a hold open option to automatically open door to full open position and remain open. D. Provide push plates in locations shown on the Drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the surrounding structure and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Door operators and accessories shall be installed by a factory trained contractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Each door shall be cycled 100 times then readjusted for optimum operating condition and safety. B. Following installation and adjustment, automatic doors shall not be used as a means of access for construction materials and equipment without approval by the Owner's representative. 1. Damage resulting from such use shall be immediately repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION n J M LJ n i� U [�1 li u 1� n J 11 i 9 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 L SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES L_, A. Glass glazed into frames (except factory glazed windows). B. Frameless mirrors. n LD. C. Insulated spandrel panels. Setting materials and cleaners. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Glazing work for the following Sections shall be the responsibility of those contractors complying with the requirements of this Section. 1. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. C 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Samples Ea. 12" square sample of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units. b. 6" square sample of insulated spandrel panel aluminum skin in gauge and finish specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE EA. Unless otherwise shown, comply with published recommendations, details, and procedures of glass product manufacturers and organizations below. 1. Glass Association of North America (GANA/formerly the Flat Glass Marketing Association), "Glazing Manual", 1997 Edition. 2. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA), TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines". 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z97.1 - 1994, "Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test". C a. Each piece of safety glass shall exhibit appropriate label. 4. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 16 CFR Part 1201 (1-1-91 Edition) "Safety C Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glazing materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified with trade C name, color, size, hardness, type, class, and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. C1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. during glazing unless the manufacturer of the glazing materials specifically agrees to installation of specified materials at lower temperatures. If job progress and other conditions require glazing work when temperatures are below 40 degrees F. (or below the minimum temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure satisfactory work. Record in writing to the manufacturer, with copy to the Architect, the conditions under which such glazing work proceeds, and the provisions made C to ensure satisfactory work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant in writing, that the insulating glass units and mirrors will be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except the warranty period shall be extended by the manufacturer's written warranty of these products as follows: 1. Insulating Glass: 5 years against material obstruction of vision between interior glass surfaces. 2. Mirrors: 15 years against silver spoilage. LJ 11, E. KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Primary Glass Products and Insulated Units 1. Cardinal IG 2. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div. 3. Guardian Industries, Corp. 4. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 5. Viracon, Inc. 6. PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group (Primary glass only) B. Other Materials: As specified in Article 2.02. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036-91, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, 1/4" thick, clear. B. Tempered Float Glass: Float glass which has been heat strengthened (fully tempered) to achieve strength 4 to 5 times stronger than regular annealed glass, complying with ASTM C1048-92 and ANSI -Z97.1. Glass shall be tempered horizontally. (Tong marks at top only will be permitted.) C. Insulating Glass: 1" insulating glass complying with ASTM E774-97 tested and approved in accordance with SIGMA, Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association requirements. Provide following where shown: 1. Typical: 1/4" clear glass outboard, 1/2" air space and 1/4" clear glass inboard. a. Temper both panes where shown on Drawings and as required. D. Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick, Quality q2, polished float glass mirror electrolytically copper plated with ground and polished edges and concealed fasteners. E. Mirror Trim (For Column Application): Prefinished extruded aluminum J shaped moldings, Nos. 420107-5/8" and 420068-5/16" Fascia J Moldings (Stylmark, Inc./(612)574-7474 or (800)328-2495). 1. Finish: Factory finished, No. 110 Buffed Brite Natural. F. Mirror Adhesive (For Column Application): "Mirror Mastic -Ultra Bond" (Gunther). G. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Smooth aluminum faced composite panel consisting of 0.032" aluminum skins, hardboard liners and expanded polystyrene core, "Omega Foam -Ply" (Laminators, Inc.); or approved substitution. 1. Size: V thick. 2. Finish and Color: Fluoropolymer resin -based (Kynar 500), 2 coat system, color to match aluminum storefront. H. Glazing Tape: Polyisobutylene/butyl "Tremco 440 Tape" (Tremco, Inc.); "Extru-Seal" (Pecora Corp.). I. Setting Blocks: Neoprene blocks, 70 to 90 Type A durometer hardness. J. Spacers: Neoprene blocks, 40 to 50 Type A durometer hardness, 3" long, self-adhesive on 1 (one) face only. K. Dry Glazing Gaskets: 50-70 durometer hardness, extruded or molded neporene, butyl or vinyl, color to match aluminum. Thickness and configuration to suit metal sections used to provide 15 percent minimum compression around seal. Miter corners. L. Cleaners: Type recommended by gasket manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measure openings and cut glass accurately to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as specified by GANA. If glass is to be cut to size at Project site, deliver each piece to Project at least 2" larger (in both dimensions) than required, to facilitate the cutting of clean-cut edges without the necessity of seaming and nipping. 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 J J� r 11 C C C 8 C C C C SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, and abrade glass which is tempered, heat strengthened, and coated. B. Clean glazing stops and rabbets to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Set each piece with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Pieces which have significant impact damage at edges, scratches and abrasion of faces, and other evidence of damage shall not be installed. C. Locate setting blocks at the quarter points of sill, but no closer than 6" to corners of glass. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide spacers for glass to separate glass from stops, except where continuous gaskets or tape are required. Locate spacers 36" o.c. maximum inside and out, with a minimum of 2 spacers per edge of glass. Provide width as required for minimum of 3/8" bite on glass at all 4 edges. E. Butt or lap ends of sealant tape in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Install toilet room mirrors plumb and level using concealed fasteners. G. Install column mirrors plumb and level with mirror adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions, and retained at top and bottom with aluminum J moldings specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or ribbons suitably attached to framing and held free of the glass. Warning markings shall not be applied directly to the glass. B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, cracked, chipped, or damaged in any way and from any source, including vandalism and accidents during the construction period. C. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not become stained. D. Wash and polish glass on all faces just prior to final acceptance. Comply with instructions and recommendations of the glass manufacturer for cleaning. C C KKE0900 END OF SECTION 3 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r C C C Q N C SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonload-bearing steel studs. B. Steel studs with integral slotted standard. C. Gypsum wallboard and sheathing. D. Metal suspension system. E. Accessories and joint materials. F. Acoustical sealant. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Acoustical insulation is specified in Section 09530. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and recommended installation instructions for systems used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gypsum wallboard construction shall comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of governing authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the Work. B. To the greatest extent possible, obtain materials from 1 (one) manufacturer to promote single source responsibility. C. Installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the wallboard materials. D. Where gypsum drywall systems with fire -resistance ratings are indicated and where required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL, FM and A.I.A. E. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings or specified herein: 1. Gypsum Association (GA) "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard," GA -216, unless otherwise specified herein. 2. Gypsum Association (GA) "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" GA -214 jointly published by AWCI, CISCA, GA, and PDCA. 3. ASTM C645 -96a "Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members". 4. ASTM C754-97 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum". 5. Cold -formed metal framing and related work shall be designed in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in their original, unopened containers or bundles and stored in a place providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 degrees F. for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. Installation shall not be started until windows are glazed, doors installed and openings temporarily closed. Ventilation shall be provided to remove excess moisture during joint treatment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Wallboard and Finishing Compound (Interior Construction) 1. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp. EKKE0900E KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD B. Gypsum Sheathing 1. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 2. National Gypsum Co. 3. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp. C. Steel Framing 1. Gypsum wallboard and sheathing manufacturers specified above, or; 2. Clark Steel Framing 3. Consolidated Steel, Inc. 4. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc. D. Other Materials: As specified in Article 2.02. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Tapered edge, thickness as shown on the Drawings. 1. Regular: ASTM C36-97 2. Type X: ASTM C36-97 3. Water resistant: ASTM C630 -96a B. Gypsum Wallboard: Square edge, thickness as shown on the Drawings, ASTM C36-97. 1. Special Size: 24" x 144"; for use with slotted standard steel studs specified. C. Gypsum Sheathing 1. Typical: Square edge, 1/2" thick for 16" stud spacing and 5/8" for 24" stud spacing, ASTM C79-97. 2. Fiberglass Faced: Square edge, 1/2" thick, ASTM C79-97, with silicone treated gypsum core and surfaced with inorganic glass facers, "Dens -Glass Gold" (Georgia-Pacific Corp.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. D. Screws: Type S and S-12 buglehead and panhead, sized to suit thickness. 1. Type 5-12 buglehead for attachment of gypsum sheathing to steel studs, corrosion resistant treated, ASTM C954 -96a. E. Adhesive: As recommended by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer. F. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645 -96a. 1. Lightgage Steel Framing: 20 gage (0.0329" minimum) and 25 gage (0.0179" minimum) hot dipped galvanized studs, runners, and related components, sizes as shown. G. Steel Studs with Integral Slotted Standards 1. Garcy Corp. steel stud assembly, No. 1301 and 1302, Type A for 5/8" thick gypsum board. a. Stud Size: 3-5/8", with 1/2" slots 1" on center, 0.125" wall thickness. 2. Garcy Corp. Regional Sales Offices a. East: (212)564-6958 b. Midwest: (708)345-2500 C. West: (213)532-4361 H. Metal Furring Channels: 24 gage, electro -galvanized steel, hat -shaped, sizes as shown on the Drawings. 1. Where shown as "Resilient", provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce sound transmission. I. Cold -Rolled Channels 1. 3/4": 300 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft. 2. 1-1/2": 475 lbs. per 1000 lin, ft. J. Z -Furring Channels: 26 gage (0.0179" minimum), hot dipped galvanized steel, slotted web, 3/4" and 1-1/4" flange widths, depth as shown. K. Clips: Galvanized steel wire or sheet metal devices designed for attachment of furring members to supports or to each other. L. Wire Ties: Soft galvanized steel wire, not less than 16 gage for tying furring channels to runner channels, and not less than 18 gage for other ties. M. Hangers: 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire. n Lj it �J Ij III 11� Lj 1-� u 1� KKE0900E KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 u r C C C F u C C I C C SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD N. Backer Plates: 20 gage, galvanized per ASTM B633-85(1994), Type RS or heavier, sizes as required, for fastening to channels for attachment of fixtures, accessories, and similar items. O. Accessories: Corner reinforcements, casing beads and metal trim, fabricated from 0.012" (minimum) galvanized sheet steel with perforated flanges, designed to receive joint compound. P. Control Joints: Roll -formed zinc, or extruded vinyl as standard with the wallboard manufacturer. Q. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C475-94. . R. Acoustical Sealant: Non-drying, permanently flexible, synthetic rubber based; "Acoustical Sealant BA -98" (Pecora Corp.); "Acoustical Sealant" (Tremco, Inc.); or gypsum wallboard manufacturer's sealant specifically developed for this use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Steel Studs and Framing 1. Size and spacing of Studs: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and as otherwise shown or specified herein. a. Frame door openings with vertical studs securely attached by screws at each jamb either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frame; install runner track sections (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1) Provide runner tracks of same gage as jamb studs. Space jack studs same as partition studs. 2) Install 20 -gage studs at each jamb for doors 2'-8" wide to 4'-0" wide weighing not more than 200 lbs.; and for doors less than 2'-8" wide weighing more than 100 lbs. but not more than 200 lbs. 3) Install double 20 -gage studs at each jamb for single doors up to 4'-0" wide weighing more than 200 lbs. but not more than 300 lbs. b. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. C. Space wall furring members 24" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. Provide continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of runner tracks. a. Isolation of Partitions from Structure: Where partitions abutt ceiling, deck construction and vertical structural elements, provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended by stud manufacturer to prevent the transfer of structural loads and movements to partitions. 1) Deflection track shall accomodate up to 1-1/2" deflection; provide minimum 3" track depth. C b. Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to the structural support and substrate above the ceiling unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. 4. Install steel studs with integral slotted standards at walls indicated on the Drawings. CB. Metal Suspension System 1. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 2. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. 3. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. C 4. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 5. Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. 6. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated. C� CKKE0900E KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD C. Direct -hung Metal Support System 1. Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join support members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. D. Wallboard 1. Install acoustical insulation as indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. 2. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 1' -0" in alternate courses of board. 3. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end -butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'-0". 4. Install wall/partition boards perpendicular to framing (long edges of board at right angles to framing members) for walls 8'-1" and less in height using maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. If ceiling height is greater than 8'-1 ", or wall is 4'-0" wide or less, install wall/partition boards parallel to framing (long edges of board parallel to framing members). In fire rated assemblies, verify installation procedures with manufacturer. a. Install special sized gypsum board full height without horizontal joints in field of board and between steel studs with slotted standards. b. Where double -layer application is shown for fire -resistive rated assemblies, fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. Install base layer perpendicular to framing members and face layer parallel to framing member. C. Gypsum board joints at openings shall be located so that no joint will align with edges of opening unless control joints will be installed at these points. 5. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged and damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. 6. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges and ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. 7. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. 8. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. 9. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (e.g. above ceilings), except in chase walls which are braced internally. a. Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air and smoke ratings, coverage may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage. n I�I 10. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J -type semi -finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks. 11. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board with "floating" internal corner construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated, unless control and expansion joints are indicated, and unless fire rating is n indicated. i J 12. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with GA -216 and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. 13. Install water resistant gypsum wallboard on all walls in toilet rooms and at plumbing walls and similar wet areas in other rooms or spaces. a. Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water-resistant sealer before L► installation as recommended by manufacturer. 14. In addition to sealing of joints specified in Subparagraph 3.0I.A.10, seal the perimeter of, and openings in drywall construction containing acoustical insulation, with acoustical sealant. E. Sheathing: Screw attach sheathing to exterior studs with corrosion -resistant screws at 8" o.c. and 3/8" from ends and edges. Where sheathing is backup for masonry veneer, apply building paper horizontally to face of sheathing beginning at the bottom of the wall, and lap each layer 2", allowing 6" at endlaps, fasten with corrosion -resistant staples. Cut back felt 1/2" on each side of break in supporting members where control joints will be located. 4 KKE0900E KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 J C 1 C r C C C C C C C C C C C C SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Accessories 1. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. a. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. b. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi -finishing type is indicated. Install metal or vinyl control joints where indicated, but not to exceed 30 feet o.c. maximum for walls and 50 feet o.c. maximum for ceilings whether indicated or not. Ceilings in addition shall not exceed 2500 s.f. Wallboard Finishing 1. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints, rounded and beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. a. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. Sand after last coat, between coats if necessary to produce desired finish. Wallboard finishing including joint treatment and nail or screw dimple treatment shall be complete to finished floor. 2. Levels of finishing shall comply with those established by reference in GA -214 except as follows: a. Level 4: In finished spaces scheduled for painting, and wallcoverings classified as Grades I and II. b. Level 3: For finished spaces scheduled for wallcoverings classified as Grade III. C. Level 2: For wallboard scheduled to receive ceramic tile, and in exposed spaces not painted. d. Level 1: For concealed spaces, except where additional finishing is required to achieve fire -resistance rating, sound rating and where acting as an air or smoke barrier, meet Level 2 finishing requirements. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION CKKE0900E KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r C r El C C r C SECTION 09290 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT SHAPES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced cement (GFRC) column covers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. B. Section 07900 - Sealants. C. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, physical properties and recommended installation instructions for systems used. 2. Shop Drawings: Show plans, sections, details, dimensions, joint -treatment, design tolerances, bracing, fastening devices, connections and the relation of the prefabricated units to surrounding construction. 3. Samples: Submit two 8" x 8" (minimum) flat samples with typical finish surface. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm regularly engaged in the fabrication of GFRC shapes with at least 3 years of experience and 5 installations similar to the requirements of this Project. B. Installer: Firm with not less than 3 years successful experience in installation of systems similar to those required by this Project and acceptable to the manufacturer of the system. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in wooden crates cushiond and blocked to prevent damage. Crates shall clearly bear the manufacturer's name and inspection stamp. Store crated until ready for use in a place providing protection from damage and exposure to moisture and the elements. Prevent joint compound and primer from freezing. Damaged or otherwise unsuitable materials, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. n 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. When the outside temperature is below 55 degrees F., heat shall be maintained in areas where the work of this Section is to be performed. Heat shall be provided continuously and uniformly at 55 degrees F. from 1 (one) week prior to start of installation until GFRC fabrications application is completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Casting Designs, Inc. B. DecoForm Corporation C. Formglas Interiors, Inc. C D. Plastrglas, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Glass fiber reinforced cement column covers. 1. Glass fiber reinforced cement shall be a blend of Type III Portland cement, washed and dried silica sand potable water, alkali -resistant glass fibers complying with PCI MNL 128, and curing additives. B. Related Accessories: GFRC manufacturer's recommended products as appropriate for the design and conditions shown. 1. Adhesives: Solvent based construction adhesive. 2. Fasteners: Clips and self -drilling, self -tapping screws. KKE0900C KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09290 l� GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT SHAPES U 3. Patching Compound: Cementitious based patching compound for filling holes and patching minor damage. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Moulds for GFRC fabrications shall be rigid and constructed of materials that will result in smooth, finished products conforming to profiles and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 1. Tolerances (Fabricated Units) a. Shell thickness: 3/16" to 3/811 . b. Dimensional: Plus or minus 1/8" per part. C. Warpage and Bow: Plus or minus 1/16" per part. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION I j ►� A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with n erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. LJf 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all critical field dimensions prior to fabrication. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Set GFRC fabrications accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and secured in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Tolerances (Installed Units) 1. Face Width of Joint: Plus or minus 1/8". 2. Out of Plane (Unit to Unit): Plus or minus 1/4". 3. Warpage and Bow: Plus or minus 1/16" per foot. C. Upon completion of installation of the individual units, fill screw holes and minor damage with patching - compound, then sand smooth. The entire assembly shall be rigid and shall present a smooth finished assembly ready to receive sealants and paint. D. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Procedures: Advise Contractor of procedures required to protect finished work form damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900C KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 ,J SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1- GENERAL n I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic wall and floor tile, and setting and grouting materials. B. Tenant furnished porcelain tile, setting and grouting materials for installation by the Contractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Sealants. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and recommended installation instructions for adhesives, manufactured mortar, grout and latex additive. 2. Samples: Samples of each type ceramic tile in colors selected, mounted on 12" x 12" backing, with grouted joints. Sample of each trim shape. 3. Submit ceramic tile manufacturer's maintenance guidelines for Owner's use in maintaining all ceramic tile work specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material and installation shall comply with following: 1. Tile Council of America, Inc.: a. 2001 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. American National Standards Institute Specifications for: a. ANSI A108.1C-1999, Contractor's Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile Using A108.1A- or-A108.B; except as specifically indicated. b. ANSI A108.5-1999, Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. C C. ANSI A108.10-1999, Installation of Grout in Tilework. d. ANSI A118.1-1999, Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. e. ANSI A118.4-1999, Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. f. ANSI A118.6-1999, Ceramic Tile Grouts. g. ANSI A137.1-1988, Ceramic Tile. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept delivery of material only in an undamaged condition; store above ground and in a dry place within the building. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Wrapped or bundled material shall bear the name of the manufacturer and the r -j product. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature within spaces scheduled to receive tile at 50 degrees F. (minimum) during installation and for 7 days following completion. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner at least 2 percent additional ceramic tile of each type used on this Project (EXCEPT Owner or Tenant furnished materials) over and above the quantity installed. B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in the building. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. For Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1. Daltile Corporation EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 F1 SECTION 09300 Lj TILE 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS Lj B. For Setting and Grouting Materials] D. 1. Bostik Construction Products 1 E. 2. Custom Building Products h + F. 3. Laticrete International, Inc. U 4. Mapei Corp. 5. TEC, Inc., an HB Fuller Co. 3. "Laticrete Floor'N Wall" (Laticrete) C. Other Materials: As specified in Article 2.02. 2.02 MATERIALS G. Grout N A. Ceramic Tile Walls and Floors: Standard Grade, unglazed, mosaic ceramic tile, porcelain type, cushion edged. Tile shall be factory mounted on mesh or net backing. Furnish trim shapes as required; angles, h corners, bullnose, and similar pieces. ; i 1. Size: 2" x 2" face size. v 2. Base: Coved, 5" high consisting of V x 2" cove, 2" field tile, and 2" x 2" cap with bullnose top. 3. Color and Pattern: Refer to Drawings. B. Porcelain Tile: The Tenant will furnish porcelain tile for installation by the Contractor. For the purpose of U bidding installation, the porcelain tile will be "Veronastone" (Verona Marble Co., Inc.). U 1. Size: 12" x 12" face size. 2. Colors: Refer to Drawings. 3. The Tenant will also furnish thin set mortar and grout for setting and grouting porcelain tile. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-97, Type I. D. Sand: ASTM C144-93. E. Water: Clean, free from deleterious substances. h + F. Dry -Set Mortar U 1. "Tile Mate - Premium" (Bostik) 2. "Premium -Blend" (Custom) 3. "Laticrete Floor'N Wall" (Laticrete) 4. "Kerabond" (Mapei) 5. "Full Set Plus" (TEC) G. Grout 1. "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout" (Bostik) 2. "Laticrete 500 Series" (Laticrete) 3. "Keracolor Floor Grout" (Mapei) 4. "AccuColor Sanded Grout" No. TA -670 (TEC) 5. Color: No. 370, "Antique White" based on Bostik grout colors; matching color from other manufacturers specified herein are acceptable. H. Latex Liquid Additives n 1. Type 1 (For Mortar) U a. "Upco-Crete" (Bostik) b. "Custom -Crete" (Custom) C. "Laticrete" No. 4237 (Laticrete) d. "Keralastic" (Mapei) e. "TEC Crete" No. TA -870 (TEC) 2. Type 2 (For Grout) L! a. "Flexible Grout Admixture" (Bostik) b. "Laticrete" No. 3701 (Laticrete) ri C. "Plastijoints" (Mapei) ,, ii d. "Acrylic Grout Additive 869" No. TA -869 (TEC) L! I. Marble Thresholds: Provide Sound Group "A" marble with an abrasive hardness of not less than 10.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C241-90. J. Porcelain Tile Control Joints: Aluminum angle type as standard in the terrazzo industry, with neoprene rubber filler; color - gray. 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r1l L SECTION 09300 TILE i-' 2.03 SETTING BEDS I A. Floor Setting Beds 1. Over Slab -On -Grade a. Dry -Set Mortar: Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (By Volume) (Optional, unless specifically indicated in Article 3.09 - SCHEDULE): One part portland cement, 1 part fine dry sand and latex t� liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. B. Wall Setting Beds 1. Over Gypsum Wallboard a. Dry -Set Mortar: Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations. b. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (By Volume) (Optional, unless specifically indicated): One part portland cement, 1 part fine dry sand and latex liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. C. Grout 1. Dry -Set Grout: Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Sand-portland cement grout, or dry -set grout, with latex liquid rl added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory condition have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Work shall not commence until grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, and similar items, have been j� installed, and until adjoining work is satisfactorily protected. B. Layout tile in each area in such a manner as to minimize the cutting of tile. 1. Locate cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. 2. Align wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb and level. �- 3. Align floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE A. Metal Studs: Gypsum Board, Dry -Set Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; TCA Method W243-01. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE AND BASE r, A. Concrete Subfloor (Slab -On -Grade): Dry -Set Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; TCA Method F113-01. B. Construct expansion and control joints in accordance with TCA Method EJ171-01, by installing wood strips extending through setting bed. Width of such joints shall be as shown but not less than 1/8". If locations of such joints are not shown they shall occur at restraining surfaces, such as walls, curbs, columns, pipes, other arises and penetrations, over expansion joints in backing and at changes in backing material. In large interior tiled areas, expansion joints shall occur not more than 36 ft. o.c. each way. After tile has set for 3 days, remove the wood strips, clean and repair the joints. C. Construct control joints in porcelain tile with back to back angles separated by neoprene rubber filler. Secure angles to substrate with adhesive. D. Setting Base: Install base with latex-portland cement mortar, directly to substrate. Apply latex-portland with the flat side of trowel and comb with the serrated or notched side of trowel, Press the base firmly into place and tap lightly to ensure maximum bond. Joints of the base shall be of the same width and align with the joints of the floor tile insofar as practicable. C EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Upon completion of tile work in each area, including work specified under other Sections, clean tile surfaces with warm water and a high quality washing compound. Acid or acid cleaners shall not be used. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly, working diagonally across joints; polish with dry cloths. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 3 days following completion. C. Immediately prior to occupancy by the Owner, wash tile surfaces again, and perform additional grouting that may be necessary. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Tile floors shall be covered with non -staining building paper or polyethylene sheeting until just prior to occupancy by the Owner. During construction, tiled areas used as walkways, in addition to other covering shall be protected with boards or plywood. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Tile Setting Methods 1. TCA Method W243-01: For walls - typical. 2. TCA Method F113-01: For floors - typical; use latex modified setting bed and grout in toilets. END OF SECTION LJ Li U E 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 LJ SECTION 09300 TILE 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Install marble thresholds at locations indicated set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in thinset mortar for locations, where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed t� above adjacent non -tile floor finish. 3.06 GROUTING A. After tile is firmly set, fill joints with appropriate dryset, or latex-portland cement grout. Spread slurry of grout over the floor surfaces until joints are filled. On walls, after tile has set, force a maximum of grout into joints by trowel, squeegee, brush, or finger application. Use latex-portland cement grout in joints of tile. Fill joints flush with surface of tile. Before grout sets, fill skips and gaps. Tool joints to cushion edge of tile. Remove surface latence and excess grout with dry polishing cloths. Face of tile shall be left clean and free from grout and other stains. B. Damp mop grouted floors twice daily for not less than 7 days following installation. Cover floors in areas subject to construction traffic with polyethylene sheeting as temporary protection. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING _ A. Upon completion of tile work in each area, including work specified under other Sections, clean tile surfaces with warm water and a high quality washing compound. Acid or acid cleaners shall not be used. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly, working diagonally across joints; polish with dry cloths. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 3 days following completion. C. Immediately prior to occupancy by the Owner, wash tile surfaces again, and perform additional grouting that may be necessary. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Tile floors shall be covered with non -staining building paper or polyethylene sheeting until just prior to occupancy by the Owner. During construction, tiled areas used as walkways, in addition to other covering shall be protected with boards or plywood. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Tile Setting Methods 1. TCA Method W243-01: For walls - typical. 2. TCA Method F113-01: For floors - typical; use latex modified setting bed and grout in toilets. END OF SECTION LJ Li U E 4 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 F L SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS EPART 1 - GENERAL E, c C 11 C c f7 L E. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lay -in acoustical ceilings. B. Suspended ceiling grid. C. Lighting cove louver over vanities. 1.02 RELATED DIVISIONS A. Division 15 - Mechanical B. Division 16 - Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings. B. Other Submittals 1. Proposed seismic support and bracing which differs from specified requirements shall be submitted to the local building official for acceptance. Submittal shall include necessary design calculations to support the variations and shall be certified by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is located. Do not proceed without notification of acceptance from the local building official or governing authority. After acceptance, submit this information to the Architect for the Project records. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this Project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand, type, style, size, color, texture and other identifying information. B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground to prevent damage, deterioration, and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been damaged or are otherwise unsuitable. When so determined, immediately remove damaged and otherwise unsuitable material from the Project site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproofed, until wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, until work above ceilings is completed, and until ambient condition of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner at least 1 percent additional acoustical units clearly identified, of each type used on the Project over and above the quantity installed. B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in the building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Panels 1. General Areas: Mineral fiber composition lay -in panel, complying with ASTM E1264-98, Type III, Form 2, Pattern CD, "Radar" (USG); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. a. Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8". b. Edge Treatment: Square edges. C. Pattern: Fissured; nondirectional; No. 2310. d. Color: White. El KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 I SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2. Toilet Rooms: Scrubbable, vinyl -faced, gypsum board lay -in panel, complying with ASTM E1264-98, Type XX, Pattern G, "Sheetrock Brand Lay -In Ceiling Tile C1imaPlus" (USG); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. a. Size: 24" x 48" x 1/2". b. Surface Treatment: Nonperforated; No. 3270. i C. Edge Treatment: Square edges d. Color: White B. Exposed Suspension Systems + , 1. Direct -hung, nonfire-rated, double web steel suspension system complete with main tees, cross ~+ tees, splices, wall moldings and accessories, complying with ASTM C635-97, Donn DX (USG); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. n a. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty systems unless otherwise required by J acoustical panels or fixtures and other items supported thereon. b. Grid Face Size: 15/16". C. Finish: Factory applied white enamel (satin). 2. Spacer Bars: 'V' shaped galvanized steel bars, notched to fit over grid components. 3. Seismic Strut: Telescoping design fabricated from heavy wall galvanized tubing, incorporating injection -molded bulb clip for placement over the bulb of main tees, and spring steel top clip for attachment to hanger wire, with injection -molded guide ring to minimize vibration of telescoping sections, "Donn Compression Post" Model VSA (USG); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. a. Lengths: Available in 4 telescoping sizes; 18" to 30"; 30" to 48"; 48" to 84", and; 84" to 102". ri b. Bridging: Provide steel angle not less than 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" for welding to top or bottom chord of steel joists or other structural steel member when seismic strut is not U located immediately below such steel joists or other structural steel member. C. Bolts: 3/8" diameter x length as required, with washer and nut. 4. Hold Clips: Provide hold-down for -Down clips lay -in ceiling units in public toilet rooms. C. Hangers: Soft steel wire, 12 gage, galvanized. D. Lighting Cove Louver: Injection molded polystyrene parabolic louver, No. 87-2448 (American Louver r Co./(800) 323-4250); or approved substitution. (J 1. Size: 3/4" x 3/4" x 1/2" deep cells, in 24" x 48" panels, field cut to size. 2. Finish: Silver. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever specifically shown on the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION Li A.A. General 1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements where indicated, and industry standards applicable to the work; and meet the requirements specified herein. 3. The finished system shall be true and level, and panels shall be installed so as to form straight true lines and cross lines. Adjacent panels shall match in appearance and shall be from 1 (one) n "factory run". jLJ; 4. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. 5. Frame access panels and other openings on 4 sides with 1-1/2" runner channel; each frame to be rl supported by a hanger at each end. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636-96, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel and direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". I j I . Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye- iJ screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age and elevated temperatures. 2 KKE0900F KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 W SECTION 09510 {�1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS a. Space hangers not more than 6" from ends, not more than 4'-0" o.c. between ends of main runners, and as required to support other work resting in and on ceiling. Where spans exceed the recommended and specified spans, furnish larger main runners or additional reinforcing. b. Do NOT attach hangers to metal decking under any circumstances. 2. Coordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners, and moldings with the location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in and on ceilings. 3. System shall not be supported from electrical conduit, mechanical ducts, pipes, and equipment. 4. Light Fixture Support a. Ceiling grid which directly supports strip type light fixtures shall be secured to structure above by not less than 2 wire hangers per fixture. Each wire hanger shall be located directly above light fixture attachment to grid insofar as practicable. L b. Ceiling grid which directly supports lay -in type lighting fixtures shall be secured to structure above by 4 wire hangers, one located within 3" of each corner of the fixture. r� 5. Do not bear main runners on walls and partitions. 6. Miter grid corners. Provide finish channels at exposed edges. Center runners to align with architectural elements, light fixtures, and similar visual components. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before beginning construction if layout is not specifically shown on the Drawings. a. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely. I ! 7. In addition to the requirements specified above, provide the following special installation requirements for Seismic Zones 2A, 213, 3 and 4: a. Each main runner and cross runner shall be supported by a hanger wire located not more than 8" from the perimeter of each ceiling. b. Main runners and cross runners shall be pop -riveted to wall angles on 2 adjacent walls of each space, but not on opposite walls. C. Main runners and cross runners shall be separated by a horizontal spacer bar on 2 walls opposite those specified in Subparagraph b above. Locate spacer bars 8" (maximum) from perimeter of each ceiling. j d. The requirements specified in Subparagraphs a through c above apply to all ceilings regardless of size. e. Each 12 feet square section of ceiling or portion thereof, shall have 4 hanger wires splayed rat a 45 degree angle to the ceiling at a 90 degree angle from each other, and secured to the structure above. Intersection of splayed wires secured to the grid shall begin in one corner L11 of the room or space 6-0" from each wall and then 12'-0" o.c. in each direction. The termination of each wire secured to the grid shall occur within 2" of the intersection of n main runners with cross runners. f. At the intersection of the splayed wires specified in Subparagraph a above, a seismic strut L shall be attached vertically from main runner to the structure above. Provide bridging welded between joists if necessary for anchoring top of seismic strut. g. The requirements specified in Subparagraphs a and f above are in addition to those specified in Subparagraphs a through c, and apply to all ceilings 144 s.f. and larger in size. C. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. D. Install hold-down clips in public toilet rooms spaced as indicated by panel manufacturer unless otherwise required by code. E. Carefully trim lighting cove louver to required size and install above vanities supported on wall moldings. Maintain accurate cell spacing where panels abut. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING l KKE0900F KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Adjust hanger lengths if necessary to correct deflections caused by installation of panels, light fixtures, and other equipment in plenum following original leveling of grid system. B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of Ldamage. U' END OF SECTION l KKE0900F KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 C SECTION 09530 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION EPART 1 - GENERAL C C El El ri U e C E. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acoustical insulation for installation in steel framed walls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard: For installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and recommended installation instructions for acoustical insulation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver insulation to the Project site prior to the time of its installation. Handle and store material to prevent damage. Store under cover and above ground. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sound Deadening Insulation: Unfaced fiberglass batts complying with ASTM C665-95, Type 1, specifically designed as a noise reduction material : "Sound Control Batts" (CertainTeed Corp., Insulation Group); "Sound Control Batts" (Manville, Building Materials Marketing Division); "Noise Barrier Batts" (Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.). 1. Sizes: As standard with the manufacturer; either 2-1/2", 2-3/4", 3-1/2" or 4" (thickness as shown on the Drawings) x 96" long and 16" or 24" wide as determined by stud spacing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the supporting structure and substrate, and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review safety precautions, proposed operating procedures and environmental requirements with the Contractor and with the manufacturer's or supplier's representative before proceeding with the Work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be covered unless otherwise shown. C. Install noise insulation batts pressed firmly into position between metal studs. Fit snugly around wall penetrations, (e.g. junction boxes and receptacles). Install continuous from floor to structure above and extend over ceilings where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Provide temporary supplementary support for walls over 8'-0" high until gypsum wallboard is installed. END OF SECTION EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 END OF SECTION KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 L' SECTION 09545 SANITARY WALL PANELING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES r La A. Sanitary paneling. B. Accessories and adhesive. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Sealants. r-� 1.03 SUBMITTALS LA. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Samples: 12" square piece of each type paneling and 12" length of each type molding strip i specified. U 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall meet USDA and FDA minimum applicable requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original cartons clearly identified, and store indoors protected from the weather and exposure to the sunlight. Prior to installation, re -stack panels on solid flat surface to minimize package distortion. n, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Paneling: Moisture resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, 0.09" thick, "Kemlite Glasbord-P" (Kemlite Co.). 1. Size: 48" x 96" long (minimum) or as otherwise required to allow no horizontal joints except at floor (base), and ceiling unless otherwise detailed. 2. Color: White B. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard vinyl edge and corner moldings; color to match paneling. C. Adhesive: As recommended by the paneling manufacturer for the substrates indicated. {' 1 D. Sealant: Refer to Section 07900. L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install sanitary wall paneling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. B. Cut panels as necessary to fit wall conditions with as few joints between panels as practicable. 1. Panels forming corners in rooms shall be not less than 16" wide. { C. Install moldings wherever paneling meets paneling (corners), terminations at floor (base) and ceilings, and where panels are used as wainscoting unless otherwise detailed. D. Apply sealants to all panel joints prior to installing vinyl moldings. Seal top and base of panels with sealant where panels terminate without moldings. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesives and sealants from face of panels and moldings, and other finishes as the work progresses. Use soft cloths and detergents or solvents as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r Li SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES L4 A. Vinyl tile. B. Vinyl base. C. Accessories. D. Leveling/patching compound, adhesives, and wax. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Samples: Full size tile in color specified and 12" length of each style base in color specified. 1.03 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Receive resilient flooring materials in undamaged condition as packaged by the manufacturer with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Store materials at the Project site within the building and in a dry place at least 24 hours before installing flooring materials. Space temperature shall not be less than 70 degrees F. nor more than 90 degrees F. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. yn 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. Spaces to receive resilient flooring materials shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F.; this temperature shall be maintained during the installation of the flooring, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. 2. When solvent -based adhesives are used, the space shall be ventilated; use sparkproof fans if natural ventilation is inadequate. Prohibit smoking. E' 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner at least one box of additional tile for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof of each type and color used on the Project over and above the quantity installed. B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section and store where directed in the building. �1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: 12" x 12" x 1/8" vinyl type complying with ASTM F1066 -95a, Composition 1, Class 2 Excelon Tile Series, "Imperial Texture" pattern (Armstrong World Industries, Inc.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 1. Color: Refer to Drawings. B. Resilient Base: 1/8" gage coved set -on type and straight base, 4" high unless otherwise shown, (Johnsonite, Inc.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 1. Coil stock only is allowed, NO 4 ft. lengths. 2. Color: Refer to Drawings. C. Reducer Strips: Vinyl, V x thickness required, beveled. 1. Colors: Selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. D. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Adhesive: Water and alkali resistant, complying with recommendations of resilient flooring manufacturer. F. F. Wax: Vinyl flooring manufacturer's recommended commercial floor wax. El KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall meet the minimum requirements of the manufacturer of the flooring. C. Resilient flooring work shall not be started until all items that go through the flooring have been installed. D. No resilient flooring shall be installed until the installer has determined that the chemical treatment on substrates will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials. E. Before installing resilient flooring, test concrete floors for excessive moisture. Do NOT perform tests until working environment within the room or space is approximately the same as the flooring will encounter when the room or space is enclosed and the air is conditioned. Test floors by one of the following methods, at the installer's option. 1. Test floors by taping an 36" x 36" mat of polyethylene sheet material to floor at edges with duct tape. If darkening of concrete is observed or if condensation is apparent on the underside of the sheet after 24 hours, it is unsafe to install flooring. 2. Test floors with flooring manufacturer's calcium chloride testing kit. Follow instructions included in kit. If moisture results exceed manufacturer's published limits, it is unsafe to install flooring. 3. Perform at least one test for each concrete pour made, which is to receive resilient floor covering, but not less than one test for every 500 sf of flooring to be covered. F. Verify that finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Spaces in which resilient flooring is being installed shall be closed to traffic and other work. B. Before installing resilient flooring, fill cracks and holes and level depressions with underlayment compound. Surfaces shall not vary more than 3/16" in 10 ft. in any dimension. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified. B. Mix and apply adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover surface evenly. Maximum working area shall not be exceeded. Install flooring within time limits recommended. If adhesive films over, or dries, remove the adhesive and recoat the area. Lay flooring so that fields or patterns center on areas. Adjust pattern so that edge pieces shall not be less than one half tile (vinyl composition tile). Lay flooring true to line, level, and with tight joints. Cut flooring to and around all permanent cabinets and bases. Roll flooring to assure intimate contact and proper adhesion to substrate. C. Firmly adhere resilient base to walls and permanent bases. Use longest lengths practical. Form internal and external corners and end stops with preformed units. Corners may be hand formed if method is demonstrated and approved. Mitered corners shall not be used. Scribe bases accurately to abutting surfaces. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular vertical substrates, fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler. D. Remove excessive adhesive in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. E. Install reducer strips at terminations of resilient tile flooring where substrate is exposed and extends beyond. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Not less than 4 days after flooring installation, clean the resilient flooring and base. Wash thoroughly, with a cleaner recommended by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. B. The floors shall then be given 2 coats of specified wax. Factory finish wax application shall constitute first coat if tile is so provided. Machine buff each coat. END OF SECTION KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 i` v 'I F1 J F1 lij n �i �I r SECTION 09680 CARPETING EPART 1 - GENERAL r V C `n n c c Ek El 11, El 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tenant furnished carpet for installation by Contractor. B. Accessories. C. Installation materials. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Samples: 12" length of edge strip in finish specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage a carpet installation firm, which has at least 5 years successful experience in carpet installations similar in size and type to the carpeting requirements of this Project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Tenant will deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping. Unload and store carpet inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials, when so determined, shall be reported to the Tenant upon delivery. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet (Tenant Furnished): For the purpose of bidding, the carpet will be direct glue type. I . Manufacturer: Karastan Bigelow Commercial Carpet, Division of Fieldcrest Cannon, Inc. 2. Pattern and Color: Refer to Drawings. B. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard, No. 150 (Mercer Products Co.). 1. Color: Refer to Drawings. C. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, non -staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. D. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. E. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by carpet manufacturer for applications indicated. F. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturer of carpet, and other carpeting products; and selected by installer to meet project circumstances and requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which carpeting is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sub -floors shall be level and free of irregularities. Irregularities in the sub -floor height shall be gradually raised with troweled underlayment. B. Just prior to installation of carpeting, sub -floors shall be dry, broom clean, free of oil, grease, paint, or concrete treatment that may interfere with adhesion of carpeting. C. Measure each space to receive carpeting, as a basis of cutting and seaming the carpet. Do not scale the Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions shown. EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n SECTION 09680 L-+ CARPETING 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpeting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. r1 B. Carpeting shall run under open bottom items such as heating convectors, and shall be installed tightly LJ against walls, and bases so that all portions of the floor are covered in each room. C. Carpeting shall be installed around all floor outlets or similar obstructions. Extend carpeting into alcoves and recesses adjoining areas to be carpeted. t1 D. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible to minimize the placement of seams in traffic lanes. Hold cross seams to an absolute minimum. Make all seams so the pile of the adjoining pieces have the same directional run to be practically invisible. E. On completion the carpet shall be free of wrinkles and buckles; seams and cross joints shall be straight, n close and well made. i 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At the completion of the Work when directed by the Owner, the protective covering shall be removed, the carpeting vacuum cleaned and soiling removed. B. Rubbish, wrapping paper, and salvages shall be removed from the Project site. Excess pieces of usable carpet shall be left with the Owner for future repairs. n 3.05 PROTECTION U A. Carpeting shall be adequately covered and protected against damage of any kind during the remainder of the construction period, and until acceptance by Owner. Protect by means of clean drop cloths, or heavy, reinforced, non -staining paper. Damaged carpeting will be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 1J 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 L� n n 0 LJ C LJ CPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 09893 SILICONE -EMULSION MASONRY COATING SYSTEM A. Silicone -emulsion masonry coating system for exterior concrete block and concrete walls above grade. B. Surface preparation including minor patching if necessary, and pressure washing of existing coated masonry and concrete prior to application of new coating. V 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and application instructions for each material. 2. Certification: Written certification from the manufacturer that applicator is approved to apply the silicone -emulsion masonry coating system on this Project. 3. Reports: Coating manufacturer's preapplication report summarizing the visual inspection of the masonry walls to be coated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall determine the number of topcoats to be applied on existing masonry and concrete surfaces to satisfy warranty requirements. This shall be done after a pressure washing is completed. 1. For the purpose of bidding, include 2 topcoats applied at the rates specified in Article 3.03. If after review of existing masonry and concrete surfaces, it is determined that one topcoat only is s- required, the Contract Sum will be adjusted by agreed upon Change Order. l_s 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Receive coating materials only in unopened, original containers, with labels intact. Record batch or lot numbers of all coating materials for reference and warranty requirements. Store materials on the site in an approved location. Damaged and otherwise defective material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not proceed with application of materials if ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F. and expected to fall below 50 degrees F. within 24 hours, and if ice and frost are covering the substrate. 2. Surface temperature readings shall be made on masonry walls to confirm substrate temperatures and conditions. C KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Applicator shall be approved by the manufacturer, for this Project, to apply specified materials. L1 B. Preapplication Conference and Mock -Up 1. The coating manufacturer's authorized representative will schedule a preapplication conference. Prior to application of coating system, meet at the Project site with the Contractor, applicator, Yn masonry subcontractor, and coating manufacturer's representative. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening preapplication conference. a. Review masonry work prior to application. The coating manufacturer's representative will prepare a written report signed by the coating manufacturer and the coating applicator. Record discussions and agreements. Furnish copy to each participant. 1) Include defects in masonry walls, if any, and recommend remedial work. 2) Include meter readings of the moisture content of the masonry walls. 2. In the presence of the coating manufacturer's representative, prepare a sample panel at least 10 feet square of the primer (or block filler if recommended by the coating manufacturer's representative), and topcoats for approval. Review shall be for surface preparation, coverage rates, and uniformity of coating colors, texture, and application. DO NOT PROCEED WITH FURTHER APPLICATION UNTIL APPROVAL OF THE SAMPLE PANEL HAS BEEN f f GIVEN. C. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall determine the number of topcoats to be applied on existing masonry and concrete surfaces to satisfy warranty requirements. This shall be done after a pressure washing is completed. 1. For the purpose of bidding, include 2 topcoats applied at the rates specified in Article 3.03. If after review of existing masonry and concrete surfaces, it is determined that one topcoat only is s- required, the Contract Sum will be adjusted by agreed upon Change Order. l_s 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Receive coating materials only in unopened, original containers, with labels intact. Record batch or lot numbers of all coating materials for reference and warranty requirements. Store materials on the site in an approved location. Damaged and otherwise defective material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not proceed with application of materials if ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F. and expected to fall below 50 degrees F. within 24 hours, and if ice and frost are covering the substrate. 2. Surface temperature readings shall be made on masonry walls to confirm substrate temperatures and conditions. C KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09893 SILICONE -EMULSION MASONRY COATING SYSTEM 1.06 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant that the masonry coating system will be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's and applicator's joint 5 -year written material and labor warranty against defects, allowing water penetration of the film, peeling, blistering, cracking and deterioration of the coating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Multi -coat, waterproof, above -grade, silicone -emulsion masonry coating system, "Sto SilcoPrime" and "Sto SilcoShield" (Sto Corp.). 1. Colors: Selected by the Owner. 2. Texture: Smooth. B. Block Filler: Masonry coating manufacturer's recommended block filler, when required in lieu of primer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the masonry coating system is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Pressure wash surfaces to be coated to remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laitance, and foreign material, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, and allow to dry thoroughly. B. Make necessary repairs with repair compound installed according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Test masonry wall surfaces with calibrated moisture metering equipment daily. 1. Perform tests at 15 foot intervals along the length of each wall, at or near 4 feet above grade and at or near 16 feet above grade, or more often if necessary to confirm accurate moisture condition of walls. 2. Perform tests in the field of the masonry and at mortar joints. D. Installed sealants shall be masked prior to application of coating system. E. Mask other finished surfaces as required. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply primer and multiple topcoat system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions. Do not exceed published coverage rates for surfaces to be coated unless approved by the manufacturer. 1. All new concrete unit masonry and concrete surfaces shall receive primer (or block filler) and 2 coats of topcoat specified, or more if required to satisfy warranty requirements. VERIFY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS WITH MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO BIDDING. 2. Existing painted masonry and concrete shall receive number of topcoats necessary to satisfy warranty requirements, as determined by the manufacturer's authorized representative. 3. Coverage Rates a. Primer: As required to obtain 3.0 mils dft (minimum) on the surface. b. Block Filler (ONLY When Required): As recommended by the masonry coating manufacturer. C. Topcoats: As required to obtain total 7.0 mils dft (total minimum thickness for 2 coats) on the surface, plus primer. 4. Brushing or backrolling of spray -applied materials is required. 5. Completed application shall be pinhole free. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The applicator shall maintain accurate records of the masonry coating application and provide copies of records to the Architect and the manufacturer upon completion. 2 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n U n �u M I u n r ID E If SECTION 09893 SILICONE -EMULSION MASONRY COATING SYSTEM 1. Records shall include at least the following information: a. Daily temperatures morning and evening. b. Weather conditions. C. Wall area coated daily. d. Amount of material used daily. e. Computed coverage rate per s.f. f. Daily moisture readings of masonry surfaces to be coated. 2. Records shall be made available for periodic review at the request of the Architect or the manufacturer. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion of masonry coating work, remove masking, clean window glass and other surfaces to remove spatters using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 3 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 r t SECTION 09900 PAINTING EPART 1 - GENERAL C'1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Painting interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces shown and otherwise scheduled to be painted. B. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified in addition to shop -priming and surface treatments specified under other Sections of the Work. C C. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work in paint finished spaces. D. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work: 1. Shop priming specified in other Sections. 2. Mechanical and electrical work except exposed in painted spaces. 3. Prefinished items 4. Finished metal surfaces 5. Operating parts and labels 6. Copper, brass, bronze, aluminum, stainless steel and other nonferrous metals. 7. Face brick (except where specifically shown to be painted), ceramic tile, structural glazed units, stones, marble and other similar items. 8. Work identified in Article 1.02 below. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DIVISIONS A. Section 09893 - Silicone -Emulsion Masonry Coating System B. Section 09960 - Vinyl Wall Covering C. Division 15 - Mechanical D. Division 16 - Electrical 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" as used herein means coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.04 SUBMITTALS f`1 A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: L 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, product data and installation instructions for each type material 2. Schedule: Clearly indicating surfaces to be painted, paint manufacturer and names of paints to be used. Submit in the same format as specified in Article 3.06. 3. Samples a. Actual color chips clearly labeled, of each paint color scheduled or otherwise shown, prior to submitting "draw -downs". b. 8-1/2" x 11" "draw -downs" for surfaces to be painted, clearly labeled identifying color and sheen. C. V x 3" x 6" long or larger wood samples for stained and natural finishes, applied to wood of the species specified. E1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the recommendations of the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) for Premium Grade work, unless otherwise specified herein. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. 1. Each product container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indicating manufacturer's name, type of material, product number, batch number, color, and instructions for reducing where applicable. 2. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will NOT be acceptable. C C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. E 1 KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 2 A. Acceptable brands of best quality grade paints, stains, varnishes, sealers and coatings equal or better than J J SECTION 09900 a. Devoe & Raynolds Co. PAINTING b. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2. General Coatings (Exterior Work Except GFRC Column Covers) D. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other b. Devoe & Raynolds Co. Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total d. Fuller O'Brien Paints coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on e. The Glidden Co. characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide L) g. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect, in h. Pratt & Lambert (P & L) writing, of anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. E. Proprietary names used to designate colors of materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent or better products of other E manufacturers. F. No claims as to the suitability of materials specified, or the applicator's inability to produce first class finishes with these materials will be considered unless such claims are made in writing prior to the start of the painting work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Receive paint materials only in unopened, original containers with labels intact. Store materials on the site in an approved location. Damaged or otherwise defective material when so determined, shall be u immediately removed from the Project site. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Finishes shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Finishes other than water -thinned coatings shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of surface moisture as determined by sight or touch. Finishes shall not be applied when the temperature of the surfaces to be painted and of the surrounding atmosphere is below 50 degrees F. for other coatings, or when the temperature is expected to drop to 32 degrees F. B. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra stock is not required for this Project, however all partially used containers of paint as well as 1 L' unopened containers of paint, shall be presented to the Owner at the completion of the Project and stored in the building at the Owner's direction unless otherwise requested by the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable brands of best quality grade paints, stains, varnishes, sealers and coatings equal or better than J those scheduled herein are acceptable as follows: 1. General Coatings and Stains (Interior Work) a. Devoe & Raynolds Co. b. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2. General Coatings (Exterior Work Except GFRC Column Covers) a. Benjamin Moore and Co. b. Devoe & Raynolds Co. C. Diamond Vogel d. Fuller O'Brien Paints e. The Glidden Co. f. Martin-Senour g. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints h. Pratt & Lambert (P & L) i. The Sherwin-Williams Co. 3. GFRC Column Covers, a. M.A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (MAB/1(800)622-1899) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide materials, brushes, tools, ladders, scaffolds, and other equipment kind necessary for the proper execution of each type of work. B. Materials used on this part of the Work shall be as specified in Article 3.06 PAINT SCHEDULE. r 2 KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 L r r C c C c C El C SECTION 09900 PAINTING C. Materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, and mineral spirits, shall be pure and of highest quality. 2.03 COLORS A. Prior to beginning work, obtain approval of colors for surfaces to be painted. Each coat of paint shall be slightly lighter or darker than the preceding coat. Colors may not necessarily be the manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which painting is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General 1. Remove and protect hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items, before painting. Protect finished surfaces in areas where paint is being applied, with clean drop cloths and suitable masking. 2. Clean surfaces to be finished as required to remove oil grease, dust and dirt. Sand where necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive finish. Surface Preparation 1. For Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete and concrete block by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. For Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized, and not shopcoated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non -petroleum based solvent. For Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including interior millwork and trim. b. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming. C. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer (pigmented to be easily identifiable) immediately upon delivery to job. 5. For Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: Fill scratches, nicks and uneven areas with joint compound or spackle, and sand flush with the surface. C. Materials 1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean conditions, free of foreign materials and residue. 3. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. E. KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09900 PAINTING 3.03 APPLICATION A. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the Paint Schedule, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items and surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials and areas. If color and finish is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. B. Apply paint evenly and smoothly without runs, sags, brush marks, laps, streaks, unfinished patches and other blemishes. The hiding shall be complete, and each coat shall be so applied to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to ensure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces. C. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. D. Brush out flow on each coat as required by the characteristics of the materials, or recommended by the manufacturer. E. Priming coat shall be of suitable type for each surface and compatible in each case with the finish paint. F. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying next coat. G. The priming coat on concrete block shall be tinted to the approximate shade of the final coat. Suction spots or "hot -spots" in concrete, evident after the application of the first coating shall be touched -up before applying the second coat, to produce an even result in the finish coat. H. Properly prepare and touch-up scratches, abrasions and other disfigurements and remove foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. Spot -priming or spot -coating shall be featheredged into adjacent coatings to produce a smooth and level surface. I. Final coats shall not be applied before other trades whose operations would be detrimental to finish painting have finished with their work in the areas to be painted. J. Fill nail holes with suitable filler. K. Finish recesses the same as adjoining rooms. Finish other surfaces the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces unless otherwise shown. L. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only, before final installation of equipment. M. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors. Temporarily remove door silencers from frames prior to painting. Replace door silencers after finish coats are dried. N. If metal has been shop primed omit first coat, except for touch-up. Primer for touch-up shall be the same composition as shop primer. O. Mechanical and Electrical Work 1. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in occupied spaces. 2. Paint exposed items, identical with room color, ceiling color or adjacent surfaces unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to the following: a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports b. Heat exchangers C. Tanks d. Ductwork, insulation e. Motor, mechanical equipment and supports f. Accessory items 4. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conduit and fittings b. Switchgear 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers and grilles, with a flat, non - specular black paint. 6. Paint all store fixtures FCFFC 1 and TFFC 1 where painting is scheduled on the Drawings. P. Do not paint over code -required labels, such as Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual, and over equipment identification, performance rating, name, and nomenclature plates. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements, until such requirements are met. B. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and defaced painted surfaces. 1. Costs for this touch-up painting shall be charged to the trade responsible for such damage, and at no additional cost to the Owner. n V I u n, �1 U r, u �i n, 2 n �1 r Li KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 iJ KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09900 PAINTING C 2. Notify the Contractor immediately upon such discovery. C. During the progress of the work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from the Project site at the end of each work day. D. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch and otherwise n damage finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION n A. Protect work finished under this Section and the work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and l� repainting. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted surfaces. Remove temporary protective n wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. L3.06 PAINT SCHEDULES C A. Provide the following EXTERIOR paint systems based on Devoe & Raynolds Co. (D & R) for the various substrates as indicated; equal or better paint systems from the other specified manufacturers will be acceptable: 1. Bituminous/Concrete Paving and Curbs a. 1 coat D & R Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint 2. GFRC Columns a. I coat MAB Lok-Tite Latex Surface Conditioner b. 2 coats MAB Sea Shore/Four Seasons Gloss House Paint 3. Ferrous Metal a. I coat D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up b. 2 coats D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up Gloss Enamel 4. Galvanized Metal a. 1 coat D & R Galvanized Metal Primer b. 2 coats D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up Gloss Enamel 5. Cast -In -Place Concrete and Concrete Block: Refer to Section 09893. B. Provide the following Devoe & Raynolds Co. (D & R) INTERIOR paint systems for the various substrates as indicated; NO SUBSTITUTITONS: I. Concrete Block a. 1 coat D & R Bloxfil b. 1 coat D & R Velour Alkyd Eggshell Enamel C 2. Ferrous Metal a. 2 coats D & R Velour Enamel Undercoat b. 1 coat D & R Velour Eggshell Enamel 3. Metal Stairs and Ladders a. 2 coats D & R Porch and Floor Alkyd Urethane 4. Metal Railings a. I coat D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up b. 2 coats D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up Gloss Enamel 5. Metal Joists and Decking a. 1 coat D & R Millite Interior Alkyd Dry Fog Spray Paint, Flat 6. Galvanized Metal a. 1 coat D & R Metalclad Acrylic Latex Primer C b. 2 coats D & R Mirrolac Cover -Up Gloss Enamel 7. Wood (Transparent) a. For stained finish: 1) 1 coat D & R Wonder Woodstain Interior Alkyd Stain KKE090OF KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09900 PAINTING 2) 1 coat D & R Filler Sealer (omit on close grain woods) 3) 2 coats D & R Mirrothane Polyurethane Varnish 8. Wood (Opaque) a. 1 coat D & R Velour Alkyd Undercoat b. 1 coat D & R Velour Alkyd Eggshell Enamel 9. Gypsum Board a. 1 coat D & R Wonder -Tones Vinyl Latex Primer b. 2 coats D & R Wonder -Tones Latex Satin Enamel C. Other Surfaces 1. If substrate is not among those specified above, notify Architect for direction. END OF SECTION 6 KKE0900F KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09960 VINYL WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl wall covering. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description, installation and maintenance instructions upon selection. L 2. Samples: 6" x 6" each color and pattern specified. t.._, 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE CA. Installation shall be by a firm specializing in wall covering work with not less than 3 years of experience in installing wall coverings similar to those required for this Project. B. Sample Panels: Install 2 sample panels of full usable width, including 1 (one) corner, in areas designated by Architect. Replace panels which are not acceptable to Architect until satisfactory installation is achieved. C1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Vinyl wall covering shall be stored in undamaged condition as packaged by the manufacturer, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Storage area shall be clean and dry and shall be maintained at a temperature above 40 degrees F. with normal humidity. Wall covering shall not be stored in an upright position. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Vinyl wall covering should be installed only when normal temperature and humidity conditions approximate the same conditions that will exist when building is occupied. Area to receive wall covering E, shall be at constant temperature of 70 degrees F. measured at base elevation. Temperature shall be maintained for 72 hours before, during and 48 hours after the application. E1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver to Project site not less than 15 linear yards of each type, color, and pattern of wall covering installed, clearly marked and wrapped for protection. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS n 2.01 MATERIALS J[ A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Vinyl coated fabric, 54" wide, conforming to FS CCC -W -408A(1), Type II, Medium Duty, Class 2 - Mildew Resistant, Arno Vicrtex Custom (RJF International Corp.). 1. Fire Hazard Classification: Wall covering shall bear UL label and marking, indicating fire hazard classification as determined by ASTM E84-91 a. a. Flame spread: 10. b. Smoke developed: 5. 2. Patterns and Colors: Refer to Drawings. B. Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended strippable -type adhesive, primer, and sealer, produced expressly for use with selected wall covering on substrate as shown on Drawings. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant and nonstaining to wall covering. C. Release Coat: Oil base sealer or enamel undercoater for drywall substrates. C EKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 09960 VINYL WALL COVERING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which vinyl wall covering is to be installed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Other work that penetrates the substrate shall be completed before beginning wall covering installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove vinyl wall covering from its packaging and allow to acclimate to the area of installation 24 hours before application. B. Remove hardware, switchplates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures in areas where wall covering is to be applied. C. Repair gypsum wallboard substrate by depressing exposed nails and screws. Fill cracks and holes with joint compound, or spackle. D. Sand and dust surfaces. Surfaces shall be dry, smooth and structurally sound. E. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer s recommendations for type of substrate. Apply surface sealer to gypsum wallboard which will permit subsequent removal of wall covering without damage to paper facing. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Use vinyl wall covering rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacturer. Place panels consecutively in exact order they are cut from the roll including filling spaces above and below windows, doors and similar penetrations. Hang panels by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. B. Trim deeply textured strip matched patterns on a work table with a metal straight edge and an industrial razor blade. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. C. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing adhesive. Adhesive shall be at room temperature. D. Apply adhesive to back of wall covering using a roller or paste brush to fill pores of fabric and produce a smooth layer and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install seams plumb, and at least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Overlap seams and double -cut to assure tight closure. Roll, brush, or use broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall covering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or support. E. Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match. F. Remove excess adhesive immediately, using warm water and a dry sponge, or dry cloth towel. G. The installed wall covering shall be secure, smooth, clean and without wrinkles, gaps and overlaps. H. Replace hardware, switchplates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures, removed earlier to facilitate wall covering installation. 1. Cut edges of wall covering shall be completely concealed. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from wall covering installation and leave areas of work in a neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 U 11 U '1 U E. it U n 11; U 2 11 C SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS EPART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet partitions and doors. B. Door operating hardware. C. Coat hook/bumpers and wall stops. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 10820 - Toilet Accessories: For partition mounted accessories requiring blocking. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Show layout and elevations of compartments, details of anchorage and accessories. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS rl A. Metpar Steel Products Corp. B. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toilet Compartments: Floor supported overhead braced style. 1. Sheet Steel for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM B633-85(1994), Type RS, stretcher leveled, galvanized and bonderized; minimum of 0.00015" thick zinc coating on each face; minimum gages as follows: a. 20 gage: For pilasters. b. 22 gage: For doors and panels. C. 16 gage: For headrails. 2. Concealed Reinforcement: 14 gage for tapping, 12 gage for anchoring devices. 3. Core Construction: Paper honeycomb permanently bonded to metal face sheets. 4. Hardware and Accessories a. Brackets: Extruded aluminum with satin anodized finish or brass with dull chromium j -j finish. b. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel with satin finish. C. Finishing Devices: Stainless steel with satin finish, or brass with dull chromium finish; 1 -way or spanner head type bolts where exposed. C d. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard notched -in top hinge with corrosion -proof pintle and nylon bushing, and gravity or spring tension type cam bottom hinge, fully adjustable to bring door to rest in any position. e. Latches: Manufacturer's standard slide latch, with rubber bumper on keeper. f. Combination Coat Hook/Bumpers, and Wall Stops 1) Manufacturer's standard hook and pin with rubber bumper; dull chrome finish; for each inswinging stall door. 2) Wall stop with convex resilient inset, similar to No. W307 (Quality Hardware Mfg. Co.); dull chrome finish; for each outswinging stall door. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate with flat, smooth surfaces, free of waves, warping, buckles, rough areas and voids. Miter edge facing strips corners and either braze and grind smooth or cap with manufacturer's standard stainless steel corner fitting. Provide concealed metal reinforcement for attachment of brackets, hardware, accessories and anchoring devices, and as required for adequate strength of units. Provide cutouts required for other work as shown. C B. Complete fabrication at factory, including drilling, tapping and assembly, to the extent possible within delivery limitations. C. Finish shall be baked enamel on clean sheet steel surfaces applied in following coats of manufacturer's standard paint to provide a minimum finish thickness of 1.5 mils on all exposed non -plated surfaces. 1. 1 st Coat: Rust -inhibiting baked -on primer. CKKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Synthetic semi -gloss enamel, applied by electrostatic spray process, baked at not less than 300 degrees F. for not less than 30 minutes, same color for both coats. 3. Color: No. 021, Black. D. Doors: 24" x 58" x 1" thick inswinging typical; provide inswinging/outswinging doors as shown for handicapped toilet stalls, which will result in not less than 32" clear unobstructed passage in full open position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Partitions: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. 1. Secure panels to walls with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry and tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than 2 stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 2. Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead -brace to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead -brace when doors are in closed position. B. Accessories: Mount accessories to partition units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Installation work is included in Section 06200. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches and other finish imperfections. Replace damaged work as directed. END OF SECTION 2 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 n ID rl L,' C SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall vents. B. Brick vents. C. Soffit vents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery, free area percentage and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver each vent, wrapped as required to prevent damage and fully identified. Use care in handling to prevent damage. Store units above grade and protect from deterioration and damage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS C. Soffit Vents: Extruded aluminum horizontal vent fabricated from 6063-T5 alloy, with V x 1/8" slots at 1-3/8" o.c., Style HSV 34-400 "H" Screed, (MM Systems Corp.); or approved substitution. 1. Size: 4" finished width in soffit x 10'-0" continuous length, and 7 rows of vents. 2. Finish: Factory applied baked -on enamel. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Provide square mesh, woven aluminum wire insect screen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION EA. Locate and place wall vents, brick vents, and soffit vents plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. C EKKE0401 E END OF SECTION KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 A. Wall Vents (Louver): Extruded aluminum, with chevron style drainable blade, fabricated from alloy 6063-T52, 4" deep, Model SED -401 (Greenheck); or approved substitution. 1. Size: Refer to Drawings. C 2. Finish: Mil finishClear anodized to comply with AA-M12C22A31 for a Class II coating. 3. Vent Screens: Provide louver manufacturer's removable screens for exterior louvers. Fabricate screen frames of same metal and finish as louver units to which secured, unless otherwise indicated. Provide rewireable frames consisting of formed or extruded metal with a driven spline C or insert for securing screen mesh. a. Bird screens shall be 1/2" square mesh, 0.063" aluminum wire. b. Fastenings: Use same material as items fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Provide types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat -head machine C screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brick Vents: One-piece, load-bearing, cast aluminum louvers and frames, minimum 0.125" thick, with 18 x 14 mesh aluminum insect srceening on interior face, and incorporating integral waterstop on inside C edge of sill, Model CA 168 (Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 1 . Size: 16" x 7-3/4" x 4" deep. 2. Finish: Mill finish. C. Soffit Vents: Extruded aluminum horizontal vent fabricated from 6063-T5 alloy, with V x 1/8" slots at 1-3/8" o.c., Style HSV 34-400 "H" Screed, (MM Systems Corp.); or approved substitution. 1. Size: 4" finished width in soffit x 10'-0" continuous length, and 7 rows of vents. 2. Finish: Factory applied baked -on enamel. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Provide square mesh, woven aluminum wire insect screen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION EA. Locate and place wall vents, brick vents, and soffit vents plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. C EKKE0401 E END OF SECTION KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic corner guards. B. Stainless steel corner guards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Samples: 12" length of each style corner guard in color or finish specified. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide protective coverings for materials prior to shipping. Protect during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lexan brand high impact polycarbonate corner guards, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" wings and 48" or 96" long as required, "Tri -Guards" No. TG 4212 or TG 8212, (Tri -Guards, Inc.); No. CP -2548-L or CP -2596-L (Tubular Specialties Mfg., Inc.); or approved substitution. 1. Color: Clear B. Stainless steel corner guards Type #304, 16 gauge, 90 degree profile (unless otherwise shown), 3" x 3" wings (minimum), and 48" or 96" long as required, (MM Systems Corp.); No. CG -50 (Pawling Corp., Standard Products Div.); or approved substitution. 1. Finish: No. 4, Satin. C. Fasteners 1. Chrome plated screws for clear plastic corner guards. 2. Stainless steel screws for stainless steel corner guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install corner guards in longest practicable lengths to eliminate joints. Secure with fasteners specified of adequate length, through factory pre -drilled holes. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Following installation of clear plastic corner guards, back out screws, remove drywall dust visible through corner guards and resecure. Finished installation shall be free of drywall dust and other foreign matter on the concealed side of corner guards. END OF SECTION 1 KKE0900 KOHL'S SECTION 10820 TOILET ACCESSORIES CPART 1 - GENERAL CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Certain Contractor furnished and installed toilet accessories. B. Tenant furnished toilet tissue dispensers, diaper changing stations, and roll paper towel dispenser mechanisms for installation by Contractor. C C. Custodian utility shelf. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS C A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08800 - Glazing: for mirrors. C. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Partitions. C1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1.04 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Description of each item, and installation and operating instructions. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and handle toilet accessories in such a manner as to prevent damage; store in a secure place. Accessories shall be in original packaging with seals unbroken and shall bear the name of the manufacturer and product. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable items, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the Project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Contractor Furnished Accessories C 1. Bradley Corp. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS C2.02 MATERIALS A. Refer to Drawings for toilet accessories legend and model numbers. B. Tenant furnished accessories for installation by Contractor. 1. Surface mounted toilet tissue dispensers. C 2. Diaper Changing Station: Koala Bear Care (Koala Corp.) 3. Roll paper towel dispenser mechanisms. n Il C. Custodian Utility Shelf. No. 9983, combination shelf/mop-broom holder (3) with rag hooks. �' 2.03 FABRICATION n A. Fabricate toilet accessories of Type 302, or 304 stainless steel, satin finish, unless otherwise specified or L approved. B. Omit manufacturer's labels and imprinted names. C. Provide accessories produced by one manufacturer unless otherwise specified, or approved. D. Furnish fastening devices, including screws, bolts, anchors, and backplates. Match exposed portions of C fastening devices with that of accessories. PART 3 - EXECUTION C3.01 EXAMINATION A. Check wall opening for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking and frames, and other preparation that would affect installation of accessories. C B. Check areas to receive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories. D. Do not begin installation of washroom accessories until openings and surfaces are acceptable. C CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 10820 TOILET ACCESSORIES 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install toilet accessories only to finished surfaces and after contiguous work has been completed. C. In any one space, accessories shall be of matching design and finish. If accessories vary in this regard, they shall be referred to the Architect for approval before being installed. D. Install accessories at locations and heights indicated, level and plumb. All exposed fasteners to be tamper -proof. Finish of exposed fasteners to match items secured. E. Install manufacturer's recommended concealed anchor system for grab bars complete with stainless steel screws. F. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting on adjacent finishes. G. Fit flanges of accessories snug to wall surfaces. Provide for caulking in gaps between 90 degree return flanges and finish wall surface after accessories are installed. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for proper operation. B. Protect toilet accessories from damage after being installed. Before acceptance by Owner, clean and restore finishes; replace defective parts or units. Remove all packing material and construction debris and leave area broom clean. C. Deliver accessories schedule, keys and parts manual as part of project close-out documents. For Owner's permanent records, provide 2 sets of the following items of manufacturer's literature: 1. Technical data sheets of each item used for the Project. 2. Service and parts manuals. 3. Name of local representative to be contacted for field service or consultation. END OF SECTION J 9 tJ n U n KKE0900L KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 7 C C C C C C SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dock seals. B. Dock bumpers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: For threaded anchor bolts for mounting dock bumpers. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: For curb angles. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Equipment description, installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Show complete layout and details of seals and bumpers. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DOCK BUMPERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Durable Corp. 2. Pawling Corp., Standard Products Division B. Material 1. One piece molded rubber bumper with pre -drilled countersunk mounting, to accept 3/4" diameter anchor bolts. 2. Size: 12" high x 24" long x 6" deep. 2.02 DOCK SEALS A. Products/Manufacturers 1. Model No. 160 (Chalfant Dor-Seals) 2. Series No. 1000 (Fairborn USA, Inc.) 3. Model No. ATP -791 (Frommelt Industries, Inc.) 4. Model No. DSS -100 (Kelley Co., Inc.) 5. Model No. S-600 (SERCO Co.) 6. Model No. TS -181 (W.B. McGuire Co., Overhead Door Corp.) B. Material CC. C 1. Fabric covered stationary foam pads for forming airtight seal between truck and loading dock openings at jambs and head. a. Pads: Refer to Drawings for pad depth; shape and length to suit opening and use. 1) Cover Fabric: Blended vinyl or neoprene coated nylon, 22 oz./s.y. (minimum). 2) Guide Strips: 4" wide coated nylon on jamb pads. 3) Pleated Protectors: Hypalon, 40 oz./s.y. (minimum). a) Wear Exposure: 7" or 8" as standard with the manufacturer. 4) Colors: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Supporting Frame: Kiln -dried, preservative treated, and factory painted wood, with steel mounting hardware. Fabrication 1. Provide tapered side pads and head pad for firm parallel compression of dock seal with semi- trailer at inclined and declined docks. Field verify required taper and angle. 1 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install loading dock equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to structure to comply with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, position relative to top of platform, and anchorage. C. Dock Seals: Securely attach supporting frames to building structure in proper relationship to openings and dock bumpers, to ensure effective compression of dock seals when trucks are positioned against dock bumpers. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock equipment. B. After installation, restore marred and abraded surfaces to original condition. END OF SECTION 0 KKE0900B KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 SECTION 12690 FLOOR MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roll -up, removable floor mats, surface applied. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: Materials description and installation instructions. 2. Samples: 6" square section of floor mat showing field and edge colors specified. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the floor mats to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's 2 -year wear warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE A. Surface applied textile style floor mat, "Ultra -Dry" (Sbemco International, Inc.); NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solution dyed polypropylene fiber with non -slip backing. 1. Overall Height: 9/16". 2. Color: Charcoal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install floor mats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. 1. Install mats with ribs parallel with front of store. 2. Install mats butted to adjacent porcelain tile. 3. Install mats when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operations including painting and decorating are complete. END OF SECTION CKKE0900 KOHL'S/01-04-4863-01 Location 1S V-3/ E -)MfCt- f P V5:7 - No. X34- 1 Datelg' NORTH TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER Certificate of Occupancy $ Building/Frame Permit Fee $ 3iZ' s�cMus Foundation Permit Fee $ Other Permit Fee $ TOTAL $ 3 ra o© Check # 14 rt5 Iw') 5 G 4 0 _ - Building Inspector TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER BUILDING DEPARTMENT P APPLICATION TO CONSTRUCT REPAIR, RENOVATE, CHANGE THE USE OR OCCUPANCY OF, OR DEMOLISH ANY BUILDING OTHER THAN A ONE OR TWO FAMILY DWELLING ' ,( This Section for Official Use Onl BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER: UE DATE ISSt, 3 ( o2g v2� o SIGNATURE: ti /,zAz01 Buildin Commissioner/I or of Buildings Dat 1.1 Property Address: 1.2 Assessors Map and Parcel Number. 91 MapNumber Parcel Number ` Q� P�f' 1.3 Zoning htformation: 1.4 Property Dimensions: Zoning District Proposed Use Lat Area Frorrta e ft 1.6 BUILDING SETBACKS (ft) Front Yard Side Yard Rear Yard Required Provide Required I Provided R red Provided 1.7 Water Supply M.G.L.C.40. 54) 1.5. Flood Zone Information: 1.8 Sewerage Disposal System: Public ❑ ❑ Zone Outside Flood Zone ❑ Municipal On Site Disposal System ❑ y�Private 2.1 Owner of Record Al �Aolrl 0,1 Name (Print) Address for Service : Signature Telephone 2.2 Authorized Agent Name P int Address for Service: 4 G, R (-3 gignature Telephone 3.1 Licensed Construction Supervisor Not Applicable ❑ Address License Number Licensed Construction Supervisor: Expiration Date Signature Telephone 3.2 Registered Home Improvement Contractor Not Applicable Py111(r4%f- 1, ( JY Company Name., 3 1 Registration Number rli,J'T G i.. lvio C11(JSuy•C /Ve// ' dres &(3- 3)9-1 A Expiration Date Sign ture Telephone It as Owner/Authorized Agent Hereby declare that the statements and information on the foregoing application are true and accurate, to the best of my knowledge and belief. Signed under the pains and penalties of perjury Ar4 0?—(- &-ed Print Name li l Signa of Owner/Agent Date Item Estimated Cost (Dollars) to be Completed by permit applicant 1. Building P-jeA- t (C (a) Building Permit Fee CC Multiplier 2 Electrical (b) Estimated Total Cost of Construction from (6) 3 Plumbing Building Permit fee (a) x (b) a ° 3/L 4 Mechanical (HVAC) 5 Fire Protection 6 Total (1+2+3+4+5) Check Number/¢,954— 3i 5,.,{.1:.3{a3 at„°!'' �,� ...., �� f '�,'�idt6 r,. r�A ,� 'V.s',.>JJ>1`i�St- If :Y' � i f Y t': Mi }a S.7aY' t. r.`5f?�'f„ t ?��.5t, t' i s°'�; `fc� "t SJ1 .1/I't. IF 9w!.�t"t v ':sau 1t -i� { .t ',..y 41v •.SW{' .t .':{ ,c(. .•S:S ,a S t�,,'T� Fri? `"(.I.r.,: 11 .�}).'.lNi 5 ,3 �:._, f. 5 : s:''i "� ¢ 1..:a: X,,,(I :; `1 t�'Au3 i.�. I� �. xX � t�%r... ii'l..;Ylf Y.�-.J.t`. }Z:�ki' }}.{1Qd ri "�i ?j }Sl9. i#l:le t^`5�:6..Y�u:NS .�.�,I..y(�Y�ifiC Y . .All. tE'•a '� ✓�. `y"',Yi ��j1 rt ��ai.�.'lb� �. F✓'S1� f:.k NO. OF STORIES SIZE BASEMENT OR SLAB SIZE OF FLOOR TIMBERS iST2N 3 RD SPAN DEMENSIONS OF SILLS DEMENSIONS OF POSTS DIMENSIONS OF GIRDERS HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION THICKNESS SIZE OF FOOTING X MATERIAL OF CBRvINEY IS BUILDING ON SOLID OR FILLED LAND IS BUILDING CONNECTED TO NATURAL GAS LINE 1 Y v~, vt ,c�,,,,av `•� "„� �a :.t '� � x x-'� .z-r -'. 'x- .g1 Ys. Workers Compensation Insurance affidavi ust be completed and submitted with this application. Failure to provide this affidavit will result in the denial`of the issuance of the building permit. L_S',gneddavit Attached Yea ....... No.......❑N s ;> 1 © 0 .c �rc�K SWI c s �ly�►rrN`s,?,a�sn qLs 5.1 Registered Architect: Name: Address Signature Telephone Area of Responsibility Registration Number Expiration Date Name: Address: Signature Total Not applicable ❑ Registration Number Expiration Date Name: Address Signature Telephone Area of Responsibility Registration Number Expiration Date Name Address Signature Telephone Area of Responsibility Registration Number Expiration Date Name Address Signature Telephone 41 ` 0n Not Applicable ❑ Company Name: Responsible in Charge of Construction New Construction ❑ Existing Building ❑ Repair(s) b Alterations(s) 0 Addition 0 Accessory Bldg. 0 Demolition ❑ Other ❑ Specify Brief Description of Proposed Work: e 4 xe_ � 1 � Q-- W J� Al -e, -) ( „ I-),/ /gip K I / G r J/ rTT 9,e e ,` 0 0 B Business ❑ Structural Engineering Structural Peer Review Required Yes ❑ No ❑ SECTION 10a Owner Authorization - TO BE COMPLETED WHEN OWNERS AGENT OR CONTRACTOR APPLIES FOR BUILDING PERMIT .1, ,as Owner of the subject property Hereby authorize to act on My behalf, in all matters relative two work authorized by this building permit application Signature of Owner Date USE GROUP Check as applicable) CONSTRUCTION TYPE A Assembly 0 A-1 ❑ A-4 ❑ A-2 A-5 ❑ A-3 ❑ 0 IA 113 0 0 B Business ❑ 2A 2B 2C ❑ 0 ❑ C Educational 0 F Factory ❑ F-1 ❑ F-2 ❑ H High Hazard ❑ 3A 3B ❑ 0 IInstitutional ❑ 1-1 0 1-2 0 1-3 ❑ M Mercantile ❑ 4 ❑ R residential ❑ R-1 0 R-2 ❑ R-3 0 5A 5B ❑ 0 S Storage 0 S-1 0 S-2 ❑ U Utility M Mixed Use S Special Use 0 ❑ ❑ Specify: Specify: Specify: COMPLETE THIS SECTION IF EXISTING BUILDING UNDERGOING RENOVATIONS, ADDITIONS AND OR CHANGE IN USE Existing Use Group: Existing Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: Proposed Use Group: Proposed Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: Structural Engineering Structural Peer Review Required Yes ❑ No ❑ SECTION 10a Owner Authorization - TO BE COMPLETED WHEN OWNERS AGENT OR CONTRACTOR APPLIES FOR BUILDING PERMIT .1, ,as Owner of the subject property Hereby authorize to act on My behalf, in all matters relative two work authorized by this building permit application Signature of Owner Date 10/10/2001 11:15 6038784646 PRIME ROOFING CORP P43E 01 Prf►ms 1100LIng- Coop, 00BOX III / Now 108wich, NN 01071/Taf.•803.878-3650/fir:gdy.��f.�� Ooteber. 10, 2001 AM lttcorpwm#d all ran sem .Tewksbury, MA 01874 Aad: lot Pasgnak Rs: North Andover Plaza Former i>lrWkn gra lit following is a breehdown to supply !abet aua matorisls neceamry to repair the existing Carlisle !Ll1,y adhered system per Carlisle's r'ecaonrusndations and 169Md meistwe sm, Roof =a: 13,144 it 1, Remove 13,199 sf of wet !4" Ober bow4 into dmpstat8 2. !natal! now %7 liber board WuWou by Carhs;A 3. Imran new ,o+6o BIPDM by Csrlkk over than ares 4. Clad up "d tax. 3, All ttuteriaia htatalled per menu>hoturcrs speciflcatiooa To rentoyp Imy 4Wti0"Al Wit iduldion ad replace, if roquired, add $3.74. per if. We ptopoaa t01 nigh lWW And mitetials — eotplete in aceordattce with above gmciRoa au, and subjm m consuona of twa Agrt�mme t tbf the sten nf: _ Forty-thur thousand, aevan hur4vo trwonty-&4 i'40"At to be mads as follows, Per AIA boonms10 ---� Respectfid4, ukWited, Prime Roofing Corp. i� BY; Michael aoen a Note: 'nit proposej mely be wi wa !tWt accepted within (3 0) days. be of u AaePtadae; 1 by - lad IN III N >���� �- � � ■III � 7n'J Gr'. n ^T -.n PRIME ROOFING CORP PO BOX 478 NEVV IPSWICH NH Ph: 60-878-3550 Fax: 603-878-4646 NO ANDOVER BRADLEES ................ .................. ................ ..... m .......... . ......... ........... ............................................. THE EDGE Drawing Report ROOF ........... ........... .............. ........... ........... Legend Pitch Description <none> 10' Mech Fast w/ Russ MFS -21 B <none> Wood Curb Horiz Flash U-5-13 <none> New B%oA"Tie-in U -10-A <none> 24" Wall Flash (Russ) PS -12-C Monday, October 8, 2001 2:34 PM Page 1 ............ ED SF LF 13,198.31 2,074.57 97.50 1,650.58 305.58 Prime LVI ........... ........................... .......................... .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii a a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ ED SF LF 13,198.31 2,074.57 97.50 1,650.58 305.58 Prime LVI 4 Cq �� o w v� �. cn 0 c w w v u o a a w z w v z Cl) v o cn � W z C=D Q, N c v v V CL m ev m c ' t o Ea Cr0 :... L C w • c `Z1 o 0 lp m Cfti 0.3 m 11 :: C y a �= C y O O 1- m o 0 CD coa O 0 of c H y CL c c _ mw 0 N r0.. O t r W c0 Z Z c r=... z� vyi o.z`�5 Z uj �E a -o ZOS �y Qo y a m '� 10 eyv C . z 0a10 �m O w a 0 U vi Z o � I y O u E o � fr •� C Q cc CO) a o 0 w y C O L v CO)CDCL 3� O O C' �a 4-0 c escc J .0 C2 O Z Q CL CO2 C xa as � u o w v U) 0 U o w o a v U a w 04 to'. a o a 94 O W C v a s � o n: G° i% w x rA 0 cn Q cn :me a 7 a a z 0 U LLJ z � 0 0 O 0 co Q r.7 CO) O CL GO y O V cc cs CD CLCA C Co CM C O .0 0 m m 3� � O O C. cmQ C CD J.O O Z 43 CLCA C tj, x A O GG � u � O LE cn Cl)w p w 0.' � O '� � •� O a v U r x EOE W � O p u: G w w v' � C6j W W a: c% w" O U w � r� w w � w w �, rA z cn Q E cn LJU z am C c a� c i h O C '�• v V CL to m cc \: o oa `t n: � y 3 ' c t;0 c IS o a Oy y (� t0 3 7r; y cm m y �ca o '- m a yr o c (T� y O O V .L" y.. CD 0 cm dV O La O Z O Of -41 dct �O O m co y O O 2 _ ` O O) CL C_ H y O C �c _ CIL w p N CD ~ O t LL. .. c F- .y C :s O C 2 LU CS•E Ci fl v y cm QO y O. Z'S 'O O E Q eco S y�� C t- t S dim 1-2 050 a Ell O v v I CCD O•— y ai.— y C m m 0 CD L- I••. = Lft CO �3 'a CD i Cc O d CL Cp< caCcL 10 'FL 0 0 C Zts CD 0 CL CD CO) ccC C C cc CLCOD is f E CDL 1n Y/ Z CD Nl a O h � C I CCD O•— y ai.— y C m m 0 CD L- I••. = Lft CO �3 'a CD i Cc O d CL Cp< caCcL 10 'FL 0 0 C Zts CD 0 CL CD CO) ccC C C cc CLCOD is 12/28/2001 14:20 6038784646 PRIME ROOFING CORP PAGE 02 AC A. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ii/a /200 PROW"t (603)569-0704 FAX (603)569-6831 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Infantine Insurance, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P.O. Boot $125 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Manchester, NH 03108 POLICY NUMDER Colleen Esposito INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Prins Roofing, Inc. Appleton Business Canter P.O. Box 478 Nam Ipswich, NN 03071 A INSURERA: Transcontinental Insurance Co. INSURER 5: Continental Cafualty Co. INSURER C: Transportation Insurance CO. INSURER D: INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTEO BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED SY PAID CLAIMS. ye,Tnrll„q.0 Tt1VLNCK 1 A1 ADORONALINSURED; INSURER LETTFIL _A CANCELLATION RMD Incorporated 881 East St. TeNksbury, MA 01876 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE M MM"ON DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY I LL ENDEAVOR TO MNL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFCATE HOLDER NAMED TO TIM LEFT. BUT FAILURE TO MNL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OOUOATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY. ITS AGENTS OR REFRnENTAYTIMS. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMDER 05/01/2002 LIMITS A GENERAL LIAMITY X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILm CLMMB MADE x OCCUR X OG2503, M2504 1074040992 05/01/2001 FACH occumuma $ 1000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any a» fn) s 100, MEO EXP ww aw Parton) b 5 • PERSONAL a AW INJURY s 1 000 GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2. 000 .00 OEWL AOOREOATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY X PR X LOC PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGO s 1190. A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTQ$ X NON -OWNED AUTOS 074040989 OS/01/2001 05/01/2002 COMBINED (Es ��) ANGLE LIMIT= 1 000 BODILY INJURY b (Per pawn) BODILY INJURY (Par aet ow) b ER PROPERTY DAMAGE S (Par aftk%nt) GARAGE UABIL.ITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - FA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN FA AOC S AUTO ONLY: AGG S B EXCESS L.tABR TY X OCCUR � CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE X RETENTION S 10. C1014079727 05/01/2001 05/01/2002 Faces OCCURRENCE a 5,000 AGGREGATE b S .000, s b b C WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABAM C1074034691 05/01/2001 05/01/2002 X TORY LIMITS E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S 500 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S 5Q0 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMB I SOO OTHER D OF OPEMTI OC T10NWVEMLESIEXCLUWONS ADDED BY gNTlSPECIAL PRO ke".47 l s. North Andover MA. Rio IncorporaMMO nanwd as TaIlditional insured for Ceneral Llablity and Ushrella as respects this job. ye,Tnrll„q.0 Tt1VLNCK 1 A1 ADORONALINSURED; INSURER LETTFIL _A CANCELLATION RMD Incorporated 881 East St. TeNksbury, MA 01876 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE M MM"ON DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY I LL ENDEAVOR TO MNL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFCATE HOLDER NAMED TO TIM LEFT. BUT FAILURE TO MNL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OOUOATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY. ITS AGENTS OR REFRnENTAYTIMS. No" 1 Date.....F . .(.... - 3�3 •_ " TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER • • O0- PERMIT FOR WIRING {� 5 /1c� �.t 1 i= I(t{ c�C This certifies that................................:............................. �.............. �.. "a}� �� ,atU��e has permission to perform ....l..:........ y ...................................................... wiring in the building of ...... I 0 � ,JJ. North Andover, Mas s. r -kR Fee .'/4. 0d .9..�Lic. No. �............. t ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR Check #�� iil���/"""�/ WHITE: Applicant CANARY: Building Dept. PINK: Treasurer Office Use Only %01fr- WJJUtUW11W1%4111f .111 IAllttbn4JL+WX1W Permit No. agMrtIl Mt of 'Public %faiq Occupancy A Fee Checked BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS 527 CMR 12:00 3f90 ([Gave blank) APPLICATIONd ( FOR TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be p accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code, 527 CMR 12:00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) Date September 19, 2001 City or Town of North Andover To the Inspector of Wires: The udersigned applies for a permit to perform the electrical work described below. Job #1021 Location (Street & Number) 350 Winthrop Ave. Owner or Tenant Kohl's Department Store' Owner's Address N 56 W17000 Ridgewood Dr., Menomonee Falls, WI 53051 Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit: Yes ❑ No ❑ (Check Appropriate Box) Purpose of Building Utility Authorization No. Existing Service Amps _1 Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrnd ❑ No. of Meters New Service Amps Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrnd ❑ No. of Meters Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work Electrical, Tel/Data and Fire Alarm No. Of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs No. of Transformers Total.. KVA No. of Lighting Fixtures Swimming Pool Above In- gmd. ❑ gmd. ❑ Generators KVA No. of Receptacle Outlets No. of Oil Burners No. of Emergency UghtingBattery Units No. of Switch Outlets No. of Gas Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Detection and Initiating Devices No. of Sounding Devices No. of Self Contained Detection/Sounding Devices Municipal ❑ &her ❑ Connection No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Total tons No. of Disposal& No.of Heat Total Total Pumps Tons KW No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW No. of Dryers Heating Devices KWLocal No. of Water Heaters KW No. of NO. of Signs Ballasts Low Voltage Wiring No. Hydro Massage 1Lbs No. of Motors Total HP OTHER: INSURANCE COVERAGE: Pursuant to the requirements of Massachusetts general Laws I have a current Liability Insurance Policy including Completed Operations Coverage or its substantial equivalent. YES X7 NO ❑ 1 have submitted valid proof of same to the Office. YES 71 NO ❑ If you have checked YES, please indicate the type of coverage by checking the appropriate box. INSURANCE )Q BONO; ❑ OTHER ❑ (Please Specify) Estimated Value of Electrical Work Se 423, 600. 00 2.8 Million Total (Expiration Date) Work to Start Inspection Date Requested: Rough OR Final Signed under the Penalties of perjury: FIRM NAME OSTROW ELECTRIC COMPANY -A.Ah16992A Ucensee Philip Ostrow Signature LIC. NO. 16 9 9 2 A Address 9 Mason Street, Worcester, MA 01609 Bus.Tel.No.(5Q8) 754-2641 Alt. Tel. No. OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the Ucensee does not have the insurance coverage or its substantial equivalent as re- quired by Massachusetts Genernl taws, anct thpt my signature on thic psr:ntt aprtdcatlar. •wives this requiremer:t. Owner Agent (Please check one) (Signature of Owner or Agent) Telephone No. PERMIT FEE s 4, 200.00 x6565 f Date ...:. .. %.....`. . .... . jFlo 'o.0ry TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER P PERMIT FOR GAS INSTALLATION This certifies that ........................... :... `.......... 'has permission for gas installation Vthe buildings of ............... V....::................. . at ::.....:. r..':. . . ................. North Andover, Mass. Fee?j17..:... Lic. No.:/ ..............., n , ........... J GAS INSPECTOR v Check #- /c 6' MAS,SACHUSEIIS UNIFORM APPUCATON FOR PERMrr TO DO GAS FMING (Type or print) Date NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS Building Locations Vv 1,J/ld 7cy M d e- 't V� Permit # Amount $ 12-0 crd Owner's Name Nev, ❑ Renovation 13"' Replacement ❑ Plans Submitted El bPrint or type) -`� Check one: Certificate Installing Company Name f/ Corp. wlil- Address / / ��'7 � S UI ✓ /�'Y� /� J i%d /� /�) i!/ ❑ Partner. Business Telephone r v y y Firm/Co. Name of Licensed Plumber or Gas Fitter INSURANCE COVERAGE Check one: Iynave a current liability Insurance policy or it's substantial equivalent. Yes ©� No 0 ,If you have checked Les, ple6�� e type coverage by checking the appropriate box. Lability insurance policy Other type of indemnity ❑ Bond Owner's Insurance Waiver: I am aware that the licensee does not have the Insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Signature of Owner or Owner's Agent Owner Agent M I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under Permit Issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State s Code anhap'ter 1.42 of the General Laws. By: Title City/Town VED (OFFICE USE ONLY) Signature of Licensed Plumber Or Gas Fitter Plumber f 3 Z Gas Fit r License Number aster Journeyman zCA Ln U QQ Fd a W C4 W �" G F z zU M W w o w U 0 a H z W a z aCA d o 0o W °o W H o 0 3 a c� a U x a R F o SUB -BASEM ENT B A S E M ENT 1ST. FLOOR Q. 2 2ND. FLOOR 3RD. FLOOR 4TH. FLOOR 5TH. FLOOR 6TH. FLOOR 7TH. FLOOR 8TH. FLOOR bPrint or type) -`� Check one: Certificate Installing Company Name f/ Corp. wlil- Address / / ��'7 � S UI ✓ /�'Y� /� J i%d /� /�) i!/ ❑ Partner. Business Telephone r v y y Firm/Co. Name of Licensed Plumber or Gas Fitter INSURANCE COVERAGE Check one: Iynave a current liability Insurance policy or it's substantial equivalent. Yes ©� No 0 ,If you have checked Les, ple6�� e type coverage by checking the appropriate box. Lability insurance policy Other type of indemnity ❑ Bond Owner's Insurance Waiver: I am aware that the licensee does not have the Insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Signature of Owner or Owner's Agent Owner Agent M I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under Permit Issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State s Code anhap'ter 1.42 of the General Laws. By: Title City/Town VED (OFFICE USE ONLY) Signature of Licensed Plumber Or Gas Fitter Plumber f 3 Z Gas Fit r License Number aster Journeyman 4� I CERTIFICATE OF USE & OCCUPANCY Kohl's Dept Store TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER Building Permit Number 68 (July 31, 2001) Date: March 1, 2002 THIS CERTIFIES THAT THE BUILDING LOCATED ON 350 Winthrop Ave MAY BE OCCUPIED AS Retail Department Store IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE AND SUCH OTHER REGULATIONS AS MAY APPLY. Certificate Issued to: Delta & Delta Realty Trost 875 East Street Tewksbury MA 01876 Location 3s 0 6 /110 1 No. _6 Date �! D/ TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER Certificate of Occupancy Building/Frame 4ermit Fee Foundation Permit Fee Other Permit Fee $ TOTAL $ Check # / Building Inspector I"ar&OW Z/O / 9 450 Os� FORM U - LOT RELEASE FORM INSTRUCTIONS: This form is used to verify that all necessary approvals/permits from Boards and Departments having jurisdiction have been obtained. This does not relieve the applicant and/or landowner from compliance with any applicable or requirements. *****************************APPLICANT FILLS OUT THIS SECTION***********x*********** APPLICANT Urrae fl LOCATION: Assessor's Map Number c2 , SUBDIVISION 1� d STREET.n750 Ld 14!/ "9& p /-706 PHONE -/�,/ I �16 a PARCEL LOT (S) ST. NUMBER,3,50 ************ **************OFFICIAL USE COMME OF TOWN AGENTS: ATION ADMINISTRATOR tie ejs +Z�, / TO PLANNER DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED_ X 5 5 0- (01'Arvil c l , z4W DATE APPROVED '//L6 /0 / DATE REJECTED COMMENTS' FOOD INSPECTOR -HEALTH DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED SEPTIC INSPECTOR -HEALTH DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED COMMENTS PUBLIC WORKS - SEWERIWATER CONNECTIO ,7-- ZO Y PERMIT FIRE DEPARTMENT��''V RECEIVED BY BUILDING INSPECTOR DATE Revised 9197 jm X ' TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER BUILDING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION TO CONSTRUCT REPAIR, RENOVATE, CHANGE THE USE OR OCCUPANCY OF, OR I)EMOLISf1 kNY BUILDING OTHER THAN A ONE OR TWO FAMILY DWELLING SCCtlOII for Official Use UIII � ":'��� ��, .`a r .* .x�� .�,.�m r :"•b�; BUILDING PERNUT NUMBER: CONTROL DATE ISSUED: MSTRUCTM SIGNATURE: Y311ol Buildin Commissioner/I or of Buildings Date —+ > E � 0% . 1.1 Property Address: 1.2 Assessors Map and Parcel Number. —7 Map Number N@hber �Sb ln1 c�I`FN,•� Avsv� � oh�-N 1A w dnv�r r IA''P� o 18`-F S Parcel 1.3 Zoning Information: 1.4 Property Dimensions: PpST(V-3 �,A0, — �_NwST1--.1 Zoning District Proposed Use Lot Area Frontage R 1.6 BUILDING SETBACKS (ft) Front Yard Side Yard Rear Yard Required Provide Required Provided Required Provided X � 1.7 Water Sapy14 G.L.C.40. § 54) 1.5. Flood Zone Information: Zone�t�1 Oatsrde Flood lane ❑ 1.8 Sewyge Disposal System: Municipal Public I Prk ate ❑ On Site Disposal System ❑ 2.1 Owner of Record; /• Name (Print) ,' Address for Simce:a Signature ] r. . W?. ;.�t TeIePhorie ' 2.2 Authorized Agent Name Print . , . ! ` 1 'Address for St -vice: Signature Telephone 3.1 Licensed Construction Supervisor - Not Applicable ❑ Z r''1 vZ '1 GS DCDQ-3 4— Address - License Number 2 0 Mr_V_)Q ' Z ?3 • l3 Licen Co c so Expiration, Date SOL) Sign re Telephone 3.2 Registered Home Improvetent Contractor Not Applicable ❑ Company Name', Registration Number Address Expiration Date Signature Telephone S.. r Z 0 V" 0 D M ,0 M /X .Z 0 .Z M 90 0 n r v M r r ZZ Q I, (nJai5mRh62 gat-Uwo of 7ryo 6,va Lo as Owner/Authorized Agent Hereby declare that the statements and information on the foregoing application are true and accurate, to the best of my knowledge and belief. Signed under the pains and pep of per O Print me Signa of Owner/Agent Date Kh Item Estimated Cost (Dollars) to be � :. applicant t k 5 Completed by `{ d�'�.+,����k4 � permit Y,r,`3t k n�' .ate S• 1. Building(a) Building Permit Fee -3 Multiplier 2 Electrical (b) Estimated Total Cost of 7— t d b Construction from (6) 3 Plumbing �, r1l If Building Permit fee tat X @l 4 Mechanical (HVAC) 5 Fire Protection j QOO U 6 Total (1+2+3+4+5) 0-7 95 oa Check Number �33tfi 51Y ..! �i'l� 7'{ Y�� •J ty"YJ,t.' •l)t �(� :G? r 2':p 74�-. .aIht, rt x 5t,. t{h` c.. 2'£Ms } '. y £,+�Y Pu "F�a. Yi" o T` Sa' u �7. �4 �$� �4'��S 'ey ✓�:., \ r4 i'�J x N r'�;. i...�5h t. :��,,, Y,.r•: yW .:� {r YC':, � ,{s � ��... .f l`�. 5f'>-kY Xt•1 �7 t ti3t k ��i5� £ ✓"S5 +iirY i ) y t.•,� A5 MAN n ,c- ..den,.. .-.T2.'ti �y. {%fn t7.� NO. OF STORIES SIZE BASEMENT OR SLAB SIZE OF FLOOR TIMBERS lST 2ND 3RD SPAN DEMENSIONS OF SILLS DEMENSIONS OF POSTS DIMENSIONS OF GIRDERS HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION THICKNESS SIZE OF FOOTING X MATERIAL OF CHIMNEY IS BUILDING ON SOLID OR FILLED LAND IS BUILDING CONNECTED TO NATURAL GAS LINE „a' i$ i.1C 4 � ='�T4 �M, '���K �•4, i�L �,'� y. %^�YiY S'.#+ y4' Y i�� �3 �xs' .,`v C'4 -2r`.: e�. _�-: .S",�.... W...N a .h`YdYe -!f 0 Ik. 0 Workers Compensation Insurance affidavit must be completed and submitted with this application. Failure to provide this affidavit will result in the denial of the issuance of the building permit. Signed affidavit Attached Yea .......❑ No ....... ❑ SECTIOx S - P)C;4I4iAI.1aOG +�UCTTtI<x R'V11+1riS F4$ IMM JOS, Alb iiMug tl` Tt� CUNSTR1fJCTIfiN CY3)1TRd ' tT TC►' GMR 11ti (�CCii�I 14+�i 5,11 id GF C3F N L SLI? $- P 5.1 Registered Architect: ,. . E D q qG'y ren n iTU-CTS n� '- f l 1 ass a �U, Stk �< 1. • "o<< �5 Q�� Name: fn iu 'Q o ¢ -+ r. o No. 9661 O J Address y fA1 7� OF M ASSP L 12-7 IbICL�Pz-J � b � � �/ ,5 � Signa Telephone }3.2 Re�iskat,ed;Pr�►1essi+�ta��>lt�s� L , W�1 oS� �1n1 n7�,r Structural Engineer Area of Responsibility Name: j� V- 1 `I4 • 14N612 01'Z n.3008 Registration Number 06/30/02 A s- V A0,O Expiration Date Si ature Total L#asoN $�Ntct�Y INS GN2t Q► R. L mor i c�r� Name: 1 (/C �[��/ S -r `. 150 41wmD 6 WIJ6 RegistrationNumber Addr q- 363-2.621 61-3o102— Expiration Date Signa a Telephone lM� �►NK� (�,r C ..aALO L, R w KUE r �I�EGT�LI G4 L of Responsibility Name rArea Old LtN� P.-dlkD, S�irTE tSo 3$ (51 Registration Number Address 13 - 3 fd3 • 621 6110102 - Expiration Date Signature Telephone Area of Responsibility` � ' Registration Number Expiration Date Name Address Signature Telephone 1 "40 C -t' LUyX �QV-tjPA,,)q S Not Applicable ❑ Company Name: Pv 0� l d .X �l l C� Z DCj Responsible in Charge of Construction t5 New Construction ❑ Accessory Bldg. ❑ Existing Building 9' I Repair(s) ❑ Demolition ❑ 1 Other ❑ Specify Alterations(s) LW Addition Brief Description of Proposed Work: VK(5 �- Ufa 4 vvU i s L' BUILDING AREA EXISTING if applicable) PROPOSED Number of Floors or Stories Include Basement levels e., Floor Area per Floorsf) `L Total Areas 9 3 5 8 `2 Total Height ftZ $ - (o u Independent Structural ER&eenng Structural Peer Review Required Yes ❑ No SECTION 10a Owner Authorization - TO BE COMPLETED WHEN OWNERS AGENT OR CONTRACTOR APPLIES FOR BUILDING PERMIT -S*'� ,as Owner of the subject property Hereby authorize �f �` '"�"-' —C -`t- ccf P to act on My behalf, in all matters relative two work authorized by this building permit application "� .'�( i -A, 4 RP.el �-y`TirliSt Signature of Owner To" v, p. OW 5 I., J t(-- , -X u117-0 1 6 Da USE GROUP Check as applicable) CONSTRUCTION TYPE A Assembly ❑ A-1 ❑ A4 ❑ A-2 ❑ A-3 A-5 ❑ ❑ IA 113 ❑ ❑ B Business ❑ 2A 213 2C ❑ ❑ C Educational ❑ F Factory ❑ F-1 ❑ F-2 ❑ H High Hazard ❑ 3A 3B ❑ ❑ IInstitutional ❑ I-1 ❑ I-2 ❑ I-3 ❑ M Mercantile Rr 4 ❑ R residential ❑ R-1 ❑ R-2 ❑ R-3 ❑ 5A 5B ❑ ❑ S Storage ❑ S-1 ❑ S-2 ❑ U Utility M Mixed Use S Special Use ❑ ❑ ❑ Specify: Specify: Specify: COMPLETE THIS SECTION IF EXISTING BUILDING UNDERGOING RENOVATIONS, ADDITIONS AND OR CHANGE IN USE Existing Use Group: Existing Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: v iTi LF Proposed Use Group: Proposed Hazard Index 780 CMR 34: BUILDING AREA EXISTING if applicable) PROPOSED Number of Floors or Stories Include Basement levels e., Floor Area per Floorsf) `L Total Areas 9 3 5 8 `2 Total Height ftZ $ - (o u Independent Structural ER&eenng Structural Peer Review Required Yes ❑ No SECTION 10a Owner Authorization - TO BE COMPLETED WHEN OWNERS AGENT OR CONTRACTOR APPLIES FOR BUILDING PERMIT -S*'� ,as Owner of the subject property Hereby authorize �f �` '"�"-' —C -`t- ccf P to act on My behalf, in all matters relative two work authorized by this building permit application "� .'�( i -A, 4 RP.el �-y`TirliSt Signature of Owner To" v, p. OW 5 I., J t(-- , -X u117-0 1 6 Da I, 11104IZksTm onA= 6F Drr+llo 6L' Co as Owner/Authorized Agent Hereby declare that the statements and information on the foregoing application are true and accurate, to the best of my knowledge and belief. Signed under the pains and pep of per /14ki S O Print me Signa of Owner/Agent Date Item Estimated Cost (Dollars) to be n�3 F��! Completed by applicant Yi1i� permit , 1. Building (a) Building Permit Fee Multiplier 2 Electrical (b) Estimated Total Cost of 17 Construction from (6) 3 Plumbing �, �✓ Building Permit fee (a) X (b) 4 Mechanical (HVAC) 5 Fire Protection ©OQ U 6 Total (1+2+3+4+5)0 � Check Number [��fV.�s�ksi�l r4 `+a,-atd.J �r pm" 5t 1.:.4' felNI- rid L :..; )f `� C 1 00 1fF,ik.�y,�'T 'J, ;,4. it <.;;�et j".... {.,; .:fU�` fl" yk ref- %'S,-`.�I�/a+31, {�'i)4 '�{�fi,..� „(h i . .W 'fid].+{'.#? .:. �hY b,/ 4h�ry 4 -Y ig 47^� Yh7-ma",F o,1�. is '1STt 1Jf k 2 1 G Y 11 i i,,, 1t" ,,., Iw,tl9l-'��...r.�' ..+.fes A� '7,x4,k u t�'. NO. OF STORIES SIZE BASEMENT OR SLAB SIZE OF FLOOR TIMBERS 1ST 2ND 3RD SPAN DEMENSIONS OF SILLS DEMENSIONS OF POSTS DIMENSIONS OF GIRDERS HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION THICKNESS SIZE OF FOOTING X MATERIAL OF CHIMNEY IS BUILDING ON SOLID OR FILLED LAND IS BUILDING CONNECTED TO NATURAL GAS LINE ON TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER BUILDING DEPARTMENT APPLICATION TO CONSTRUCT REPAIR, RENOVATE, CHANGE THE USE OR OCCUPANCY OF, OR DEMOLISO kNY BUILDING OTHER THAN A ONE OR TWO FAMILY DWELLING s Section for Official use Only WELDING PERMIT NUMBER:COWROL DATE ISSUED: 60 -31. CaSTRUCTION 3u SIGNATURE: —)7tl� Buildin-& Comnussioner/lUpwor of BmIdings Date 1.2 Assessors Map and Parcel Number 1.1 Property Address: �,OA L :2-7 Map Number A t� 0A A.V,3 -Ao� 1 0451" Parcel Nhm—ber 1.3 Zoning Information: 1.4 Property Dimensions: DQS T (V--3 I'A P, k -L- �!>T I v---, ZoningDistrict Proposed Use -s— Lot Area (sf) Frontage Cf L) 1.6 WELDING SETBACKS (ft) Front Yard Side Yard Rear Yard Required Provide Required Provided Re red Provided 1.7 Water S G.L.C.40. 54) trivw 1.5. Flood Zone Information. Zone 04�;noCa Outside 1.9 s Disposal System: Public [:7 0 Flood Zone 0 _�� Municipal On Site Disposal System 0 2.1 Owner of Retprd,: Dl�T6 NameA1C (Print) ,-,,..,'Address for S&vice:- 7 A 2.2 Authorized Agent Name Print "Address for S&vice: Signature Telephone 7"TIN U!, 3.1 ticensed Construction Supervisor Not Applicable 0 Address License Number Licen Co c SO' Expiration, Date e7la�-a) 191 qS00 Sign re Telephone 3.2 Registered Home Improvetent Contractor Not Applicable 0 Company Name'. Registration Number Address Expiration Date Signature Telephone 7_3� -o FORM U - LOT RELEASE FORM INSTRUCTIONS: This form is used to verify that all necessary approvals/permits from Boards and Departments having jurisdiction have been obtained. This does not relieve the applicant and/or landowner from compliance with any applicable or requirements. *****************************APPLICANT FILLS OUT THIS SECTION*********************** APPLICANT I /Y) 6 d �� �vS��vG7l oAl LOCATION: Assessor's Map Number SUBDIVISION STREET k 14 PHONE/ PARCEL o2 % LOT (S) ST. NUMBER356 ***********OFFICIAL USE RECOMMENDATIONS OF TOWN AGENTS: CONSERVATION ADMINISTRATOR DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED COMMENTS TOWN PLANNER DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED COMMENTS FOOD INSPECTOR -HEALTH DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED SEPTIC INSPECTOR -HEALTH DATE APPROVED DATE REJECTED COMMENTS PUBLIC WORKS - SEWERIWATER CONNECTIONS DRIVEVMY FIRE DEPARTMENT RECEIVED BY BUILDING INSPECTOR DATE Revised 9197 jm e ra�noncueallj o/'lrltt/ 8OARD OF BUILDING REGULATIONS. License: CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISO Number: CS R ' + 015975 t Birthdate: 01/15/1945 i ] .., �... RExpires: 01/15/2002 Tr. no: i Restricted To: 00 f 5342 1 MARSHALL A CONNOLLY f 26 ANTHONY ST BERKLEY, MA 02779 Administrator ., 07/30/2001 14:13 262-377-4868 AMBROSE E146INEERI14G PAGE 02 y � ALMBROSE ENGINEERING, INC. W67 N222 Evergreen Blvd, Suite 106 Cedarburg, W1 53012 262/377-7602 FAX 262/377-4868 email ambeng@.ambeng.com .iuly 30, 2001 Scott Dinrio Construction 75 Chapman Street Providence, 8102905 Re: Proposed Kohl's Store This letter is to confirm we are in =eipt of the Construction Control form. Unfortunately the Engineer of Record, Mr. Robert M. Steckel, is on vacation this week and unable to complete and stamp the form. When Mr. Steckel returns on Monday, August 6 the forth will be completed and promptly forwarded to you for your use. Sincerely, Ambrose Engineering, Inc. Matthew Butler Engineer In Training >4 OFFICE OF BUILDING INSPECTOR •�'�' `' TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER C NSTRUCTION CONTROL w PROJECT NUMBER: A e A PROJECT PROJECT LOCATION: Ic — NAME OF BUILDING: NATURE OF PROJECT _g r . sb IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE� 1116 OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE REGISTRATION N BEING A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERIARCHITECH HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I CAI HAVE PREPARED OR DIRECTLY SUPERVISED THE PREPARATION OF ALL DESIGN PLAN » COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONCERNING: o ISTEpE� SS�ONAI EMD PROJECT ARCHITECTURAL a STRUCTURAL. 0 MECHANICAL, `7 07 ENTIRE FIRE PROTECTION Q ELECTRICAL 0 OTHER (SPECIFY) FOR THE ABOVE NAMED PROJECT AND THAT. TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEGE, SUCH PLANS. COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS MEET THE APPUCABLE PROVISION OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE, ALL ACCEPTABLE ENGINEERING PRATICES. AND APPLICABLE LAWS AND ORDINANCES FOR THE PROPOSED USE AND OCCUPANCY. 1 FURTHER CERTIFY THAT I SHALL PERFORM THE NECESSARY PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AND B EPRESENT ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE ON A REGULAR AND PERIODIC BASIS TO DETERMINE THAT THE PERMIT D SHALL BE REISPONS16LEIN ORDANCE WITH THE OR THE FOLLOWING AS SPECIFIED N SECTION 116.0 CUMENTS APPROVED FOR THE BUILDNG PE 1. Review, for conformance to the design concept, strop drawings, samples and other submittals which are submitted by the contractor in accordance with the requirements of the construction documents. 2. Review and approval of the quality control procedures for all code -required controlled materials: 3. Be presert'ad intervals appropriate tthe work and =o determine, 'n arena} if tof construction to he wo�'Ic is being withethe progress and quality of the performed in a manner consistent with the construction documents.. ORT PURSUANT TOS PERT PERTINENT COMMENTS TO THE NORTH ANDOVER BUILDITION 116.2.2 1 SHALL SUBMIT WEEKLY, A PROGRESS NGPINSPECTOR. TOGETHER WITH UPON COMPLETION SUBMIT REPORT A COMPLETION AND READINESS OF THE PROJECT S TO SATISFACTORY 9 9A BS , IBE WORM TO BEFORE ME THIS 2? ._DAY OF w=Y 20 MY COMMISSION IRE$ 1k. TAYLOR Y us C Notary Public • State of Kansas My AppL Expires 2` K Id 099 I K 10 1 ON XdA 00 NO I 10ANISNOO 03W10 IU -L6- OFFICE OF BUILDING INSPECTOR TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER CONSTRUCTION CONTROL PROJECT NUMBER: d A A PROJECT PROJECT LOCATION: Ic- NAME OF BUILDING: NATURE OF PROJECT - r,-(,�t 00 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 1113 OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING ODE, l�rN k EIr REGISTRATION NO. Of BEING A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEEWARCHITECH HEREBY CERTIFY THAT HAVE PREPARED OR DIRECTLY SUPERVISED THE PREPARATION OF ALL DESIGN PLAIN COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONCERNING: A a ENTIRE PROJECT 0 ARCHITECTURAL 0 STRUCTURAL. 0 MECHANICAL a FIRE PROTECTION Q ELECTRICAL OTHER (SPECIFY) FOR THE ABOVE NAMED PROJECT AND THAT. To THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEGE, SUCH PLANS. COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS MEET THE APPLICABLE= PROVISION OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE, ALL ACCEPTABLE ENGINEERING PRATICES_ AND APPLICABLE LAWS AND ORDINANCES FOR THE PROPOSED USE AND OCCUPANCY. I FURTHER CERTIFY THAT I SHALL PERFORM THE NECESSARY PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AND B EPRESENT ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE ON A REGULAR AND PERIODIC BASIS TO DETERMINE THAT THE WORK IS PROCEEEDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DOCUMENTS APPROVED FOR THE BUILDING PERMIT AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 116.0 1. Review, for conformance to the design concept, shop drawings, samples and other submittals which are submitted by the contractor in accordance with the requirements of the construction documents. 2. Review and approval of the quality control procedures for all code -required controlled materials. 3. Be present -;g intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become, generally farniisar witWhe progress and quality of the work and to determine, in general, if the work is being performed in a manner consistent with the construction documents. PURSUANT TO SECTION 116.2.2 1 SHALL SUBMIT WEEKLY, A PROGRESS REPORT TOGETHER WITH PERTINENT COMMENTS TO THE NORTH ANDOVE=R BUILDING INSPECTOR. 381 17� UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, I SHALL. SUBMIT A FINAL REPORT AS TO THE SATISFACTORY COMPLETION AND READINESS OF THE PROJECT FO3RU PANCY. e ATURE D WORM TO BEFORE ME THIS DAY OFr;IBVISCED MY COMMISSION EXP ES7 �C. TAYLOR Notary Public - State of Kansa= My Appt. Expires M Id 6VSV t 8L I Ob I 'ON XVA 00 NO I10f1N1SN00 03W I o 1 -Lz-lnf 07/30/01 16:20 FAX 612 JUL-27-01 FRI 15:13 339 5088 RIS ARCHITECTS DIMEO CONSTRUCTION CO FAX NO, 14017614549 OFFICE OF BUILDINV lmcrr-%• 1 "" TOWN Of NORTH ANDOVER CONST UCl'IO�t CO TRO PROJECT NUMBER: $To PROJECT TITLE: �*" PROJECT LOCATION: � NAME OF NATURE OF IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 116 OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILD IINGG CODE, I, Greg or G. Hollenkamp REGISTRATION NO. HEREBY 7 THAT I BEING A REGISTERED pROFfrSS10NARNA ED THE REPARATION OF ALL Dir PLANS, HAVE PREPARED OR DIRECTLY SUPE COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONCERNING. ENTIRE PROJECT L�! n 0ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL p MECHANICAL a FIRE PROTECTION Q ELECTRICAL 0 OTHER (SPECIFY) la 002 F. 02 ID H PLANS, FOR THE ABOVE NAMED PROJECTIONS MEETT�TNE APPTO THE LICEST ABLE pROSION OF THE F My KNOWLEGE. CMASSACHUSETTS COMpUT'AT10NS AND SPEC►FICA STATE BUILDING CODE, ALL ACCEPTABLE ENGINEERING PRATICES. AND APPLICABLE LAWS AND ORDINANCES FOR THE PROPOSED USE AND OCCUPANCY, MINE THAT I FURTHER CERTIFY THAT 15I ALL- PE TE ON A R G l AR AND PEmO fkM THENECESSARY I� pRET E BUI NC3 TO .PRESENT ON THE CONSTRU DOCUMENTS APPROVED THE WORK IS PTtOCEEEDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PERMIT AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING AS SPECIFIED IN SECS su1bmitlal6 nce to the design concept, shop drawSngs� samples and 1. Review, for confom+n or In aceordanoe with the requlremer+� of t1*construction vuhicx► are submitted by'the crantm� documents, -_. __ ro nate to the stage of conthiCtlOn to become, e.wogenerk is being g, ge present at Intervals app D to determine, in general, If the work Is being withethe Progress and quality of the work and doc�ume.�nts�. performed in a manner consists m th the constn q p R>:SS REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 116.2.2 I SHALLSUBMIT R' ANDOVER BUILDING INSPECTOR. T0C3ETHER WITH PERTINENT COMMENTS TO THE NO UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, I SHALL SUBMIT A 1:1 NAL REPORT AS T SATISFACTORY COMPLETION AND READINESS OF THE PROJECT FOR OC 5 E SUBS BED AND SWORM TO BEFORE ME THIS p* pAY OF p.. 111111111111 dill'• Y if - NO UBLIC SUSAN K. TROUSDALE NOTARY PUBLIC-IANNE , My Gmmiaian Ex�Iroa Jan. al, 2005. July 3, 2001 Town of North Andover Attn: Mr. D. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 RE: Certificate(s) of Insurance Dimeo Construction Co. To Whom It May Concern: Aon Risk Services Construction Servicer Group On behalf of Dimeo Construction Co., enclosed please find the certificate(s) of insurance evidencing coverage for the December 31, 2000 to December 31, 2001 term, per your request. We trust all to be in order. If you should have any questions, please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely, Leah M. Hatch Administrative Assistant Construction Services Group cc: Mr. Scott Eaton, Dimeo Construction Co. Ms. Judy Barrett, Travelers Indemnity Co. of IL Charter Oak Fire Insurance Co. Enclosures Aon Risk Servicer, Inc. of Massachusetts 99 High Street • Boston, Massachusetts 02110 • tel: (617) 482-3100 • fax: (617) 457-7777 .. `m DATE ACORDTM CERT�'CAT O,ABILITYTSUEANCE a w... , r 07/03/01 . _.. PRODUCER s THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Aon Risk Services, Inc. of Massachusetts ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. 99 High Street THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE Boston MA 02110 USA COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED INSURER A: Travelers Indemnity Co. of IL Dimeo Construction Company 75 Chapman Street INSURER B: Charter Oak Fire Ins Co INSURER C: Providence RI 02905 USA INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERA6ES;EThisCer#i icaYeeris not mtendedata slJeclfy all en iorsements',.covera es,, terms eon'ditions and exclusions of the pofici6sihown.vu THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE(MM\DD\YY) POLICY EXPIRATION DATE(MWDD\YY) LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY C0-1071)1181 Dimeo General Liab. 12/31/00 12/31/01 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE(Anv one fire) $300,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE X❑ OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $5,000 PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000 PRO- POLICY � JECr II LOC A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO 810-107D117A Automobile Liability 12/31/00 12/31/01 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS ( Per person) BODILY INJURY HIRED AUTOS NON OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE (Peracciderd) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OTHERTHAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG A EXCESS LIABILITY � X OCCUR I I CLAIMS MADE 1:1 CUP-107D8108 Umbrella 12/31/00 12/31/01 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DEDUCTIBLE—i RETENTION $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY UB-107D1156 Dimeo Work ComP 12/31/00 12/31/01 X WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $500,000 E.L. DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $500,000 E.L.DISEASE-EAEMPLOYEE $500,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS Certificate holder is additional insured with respect to work performed by or on behalf of the named insured at Kohl's, North Andover. ERTIFICA -E HOL➢FR' ,; : CANCELLATIO T SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLI3D BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL Town of North Andover 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT. Attn: Mr. D. Robert Nicetta BUT FAILURE TO DO 80 SH POSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY Building Commissioner OF ANY KIND THUN I. 27 Charles Street North Andover MA 01845 USA AUTHORIZED�N] ACORD 25=S (7197) - w COIF RATION 198 Certificate No : 240000059138 Holder Idielrfifier : Kohl' SN.Andover a w cn cn w z w° U w o � ts a E a U Z o„ O C7 y = H w A w CD cm ° z Q o V� 9` uj z 02 o � C N C3 C-3 CL= cc ev m c v +•c••. •rO�„ p L CD CE 0 CLm L cps p Cm m c E y W m y r (� Q! 0.5 y C C ' 2 .J_m 0Cn yM o w O � Ey U m Nmo cm :tea►' comCD C/) I°f .==o cCM 0 W OA acr m 0 In w MJF y O L Al = cc .•No Z O M? p G cm c Cr: co C• C •C _ CL - 0 L — N F- m hoot•- z W � cc =0 � H •y a= m c Z � .E •y O CJ m O mg C CO) C. m '� O , S NON co = ` 1) O F•� ss +0.. CL.I..0 1 O co O ts Z o„ O o y = I CD cm 'E m m w co O O _0 C/) rk .0 O m W cr cr O G 0 �4 j O IE m W w CA C N -CJ CO cc cc 4 'v C C.O°r1i COD Z QOJ C) t� Ma Cc_ _ � h C Q cc C05 .� V e1 0 w Bergmeyer Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Field Observation Report To: Mr. Robert Nicetta, Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 28, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 0 1126. 10 Filed Observation Report of September 27 2001 Time of Visit: Weather: Trades Present: 9:30•AM :. Sunny, 60's " • 1� Demolition HVAC Roofing Masonry Electrical Carpentry s Work ongoing • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork (75% complete) • Shoring to remain for roof decking replacement • Floor slab removed for plumbing and electrical • Cutting new roof openings • Electricians pulling new wires above • New door opening in CMU exterior wall Work planned through next week • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork to c • Under slab plumbing and electrical • Setting of new footings at exterior and interior • New support for roof at bearing'line and new roG • New roof openings I OCT 2 2001 dec�,pILDING pEPT 126.1 M92801.6s0_fieldreport09.doc 10/05/01 16:52 FAX 6173386897 BERUEYER Bergmeyer Architecture & Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergrneyer.com FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER Job Number: 01126.11 Date: October 5, 2001 From: Holly Schufa 001 Re. Kohl's/North Andover Optional 350 Winthrop Ave. North Andover, MA Attn: Robert Nicetta Town of North Andover 978 688 9542 We are sendingyou attached, via Fax w/ Hard Copy to Follow 2 page(s) Pa es T e Number Date Description Note 1 B #10 10/3/01 Fead Observation Report 2 A Original For Approval l B Copy / Print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & Comment 4 E Electronic Media No Exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submittal Forward Revise & Resubmit 7 H Sample Rejected 8 p Other Other / See Remarks Below 9 If enclosures are not as noted kindly notify us at once. Remarks. Robert Please feel free to contact me if there are any questions. Thanks Holly The information contained herein and any attachments to this transmittal are intended for the exclusive use of the designated receipient(s) named above and may contain confidential or privileged information. If you are not the intended recipient, please notify Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 10/05/01 16:53 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER 1 002 w Bemmever Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Field Observation Report To: Mr. Robert Nicetta, Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: October 5, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 01126.11 Filed Observation Report of October 3, 2001 Time of Visit: 11:00 AM Weather: Sunny, 60's Trades Present: Excavation HVAC Roofing Masonry Electrical Carpentry Plumbing Roofing Work on ' • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls too roof decking • Completing installation of HVAC distribution ductwork (90% complete) • Shoring to remain for roof decking replacement • Installation of rough plumbing • Installation of roof curbs for RTU's • Electricians pulling new wires above (90% complete) • Forming new footings at exterior Work planned through next week • Installation of interior studding • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork to complete • Continue under slab plumbing and begin under slab electrical • Setting of new footings at interior • Pouring foundations at exterior • Electrical to start at interior walls • Begin structural work at interior bearing line and exterior • Replace damaged roofing system • Flashing at roof top curb openings to prep for RTU's 126.11r100301.1tso_fieidreporrl0.doc Field Observation Report Beramever To: Mr. Robert Nicetta, Building Commissioner North Andover, 1l A 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: October 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Kohl's store renovation Project No. 01126.11 Filed Observation Report of October 11, 2001 Time of Visit: 9:00 AM. ; Weather: Sunny, 50's. Work planned through next week • Continue installation of interior framing rt • 1 Insulating HVAC,distribution (cam a v e Begin under slab electrical work at floor boxe • Setting of new footings at interior OCj 1 5 2001 • Continue foundations at exterior, • Electrical to start at interior walls • Begin gas piping insulation on roof BU1LD1NG DEPT. • Begin sprinkler system for Zone 2 126.11 r101201.hs0_fieldreporr 11. doc Trades Present: HVAC Roofing Masonry Carpentry Electrical Fire Protection Architecture and Interiors Plumbing Structural Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Work ongoing g g Boston, MA 02210 • Installing rough interior framing (35%complete) Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 Insulating main distribution HVAC stem g on osystem www.bergmeyer.com • Construction of interior steel at bearing line Installation of rough plumbing and inspection complete to begin backitll • Installation of roof curbs for RTU's • Electricians pulling new wires above for rough electric (94% complete) • Forming and pouring new footings at exterior -two locations • Installation of sprinkler system at Zone 1 • Roofing insulation complete as per contract Work planned through next week • Continue installation of interior framing rt • 1 Insulating HVAC,distribution (cam a v e Begin under slab electrical work at floor boxe • Setting of new footings at interior OCj 1 5 2001 • Continue foundations at exterior, • Electrical to start at interior walls • Begin gas piping insulation on roof BU1LD1NG DEPT. • Begin sprinkler system for Zone 2 126.11 r101201.hs0_fieldreporr 11. doc 10/12/01 13:53 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Architecture 6c Interiors BergmeyerAssoclates, Inc. 286 Congress 5trea Boston. MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergincycr.com FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER Q001 job Number. 01126.11 Rx• Kohrs/Nonh Andover Optional 350 Winthrop Ave - Date: October 12, 2001 North Andover, MA From: Holly Schfua Attw Robert neetta Town of North Andover 978 688 9542 We are sending you attached, via Fax w/ Hard Copy to Follow 2 page(s) Pam T e Number Dare Description Note 1 B - 10/12/01 Feild Observation Report 2 A Original For Approval 1 B Copy / print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & CornineAC 4 E ) Jcctronic Media No Exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submittal Forward Revise & Resubmit 7 H Sample Rejected 8 O Other Other / See Remarks Bdo- 9 If endesura are not as noted, kindly notify ru ar once. Remarks. Robert Please contact me if you have any questions thanks Holly The information contained herein and any attachments to this rranemittal are intended for the exclusive use of the designated reccipient(s) named above and may contain confidendal or privileged information. If you are nor the intended recipient, please xiotify Bergmeycr Associates, Inc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 10/12/01 13:33 FAX 6173386897 B£RGMEYER Bergmeyer Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congms Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www,bargm2yer.,em Field Obscryation Report To: Mr. Robert Nicerta, Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Rcgisuadon No. 6546 Date: Ocrober 12, 2001 Rc: 350 Winthrop Avenue Kohl's store renovation Project No. 01126.11 Filed Observation Report of October 11, 2001 Time of Visit: 9:00 AM Weather: Sunny, 50's Trades Present: HVAC Roofing Masonry Carpentry Electrical Fire Protection Plumbing Structural Work one ink • Installing rough interior framing (35%complete) • Insulating main distribution of HVAC system • Construction of interior steel at bearing line • Installation of rough plumbing and inspection complete to begin backfill • Installation of roof curbs for RTU's • tlecrricians pulling new wires above for rough electric (94% complete) • Forming and pouring new footings at cxcerior-two locarions • Installation of sprinkler system at Zonc 1 • Roofing insulation complete as per contract Work planned rhrough next week • Continue installarion of interior framing • Insulating HVAC distribution • Begin under slab electrical work ar floor boxes • Setting of new footings at interior • Continue foundations ai exterior • Flecrrict to sutrr at interior walls • Begin gas piping insulation on roof Begin sprinkler systern for Zone 2 @1002 126.1 1 r101201 JLO _fieldteporr1 l.dM Bergmeyer Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com kaz'S R P FiZ� Field Observation Report To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 20, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Pro)ect No. 01126.10 Filed Observation Report of September 20,_ 2001 Time of Visit: 10:30 AM Weather: Cloudy, 60's Trades Present: Demolition Excavation HVAC Roofing Masonry Concrete Electrical Work ongoing • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Removal of CMU wall • Floor slab removal for plumbing line • Infrared testing of roofing conditions • Removal of roof top units (7) • Excavation at front of site for foundation formwork Work planned through next week • Installation of -studding and insulation at exterior • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Under slab plumbing • Setting of new footings at exterior and interior • Prep electrical work • New support for roof at bearing line �Ec # ME i� JEP „I 3' BUILDING QE 126.1 09 Aoc 09/21/01 15:00 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEY'BR Field 06scrvadov Report Beramever To: Mr. Robert Nicena Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Iialine MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: Scptcmbcr 20, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avcnue Storc Renovation Project No. 011'6.10 Fiecd Observation Report of September 20, 2001 Time of Visic: 10:30 AM Weather: Cloudy, 60's Trades Present: Demolition Work planned through next week • Installation of scudding and insulation at rxcerior walls • lustallatioa of HVAC distribution ductwork • Under slab plumbing • Setting of new footings at elccerior and interior • Pecp electrical work • New support for roof at bearing line Q002 126.1 oc092001.ibo_heldrel,orcOB.doc Excavation HVAC Architccrurc and interiors Roofing Bergaieyer Associates, Inc. Masonry 286 Congress Street Concrecc Boston, MA 02210 Phonc 617 542 1.021 Electrical Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmcycr.com Work ongoit1T • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Rcmoval of CMU wall • Floor slab removal for plumbing line • Infrared testing of roofing conditions • Removal of roof top unirS (7) • Excavation at front of site for foundation formwork Work planned through next week • Installation of scudding and insulation at rxcerior walls • lustallatioa of HVAC distribution ductwork • Under slab plumbing • Setting of new footings at elccerior and interior • Pecp electrical work • New support for roof at bearing line Q002 126.1 oc092001.ibo_heldrel,orcOB.doc Q9/21/01 15:00 FAX 6173386897 BERGME17ER Bergmeyer Architecture & Interiors BergmeyerAssociates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER Job Number.• 01126.10 Date• September 21, 2001 From: Holly Schufa Re,- Kohl's/North Andover North. Andover, MA Q001 Atte: Robert Nicena Town of North Andover 978.688.9542 We are sending you amched, via Fax w/ hard Copy to Follow 2 page(s) Pages "I 1e .Number Date Descri cion Note 1 B 08 9/20/01 Feild Ob,,-ervacion Report 2 A Original For Approval 1 B Copy / Print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & Comment 4 E Electronic Media No exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submittal Forward Revise & Resu6mic 7 H Sample Rejexted 8 O Other Other / See Remarks Below 9 If enclosures are not as noteg kingly Wooly as at once. Remarks; Roberc Please contact me if you have any questions regarding chis report_ Thanks Holly The informarion contained herein and any arrachmencc to chis transmittal are intended for the exclusive use of the designated reccipient(s) named above and may contain confidential or privileged information. if you are not the untended recipient, please notify Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 09/13/01 14:54 FAX 6173386897 BERGME17ER Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr_ Robert Nicerm Building Commissioner North Andovcr, MA 0184 5 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch, Registration No. 6546 Datc: September 13, 2001 Rc: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No_ 0 1126. 10 Filed Observation Deport of September 13, 2001 Time of Visit: 11 AM Weather: Fair, 60's Trades Precenc None (no work this day) Architecrure and Interiors Bergn,eyer Assoaatrs, Inc. Work ongoing: 266 Cong= Surat Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls fax 617 338 6697 Vmmbergmeyercom • Installation of HVAC distributrion ductwork • Shoring of roof structure at CMU wall to be removed • Floor slab removal for plumbing line • Removal of exterior signage Work planned ch rough next week— • Installation of studding and insulation at exrcnor walls • Inscallation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Shoring of roof structure and removal of CMU wall. • Undcr slab plumbing • Exc wadon and setting of new footings at exterior and interior 0003/003 126.10r091201 Jb0_Fic1d=porto7.doc 09/13/01 14:54 FAX 6173386897 BERGb1EYER Bergmever Architecture and Interiors BergateyerAssociates, Inc, 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Rhone 617 5421025 Fax 617 338 6997 www.bergmeyer.com September 13, 2001 Mr. Robert Nicerra Building Commissioner North Andover, Massachusetts 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 Re: 350 Winthrop Street Store Renovation Field Observation Report Project No. 0 1126. 10 Dear Mr. Nicetta: Q002/003 We have attac:hcd our Feld report for Seprcmbcr t 3, 2001 to this letter. The work includes renovations to the exterior enclosure systems, building utility systems, fire protection systems and interior finish systems. Thcrc arc minor modifications to the steel frame of the building. Please let us know if the format for these field reports is adequate for your purposes. We will keep you up to dare on the project. Please concacc us if you have any questions. V trulyyours, G 14D) Ira M. Baline, RA Senior Associate 126.1OL091301.ib1_coverfWcLdoc 09/13/01 14:54 FAX 6173386897 • Architecture & Interiors BergmeyerAssociates, Inc. 286 Congreu Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 Fax 617 338 6897 www bcrpucm com BERGMEYER FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER Job Number' 01126.10 Date. Septernber 13, 2001 From: Holly Schufa Re.- Kohl's/North Andover Noah Andover, MA la 001/003 Auw Robert Nicctra Town of North Andover 978.698.9542 We are scn&g you a=ched, viaFax w/ Hard Copy to Follow 3 pages) Pa T Number Date Desai tion Note 2 B 9/13101 Feild Report 1 A Original ForApproval 1 B Copy/ Print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & Comment g E Flecnonic Mtdia No Exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submittal Forward Revise & Resubmit 7 H Sample Rejected 8 O Other Other ! See Remarks Below 9 If enclosures are not as noted kindly notify us ar once_ REmarks: Robert Please contact myself if you have any questions Thanks Holly SchuFa cc. Ira Baline The information contained herein and any artachutents to this transmittal are intended for the exclusive use of the designated rece;pient(s) named above and may contain confidential or privileged information. If you arc not the intended recipient, please notify Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 09/28/01 15:24 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Field Observation Report BerpMeVer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta, Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 28, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 0 1126. 10 Filed Observation Report of September 27, 2001 Time of Visit: 9:30 AM Weather: Sunny, 60's Trades Present: Demolition HVAC Roofing Architecture and Interiors Masonry Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. Electrical 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Carpentry Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Work ongoing • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork (75% complete) • Shoring to remain for roof decking replacement • Floor slab removed for plumbing and electrical • Cutting new roof openings • Electricians pulling new wires above • New door opening in CMU exterior wall Work planned through next week • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls to complete • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork to complete • Under slab plumbing and electrical • Setting of new footings at exterior and interior • New support for roof at bearing line and new roof decking • New roof openings Q002 126.10r092801.hs0_&e1dreporr09. doe 09/28/01 15:24 FAX 6173386897 Beronever Architecture & Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com BERGMEYER FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER job Number: 0 1126. 10 Date: September 28, 2001 From: Holly Schufa Re. • Kohl's/North Andover North Andover, MA 16 001 Attn: Robert Nicetta Town of North Andover 978.688.9542 We are sending you attached, via Fax w/ Hard Copp to Fohow 2 page(s) Pages T c Number Date Description Note 1 B 9/28/01 Feild Observation Report 2 A Original For Approval I B Copy / Print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & Comment 4 E Electronic Media No Exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submiccal Forward Revise & Resubmit 7 H Sample Rejected 8 O Other Other / See Remarks Below 9 If enclosures are not as notes; kindly notify us at once. Remarks: Robert, Attached please find the fells observation report for the week of Sept. 24th. Please call me if you hve any questions. Thanks. Holly The information contained herein and any attachments to this transmittal are intended for the exclusive use of the designated receipient(s) named above and may contain confidential or privileged information. If you are not the intended recipient, please notify Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 'iii `i iE - ., .r � •i r � -��- . _C\ Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Asbestos Notification Form — ANF -001 1544A Asbestos Asbestos Abatement Description 1. Facility location: FORMER BRADLEES DEPT STORE RTE 114 350 WINTHROP AVE ---- INSTgUCTIDNs Nam NOW N. ANDOVER, MA 01810 _ N/A 1. _ 1. All sections of this form -""- . Plus] be completed In order City/loan Zip code Telephone �^ locompiywilhllie _R_LLQQ$__SE Dopartment of What Is the norksfle location? building narm 1, wing, floor, room Environmental Protection nolificallon 2. Is the facility occupied? ❑Yes XJ No requirements of 310 CMR 7.15 (len working days 3. Asbestos Contractor: Prior notification is required akatemenl project); andnd the —A—BEST ABATEMENT, INC 24 KEEWAYDIN DRIVE the Department of Labor Name Address and Industries SALEM NH 03079 603/893-4696 notification requirements of 453 CMR 6.12 (fen days City/rotm zip code Telephone prior nolificallon is requiredol'ANrabalement AC/000197 WRITTEN project greater than three DULlcensel Contract T)pe(eriaenwfbag — fineaf or square fee0. 4. On -Site Project Supervisor/Foreman: 2. Submit Original Form In: ANGEL BURGOS AS31039 Commonwealth of Name DUCerrulcation Massachusetts 5. Project Monitor: Asbestos Program P.O. Box 120087 DAN SLOWE PM02480 Boston, MA Name DLICerlifIcationl 02112.0087 6. Asbestos Analytical Lab: 3. This term may be used ERS AA0001 22 for nottlyng lie U.S. Name — D11 CMilication/ Environmental Protection ��-- Agency Region Iof 7. Project start dat �enddals:specilicworkhours(Mon: Fri.) t.Sun.) yes asboslosdemoulion/pr, _ / pro. renovalionoperations 6 .�1• D ASBESTOS subject In NESNAPS (40 8. What type of project Is this? (arcle one): demolition repair nmovation orher(evlarn/ REMOVAL CFR Subpart M) rdoelowft00y, 9• Describe the asbestos abatementprocedurestobeused (circle); gtoreawg ,WCe rurlconralanen eleamp ` r encapsulation disposal only other (explain) Hdlrrcalime *, kF . I Ilaahns ,r+a f 10. Is the job being conducted E Indoors ❑ outdoors 7 Gu' 11. Total amount of each type of Asbestos_ Containing Materials (ACM) to be handled on pipes or ducts (Ilnear ft.) or other surfaces (square ft.) 16 8 , 00 Or to be removed, enclosed or encapsulated: lineadsquare feet boiler, breaching, duct, lank surface coatings. _/ thermal, solid core pipe insulation...... corrugated or laivnedpaperielpeinsulation:.. _/ insulating cement .................. sprayonfireproofing..................... _J fro"113plawcoatings.............. cloths, mveo fabrics ..................... _/ translteboardwdllboard .............—J other (please dasaibe)...............:.... 6R, 000 96,000 tile/mastic 12. Describe the decontamination systems) to be used: 72,000 ceiling tile 3 CHAMBER DECON 13. Describe the contalnerization/disposal.melhods to comply with 310 CMR 7.15 and 453 CMR 6.14(2)(8): All containerization/disposal methods will comply with 310 cmr 7.5 and 453 cmr 6-14"(2) (g.) 14. For Emergency Asbestos Abatement Operations, the DEP and DLI officials who evaluated the emergency. 1 Name oIDEPOfficial c Tile 3, s Dale olAuthorbation Waiter/ Name oIDU Official Tile Dare ofAuthodiation Waiver) 15. Do prevailing wage rales apply as per M.G.L. c. 149, § 26, 27, or27A - F to this project? ❑ Yes (}5 No NY. n/99 :(wlol 10 lual w0J)) 0 JeHo11S oU ❑ sa6 ❑ G (ss9l Jo shun enol to lepueplsel peldn000•JauMo'Allloglne Bulsnoq ledlolunw'loljjslp 'umol'A110) ldwexe eel u! ,. ;, ti^ epoa 1I uxo WIM 6LOE0 HN 'Wa`vs HAIHO NIQAVMNN?f 6Z auaydalel durluaselday 9696�£GB/E'09 __----`ONT--SNNWHSBati �LS�9=il- elplworprod G� oleo aupeudi p n awryluNd epeq pug 90pelMOU4 Jeq/slq 10 lseq eql of 1=10D pug On11$1 u01le31111ou $141 ul p9uleluo0 Uol►ewlolul 9411eg1 pue'911 HWO 016 Pug 00'9 NWO 99P's0lsegsylo uo0elnsdeau3 Jo luewulelUO3'lenow9d 041101 suolleln0ay sRosngoesseyV to 41leeMuowwoo 941 peel seg e0/e41e41'kn(1gd to sepleued egl lepun 'solels 6gelag peuillsJepun 041 auoydelel a1loadq uxnUkr� 0066—L99—PZL 199SL VC1 'lIVGJ,soZ)S WIPPV uvoa`I II3QNFl I 9 lL X09 L ' Q' 2I auleN tmy oweN uopeool -1163'%ittd�t'33�tt�9C1I?IN332i�' :011S lesOds10 JEUJJ '6 auoyda/al ap" d sosodind U0110111100'170 JO1 wJ01 sm As lsnw Jo1a WU03 :91011 Z un,ol/JtrO 00'81 rrajppy aweN HINOOISsuolJ s1n11ei u0161A10 SIM P/109 :(elgeolldde 11) JeuMo pue uopels JelsueJl esnl0y •E BUJ 4JIM Aldwoo lsnw suopelS auoydafal apmdil uxoJ/Alq J9/SuOJ1:SION rraippV aweN :ells lesodslP Null 01.011S eBelols Amodw91 /lenow91 W04 1911912W 91seM BUIUMUoo-solsegse 10lelJodsueJl •Z euoydepl apm dQ 969P—M/E09 6LOE0 -HN �W�ZyS na'PPy OWNONI SNSWNsttflti ssa9-ti :ells lesodsip leull of (l6essooeu 11) ells eBelols ielodwel of ells woJl lepolew elseM Bululeluoo-solsagse to J9lJodsueJl , •1 /esodsl0 pile uopeuodsueil solsagsd (stool! to N) j (11 bs)53,�W.LM.11hg1.9411o, 9zls e4l sl le4M •9 olrO•dx3 ikfl0d ivnsul •dwo3 uoyioM ajolorMao 1.019zjzL— LO .1 1 1 '00 30NvansNI 2lttIS auoydalal opoo dlloL�l19 snippy aweN JoloeJlUOD leJOU99 '9 opw d11 uxol/Al� OOOL—COL—ZLZ LSOES IM,,1srii 7a NOWONSW ssriPPV ameN 2IQ QOOMNOQIU OOOL LM 9SN ZZ0HU3A0 Atte :JeBeueW ails -u0 s,JeuMo s,Alllloel '6 auoydalal apoo dy uxoilk!0 OOOL=COL—ZLZ LSOES IM rSgUa MONSW rsalM aweN . '21Q QOOMa9cila OOOL LM 9SN SaHom Vaal S, ZHON :JouMo Anlloel •s ON IX sok ❑ Lssel to shun, 6 411M lellueplsel peidn000-JOUMO A11113e1041 sl 'Z az)Mds Iivjall SNilOiln . :4113e110 esn Jol1d Jo luanno •1 uolldlrssan Alypej N2 ry �" "A J 1 J 3 Date....... '...... ....`........� TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING This certifies that ... ?...s1 `r1 /! :.... has permission to perform .............1.2 ............................................ /1 wiring in the building of .........�.1. <.(f ..................:....... �. at ......... .............. ff 4: ................. ,North Andovv�err Mass. Fee.: !� ?.. GU Lic. No. /�-:...�...C/..... ... •.. 1 5! ,�........ ELLfCTRICAL INSPECTOR C } / Check # WHITE: Applicant CANARY: Building Dept. PINK: Treasurer >z The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Office Use Only Permit No. Department o Public Safety P f Occupancy & Fee Checked BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS 527 CMR 12:00 P ° 3/90 (leave blank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts -Electrical Code, 527 CMR 12:00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPEALL INFORMATION) Date June 15 2001 City or Town of N. Andover MA The undersigned applies for a permit to perform the electrical work described below. To the Inspector of Wires: Location (Street & Number) 350 Winthrop St Owner or Tenant Target Department Stores Owner's Address Same Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit: YesEl NoD (Check appropriate box) Purpose of Building Retail Store Utility Authorization No. Existing Service New Service Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Work Amps Volts Amps Volts Overhead UndgrndF1 Overhead Undgrndn Old Bradlees store Make Safe Demolition No. of Meters No. of Meters No. of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs Tota I No. of Transformers KVA Above In - No. of Lighting Fixtures Swimming Pool rnd rnd Generators KVA No. of Emergency Lighting Battery No. of Receptacle -Outlets No. of Oil Burners units No. of Switch Outlets No. of Gas Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Detection and No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Total tons Initiating Devices Heat Total Total No. of Disposals N0. of Pumps Tons KW No. of Sounding Devices No. of Self -Contained No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW Detection/Sounding Devices No. of Dryers Heating Devices KW Local Munlc. conn. Other No. of No. of Low Voltage No. of Water Heaters KW signs Ballasts wiring No. of Hydro Massage Tubs No. of Motors Total HP Other: I INSURANCE COVERAGE: Pursuant to the requirements of Massachusetts General Laws: YES ® NO B I have a current Liability Insurance Policy Including Completed Operations Coverage or its substantial equivalent. YES NO I have submitted valid proof of same to this office. If you have checked YES, please indicate the type of coverage by checking the appropriate box: INSURANCE Q BOND[] OTHERQ (Please specify) Expiration Date Estimated value of electrical work $ 1,500.00 Work to start 6118101 Inspection Date Requested: Rough Will Call Final Will Call Signed under the penalties of perjury: FIRM NAME Consolidated Electrical Services Licensee Stephen Bission Signature Address 661 Pleasant St LIC. No. A8639 LIC. NO. Business Telephone No. 781-769-7110 Alternate Telephone No. OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the Licensee does not havethe insurance coverage or it's substantial equivalent as required by Massachussets General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. ❑ Owner [:]Agent (check one) (Signature of Owner or Agent) Telephone No. Permit Fee $ 100.00 Consolidated Electrical Services a division of CONSTAR International, Inc. 661 Pleasant Street, Norwood, MA 02062-4603 Tel. (781) 769-7110 FAX(781)762-4508 WATTS (800) 628-7110 www.ces-electric.com TO V GENTLEMEN LCEUTOIN OF CTIRUSATTUR- DATE ATTENTION � f� RE WE ARE SENDING YOU y Attached ❑ Under separate cover via ❑ Shop drawings ❑ Prints ❑ Plans ❑ Copy of letter ❑ Change order ❑ ❑ Samples the following items: ❑ Specifications COPIES DATE NO. DESCRIPTION // - o z�� r THESE ARE TRANSMITTED as checked below: XFor approval ❑ Approved as submitted 4 ❑ For your use ❑ Approved as noted ❑ As requested ❑ Returned for corrections ❑ For review and comment ❑ ❑ FOR BIDS DUE 19 REMARKS COPY TO ❑ Resubmit copies for approval ❑ Submit copies for distribution ❑ Return corrected prints ❑ PRINTS RETURNED AFTER LOAN TO US SIGNED: �C%ffO "cAn.e.a= s AE-t1t<S- Ao# ,Ff of Laf eonf7aeto%" Date....... TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING This certifies that .........5' ........rT r ....... � --:....... . - ............ / ........ has pemission to perform ... Aj :q ..Q.Ft/. wiring In the building of ..................! .0.. .,.:........................................ at ....... '�4..�%.Ak,'.? .A!�.......... , North Andover, Mass. " Fee.... ..'' ^ Lic. No...,sR.31&.0 ............ .r.. ... ELECTRICAL INSPECTs,Y� Check p �� � � °� v � " 756 a CInwtonweaR of Maijackwattd Official Use Only alJcc �� c7 Permit No. 7 Sd�j ePartment o� }ire �eruiced BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS Occupancy and Fee Checked [Rev. 1/07] leave blank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO PERFORM ELECT CAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code (MEC527 CMR I .00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR PEALL Yf0 � TION)_ Date: � � (1 City or Town of: To the Inspector of Wires: By this application the undersigned gives notice of his or her intention to perform the electrical work described below. Location (Street & Number) 05-0 Owner or Tenant Telephone No. Owner's Address Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit? Yes E] No n (Check Appropriate Box) Purpose of Building Utility Authorization No. Existing Service Amps / Volts New Service Amps / Volts Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work: Overhead ❑ Undgrd ❑ Overhead ❑ Undgrd ►.���1���+ice o No. of Meters No. of Meters e C.0 f t d ,, t It t_.a. rrn S L4 STeln Completion of the following table may be waived by the Inspector of Wires. No. of Recessed Luminaires No. of Ceil: Susp. (Paddle) Fans o. o ota Transformers KVA No. of Luminaire Outlets No. of Hot Tubs Generators KVA No. of Luminaires Swimming Pool Above ❑n- ❑ rnd. arnd. o. o Emergency Lighting Battery Units No. of Receptacle Outlets No. of Oil Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Switches No. of Cas Burners of Detection an o. Initiating Devices No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. TotalNo. Tonnss of AlertingDevices No. of Waste Disposers eat PumpNumber., Totals: Foris I KW No. of Self -Contained Detection/Alertin Devices No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW Local Muntci al ❑Other onnec t of Dryers Heating Appliances KW riy Sstems:No. uE uivalent/ No. o ater KW Heaters o. o o. o Signs Ballasts Data Wiring: No. of Devices or E uivalent No. Hydromassage Bathtubs No. of Motors Total HP a ecornmuwcaic Wtrmg: No. of Devices or E uivalent OTHER: ag— Attach additional detail if desired, or as required by the Inspector of Wires. Estimated Value of Electrical Work: �' (When required by municipal policy.) Work to Start: Inspections to be requested in accordance with MEC Rule 10, and upon completion. INSURANCE COVERA E: Unless waived by the owner, no permit for the performance of electrical work may issue unless the licensee provides proof of liability insurance including "completed operation" coverage or its substantial equivalent. The undersigned certifies that such coverage is in force, and has exhibited proof of same to the permit issuing office. CHECK ONE: INSURANCE ® BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Specify:) 1 certify, under the pains andpena/ties ofperjury, that the information on this application is true and complete. FIRM NAME: Avlb-T S2CUY`1'rN ScrV( , _A c ! A i7 LIC. NO.: 15 33'L Licensee: "tchae—/ Signature2"_L �,UL(I(t6.('/1 LIC. NO.: a 3 i0 (Ifopplicable. enter "exempt" in the license num er line.) "�`�— Bus. Tel. No.: Address: 1 rQ I? L / tVrG'�1 �_ % /�IS , +UH 0..3049 Alt. Tel. No. *Per M.G.L. c. 147, s. 57-61, security work requires Department of Public Safety "S" License: Lic. No. G oft /Srj OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the Licensee does not have the liability insurance coverage normally required by law. By my signature below, I hereby waive this requirement. I am the (check one) ❑ owner ❑ owner's agent. Owner/Agent D -f Signature Telephone No.PERMIT FEE. S plEALTH pF' 'pSSACHUSETTS .. OF ELECTRICIANS REGISTERED SYSTEM TECHNICIAN ISSUES THIS LICENSE TO MICHAEL -P MFSSERVILLE 25 SANBORN STREET LAWRENCE MA 01843--1221 2310 D 07/31/07 952076 a1 b- 2 7- a - DE ARI1yENT OF HUC SAFETY Uomse: SEC SYS CERT. Cl-EARANCE Number: SS CC 001596 g,thd2ft: QSM1962 Ezp'ees: 0920/2007 Tr. no: 73.0 Restricted: 00 MICHAEL P MISSERVILLE .. I 25 SANBORN ST LAWRENCE, MA 01843 Commissioner b Submittal for the FIRE ALARM SYSTEM for Kohl's Department Store North Andover, MA ...................... AFA Massachusetts, Inc. Subsidiary of AFA Protective Systems, Inc. 200 High Street Boston, Massachusetts 02110 License #I 379C SINCE 1873 ............................. Fire, Burglary, CCN, Access Control www. a faprotectivesystems. com 617.772.5900 Fax 617.772.5923 Robert M. Hill Commercial Systems Consultant AFA Massachusetts, Inc. Subsidiary of AFA Prolective Systems, Inc. 200 High Street Boston, Massachusetts 02110 Lic. # 1547C 617.772.5900 Ext. 245 Fax 617.772.5923 Mobile 617.593.2443 email: rhill@afap.com www.afaprotectivesystems.com Connecticut • Delaware • Florida • Georgia • Maine • Maryland • Massachusetts • North Carolina • New Hampshire New Jersey New York • Pennsylvania • Rhode Island • South Carolina • Vermont • Virginia 1. 2 3. 4 5 6. 7. 8. Kohl's Department Store North Andover, MA Fire Alarm Systems Submittal TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Equipment List 1 - 18 Warranty 19 Notification Appliances Circuit Loading 20 Line -loss Calculation Sheet & Wire Sizing 21 Battery Calculation Sheets 22 Back box requirements 23 System Sequence of Operation 24 NICET & IMSA Certifications 25 ITEM QUANT. MODEL # A 1 FC 72-7 B 1 BMFC-6 C 1 PS -6 D 1 BCM -6 E 2 ZMC-6 F 4 ZDM G 2 B-31 R H 1 BC -1R 1 2 SNAC-9 J 4 B7R K 1 5406B -0 -14 -DC L 1 3200S M 8 NBG-12S N 2 ST-FRC01 0 2 STALM01 P 2 2451 Q 2 B401 R 16 DH100AC/DCP S 16 ST -10 T 16 RTS -451 U 1 A77 -716B V 37 28248-14-24 W 10 2700B-14-24 Submittal for Fire Alarm Equipment for Kohls' Department Store North Andover, MA DESCRIPTION PAGE # FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT 1 BASIC MOTHER FIRE CARD 2 POWER SUPPLY 3 BELL MASTER CODER MODULE 4 ZONE MOTHER CARD 5 ZONE DETECTION MODULE 6 BATTERY 7 BATTERY CABINET 7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE POWER SUPPLY 8 BATTERY 7 SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE 9 SURFACE -MOUNTING KEY REPOSITORY NONE MANUAL PULL STATION 10 MANUAL PULL STATION COVER 11 ALARM HORN FOR ABOVE 11 SMOKE DETECTOR 12 BASE FOR SMOKE DETECTOR 12 DUCT -MOUNTING SMOKE DETECTOR 13 SAMPLING TUBE 13 REMOTE TEST STATION 13 POWER SUPERVISION RELAY 14 ADJUSTABLE CANDELA HORN/STROBE 15 ADJUSTABLE CANDELA STROBE 16 Page 1 of 2 Revised 11/12/01 8:42 PM ITEM QUANT. MODEL # X 1 6230B -0 -14 -DC Y 1 301513-0-14 Submittal for Fire Alarm Equipment for Kohls' Department Store North Andover, MA DESCRIPTION PAGE # WEATHER -RESISTANT HORN 17 CAST BOX FOR ABOVE 18 Page 2 of 2 Revised 11/12/01 8:44 PM ff it ;rl FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION The FC -72 Series Fire Alarm Control panel is a proven, versatile, modular control which meets the requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Central Station, Protected Premises, Auxiliary, Remote and Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems. It is Listed to UL Standard 864, inherently power limited, meets all UL transient immunity requirements, and is suitable for releasing device service. The control is housed in a heavy duty 16 gauge steel enclosure finished in textured beige or optional red with back lighted panels displaying the status of vital functions. The surface mounted enclosure, with its slim appearance (4 -inch depth) is designed to blend with any environment. The many features of the FC -72 series control provide a cost effective approach to systems design, and allow a great degree of flexibility in one enclosure. Many of these features include full supervision, Class B, Style B, Class A, Style D initiating circuits, with Class B, Style Y and Class A, Style Z notification appliance circuits. The modular concept offers total freedom of systems configuration, ease of expansion, and complete interchangeability of all standard modules. Field expansion of an existing system is accomplished by the addition of plug-in modules for initiating circuits, zone coding, "walk test", time limit cutoff, system or zone verification, releasing and additional notification appliance circuits. UL Listed zone capacity is unlimited. Supervision of vital components, plug-in modules, functional switches ' and standby batteries is provided. In addition, supervised outputs are available for LED or incandescent remote alarm annunciation and supervised remote system trouble annunciation. The FC -72 control is UL Listed for modular construction or expansion in the field, or is available factory assembled and tested. a APPROVALS U.L. (Std 864) S 1869 FM 1KOA8.AY C.S.F.M. 7165-0694:001 n NYC BS&A 960 -81 -SA City of Chicago 2057E OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Operating temperature 32 - 120° F (0 - 49° C) Relative humidity 85% (non -condensing) FC -72 SERIES S FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL F M APPROVED FEATURES • Suitable for Releasing Device Service • Inherently Power Limited • Rugged Reliability • Plug-in Modules • Simple Field Expansion • Field Programmable Configuration • Unlimited Zone Capacity per UL • Temporal Pattern Output per ANSI S3.41 (option) • "Walk Test" Capability (option) • Alarm Verification by System or Zone (option) • Versatile Performance • Factory Assembled (optional) • Factory Tested 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0002Ner. 1.4 NOTE: DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO SCALE, DESCRIPTION 1- Zone Control Panel 1 Auxiliary D.C. Actuation Module SUPV. CURRENT .063 A .013 A ALARM CURRENT .370 A .073 A 411 Auxiliary D.C. Actuation module Auxiliary Power Supply, 24 VDC/4A .026 A .020 A .133A I I 1-32 ZONE .012A .030 A I Notification Appliance Circuit Module I 1.24 ZONE I CAPACITY BMFC-6 Lo I o Co co I CAPACITY o L C I 33-72 ZONE 2 1-4 ZONE 00 N�N M (CAPACITY co I c� m m, CAPACITY PNIS N n CAPACITY .150 A PS -6 Power Supply, 24 VDC/4A - I Auxiliary Relay Module I .070 A 4 RDF �v I f4.00--- (10.16) .002 A 4.00 f(10.16) r'__ 4.00 II 4.00 15.00 �_ 21.00 _ Remote Trouble Indicator 21.00 (10.16) 30.00 (10.16) (38.10) (53.34) -(53.34)-x (76.20) Cabinet Sizes (Inches and metric) MODULE FC -72-1 ADAM -6-1 DESCRIPTION 1- Zone Control Panel 1 Auxiliary D.C. Actuation Module SUPV. CURRENT .063 A .013 A ALARM CURRENT .370 A .073 A ADAM -6-2 APS -6 Auxiliary D.C. Actuation module Auxiliary Power Supply, 24 VDC/4A .026 A .020 A .133A AVM Alarm Verification Module .012A .030 A BCM -6 Notification Appliance Circuit Module 2 2 BMFC-6 Basic Master Fire Card 1 1 CCM -6 Common Coder Module 2 2 DMM Diode Matrix Module PNIS Zone Coder Module .012 A .150 A PS -6 Power Supply, 24 VDC/4A - RB -6 Auxiliary Relay Module .070 A 4 RDF Releasing Device Interface .002 A .047 A RRT Remote Reset Ca abilit 3 3 RTI Remote Trouble Indicator .002 A .002 A RZA Remote Zone Annunciator LED SAM Subsequent Alarm Module SRB-6 Supervised Auxiliary Relay Module .019 A .079 A 4 SSM Sprinkler Module .027 A .069 A 4 TBZ TCM -6 Trouble By Zone Module Temporal Pattern Coder Module 003 A 2 021 A/Zone 2 TDS-438 Time Delay Switch .001 A VZM Verification Zone Module .010A .175 A WTM Walk -Test Module .040 A ZDM Zone Detector Module each addonal Zone .006 A .163 A ZDM-D Dual -Density Zone Detector Module .018 A .298 A 4 ZMC-6 Zone Mother Card NOTES: (1) A Basic FC -72 system contains one (1) each of the BMFC-6, PS -6, ZDM, and one (1) each of the BCM -6, TCM -6, or CCM -6. (2) Included in BMFC-6 and/or ADAM -6 power requirements shown. (3) Consult factory. (4) With both circuits in alarm. (5) Add 4" to height and width for trim dimensions of flush mounted enclosures. D Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ©1997 All Rights Reserved E2 of 2 qw-n-non?, 7 FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION The BMFC-6 Basic Master Fire Card provides all of the signaling and supervisory functions of the FC -72 series fire alarm control. It is the nucleus of the system as it serves as the interface between all external devices and the operating a circuits of the control. The BMFC-6, with power supply module PS -6, provides the basic power and control for virtually any size standard a FC -72 series control panel. With the addition of two Zone Detection Modules, (ZDM) and a Notification Appliance Circuit Card (BCM -6, TCM -6 or CCM -6), the BMFC-6 comprises a system with two supervised initiating circuits n and two supervised notification appliance circuits with visual 'LJI trouble indicator LED's. These circuits may be expanded to practically any requirement using additional FC -72 series expansion modules. n The BMFC-6 has five visual trouble indicators, a yellow "GROUND FAULT' LED, individual yellow positive and negative "GROUND FAULT' LEDs, a yellow "SHORT CIRCUIT FAULT' LED and a yellow "CITY BOX" LED. Five functional switches are used on the BMFC-6: "TROUBLE SILENCE", "BATTERY/BELL TEST', "LAMP TEST", "RESET" and "CITY BOX DISCONNECT'. A unique matrix configuration on the BMFC-6 allows the FC -72 control panel to be programmed for a wide variety of special applications. Some of these are: presignal operation, signal -by -zone, separate and distinct outputs for sprinkler V supervision, etc. All external connections are made via high barrier terminal strips which use captive wiring clamps to facilitate installation. ELECTRICAL INFORMATION Operating voltage 24 VDC (nominal) Operating current* .063 amp. Alarm current* .370 amp. Operating temp. 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C)) Operating humidity 85% non -condensing @ 86° F * Includes BMFC-6 with one ZDM. OPTIONAL FEATURES • Supervised Remote Trouble Output • Temporal Pattern Output per ANSI S3.41 a • Dry Trouble Contacts • Remote City Box Disconnect • Releasing Device Output FC -72 SERIES UL BMFC-6 BASIC MASTER FIRE CARD F M APPRDVED FEATURES • Inherently power Limited per UL 864 • Alarm -by -Zone Output • Class A, Style D and/or Class B, Style B Initiating Circuit Wiring • Common Alarm Dry Contacts • Alarm Dry Contacts per Zone • Positive and Negative Ground Fault Indicators • "BATTERY/BELL TEST" Switch • "LAMP TEST, Switch • Class A, Style Z and/or Class B, Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit Wiring • Short Circuit Indicator for Notification Appliance Circuits • Supervised Annunciator Output for Incandescent Lamps or LEDs • Two Supervised Alarm Transmitter Outputs • Local Energy Master Box Output • Remote Station Signaling Output • Remote Reset • Matrix Programmable • T)rouble-by-Zone Output • Radio Master Box Output with Supervised Disconnect Switch 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0003/Ver. 1.4 FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS, Inc. IRpIBI! . llRlM 1Il! S!! r1 �.-I,lI-TilB 20 2t 22 23 24 25 26 1 2J '000000000 TRBL � JLID 13 190 O 1 180 iT O O =17 O K1 TROUBLE TOL BUPV FGNO V 1 0 9 IS5 0 fi Y 170 REVERSING Pa 1 2 Q 45 JQ 13 0 46 12 E O K3 BATT 1 110 Jlz ALARM 100 � y O ea _ D 8 0 I J„ BATTERY JS b .7 Q 60 TEM 00 S 000- e _a 44 43 31 30 29 alm 1'er�n� (Ji1 JRRI TB6 00000 00000 MASTER BOX 35 34 33 42 47 35 34 33 42 47 FAULT O P7 MASTER BOX J2 34 J28 J3A JSSAAAH MS JJtBB� F6 5 OA I3 J3 JJ32 B -4;Iri 0 �I �_j0 z 0 eoR L O 1. I� 3 0000000000040 B M F C - 6 36 37 38 39 40 41 36 J7. A 37 38 39 NOTE: SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9000-0007 FOR NOTES. THE QUANTITY OF FCI APPROVED, U.L. LISTED (MULTIPLE LISTED) TWO -WIRE PHOTOELECTRIC OR IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTORS WHICH MAY BE USED PER CIRCUIT VARIES ACCORDING TO THE INITIATING ZONE MODULE USED. FOR SPECIFIC INFORMATION, SEE THE FC -72 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9000-0007. �q Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility Is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ®1997 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 2 of 2 1 FC -72 SERIES ff FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS PS -6 POWER SUPPLY FM 24 VDC, 4 AMP. APPROVED DESCRIPTION The PS -6 is the primary power source for the FC -72 series fire alarm control. In addition to supplying the system with 4 amperes of filtered and regulated DC, the PS -6 contains a solid state battery charger which is capable of float charging sealed lead -acid batteries, or (optionally) charging nickel cadmium batteries. The automatic high rate circuit has a controlled output to 0.9 ampere, and the end of charge voltage is automatically regulated by a solid state switching circuit. Failure of the primary power input, and/or the 24 VDC power supply output will automatically transfer the FC -72 control to its standby batteries. This will cause both audible and visual system trouble conditions. The battery monitor circuit indicates both system trouble and battery trouble conditions if the standby batteries are disconnected, or deteriorate to 85% of rated voltage. The "brown -out" circuit detects low AC input and automatically transfers the system to battery standby. Options available are an ammeter for monitoring the charg- ing current, and a voltmeter indicating the power supply voltage. OPTIONS MT -A Ammeter MTV Voltmeter Power input Max. DC load Battery charging current Ripple @ 4.0 amp. Line regulation, 101-132 VAC Load regulation, 4.0 amp. Fuse size SPECIFICATIONS 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2 amp 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz 4.0 amp. 0.9 amp. max. <0.1 V peak to peak <2% change in output voltage <3% change in output voltage 6 amp., 7AG style ORDERING INFORMATION Part No. Model Description 1100-0072 PS -6 Power supply (lead -acid batteries) 1100-0233 PS -6N Power supply (nickel -cadmium batteries) Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ©1997 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0004/Ver. 1.3 FIRECONTROL INSTRUMENTS BCM -6A The BCM -6A Notification Appliance Circuit Module is included as standard equipment in every FC -72 series control panel. Its functions are to supervise the alarm relay and provide supervision of the notification appliance circuit field wiring for grounds, breaks and short circuit conditions. Should a fault occur, audible and visual system trouble indicators will be actuated. TCM -6 The TCM -6 Temporal Coder Module is an optional module which can be used to replace the BCM -6 series module in the FC -72 series control panel. In addition to providing all the supervisory functions of the BCM -6 series, the TCM -6 will sound the notification appliance circuits in the Temporal Pattern Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal per ANSI S3.41 a CCM -6 The CCM -6 Common Coder Module is an optional module which can also be used in place of the BCM -6 series module. In addition to providing all the supervisory functions of the BCM -6 series module, it gives the FC -72 system the capability of generating a wide variety of common -coded signals. Any repeatable code composed of up to ten (10) sequential pulses may be selected, and can be programmed at either factory or field level. The CCM -6 module also provides a field -adjustable signaling rate, and a selectable/field-adjustable time limit �j cutoff. The pulse duration is 0.25 second to 1.5 seconds U (max.) at 50% duty cycle. NOTE: When adjusting time limit cutoff, the common coded alarm signal shall be of not less than three rounds duration in order to comply with the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72. ORDERING INFORMATION Part No. Model Description 1100-0076 BCM -6A Notification Appliance Circuit Module 1100-1133 TCM -6 Temporal Code Module 1100-0073 CCM -6 Common Coder Module FC -72 SERIES V� BCM -6A, TCM -6, CCM -6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT MODULES BCM -6A Notification Appliance Circuit Module TCM -6 Temporal Pattern Coder Module CCM -6 Common Coder Module Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ©1997 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0259Ner. 1.3 FIRECONTROL INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION The ZMC-6 Zone Mother Card is used to expand FC -72 series controls to accept additional initiating zones. Mounted on each ZMC-6 are polarized connectors which will accept up to two initiating modules, and high barrier terminal strips which are easily accessible for the connection of field wiring. A sophisticated jumper matrix on the ZMC-6 allows each zone to be independently programmed for pre -signaling, selective signaling, special annunciation, and trouble -by - zone with optional TBZ Module. (Trouble -by -module with ZDM-D). 35 34 33 42 47 J33 J1A J2A o ZMC J J3A 4A J5A J6A J10A J11A 0 ZONE 1 + DETECTION OOOOOOOOOOO CIRCUIT 36 37 38 39 40 41 36 37 38 39 40 ZONE 1 j ANNUNCIATOR JRA JRBO OUTPUT FC -72 SERIES ZMC-6 ZONE MOTHER CARD 00060 534334247 J106 J116 DRY ZONE ALARM CONTACTS ZONE TROUBLE OUTPUT (FOR USE WITH TBZ MODULE ONLY) ALARM BUS PROGRAM DIODES: J1A-J1 B BUS 1 - CITY BOX ONLY J2A-J2B BUS 2- NOT PROGRAMMED J3A-J3B BUS 3 - SIGNAL. REVERSING RELAYS. CITY BOX (FACTORY INSTALLED) J4A-J4B BUS 4 - AUX. TERMINALS 3, 4, 5. J5A-J5B BUS 5 - NOT PROGRAMMED J6A-J6B BUS 6- NOT PROGRAMMED ZONE 2 DETECTION CIRCUIT ZONE 2 ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT ANNUNCIATOR COMMON (+) Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ®1997 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 uL FM APCROVEO 9020-0007Ner. 1.3 P IJ 0 FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION The ZDM Zone Detection Module mounts in the BMFC and ZMC modules in the FC -72 control. It accepts one Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B initiating circuit and expands the zone capacity of the system. It provides supervised annunciator output for both LED and incandescent lamp indicators, and also furnishes a set of Form "C" dry alarm actuated contacts. With Class A wiring, depending on quantities of detectors involved, a model VEOL end of line device may be required. The module will accommodate FCI Model 301, SBS, CPD or PSD series two -wire smoke detectors. The number of two -wire detectors which can be accommodated per zone varies with the control panel. Consult the control panel instruction manual to determine the capacity. Do not mix CPD/PSD detectors with SBS/301 detectors in the same circuit. SPECIFICATIONS Supv. current .006 amp. Alarm current .035 amp. .065 amp. w/LED remote annunc .120 amp. w/#1829 incandescent lamp annunciator .163 amp. w/#1820 incandescent lamp annunciator Relay contacts SPDT 2 amp. @ 26VDC (resistive) Max. line res. 100 ohms* * When using model 301 or SBS smoke detectors in Style B configuration with 3.3K EOL resistor ONLY, line resistance is 750 ohms max. FC -72 SERIES I ( RUIL ZDM ZONE DETECTOR F M MODTTT.F. FEATURES • Accepts either Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B Initiating Circuits • Supervised Red Alarm Indicator • Yellow Zone Trouble Indicator • SPDT Zone Alarm Dry Contacts • Coded or Non -coded Operation • Will Operate U.L. Listed FCI Model CPD, PSD, 301 or SBS Two -wire Smoke Detectors • May be used with Waterflow Detection or Supervisory Devices • "ZONE MAINTENANCE" Switch • Supervised Annunciator Output for LED or Incandescent Lamp Indicators (#1820 or 1829 lamps) �J Specifications are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control Instruments, Inc. far their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ®1997 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0008/Ver. 1.3 0 BATTERIES - BATTERY CABINET FIRECONTROL 7 �j INSTRUMENTS 12 VOLT - SEALED LEAD ACID RECHARGEABLE BATTERY CABINET The Model BC Battery Cabinet is UL Listed and finished in textured red or beige to match the various FCI control panels. The cabinet will house up to four (4) model B-31 or two (2) model B-55 batteries. The heavy duty cabinet, constructed of 16 gauge steel, is phosphate treated and primed with zinc chromate prior to painting. Knockouts are located at each end of the cabinet. The cabinet features a hinged, locked cover which is keyed alike with FCI control panels. BATTERIES The rechargeable batteries are of sealed lead calcium maintenance -free construction with a fully gelled electrolyte in a polypropylene case. These batteries will not leak or spill even if left upside down for extended periods of time. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Nominal voltage 12 volts Charging voltage Float 13.5 - 13.8 VDC Cycle 14.4 - 14.8 VDC Operating Temp. Range Discharge -76° F to +122° F (-60° C to +50° C) Charge -4° F to +122° F (-20" C to +50° C) PYw B -1.9R i' B -17R BC -1 Cabinet B -7R `'• a n W. B-31, z. B-31, B-55 BATTERY FEATURES • Long Life • Completely Sealed • Charge and Discharge in any Position • Low Self Discharge • Maintenance Free SPECIFICATIONS Model Capacity Terminal Type Dimensions (20 hr. rate) B -1.9R 1.9 AH Faston tab ".187" series B -7R 7 AH B-17 17 AH B -31R 31 AH B-55 55 AH BC -1 Faston tab ".187" series Terminal posts w/5 mm nut & bolt connectors "L" blade w/.6.4 mm hole "L" blade w/6.4 mm hole at negative, 8.9 mm sq. cutout at positive 17.78 cm L x 6.6 cm H x 3.4 W Weight 7" L x 2.6" H x 1.34" W 1.9 tbs. (0.86 kg) 15.11 cmLx 10.03 cmHx6.6cmW 5.95" L x 3.95" H x 2.6" W 5.75 tbs. (2.61 kg) 18.11 cmLx 16.69 cmHx7.59cmW 7.13" L x 6.57" H x 2.99" W 13.2 tbs. (5.99 kg) 19.69 cm L x 18.54 cm H x 12.95 cm W 7.75" L x 7.3" H x 5.1" W 24 tbs. (10.89) 26.04 cm L x 22.23 cm H x 17.27cmW 10.25" L x 8.75" H x 6.8" W 39 tbs. (17.69 kg) 55.88 cm L x 25.4 cm H x 23.38 cm W 22" L x 10" H x 8.81" W 19 tbs. (8.62 kg) 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 9020-0357/Ver. 1.4 ® FIRE CONTROL INSTRUNENiS DESCRIPTION The SNAC-9 Supplementary Notification Appliance Cir- cuit panel provides two (2) Class A, Style Z, or four (4) Class B, Style Y notification appliance circuits, with a total capac- ity of 9 amperes. These circuits may be programmed to acti- vate by groups or various combinations by connection to one or two existing Class A or B notification appliance circuits with operating voltages ranging from 9 to 30 VDC. Either non -coded or coded operation is possible. In addition, the SNAC-9 can provide a temporal pattern output from a non -coded input. A unique feature allows for programmable synchronized outputs for strobes by three (3) different major manufactur- ers, System Sensor, Faraday, or Gentex. The SNAC-9 contains its own battery.charger capable of maintaining batteries of up to 33 AH. The cabinet provides space for a set of 7 A/H batteries. It is supervised for ground fault, over -current, open circuits and low battery conditions. These conditions light the appropriate trouble LED and auto- matically open the notification appliance circuit used for ac- tivation, transmitting a trouble signal to the main fire alarm control panel. The ground fault detection circuit may be dis- abled. The unit contains a set of dry, Form "C" trouble actuated auxiliary contacts, rated 2.5 amp. @ 24 VDC (resistive). Transfer of these contacts for AC power failure is program- mable and can be delayed for a period of six (6) hours. This delay feature may be disabled A power limited, non-resettable auxiliary power output up to three (3) amperes is also available. The panel can be pro- grammed via DIP switch to disconnect this output from the batteries 30 seconds after AC power failure, in order to avoid running down the batteries from current devices such as door holders, etc. APPROVALS UL S1949 CSFM Approved NYC MEA 429-92-E Vol. XII SNAC-9 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT PANEL FEATURES • UL Listed as a Fire Alarm Accessory for use with any FCI or other UL Listed Fire Alarm Controls • Two (2) Class A (Style Z), or Four (4) Class B (Style Y) Notification Appliance Circuits • Programmable Temporal Pattern Output Including ANSI S3.41 • High Current 9 Amp. Total Output • Integral Strobe Synchronization Feature for Strobes by Three (3) Manufacturers • Integral Ground Fault Detection • Form "C" Trouble Contacts with Delayed AC Failure Indication • Compatible with most Listed Notification Appliances • Compact Construction TECHNICAL AND ORDERING INFORMATION Operating power 120 VAC, 3.6 amp. 60 Hz) Standby battery circuit 24 VDC (nominal) 7 ampere/hours, max. Supervisory current 0.075 amp. (� Alarm current 0.175 amp. (excluding notification appliances) 4�I Alarm output 9.0 amp. max. @ 24 VDC (nominal) Dimensions 16" H x 12.25" W x 3" D (40.64 x 30.88 x 7.62 cm) n Operating temperature 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) `tel Relative humidity 10 to 85% @ 86° F (non -condensing) Part number 150-00012 Specifications are provided for information only, are not intended to be used for installation purposes, and are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Fire Control In- struments, Inc. for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice. ® 2000 All Rights Reserved 301 2nd Ave Waltham, MA 02451-1133 USA TEL: (781) 487-0088 FAX: (781) 370-4132 www.firecontrohnstruments.com An ISO 9001 Certified Company 9020-0516 /Ver. 1.3 Effective: March 1, 2001 (replaces: August 30, 1999) CAC' 13-7 Features ■ Standard 4" square back box mounting ■ Synchronizes The Adapter'" series field selectable candela strobes and Faraday "M", "R", "T", "Y" & "Z" strobes ■ Synchronizes Faraday models 2820, 2821 & 2824 temporal horns ■ Temporal horn silence while strobes continue on 2 wires ■ Output configuration can be two Style Y, (class B) or one Style Z (class A) notification circuit(s) up to 3A per circuit ■ Usable on any listed polarity reversal type notification appliance circuit (NAC) ■ UL 1971 listed, CSFM listed, ULC and MEA approvals ■ Terminals accept up to #12 awg wire ■ Made in USA, ISO 9001 Quality Crafted Description The 5406 Dual Sync Control Module provides synchro- nization of the Faraday Adapter field selectable candela strobes, Faraday "M", "R", "T", "Y" & "Z" strobes, and synchronization and silenceability to 2820 series electronic audible signals. When connected to a polarity reversal notification appliance circuit, there is supervision of the wiring from the FACP through the 5406 to the End -of -Line device. The 5406 triggers the strobes to flash at a rate of 1 flash per second. The 5406 also provides a synchro- nized temporal or march time horn pattern when used with the Faraday series 2820, 2821 & 2824. These audible signals may also be silenced while the strobes continue to flash, all on two wires. The module can support two Style Y (class B) or one Style Z (class A) notification appliance circuit(s). The 5406 may be alternatively configured to synchronize audible conventional notification appliances in a march time or temporal horn pattern from steady 24 Vdc NACs. ' FARADAY 11 Model 5406 Engineering Specifications 7 The synchronization modules shall be Faraday Series 5406. The sync module shall be listed to UL1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling for the Hearing im- paired). The Series 5406 shall be specifically designed to be compatible with Faraday notification appliances which are equipped with the Faraday Adapter series field selectable strobes, or the "M", "R", "T", "Y", & "Z" strobes, as well as Faraday Series 2824 Horn -Strobes, and Faraday Series 2820 and 2821 Horns. When controlling NAC's that have these Faraday notification appliances, all strobes shall be synchronized in the minimum 1 flash per second flash rate, and the Series 2820, 2821, and 2824 horns shall be synchronized in the field selectable march time or temporal horn pattern. In addition, it shall be possible to silence the 2820, 2821, and 2824 horns while the strobes con- tinue to flash ..... all on 2 wire circuits. The module shall have provision to control one class A (style Z) NAC, or two class B (style Y ) NAC's. Each circuit shall be rated up to 3A at 24 Vdc. It shall be possible to inter- connect up to 600 sync modules to insure mutual synchronization of appliances on multiple NAC's. Inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity circuit supervision by an FACR The Faraday 5406 Sync Module can be alternatively field configured to synchronize conventional audible appliances in a march time or temporal pattern, when powered by steady 24 Vdc NAC's. The module shall mount to a standard 4" square backbox, as well as Faraday 3046 and 3047 Surface Boxes Page 1 FAS -37 Model 5406 Dual Synchronization Control Module FAS -37 Specifications Environmental 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) with 85% humidity Primary Input Voltage 20 to 31 Vdc or VFWR Operating Current 55 mA Mounting Standard 4" square box Output Current 3A max. (supplied by FACP) Shipping Weight 10 oz. approx. Wiring From control panel (non -pulsing or pulsing) silenceable NAC or slaved NAC: 20-31 Vdc or VFW, 5 mA, if required F.A. panel NAC EOL if circuit used Non-Silenceable NAC Silen leable — — — ❑ NAC' — — — Physical Dimensions 4-9/16" qa _❑ ❑ - Non- Silenceable — NAC ❑ ❑ Single Style "Z" (Class A) Silenceable -- - -❑ Dual Style "Y" (Class B) Wiring NAC* El--- Wiring r `5406 Wired if horn silence is required, while strobes FACP continue to flash Ordering Information Part Number Description 5406B-0-(')-24-DC ....... Semi- Flush mount Dual Sync Control Module ' (14) red or (21) off-white Ls 5406 'Wired if horn silence is required, while strobes FACP continue to flash Notes: • 5406 Sync Module must be connected to 2 non -pulsing signal circuits with a steady current output and appropriate voltage. • A third signal circuit is required to provide horn silence while strobes continue to flash. • Audible and visual currents are combined together. • The 5406 sync strobe control unit must be wired electrically before the strobes/signals. ©Faraday, LLC, 2001 —all rights reserved Specifications subject to change without notice 805 S. Maumee Street WARNING - The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary U.S.A. and is subject to change without notice. The devices described in this document have Tecumseh, MI 49286 specific instruction sheets which cover various technical, limitation and liability information. Phone: (800) 465-7115 Copies of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, which also contains important information, are provided with the product and Fax: (800) 552-3557 are available from the Manufacturer. Information contained in these documents should be Web: www.faradayllc.com consulted before specifying or using the product. For further information or assistance concerning particular problems contact the Manufacturer. Page 2 From control panel (non -pulsing) non-silenceable NAC: 20-31 Vdc + IN + IN1 or VFW, 55 mA, plus output notification appliance load IN 1 To compatible notification appliances. + OUT + OUT1 3A max. load, not to exceed NAC rating. Supervised by NAC - OUT + IN2 Silenceable -2 Same as circuit above +OUT2 Non-Sil _❑ ❑ - Non- Silenceable — NAC ❑ ❑ Single Style "Z" (Class A) Silenceable -- - -❑ Dual Style "Y" (Class B) Wiring NAC* El--- Wiring r `5406 Wired if horn silence is required, while strobes FACP continue to flash Ordering Information Part Number Description 5406B-0-(')-24-DC ....... Semi- Flush mount Dual Sync Control Module ' (14) red or (21) off-white Ls 5406 'Wired if horn silence is required, while strobes FACP continue to flash Notes: • 5406 Sync Module must be connected to 2 non -pulsing signal circuits with a steady current output and appropriate voltage. • A third signal circuit is required to provide horn silence while strobes continue to flash. • Audible and visual currents are combined together. • The 5406 sync strobe control unit must be wired electrically before the strobes/signals. ©Faraday, LLC, 2001 —all rights reserved Specifications subject to change without notice 805 S. Maumee Street WARNING - The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary U.S.A. and is subject to change without notice. The devices described in this document have Tecumseh, MI 49286 specific instruction sheets which cover various technical, limitation and liability information. Phone: (800) 465-7115 Copies of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, which also contains important information, are provided with the product and Fax: (800) 552-3557 are available from the Manufacturer. Information contained in these documents should be Web: www.faradayllc.com consulted before specifying or using the product. For further information or assistance concerning particular problems contact the Manufacturer. Page 2 �JNOTI FI ERS FIRE SYSTEMS GENERAL The NOTIFIER NBG-12 Series is a cost-effective, feature - packed series of non -coded manual fire alarm pull stations. It was designed to meet multiple applications with the in- staller and end-user in mind. The NBG-12 Series features a variety of models including single- and dual -action ver- sions. The NBG-12 Series provides conventional fire alarm con- trol panels such as the SGL -2000, SFP Series, XP Tran- sponders, System 5000, and System 500 with an alarm initiating input signal. Its innovative design, durable con- struction, and multiple mounting options make the NBG-12 Series simple to install, maintain, and operate. FEATURES • Aesthetically pleasing, highly visible design and color. • Attractive contoured shape and light textured finish. • Meets ADA 5 Ib. maximum pull -force. • Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. • Easily operated (single- or dual -action), yet designed to prevent false alarms when bumped, shaken, or jarred. • PUSH IN/PULL DOWN handle latches in the down posi- tion to clearly indicate the station has been operated. • The word "ACTIVATED" appears on top of the handle in bright yellow when the station has been operated, fur- ther indicating operation of the station. • Operation handle features white arrows showing basic operation direction for non -English-speaking persons. • Braille text included on finger -hold area of operation handle and across top of handle. • Multiple hex- and key -lock models available. • U.S. patent pending hex -lock needs only a quarter -turn to lock/unlock. • Station can be opened for inspection and maintenance without initiating an alarm. • Product ID label viewable by simply opening the cover; label is made of a durable long -life material. • The words "NORMAL" and "ACTIVATED" are molded into the plastic adjacent to the alarm switch (located inside). • Four -position terminal strip molded into backplate. • Terminal strip includes Phillips combination -head cap- tive 8/32 screws for easy connection to Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). • Terminal screws backed -out at factory and shipped ready to accept field wiring (up to 12 AWG/3.25 mm2). • Terminal numbers are molded into the backplate, elimi- nating the need for labels. • Switch contacts are normally open. July 11, 2000 DN -6643 • 1-410 NBG-12 Series Non -Coded Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations Section: Conventional Initiating Devices U.S. PATENTS PENDING U California State Fire C o L US :, Marshal 7150-0028:199 LISTED (except NBG-12LO, S692 F M NBG-12LOB) Approved (except NBG-12LO, NBG-12LOB, NBG-12LA) • Can be surface -mounted (with SB -10) or semi -flush mounted. Semi -flush mount to a standard single -gang, double -gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box. • Backplate is large enough to overlap a single -gang backbox cutout by 1/2" (12.7 mm). • Optional trim ring (BG -TR). • Spanish version (FUEGO) available (NBG-12LSP). • Designed to replace the popular NBG-10 Series. • Models packaged in attractive, clear plastic (PVC), clamshell -style, Point -of -Purchase packages. Packag- ing includes a cutaway dust/paint cover in shape of pull station. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our i� product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact NOTIFIER. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 rj"i NOTIFIER• 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 IS09001 ENCINEERINC A MANIIfACTURINC DN -6643.07/11/00 — Page 1 of 2 CONSTRUCTION PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION 106 • Cover, backplate and operation handle are all molded Model Description n of durable polycarbonate material. 5.500 inches 6.000 inches `�! - Cover features white lettering and trim. NBG-12S Single-action pull station with pigtail con- • Red color matches System Sensor's popular SpectrAlertTM Width: nections, hex lock. horn/strobe series. NBG-12 Dual -action pull station with SPST N/O OPERATION (10.4775 cm) switch, hex lock, screw terminal connec- Depth: 1.390 inches tions. The NBG-12 manual pull stations provide a textured fin- NBG-12L . Same as NBG-12 with key lock. ger-hold area that includes Braille text. In addition to PUSH IN and PULL DOWN text, there are arrows indicating how NBG-12LSP Same as NBG-12L with English/Spanish to operate the station, provided for non -English-speaking (FIRE/FUEGO) labeling. people. NBG-12LOB Dual -action pull station with key lock, out - Pushing in and then pulling down on the handle activates door applications listings (NBG-121-0), and the normally -open alarm switch. Once latched in the down backbox. Includes WBB weatherproof back - position, the word "ACTIVATED" appears at the top in bright box, and sealing gasket. Model will also yellow, with a portion of the handle protruding at the bot- mount to WP -10 weatherproof backbox in tom as a visible flag. Resetting the station is simple: in- retrofit applications. sert the key or hex (model dependent), twist one quarter- NOTE: NBG-12LO not available separately, - turn, then open the station's front cover, causing the spring- NBG-12LO + approved backbox = NBG- loaded operation handle to return to its original position. 12LOB. Outdoor applications listings apply The alarm switch can then be reset to its normal (non -alarm) to NBG-12LOB combination. position manually (by hand) or by closing the station's front cover, which automatically resets the switch. NBG-12LA Dual -action pull station with key lock and annunciator contacts. a SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: For addressable NBG-12 models, see data sheet Physical Specifications: 66E3dImlhl DN -6726. Electrical Specifications: Switch contact ratings: gold-plated; rating 0.25 A @ 30 VAC or VDC. Auxiliary contact circuit (Terminals 3 & 4, NBG-12LA): rated to 3.0 A @ 30 VAC or VDC. ENGINEERS' & ARCHITECTS' SPECIFICATIONS Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non -code, with a key - or hex -operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key or hex. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red colored LEXAN@ (or polycarbonate equivalent) with clearly visible operating in- structions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (25.4 mm) or larger.* Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox SB -10; or semi - flush mounting on a standard single -gang, double -gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Sta- tions shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. *NOTE: The words "F/REIFUEGO" on the NBG-12LSP shall appear on the front of the station in white letters, approximately 3/4" high. Page 2 of 2 — DN -6643. 07/11/00 1.390" (35.306) Length Gauge _T_ 1.000" —L 5.500" (139.70) t11) NBG-12 SB -10 WP -10 Height: 5.500 inches 5.500 inches 6.000 inches (13.97 cm) (13.97 cm) (15.24 cm) Width: 4.121 inches 4.125 inches 4.690 inches (10.4673 cm) (10.4775 cm) (11.9126 cm) Depth: 1.390 inches 1.375 inches 2.000 inches (3.5306 cm) (3.4925 cm) (5.08 cm) Electrical Specifications: Switch contact ratings: gold-plated; rating 0.25 A @ 30 VAC or VDC. Auxiliary contact circuit (Terminals 3 & 4, NBG-12LA): rated to 3.0 A @ 30 VAC or VDC. ENGINEERS' & ARCHITECTS' SPECIFICATIONS Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non -code, with a key - or hex -operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key or hex. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red colored LEXAN@ (or polycarbonate equivalent) with clearly visible operating in- structions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (25.4 mm) or larger.* Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox SB -10; or semi - flush mounting on a standard single -gang, double -gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Sta- tions shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. *NOTE: The words "F/REIFUEGO" on the NBG-12LSP shall appear on the front of the station in white letters, approximately 3/4" high. Page 2 of 2 — DN -6643. 07/11/00 1.390" (35.306) Length Gauge _T_ 1.000" —L 5.500" (139.70) t11) SENTRY Station Cover DOverview SigCom's Sentry""' Station Cover is a rugged poly -carbonate cover used to help protect manual pull stations and other devices from false alarms, vandalism, dust and weather. It is available in a variety of configurations to satisfy most applications. The Sentry"",' meets the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Specifically, it has been tested by UL for compliance with the 51b. pull force requirement. In addition, the total depth of the twit when mounted is less a than the retluired 4 inches. What's more, the Sentry can be operated easily with one hand without having to grasp and when opened will not obstruct the use of the pull station, an important requirement for ADA applications. Units with the optional alarm module can be used as false alarm deterrents Li in applications such as schools, libraries, etc. When installed, the alarm module will emit a piercing scream when the cover is opened. This startling noise will help to deter most malicious pranksters and to indicate the location of the problem. A weather proof kit is available which will allow the unit to be installed in outdoor applications. This optional kit will provide NEMA 3R protection to the device. U ADA $omPllant'. LISTED Preliminary data sheet. All inl(nnwti011 subjeet to change %%ithnut nWice. 11 Featyres • ADA Compliant • UL Listed • Tough poly -carbonate construction • UU Stabilized • Alarm module w/ piercing siren (optional) • Extender kit (optional • Weather kit w/ gaskets NEMA 3R (optional • Backplate for mounting on rough surfaces (optional) Ordering Infomation --- — —- ---- — COMPONENT LIST Item Qty Description Part# Backplate Kit ST-BKP01 1 1 Backplate 20 2 Screw, #10 Type A, 1" L phillips round head Extender Kit ST-XTR01 6 1 Extender 5 2 Conduit Block Plate 8 1 Compression Plate 21 4 Screw, #10 Type A, 4" L phillips round head Weather Proof Kit ST-WPK01 4 2 Conduit Gasket 2 1 Gasket, Flat Front Cover Kit ST-FRC01 = 7 1 Frame 9 1 Front Cover 4 Screw, #10 Type A, 1-3/4" L phillips round head(not shown) Alarm Module Kit ST-ALM01 15 1 Alarm Module 10 1 Silencer Key 22 2 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8"L, phillips pan head a3 L� • 1 0 Surface Mount Pull Station, not provided 4 6 3 20 o __ 7 mo ao oABO a a Lj J l8' www.slgcom.com P.O. Box 2588 Woburn, MA 01888 Tel.: 781 933 0998 Fox.: _7 781 933 5019 11s Y Signal Colilllllillli'aliuus Col-pol-alioll n Li �JNOTIFIER FIRE SYSTEMS June 19, 1998 2451 DN -1217. 1-125 2 -Wire and 4 -Wire Photoelectric Smoke Detector with optional thermal sensor Section: Conventional Initiating Devices GENERAL The System Sensor 400 Series. plug-in photoelectric smoke detectors are specifically designed to meet the stringent per- �� V formance requirements of industrial and municipal fire detec- tion/alarm systems. The design of these detectors empha- S911 CS308 sizes ease of installation and field maintenance. FEATURES BSA • Unique optical Sensing chamber: — Superior signal-to-noise ratio. — Built-in signal processing. — 3.0% nominal sensitivity. • Removable cover for field cleaning. • Visible LED "blinks" in standby. • Sealed against dirt, insects, and back pressure. • Three-year limited warranty. • Field metering of detector sensitivity. • Built-in magnetic test switch. • Low standby current. • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. • Designed for direct surface or electrical box mounting. • 360° field viewing angle of the visual alarm LEDs • Insect -resistant screening (0.020"/0:508 mm openings). • Easy plug-in of the head to base. • SEMS screws for easy wiring. • Optional recess mounting. • Air velocity up to 3,000 feet (914.4 m) per minute. APPLICATIONS Use to contribute to life safety, fire protection, and property conservation. Photoelectric detectors are recommended in areas where slow smoldering fires are likely to ignite. In areas where small combustion particles are usually present from forklift trucks, cooking stoves, etc., they are less likely than ionization detectors to produce false alarms. CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION All 400 Series photoelectric smoke detectors contain a unique optical sensing chamber designed to sense the presence of smoke particles produced by a wide range of combustion sources and meet the performance criteria designated by UL 268. A new custom integrated circuit incorporates signal pro- cessing to reduce false alarms and sample/hold circuitry to provide easy field metering of sensitivity. An additional key feature is the range of mounting bases, to meet a variety of applications. INSTALLATION Model 2451 detectors are designed for systems use with NO- TIFIER UL -listed control panels. For two -wire applications, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. Easy to install and maintain, this detector is designed for direct surface mount- ing (mounting bracket included), or mounting to a 4" (101.6 1232 -88 -SA California State Fire Marshal 7272-1209:131 FM nr)1An AV mm) octagonal or smaller box. Easy -to -wire screw terminals allow fast and simple field wiring of in, out, and remote annun- ciator connections. Consult NOTIFIER control panel specifications for the maxi- mum allowable loop resistance for the particular control panel to be used. To prevent wiring mistakes, observe polarities and make cer- tain that each conductor is identified. A copy of Installation and Maintenance Instructions is packaged with each detector. For further information, refer to NFPA 72 "Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors," and to local Authority Having Jurisdiction. A MOUNTING BASE SELECTION GUIDE is included on page 2 of this document. JUNCTION BOX SELECTION GUIDE: Box depth is contin- gent on base and wire size. Refer to National Electrical Code or local applicable codes for appropriate recommendations. Bases B401 and B401B can utilize a single -gang, 3-1/2" (88.9 mm) octagonal, 4" (101.6 mm) octagonal, or 4" square junc- tion box. Bases B402B and B406B can utilize a single -gang, 3-1/2" octagonal, 4" octagonal, 4" square, 50 mm, 60 mm, or 75 mm junction box. Base B404B can utilize a 4" octagonal or 4" square junction box. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Operating voltage: mounting base dependent (see chart). Standby current: 120 pA max.; 100 pA max. for thermal. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications IS09001 or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact NOTIFIER. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 CJ NOTIFIER` 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 ENGINEERINS & MANUFACTURING DN -1217 • 06/19/98 — Page 1 of 2 Sensitivity: 3.0%/ft. nominal. Weight: 0.6 pounds (272 g.). Size: model 2451 is 2.4" (60.96 mm) high, 2451TH is 2.9" (73.66 mm) high; 4.0" (101.6 mm) diameter with unflanged bases, 6.2" (157.48 mm) diameter with flanged bases. Construction: flame-retardant white Noryl® plastic. Temperature: for 2451, 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 490C); for thermal model 2451TH, 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 380C). Alarm point, thermal: 135°F (57C), or 15°F/min. rate -of - rise. Humidity range: 10% to 93% RH (non -condensing). Air velocity rating: 3,000 feet per minute (15 meters/sec.). PRODUCE LINE INFORMATION Model Description 2451 Photoelectric Detector. Must be mounted to one of the B40_B Series Bases listed above. 2451TH Same as model 2451 above, but with a 135°F (57°C) fixed -temperature heat sensor. RA40OZ Remote Annunciator for 2- or 4 -wire applica- tions. Use with any 400 Series plug-in detec- tor. Fits standard U.S. single -gang electrical box. MOD40OR Field Test Module for all of the System Sensor 400 Series Smoke Detectors. ALARMLfl CONTROL ALARM CIRCUIT PANEL A B404B Wiring Diagram MOUNTING BASE SELECTION GUIDE u'R 120 VAC 120 VAC RA40OZ OPTIONAL Alarm Contact 4�c'KI, RA40OZ (OPTIONAL) Current Number Type Resistor Type Voltage J raw on arm B401 & B401 UUULC/ EN -54 2 wire' S "wi 3i2) i 30 3 c `? O 2 0 COM 20 14 1 (_) (+) 00 6 113 12 0 N.C. 1 N.O. (+) 067 130 COM 12 0 N.C. N.O. LU 7 8 910 111 4 (+) (+) )4 AUXILIARY 6 9 AUXILIARY FORM C (+) FORM C mA B4048 CONTACTS 4 -wire CONTACTS Form -A & -C/A Supervisory ; SUPERVISION CIRCUIT 75 mA AC B401 B/B401 Wiring Diagram wD EOLPOWER maximum 84068 cc ALARMLfl CONTROL ALARM CIRCUIT PANEL A B404B Wiring Diagram MOUNTING BASE SELECTION GUIDE u'R ALARM CIRCUIT (+) A B402B Wiring Diagram EOL RESISTOR 2 2 -------- ; t2� 1® 14 COM }}�� 1® 14 COM }}�� 13 N. 13 0 12 N.O. 12 N.O. AUXILIARY AUX. CONTACTS CON- TACTS i -- -------- -- ---- -- --- - - - -- -OPTIONAL NFPA CLASS "A"WIRING A B406B Wiring Diagram Base Model OPTIONAL Loop RA40OZ OPTIONAL Alarm Contact Nominal O Current Number Type Resistor Type Voltage Voltage raw on arm B401 & B401 UUULC/ EN -54 2 wire' No — 12/24 VDC 8.5 to 35 3 U)(+) 1 (_) VDC (+) 1 H UL & ULC LU Yes Form -A & -C 4 (+) (+) )4 -' 0 M (+) VDC mA B4048 ----------------------- ------_--- 4 -wire -------------- - --- OPTIONAL FAULT TOLERANT WIRING Form -A & -C/A Supervisory ; 120 VAC 75 mA AC B401 B/B401 Wiring Diagram EOLPOWER maximum 84068 UUULCI EN -542 vire' SUPERVISION Form -C 24 VDC 15 to 32 12 to 100 RELAY, AT7-7168 +) RED (+) VDC mA" PURPLE RA40OZ RA40OZ OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) 3 3 2 EILK W 1130 COM (+ 140 COM 12 N.C. 1230 N.C. N.O. 11 p w w tu 011 8 e N.O. AUXILIARY CONTACTS AUXILIARY CONTACTS w a 2 tL ALARM CIRCUIT (+) A B402B Wiring Diagram EOL RESISTOR 2 2 -------- ; t2� 1® 14 COM }}�� 1® 14 COM }}�� 13 N. 13 0 12 N.O. 12 N.O. AUXILIARY AUX. CONTACTS CON- TACTS i -- -------- -- ---- -- --- - - - -- -OPTIONAL NFPA CLASS "A"WIRING A B406B Wiring Diagram Base Model Version Loop Current Limit Alarm Contact Nominal Standby Current Number Type Resistor Type Voltage Voltage raw on arm B401 & B401 UUULC/ EN -54 2 wire' No — 12/24 VDC 8.5 to 35 10 to 100 VDC mA" B402B UL & ULC 4 -wire Yes Form -A & -C 24 VDC 17 to 32 14 to 39 VDC mA B4048 UL & ULC 4 -wire Yes Form -A & -C/A Supervisory 120 VAC 120 VAC 75 mA AC maximum 84068 UUULCI EN -542 vire' No Form -C 24 VDC 15 to 32 12 to 100 VDC mA" `Functionality contingent on panel compatibility. "Must be limited by control panel. RELAY CONTACT RATINGS: resistive or Inductive (60% power factor) load. Form -A: 2.0 A at 30 VAC/DC. Form -C: 0.6 A at 110 VDC; 2.0 A at 30 VDC; 1.0 A at 125 VAC; 2.0 A at 30 VAC. Page 2 of 2 — DN -1217 " 06/19/98 �JNOTIFIER 0 FIRE SYSTEMS GENERAL The System Sensor DH100ACDC four -wire duct smoke de- tectors are available as either an ionization or a photoelec- tronic model. This new design allows for simplified clean- ing and maintenance, or a change in application without removing the duct housing. The DH100ACDC samples air currents passing through a duct and gives dependable per- formance for management of fans, blowers, and air-condi- tioning systems, preventing the spread of toxic smoke and fire gases through the protected area. OWARN/NGl Duct smoke detectors have specific limitations. DUCT DETECTORS ARE: • NOT a substitute for an open -area smoke detector. • NOT a substitute for early warning detection. • NOT a substitute for a building's regular fire detec- tion system. REFER TO NFPA 72 and 90A for additional duct smoke detector application information. FEATURES • Outside mounting tabs. • Telescoping sampling tube (patent pending). • Built-in reset button. • Interconnectability (patent pending) for multi -fan shut- down (up to ten air handlers). • Cover tamper trouble signal (patent pending). • Easy to clean. • 24 VAC/DC or 120/240 VAC operation. • High -Low voltage barrier. • Ion or photo models available. • Remote test station option. • Remote sounder option. , • Air velocity rating from 500 to 4,000 ft/min (152.4 to 1219.2 m/min). • Equipped with two DPDT Form -C relay contacts. • Easy and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts from 1 to 12 feet (2.54 to 30.48 cm) wide. • Textured cover for convenient visual inspection. • UL 268A listed. SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions: 14.375" (36.513 cm) wide x 5.500" (13.970 cm) high x 2.750" (6.985 cm) deep. Shipping weight: 3.75 lbs. (1.7 kg). Operating temperature range: 32° to 131 OF (00 to 550C). Operating humidity range: 10% to 93% relative humidity. October 22, 1999 DN -6753 • 1-355 DH100ACDC Four -Wire, Low -Profile, Ion & Photo Duct Smoke Detectors Section: Conventional Initiating Devices California State Fire Marshal 3240-1209:155 S911 Approved MARYLAND State Fire Marshal RR8281 Air duct velocity range: 500 to 4,000 ft/min (152.4 to 1219.2 m/min). ARCH ITECTURAVENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS The air -duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor model DH100ACDC Series Duct Smoke Detector. The de- tector housing shall be UL listed per UL 268A specifically for use in air -handling systems. The detector shall oper- ate at air velocities of 500 to 4,000 feet per minute (152.4 to 1219.2 meters per minute). The unit shall be capable of controlling up to ten (10) air -handling systems when inter- connected with other detectors. The detector shall be ca- pable of providing a trouble signal in the event that the front cover is removed. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote testing using the RTS451 KEY Remote Test Station. The unit shall be reset by local reset button or remote test station. The duct smoke detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in com- pliance with UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. The housing shall be capable of mount- ing to either rectangular or round ducts without adapter brackets. An integral filter system shall be included to re- duce dust and residue effects on detector and housing, thereby reducing maintenance and servicing. Sampling tubes shall either be telescoping or be easily installed by passing through the duct housing after the housing is mounted to the duct. The unit shall provide a spacial sepa- This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or S09001 anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact NOTIFIER. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 �� N OTI FIE R• 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 ENSINEEaINC 6 MANIIFACNRIN6 UN -6753 • 10/22/99 — Page 1 of 4 ration of no less than 1/4" and/or a physical barrier be- tween the high- and low -voltage terminals. The enclosure shall meet all applicable NEC and NFPA standard regard- ing electrical junction boxes. Terminal connections shall be of the strip -and -clamp method suitable for 12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm2) wiring. PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION DH100ACDC1 Four -wire ionization duct smoke detector. DH100ACDCP Four -wire photoelectronic duct detector. A5052-00 Replacement ionization detector board. A5069-00 Replacement photoelectronic detector board. A5064-00 Replacement four -wire power board. ACCESSORIES: ST -1.5 Metal sampling tube, duct widths 1' to 2'. ST -3 Metal sampling tube, duct widths 2' to 4'. ST -5 Metal sampling tube, duct widths 4' to 8'. ST -10 Metal sampling tube, duct widths 8' to 121 . ELECTRICAL RATINGS for DH100ACDC (including detector Power supply voltage: 20 – 29 VDC Input capacitance: 270 NF maximum Reset voltage: 3.0 VDC minimum Reset time (with RTS451): 0.03 to 0.30 seconds Reset time (by power -down): 0.6 seconds max. Power -up time: 34 seconds max. Alarm response time: 2 to 17 seconds Sensitivity test: See detector label. CURRENT LIMITATIONS (using no accessories): Maximum standby current: 15 mA Maximum alarm current: 70 mA T80-71-00 Replacement telescoping sampling tube. P48.55-00 Replacement end cap for T80-71-00. RTS451 Remote test station. RTS451 KEY Remote test station with key lock. RA40OZ Remote annunciator alarm LED. APA451 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm. MOD40OR Sensitivity test module. F36-09-00 Replacement air filters (two per package). M02-04-00 Test magnet. P48.21.00 End cap for metal sampling tubes. S08-39-01 Photo replacement screen. PA400B Mini -Alert sounder. PS24LOB Mini -Alert add-on strobe. PS12/24LENSC Ceiling -mount "SMOKE" lens. PS12/24LENSW Wall -mount "SMOKE" lens. 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 270 pF maximum 2.0 VAC minimum 0.03 to 0.30 seconds 0.6 seconds max. 34 seconds max. 2 to 17 seconds See detector label. 35 mA RMS 125 mA RMS 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz N/A 10 VAC minimum 0.03 to 0.30 seconds 0.6 seconds max. 34 seconds max. 2 to 17 seconds See detector label. 25 mA RMS` 35 mA RMS' 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz N/A 20 VAC minimum 0.03 to 0.30 seconds 0.6 seconds max. 34 seconds max. 2 to 17 seconds See detector label. 15 mA RMS* 25 mA RMs* *NOTE. When a unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 2201 240 VAC input, any combination of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are: • 60 mA or less in the STANDBY state. • 110 mA or less in the ALARM state. 6753eces.tbl Contact Ratings Alarm initiation contacts (SPST): 2.0 A @ 30 VAC/DC (0.6 power factor). Alarm auxiliary contacts (DPDT): 10 A @ 30 VDC; 10 A @ 250 VDC. NOTE: Alarm auxiliary contacts must switch 100 mA minimum at 5 VDC. Alarm auxiliary contacts shall not be connected to initiating circuits of control panels. Use the alarm initiation contact for this purpose. Trouble contacts (SPDT): 2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive). Page 2 of 4 — DN -6753 - 10/22/99 C y O uj pp U wO JO Q (0 U O .O U y U A .7 p U C ,C O i V 4 y CO a fCO N yV aNQU I -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rx t CLQ CU F O 4"- Vf Q C O O W C 1 �S a;� `m O ai 2 4`LWN ° 1 a°'`ovai0 C9V`�� h N� WCL c �W0 ~aOZZ 2 03 a� �° �� f0 LLI QOco ¢ $U� L O Uj .EE 2°c0Lio ,---------------------7------- I U 0 z U) to U ' U), CO Q CC Q 0} O i U Q d � Q vi Z p� w coo i 1 U > 1'"voTO G0 0 r u m Uz0 I I Z F5 J o � OU c Z o EE m _U O Q oU) o¢ I I Q. } 3 f- y= L CO N 1 � a�= N CLu C14 L's v� � � 0 � a I O Q= 0 w O c cti I CL -� cLn r c� 0 i LLJo0J LO ♦, Z UZ a�g zF- I O N ��Im � U CD XNWt Cc - M F2 CCQZ I l a Q (U E o CL 20 Q -U 1 z ca U D' I L- - - - - - - - -- Q U ----------------------------- I pp Z p 2 H c U) I I, V�,� H' QOf Q L>O I o U U) U > PU„ ►�=�3 0� U)m UZUW I Z I IL m�,N N U c z o f J O Q 0 c 0¢ I I W N >.p: r -0w CO �� USU.6 I U 10 1 Q 1 N O to Q� �w� O cw I a X to T-- O c� U� et to j m ��> Qw U0Z CO Z� .0 z '0 OV c CN 4O tC co c O ch = Q I Q (2)~ a Q� w Q?� (U E O 4 1 Z `m U y, I ------- ------ ¢------------ _I N 6i U O N di w coLO No 00 c c C ai �O v V r, a� �0 O E F- `d Ep�W Q �' a�OiL O>�� °� � QO> EW2Q O 0 UL 3 0 5 c �Q0 2Q o e�:? I.>o �ZOC U > o o c a ~0 > a m 2 0�n -WSJ W o CO U v E•g'o Z CD �.�•a pce)N EI�C�O .lye U :: dr. N -I j>N c k�@, jZ< E JWMlMescs Ov�N 0 aNNU (0 O Q.--.-.--?.C.1Ci CCN F- 3 p LL 0 .�0 L O � U 42 ��D c: co �� J 'v C:O� Co W uai V oa w� UJ Cl Cl) J 5.9 yJ W Z O D. LL J ami OC v F- �Z �U DN -6753 • 10/22/99 - Page 3 of 4 Removal Tools The CRT -400 Cover Removal Tool simplifies removal of the tamper -proof covers on 400/ 551 Series Ionization Detectors. It simulta- neously depresses the three lock prongs on the top of the unit so the cover can be rotated counterclockwise and removed. It can also remove the cover of photo units. The XR5 and XR2 Detector Removal Tools can be used with any 400/551 Series Plug -In Detector. The XR5 is used with the System Sensor 400 Series and the NOTIFIER CPX-5511 SDX- 551 and FDX -551. The XR2 is used with the NOTIFIER SD -651, CP -651, SDX-751, and CPX-751. When used with the XP -4 Extension Poles, detectors can be in- stalled and removed up to 18 feet overhead without ladders or scaffolding. .XP -4 Page 2 of 2 — DN -4653 - 06/01/00 Relay Modules End -of -line supervisory applications in 12- or 24 -volt systems can be handled' 3_ f with the A77 -716B Relay Module. It is CRT -400 specifically designed for use in four - wire systems. A77-7968 Effective: March 1, 2001 Features ■ The Adapter TM feature offers four field selectable candela values — 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 for wall & ceiling mount ■ Sync strobes and sync temporal horns, with horn silence on 2 wires ■ Distinctive temporal horn ■ Internally adjustable volume control ■ Low current draw ■ Single gang and universal mount configurations ■ UL 1971 & UL 464 listed - all other listings pending ■ UL 1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount ■ ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant ■ Screw terminals accept 12 awg wire ■ Synchronization requires 5406 Sync Control Module ■ Made in U.S.A., ISO 9001 quality crafted Description Faraday's 2820 & 2821 Sync Electronic Horns and 2824 Horn Strobes provide synchronous strobes with synchronous temporal tone signals on one pair of wires. The 2820 mounts to a single gang box, the 2821 and 2824 have a universal mounting plate for 1 gang, 2 gang or 4" square box mounting. Faraday notification devices are designed with the installer in mind. They are constructed with the elec- tronics in the housing and not in the box. This design eliminates possible ground faults from crowded electri- cal boxes. The Adapter feature offers four field select- able candela settings — 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110. oho Detail —Adapter s� selector switch An internal volume control provides adjustment of dBA output levels. See detail on page 2. The 2824 strobe construction consists of a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for maximum reliabil- ity and efficiency. The strobe has a rounded dome shape made of clear polycarbonate. The 2820, 2821 and 2824 are used on circuits with a 5406 Sync Control Module. FARADAY Is Mod f Engineering Specifications 'I E obe The audible/visual notification appliances shall be Faraday Series 2824 Selectable Candela Strobe -Horns, or approved equal. The audible appliances shall be Faraday Series 2820 or 2821 Horns, or approved equal. The visual segment of the Series 2824 shall be the Adapter Selectable Candela Strobe and shall be listed to UL1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired). The Series 2824, 2820 and 2821 Horns shall be UL listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). The appliances shall be listed for indoor applications and shall be ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant. The strobe segment of the Series 2824 shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Operating Voltage Range Limits. The strobe shall consist of a xenon flash tube enclosed in a rugged clear polycarbonate lens. The strobe shall be of a low current design, and shall provide a minimum of four (4) field selectable strobe intensity settings, 15/ 75, 30/75, 75, and 110candela. All settings shall be Page 1 ... continued n Models 2820 & 2821 Sync Temporal Horns and 2824 Horn Strobes (Adapter Series) " UL1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount applica- tions. The selector switch shall be tamper resistant. It shall not be necessary to remove the appliance from the mounting surface to select the strobe intensity. The Series 2824 Horn segment, and the Series 2820, and 2821 Horns shall produce a temporal pattern audible output, and shall have an internal volume control providing adjustment of dBA output levels. The appliances shall be designed for 24 VDC, 2 wire synchronous operation. The appliances shall be used on notification appliance circuits equipped with the compatible Faraday Series 5406 Sync Module, or other source of Faraday Sync Protocol.and shall provide synchronization of both the strobe flash rate and the PSpecifications 1 iJ FAS -94 temporal audible output pattern. The strobe and audibl signals shall not drift out of synchronization. The appliances shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while the strobes continue to operate, all on 2 wires. Inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity circuit supervision by an FAC P. The Series 2824 Horn -Strobe, and the Series 2821 Horn shall include a Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to single -gang, two -gang, and 4" square backboxes, as well as Faraday 3046 and 3047 Surface Boxes. The Series 2820 Horn shall be designed specifically for mounting to a single -gang backbox. Physical Dimensions - Environmental j�2-3/4"-y � 1-3/4" 4-3/4"--1 1-3/4" (-- �1/2 32 F to 120 F OAC to 490C) with 85 /o 1/2 humidity a �a �dp,VY �k IF Operating Voltage Range Limits Horn: 20-31 Vdc or VFWR 4-1/2" 4-3/4" Strobe: 16-33 Vdc or VFWR" yy I , Mounting 28206, mounts to a 1 gang box 2821 B & 2824B, have a universal mounting plate for 1 gang, 2 gang or 4" Model 2820 Model 2821 square box Typical Horn Ratings at 10 Feet* Temporal Horn - l --I Maximum: 95 db @ 23 mA Minimum: 90 db Q 20 mA Typical dBA ratings are frontal sound readings taken with a dB meter with signal mounted on wall. U Shipping Weight 2820: 8 oz. approx. n 2821: 8 oz. approx. 2824: 12 oz. approx. 2-1/2"' - 1/2" M"kr \ A Selector Switch Model 2824 Page 2 2 3 O 1 4 Max. Volume Detail — Volume adjustment (factory set at max. volume) rJ Models 2820 & 2821 Sync Temporal Horns and 2824 Horn Strobes (Adapter Series) Ordering Information Synchronized Silenceable Temporal Horns & Horns Strobes, 24 Vdc Part Number Candela Strobe Current Horn Current Q 24 Vdc (Max. Volume) 28208-0-(")-24-DC ..... n/a............................................. n/a ...................... 23 mA 2821 B-O-(-)-24-DC ..... n/a............................................. n/a ...................... 23 mA 2824B-(-)-24-DC ......... 15/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 63 mA .................... 23 mA 5406-0-(")-DC-24 .. 30/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 84 mA .................... 23 mA 75 Cd Strobe ......................... 143 mA ................... 23 mA 110 Cd Strobe ....................... 178 mA ................... 23 mA (14) red or (21) off-white Accessories FAS -94 13 I Part No. Description 3017B-0-(-) ........... Flush or surface box, 1-9/16"(D) 304613-0-(") ........... Surface box, 2" (D) 30478-0-(') ........... Surface box, 2-3/4" (D) 3048B-0-(") ........... Flush box, 2-3/4" (D) 5406-0-(")-DC-24 .. Sync Control module Typical Wiring for 2820 with 5406 Dual Sync Control Module . (Polarity shown in Alarm condition) From control panel steady (non -pulsing or pulsing) silenceable NAC or previous silenceable notification appliance 0 o From control panel steady (non -pulsing) non-silenceable ® ® �-- —� NAC or previous silenceable notification appliance 19 — 0 I @ 0 0 5406 - 20-31 Vdc or VFWR .055A Supervised and powered by non-silenceable NAC from fire alarm control unit 0 + to next device - or EOL Typical Wiring for 2821 with 5406 Dual Sync Control Module (Polarity shown in Alarm condition) From control panel steady (non -pulsing or pulsing) silenceable NAC or previous silenceable notification appliance From control panel steady (non -pulsing) non-silenceable I o o �� NAC or previous silenceable notification appliance 1 0 o I OO Qo 5406 - 20-31 Vdc or VFWR .055A Supervised and powered by 3D CD non-silenceable NAC from fire �•• alarm control unit + to next device - or EOL Page 3 Models 2820 & 2821 Sync Temporal Horns and 2824 Horn Strobes (Adapter Series) LJ Typical Wiring for 2824 with 5406 Dual Sync Control Module n (Polarity shown in Alarm condition with horn and strobe on same circuit) From control panel steady (non -pulsing or pulsing) n silenceable NAC or previous silenceable notification appliance From control panel steady (non -pulsing) non-silenceable LL 0 o NAC or previous silenceable-notification appliance E a —_� I I v=J tE, I o a� O o 5406 - 20-31 Vdc or VFWR .055A Supervised and powered by non-silenceable NAC from fire alarm control unit a805 S. Maumee Street Tecumseh, Ml 49286, U.S.A. Phone: (800) 465-7115 n Fax: (800) 552-3557 Page 4 7N FANS -94 �6 . to next device or EOL WARNING - The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary and is subject to change without notice. The devices described in this document have specific instruction sheets which cover various technical, limitation and liability information. Copies of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, which also contains important information, are provided with the product and are available from the Manufacturer. Information contained in these documents should be consulted before specifying or using the product. For further information or assistance concerning particular problems contact the Manufacturer. E Features Effective: March 1, 2001 IZA0 on `I u fi LJ P Lj ■ The Adapter M feature offers four field selectable candela strobe values - 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 for wall & ceiling mount ■ Operates in either sync or non -sync modes ■ Low current draw ■ Integral universal mounting - single gang, double gang or 4" square box ■ Colors — red or off-white ■ ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant ■ UL 1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount — CSFM and ULC pending ■ Made in USA, ISO 9001 certified ■ A 5406 Sync Control Module is only required to activate the Instant Sync feature, nothing to set or change at the strobe unit Description The 2700 and 2701 strobes combine state of the art electronics to provide reliability and low current draw to meet visual life safety applications. The Adapter feature offers four field selectable candela settings - 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110. S Detail - Adapter selector switch The integral universal mounting plate provides for easy installation with single gang, double gang or 4" square box mounting. The lens construction provides high candela output with low current consumption while meeting UL and ADA standards. The 2701 provides the same strobe choices and is constructed of metal for mounting bell or chime devices to the plate. FARADAY 2700 Strobe 2701 Strobe Plate The 2700 & 2701 use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes have a rounded dome shape made of clear polycarbonate. The 2700 uses a terminal block which will accept 12 awg wire for easy installation and the 2701 uses a pigtail (4 wire) connection. Typical Applications • Signals for hearing impaired • High noise areas where audible signals are ineffective • Add strobes to existing bell installations where replacing the audible signal is not practical Page 1 FAS -88 I Models 2700 Stand -Alone Strobe & 2701 Strobe Plate (Adapter Series) FAS -88 Lj Engineering Specifications The visual notification appliances shall be Faraday Adapter Series 2700 or 2701 field selectable candela strobe appliance, or approved equal. They shall be listed to UL1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired) for indoor applications, and shall be ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant. The strobe shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Operating Voltage Range limits of 16 to 33Vdc. The strobe light shall consist of a Xenon flash tube enclosed in a rugged, clear polycarbonate lens. Inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity circuit supervision by an FACP. The Strobe shall be of low current design, and shall provide a minimum of four (4 ) field selectable strobe intensity settings, 15/75, 30/75, 75 and 110 candela. All settings shall be UL 1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount Ell 2700 Specifications a Environmental 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) at 85% RH Operating Voltage Range Limits 16-33 Vdc or VFWR Mounting Integral universal mounting plate mounts to single gang, double gang or 4" square box. Screw terminals accept 12 awg wire Shipping Weight 9 oz. approx. applications. The selector switch shall be tamper- 1(0 resistant. It shall not be necessary to remove the strobe from the mounting surface to select the strobe intensity. When synchronization is required, the strobe shall be compatible with the Faraday 5406 Sync Module, or other source of Faraday Sync Protocol, and shall not drift out of synchronization. The Series 2700 Stand -Alone Strobe shall have an integral universal mounting plate that shall allow mounting to single- gang, two -gang, and 4" square backboxes, as well as Faraday 3046 and 3047 Surface Boxes. A cover trim plate shall be included to enhance appearance. There shall be no mounting holes or screw heads visible. The Series 2701 Strobe Plate shall facilitate the addition of a strobe to a bell installation. The Strobe Plate shall mount to a 4" square backbox for flush mounting. 2700 Physical Dimensions 4-5/8" 4 kJ' � � l�s.� � �1�, ��' �rtvn#a'� '• 2700 Ordering Information Stand -Atone Strobes Part No. Voltage Candela Strobe Current 27006 -(*)-24 .......................... 16-33 Vdc .............. 15/75 ..................... 63 mA (field selectable candela) 30/75 ..................... 84 mA 75 .......................... 143 mA 110 ........................ 178 mA E* Color (14) red (21) off-white Page 2 Selector Switch Accessories Part No. Description 3017B-0-(*) ........... 1-9/16" (D) Flush or surface box 30188-0-(*) ........... Semi -Flush adapter plate 3019B-0-(*) ........... Concealed conduit plate PM -6933 ............... Bidirectional housing, wall or ceiling, red 3046B-0-(*) ........... 2" (D) surface box 30476-0-(*) ........... 2-3/4" (D) surface box 3048B-0-(*) ........... 2-3/4" (D) flush box 5406B-0-(*)-24-DC Sync control module Effective: June 1, 2001 (replaces March 1, 2001) FAS -89 E, Features ■ Contactless Electro -Mechanical design, resulting in no contact generated interference and high reliability (Patent #5,596,477) ® The Adapter' feature offers four field selectable candela values - 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 ■ Strobe operates in either sync or non -sync modes ■ Strobe synchronization requires the 5406 Sync Control Module ■ UL 1971 & UL 464 listed for both wall and ceiling mount — all other listings pending ■ ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant ■ Horn/strobe can be wired together or independently ■ Screw Terminals accept #12 Awg. ■ Made in USA, ISO 9001 quality crafted Description The Electron -Mechanical Horns & Horn Strobes combine state of the art electronics with the rugged proven durability of a mechanical horn. The combina- tion of electronics and mechanics provide the maxi- mum penetrating sound power while eliminating problems associated with mechanical contacts. The Adapter feature offers four field selectable candela settings - 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110. a �Qo 15 Detail - Adapter selector switch SL All models remove the effects of inrush and RFI noise associated with contact operated mechanical devices This design also eliminates the possibility of dust and dirt contaminating the contacts. The construction of the horn and horn strobe allows for flush mounting on a standard 4 -inch square back box or surface mounting on a 3046 or 3047 surface box. Screw terminals are provided for the horn and strobe. The strobe can be configured to operate independently from the horn. The strobe has a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for maximum reliability and effi- ciency, and a rounded dome shape made of clear polycarbonate. FARADAY Models 6234 & 6254 Horn Strobe Models 6230 & 6250 Horn Models 6238 & 6258 Horn Strobe - k, ray{►M AKeH rm-5 K a kiF ; if..im "14ii b ='N,.; i 'baYW ; '. r r■ ray rN'! Y aw�llw ri',r� Db 4 4b� ! oaF A. � ♦Mei • s r .. Models 6225 & ._>. 6245 Horn Engineering Specifications The audible/visual notification appliances shall be Faraday Series 6234, 6238, 6254, or 6258 Selectable Candela Strobe - Electron Mechanical Horn, or approved equal. The audible appliances shall be Faraday 6225, 6230, 6245, or 6250 Electron Mechani- cal Horns, or approved equal. The Series 6234, 6238, 6254, and 6258 visual segment shall be the Adapter Selectable Candela Strobe and shall be listed to UL1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired). Audibles shall be UL listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). In addition to indoor applications, the 6230 and 6250 shall also be UL listed for outdoor applications, when mounted in a Faraday 3014 or 3015 Surface Box. All other appliances shall be listed for indoor applications, Page 1 ... continued FAS -89 Models 6225/6245/6230/6250 DC Mechanical Horns & 6234/6238/6254/6258 Horn Strobes (Adapter Series) and shall be ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant. The strobe segment shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Operating Voltage Range Limits. The strobe shall consist of a xenon flash tube enclosed in a rugged clear polycarbonate lens. The strobe shall be of a low current design, and shall provide a minimum of four (4) field selectable strobe intensity settings, 15/ 75, 30/75, 75, and 110 candela. All settings shall be UL1971 listed for both wall and ceiling mount applica- tions. The selector switch shall be tamper resistant. It shall not be necessary to remove the appliance from the mounting surface to select the strobe intensity. When strobe synchronization is required, the Strobe shall be compatible with the Faraday 5406 Sync Module, or other source of Faraday Sync Protocol, and shall not drift out of synchronization. Inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity circuit supervision by an FACP. Specifications Dimensions Environmental Indoor: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) at 85% RH Weatherproof (6230 & 6250 only): -31°F to 150°F (-35°C to 66°C) at 95% RH Primary Input Voltage Horn: 21-30 Vdc or VFWR Strobe: Operating Voltage Range Limits 16-33 Vdc or VFWR Horn Current see ordering information on page 3 Typical dB Rating at 10 Feet 6225, 6230, 6234, 6238: 96 dB 6245, 6250, 6254, 6258: 100 dB Note: Typical dB ratings are frontal readings taken with a dB meter with signal mounted on wall. 5 The appliances shall combine electronics with the rugged durability and maximum penetrating sound power of a mechanical horn. To eliminate the effects of inrush and RFI noise, the appliances shall not have any mechanical contacts. The Series 6225, 6230, 6234, and 6238 shall have a typical sound output rating of 96dBA at 10 feet. The Series 6245, 6250, 6254, and 6258 shall have a typical sound output rating of 100dBA at 10 feet. The Series 6230, 6234, 6250, and 6254 shall have a square grille for mounting to a 4" square backbox, as well as Faraday 3046 and 3047 Surface Boxes. The Series 6225, 6245, 6238 and 6258 shall have a round grille for mounting to a 4" square backbox. 0 0 • -,off o 3-1/8" y 11/16" Model 6234 & 6254 Mounting Flush Indoor: 4" square box Selector Switch Surface Indoor: 3046 or 3047 box Weatherproof (6230 & 6250 only): 3014 or 3015 WP box Shipping Weight Horn: 1-1/2 lbs. approx. Horn/Strobe: 2 lbs. approx. 0 0 0 0 n W 7-11/32" � Ate. 0 0 � o o a f 7/ 16" — 1 " 2-7 Selector Switch Model 6225 & 6245 Page 2 Model 6238 & 6258 '32" Models 6225/6245/6230/6250 DC Mechanical Horns & 6234/6238/6254/6258 Horn Strobes (Adapter Series) Ordering Information Mechanical Horn & Horn Strobes, 24 Vdc Part Number Candela Strobe Current Horn Current 6230B-0-(*)-24-DC ..... n/a.......................................... n/a ......................... 38 mA 6234B -(*)-24 ............... 15/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 63 mA .................... 38 mA 65 mA 30/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 84 mA .................... 38 mA 3047B-0-(*) ........... 75 Cd Strobe .......................... 143 mA .................. 38 mA 5406B-0-(*)-24-DC 110 Cd Strobe ........................ 178 mA .................. 38 mA Mechanical Horns & Horn Strobes, 24 Vdc, White (Ceiling Mount) 6225B -0 -21 -24 -DC ..... n/a.......................................... n/a ......................... 38 mA 6238B-21-24 ............... 15/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 63 mA .................... 38 mA 30/75 Cd Strobe ..................... 84 mA .................... 38 mA 75 Cd Strobe .......................... 143 mA .................. 38 mA 110 Cd Strobe ........................ 178 mA .................. 38 mA * Color: (14) red or (21) off-white Ordering Information Mechanical Hi dB Horn & Horn Strobes, 24 Vdc Part Number Candela Strobe Current Horn Current 6250B-0-(*)-24-DC ..... n/a.............................................. n/a ..................... 65 mA 6254B-(')-24 ............... 15/75 Cd Strobe ...................... 63 mA ................... 65 mA 65 mA 30/75 Cd Strobe ...................... 84 mA .................. 65 mA 3047B-0-(*) ........... 75 Cd Strobe .......................... 143 mA ................. 65 mA 5406B-0-(*)-24-DC 110 Cd Strobe ........................ 178 mA .................. 65 mA DC Mechanical High dB Horns & Horn Strobes, 24 Vdc, White (Ceiling Mount) 6245B -0 -21 -24 -DC ..... n/a.............................................. n/a ..................... 65 mA 625813-21-24 ............... 15/75 Cd Strobe ...................... 63 mA .................. 65 mA 30/75 Cd Strobe ...................... 84 mA .................. 65 mA 75 Cd Strobe, white ............... 143 mA ................. 65 mA 110 Cd Strobe ........................ 178 mA ................. 65 mA * Color: (14) red or (2 1) off-white Page 3 Accessories Part No. Description 3014B-0-(') ........... Weatherproof box 1/2" NPT 301513-0-(*) ........... Weatherproof box 3/4" NPT 3017B-0-(*) ........... Flush or surface box, 1-9/16" (D) 3046B-0-(*) ........... Surface box, 2" (D) 3047B-0-(*) ........... Surface box, 2-3/4" (D) 30488 .................... Flush box, 2-3/4" (D) 5406B-0-(*)-24-DC Sync control module PM -6933 ............... Pendent wall or ceiling housing Effective: December 18. 2000 (replaces: June 21, 1999) 4.. 1-9/16" 3011 B -O-(*) Extension Ring 3046B-0-(*) Surface Box 3019B-0-(*) Concealed Conduit Plate 1- 12" 3014/30158-0-(*) Weatherproof Box FAS -50 ryD � !cum i 30478-0-(*) Surface Box 3017B-0-(*) Surface Box 3048B Flush Box 5-17/32 #_1 FARADAY 711■ISI■I�r� CO 111M x. &� I 3018B-0-(*) 2366 Semi -Flush Plate Bell & Clock Guard 5001 B -O-(*) Single Projector Notes: 1. 3046 has (3) combination 1/2" and 3/4" knockouts (both sides and back). 2. 3047 and 3048 have (5) combination 1/2" and 3/4" knockouts (top, bottom, sides and back). 3. Device mounting holes on 3046, 3047 and 3048 are #8-32 tapped. FAS -50 Notification Appliance Mounting Accessories FAS -50 n fit— W —+I 3/10 lr_ i— 0 5-7/16" 5-7/16" � 4 H 3025/3026/3027 B-0-(*) Flush Bell Grille SQ. I I SQ. /J 1 J� aDimensions for Bell Grille and Box Part No. Desc. W H D * (14) red, (21) off-white Faraday, LLC 805 S. Maumee Street Tecumseh, MI 49286, U.S.A. Phone: (517) 423-2111 Fax: (517) 423-2320 n Http: www.faradayllc.com WARNING - The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary and is subject to change without notice. The devices described in this document have specific instruction sheets which cover various technical, limitation and liability information. Copies of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, which also contains important information, are provided with the product and are available from the Manufacturer. Information contained in these documents should be consulted before specifying or using the product. For further information or assistance concerning particular problems contact the Manufacturer. 3025 ...................... Grille, 4" bell ........................ 6" ........ 6" ...... 3/16„ 3026 ...................... Grille, 6" bell ........................ 9" ........ 9" ...... 3/16" 3027 ...................... Grille, 10" bell......................11"....... 11" ..... 3/16" 3029 ...................... Box, 4" bell........................ 4-3/8" ..4-3/8"... 4-1/4 3030 ...................... Box, 6" bell ........................... 7" ........ 7" ..... 4-5/8" 3031 ...................... Box, 10" bell......................... 11"....... 11" .... 5-1/8" Ordering Information 11----11 LJ 3011 B -O-(*) ............Extension ring 30148-0-(*) ............................ Weatherproof back box- 1/2" NPT �i 3015B-0-(*) ............................ Weatherproof back box- 3/4" NPT 3017B-0-(*) ............................ Surface box 3018B-0-(*) ............................ Semi -flush plate 3019B-0-(*) ............................ Concealed conduit plate 5001 B -O-(*) ............................ Single projector (not for use w/strobed grilles) 50028-0-(*) ............................ Double projector (not for use w/strobed grilles) 3029B .................................... Flush bell back box, 4", black 3025B -O-(*) ............................ Flush grille, 4" 3030B .................................... Flush bell back box, 6", black 3026B-0-(*) ........................... Flush grille, 6" 3031 B .................................... Flush Bell back box, 10", black 3027B-0-(*) ............................ Flush grille, 10" 3046B-0-(*) ............................ Surface box j 3047B-0-(*) ............................ Surface box 3048B .................................... Flush box PM -6933 ................................ Bi -direct housing, red 2366 ....................................... Round wire guard for bells and clocks * (14) red, (21) off-white Faraday, LLC 805 S. Maumee Street Tecumseh, MI 49286, U.S.A. Phone: (517) 423-2111 Fax: (517) 423-2320 n Http: www.faradayllc.com WARNING - The information contained in this document is intended only as a summary and is subject to change without notice. The devices described in this document have specific instruction sheets which cover various technical, limitation and liability information. Copies of these instruction sheets and the General Product Warning and Limitations Document, which also contains important information, are provided with the product and are available from the Manufacturer. Information contained in these documents should be consulted before specifying or using the product. For further information or assistance concerning particular problems contact the Manufacturer. 19 AFA Protective Systems Inc. 200 High Street, Boston, MA 02110 617-772-5900 Fax: 617-772-5923 MA License #1379C SINCE 1873 AFA WARRANTY AND POLICIES WARRANTY AFA Protective Systems Inc warrants the equipment that it provides to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of acceptance by the Authority Having Jurisdiction or from the date of substantial service to the end user, whichever occurs first. A device or LJ unit of equipment that is found to be defective shall be returned to AFA Protective Systems in it's original, manufacturer's package and will be repaired or replaced at the option of AFA Protective System, all at no additional cost to the contractor or end user. This does not include devices or equipment that have been tampered with, modified, written on, or that have been serviced by anyone not in the employ of AFA Protective Systems, Inc. This warranty does not include any device or equipment that has been damaged as a result of Acts of God, such as lightning, water damage, power surges and the like. POLICIES AFA Protective Systems, Inc. always endeavors to respond to a call for service, emergency or otherwise, in a timely manor. As technical staff is available 24 hours a day, seven days per week, we will respond at any time there is an emergency. For in -warranty emergency service there will be no charge based upon the guidelines listed above. However, should non - F11 emergency, warranty service or otherwise, be requested during off-duty Lihours AFA Protective Systems standard - � y dard over time rates will apply. Lj oa0000 a C; E n rn cn F - cli C6 C6 C6 C6 V� U Cfl ti z U) M �- V O cn � � 7 C) V O LO O V i M O w- tD O O = O Q O 'p c O d ti N E G m � G 0 L r aLr-m .€ x as r � N M ct In to O , N V Z 0 Lo O r. ti y o v co p � O M p � M ,) Q o r N O N _ r 'a N LO (D � (D r- LO o O V- N oa0000 a C; E n rn cn c _ ^ M M � N Cfl ti z U) M �- r T C9 LO to � N 70 _cc a C; E n rn cn c _ ^ Q o� z U) M N O cn � � = 00 7 C) V O LO O V O w- tD Q O 'p c O _v > O J N E G m � aLr-m .€ x as N M ct In to O , N V Z 21 LINE -LOSS CALCULATION SHEET Step #1: Determine the output current capacity of the notification appliance circuit from the manufacturer's installation manual. Step#2: Determine what margin is desired or specified. The specification might require, for instance, 25% spare capacity. This is usually interpreted to mean that regardless of the size of wire installed, all devices would operate at their manufacturer's specified output with 20% more load added. (25% spare capacity equals 20% of total load) This 25% spare capacity is not usually interpreted to mean that a 1.75amp circuit can be loaded to 80%, 1.4a, of its capacity, with the conductor size based upon a load of 1.4a. The conductor sizing must include whatever spare capacity is desired or specified. Step #3: Determine the total load on the circuit by adding together the current draw of each device connected to the circuit. The current draw of each device can either be determined from the label on the device or from the submittal information. Step #4: Add to this figure the margin desired or specified. Step #4: Determine the length of the two -conductor circuit from the control unit to the last device. This would be the figure, in feet, for as class B, Style Y, circuit that you would enter into the table below. If the circuit is a Class A, Style Z circuit, then you need to add to this figure the cable length required to return from the last device to the control unit. Step #5: Determine the minimum wire size from the table. Notes: A. This table is based on an allowable maximum wire loss of 10%, as most notification appliances will operate to manufacturers' specifications at 24VDC minus 10% or 21.6VDC. If this is not the case with the devices you are using, refer to that manufacturer's line -loss calculation sheet. B. Few manufacturers manufacture notification appliances that can accommodate conductors larger than 12awg. If you determine that a circuit requires a conductor larger that 12awg, it is suggested that you investigate the possibility of using a remote notification appliance circuit panel for that circuit. 4.0 3.5 3.0 N E 2.5 aZi 2.0 U M 1.5 0 J 1.0 0.5 100 1000 10000 Distance (Feet) Maximum Line Loss = 10% �14 4 f k . § o E / z in . § @ o @ ® @ CL / . , (D E 0 I CN / 0 0 / /■ w N 00 0 0 E k « 6 6 6 6 & . </ R Q ® 0000E 0 %� $ $ « a q E&/ E % 6 a 0C 6 a ~ ww \ 2% 0 6 6 6 6 6 -r0 < / ®5; F- R . q J3/ ��3 kk/CNk 0 0 0 0 «5;O ■ / e LL ¥ 2 « d a d a m ± 2 -i ƒ < R E L 2 > _ 0 0 0 0 LO k / / / F- CO < 0 §\ q % mn� 66666 / p F- 3z L) CL» w < 0k % ¥ ƒ )� � R 0 ui / k </ k0 § . / m k § CO v o \WW / � � . U) LU 0w ® a. O 2 w f / $ 0.0 12 / F § E CL Lu 3 w / ®° @CL E / < ¥ & L -i E < m « £ w o b / �L a7 /•� ƒ7RE2 // / •r� / I D= \/ a)C) o LO < / < C140. .Iq2 O <7 . $ \ / 04 / 2 U D a D D U D LU W w 0� (r O Q z Z W r W U Q0� Z z UJ Q d ujQ Dry CO W J OZ Q O m D D D D D D D D NN N (V O) C) d .a a) 0 o E ` O N � ` O N d N N N Q = Q � cu � N F'- 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Q� = J Z Q W Il- NIRT (0 O O O N M CO LO CO V• O E a) Q —'IT O N M O N Q Q oQ=ov0000 Uri Qcn U 0 0 0 0 0 0) 0) M N z OMO OMO H a w 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O CV Ci M p e w x 0 0 0 0 0 0 M U H UJ 2 Q J � W N O Cl O Q U O o O o o O (p a� E a W U o 0 0 0 00 c J MQ x 0 0 0 0 0 o N N'O W, 000000 CL O-0 a a) `) p U) p Q X 0 U UO o a Q o O W M N w xcr N a p0 cU m v CL w w U U UoZ Z E i U) mO m0 � r 0 c o U N O-0 E a E Q o U) U) -i � `° Ecn lL Q fA Q L wwwwwpf O O ;Q cu oo���z o cu o0 0 F- �F �C 14" q4- a) N N N N N O a E L) Q mm m m m Q vqq000Z N --o a c N N N N N NN N (V O) C) d M T- 2 23 cn 0� o � �a) 0(U o m N �CLQ a) 0- EN �- 00000000 O Q J Z O O N M O M M O LO N Z E 0- w O— d O v r 0 0 M" a) w p °ate OONOOOOO M Q(n U I- 00000000 O LO tt O tl- M (f) M O Q, w a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O N N M �0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O H co) � U z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a W= U (O (O V- M M M M M Q 000OOd AMM O N C) 0 0 a � O Q 5W 66666666 CO a) H E W = 00000000 a. U 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q U) 0 0 p E N :3W o000000o cod U (U CL J 0-0 CL C U � c° p p p X_ O Z U n C a) O U') LO w U)Q X cr Z 0a) a. p V a c c U IX aa)) U co W W WUUO m0000/����� Q c C) cn `� V 0-0 @@@)z~ E m = C - f-F-www�Q �_ " a CL 42 cncncnmmmOiU J F- E zzz000m� fn Qfn Q03 Q' X W F -F- O cv (� c0 3 0 0 0 Z O cuc O O o > CF - v v v v v v U n a) NCVNNNNpO O E ������v a)+� vmm0000z (fly a N NN O O O N U) 00 CO 00 t'- ti t` M Q C Q N N N N N N co Q M T- 2 23 BACK BOX REQUIREMENTS KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE North Andover, MA Fire Alarm control unit Battery Cabinet SNAC-9 5406 Synchronization Module NBG-12S Manual Pull Station ST-FRCO1 Pull Station Cover 2451 Smoke detect05 w/13401 B Base DH I OOAC/DCP Duct Smoke Detector RTS -451 Remote Test Station A77 -716B Power Supervision Relay 282413-14-24 Horn/Strobe 2700B-14-24 Strobe 6230B-0-14 Weather -resistant Horn Surface can by AFA Protective No back box required Surface can by AFA Protective 4" square, preferably deep 4" square w/1 gang cover or single gang No back box required • 4" square No back box required Single gang box Does not mount to box. Install either in last duct -mounting smoke detector or in separate 4" square box adjacent to the detector. Single gang or 4" square. If single gang note that the box is off -center of the device. See sample. Single gang or 4" square. If single gang note that the box is off -center of the device. See sample. Cast back box by AFA Protective FIRE ALARM SYSTEM �..�. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Kohl's Department Store North Andover, MA Activation of a WATERFLOW SWITCH, MANUAL PULL STATION, or AREA SMOKE DETCTOR shall cause: 1. All audible & visual notification appliances shall activate throughout the building. All indoor audible appliances will sound in a temporal pattern. All indoor audible and visual signals shall be synchronized. 2. A local energy, Gamewell master box will trip notifying the North Ansover Fire Department. 3. The zone in alarm will be annunciated on the display at the fire alarm control unit. 4. The notification appliances can be silenced at the fire alarm control unit. If the alarm is activated by a waterflow switch, the notification appliances will not be silencable until the waterflow switch returns to a non -alarm condition 5. The system can be reset at the fire alarm control unit. Activation of a DUCT -MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR shall cause: 1. All of the functions listed above to activate. 2. A remote test/alarm switch located at the control panel shall annunciate the detector in alarm. Each switch, one per duct detector, shall be placarded with the HVAC unit designation. Activation of a SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH shall cause: 1. The tamper switch in alarm will be annunciated as zone 2 at the fire alarm control unit. The sonalert will sound within the fire alarm control unit. 2. The system can be reset at the fire alarm control unit. Page 1 of 2 pages 11/12/01 Activation of a SYSTEM TROUBLE shall cause: 1. The sonalert will sound and the system trouble LED will illuminate at the fire alarm control unit. 2. The security panel will be tripped with a system trouble condition. 3. The sonalert can be silenced at the fire alarm control unit, but the trouble LEDs will remain illuminated until the trouble condition has been resolved. Page 2 of 2 pages 11/12/01 2 W W qy, 3: onny , -A � W , .... :: - ;%;"��0, , 6� ) _Ni jj Ilk .57 a y Ly : C , AW .MITI&1 P/�/�d+\ U 11 Quo 13%, lob r 9 W—KA. Rk spawn 0 2 loss, of, R, I" A x A f Awl 5 iv. to Ag"mg) Lft n low A111 gj '718 Jan MUM 4mm W LOST! lot �Y 51 -'a M4 X, Bergmeyer Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com PUNCH LIST To: From: Date: Re: Scott Eaton and Marshall Conlev, Dimeo Construction Jay Overholt, Kohl's Department Stores Holly Schufa February 22, 2002 Architectural Punch List Number 01 Kohl's .Department Store Punch List Date: February 22, 2002 Project No. 0 1126. 10 O1 -General 1. Remove all temporary facilities. 2. Furnish keys to the owner/tenant. 3. Remove excess material, tools, and clean throughout the building. 02 - Site Construction 1. Landscaping is incomplete 2. Clean up the back yard at the loading dock area. 3. Clean up the front yard free of debris. 04 — Masonry 1. Wash down the exterior brick at the entrance area. 06 - CarpentrX 1. Complete the cap flashing at the left tower along the front facade. 08 - Doors and Windows 1. Missing door silencers in the office areas. 2. The hinge at the manager's office door is missing screws. 09 - Finishes 1. Need to paint the exterior egress stairs and bollards at the rear of building 2. Warning stripes at the electrical panels need to be painted. 3. Touch up the paint at the cash office. 4. Repair the bubble in the wall covering above the water cooler. 5. Touch up the paint in the lunchroom. 6. Repaint the emergency doors at the front of building. 7. Replace the bent "T's" in the ceiling grid and replace the ACT. 15 - Mechanical 1. Need to obtain and HVAC Balance report from the airflow test. 2. Relocate the return air grill in the manager's office. (Too close to the supply duct) CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CONSTRUCTION MANAGER -ADVISER EDITION AIA DOCUMENT G704/CMa (Instructions on reverse side) PROJECT: Kohls Dept. Stores (Name and address) 350 Winthrop Avenue North Andover, MA 01845 TO OWNER: Kohls Dept. Stores (Name and address) Corporate Offices N56 West Ridgewood Drive Menomonee Falls, WI 53051 DATE OF ISSUANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: OWNER ❑ CONSTRUCTION MANAGER ❑ ARCHITECT ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ FIELD ❑ OTHER ❑ PROJECT NOS.: 01126.10 CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: August 13, 2001 TO CONTRACTOR: Dimeo Construction (Name and address) 75 Chapman Street Providence, RI 02905 The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Construction Manager's and Architect's best knowl- edge, information and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below: A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. The fail/eiro toelude any ' ems on such list does not alter the respon- sibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance ct D meats. I �r cC� CrJ�7L—Fr ciG't � o,� iZ a G CONSTRUCTION MANAGER DATE �3fRC3 14Fyf SSD. , 06 . l doZ ARCHITECT BY CATE The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of it s attached hereto within days from the above date of Substantial Completion. ^ l ✓+� � o ��15't�✓�ct'1—� cx� /aL CONTRACTOR Y DA E The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substan 'ally complete and will assume full possession thereof at time) on� (date). WNER BY DAT The responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance shall be as follows: (Note—Owner's and Contractor's legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage.) CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT G704/CMa • CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL, COMPLETION • CONSTRUCTION MANAGER -ADVISER EDITION • 1992 EDITION • AIA° • ©1992 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292 • WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. G704/CMa-1992 INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR AIA DOCt.1MEiNT C;?04/Mi, CERTIFICATE OF SULBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CONSTRL'C'I"ION MANAGER -ADVISER EDITION A. GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Purpose AIA DocuntCnt G70411CMa, Certificate of Substantial Cornpletion, Construction hlanttger-Adviser Edition, is a IICW document. This document was developed to include the Construction Manager in the process of establishing the dale of St. stomia] Completion, Which is est;lbli,shcd for the purpose of commencement of applicable warranties incl to allow the Owncr to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof. 2. Related Documents This document Nvas prepared for use under the terms of :AIA Document A20 /Cita, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Construction Manager -adviser Edition. 3. Use of Current Documents Prior to using any AIA document, the user should consult the AIA, an AIA component chapter or a current AIA Documents List to determine the current edition of each cittc'urnent. 4. Limited License for Reproduction AEA Document G704/(,Ma is a copyrighted work and tnay not be reproduced or excerpted from in substantial part without the express -,written permission of the° AIA. The G; 0 iCkla document: is intended to be used as a consumable - that is, the originai document purchased by the user is intended to be consumed in the course of being used. There is no implied per- mission to reproduce this document, nor does membership in the American Institute of Architects confer any further rights to reproduce. G70-VCMa. A limited license is hereby- granted to retail purchasers to reproduce a m u.,druum of ten copies of a completed or executed G7011/0.1a, but only for use in connection with a particular Project. B. COMPLETING THE G704/CMa FORM %- 1. 1. After the words "Project or Designated Portion shall include:-, insert a derailed description of the Project or portion(s) of the Project that hate been accepted as being substantially complete. 2. Determine Work to be completed. Provide a list of items that are to be completed or corrected. Determine dates for completion of the Work. Establish an amount to be withheld to complete the Work,. • C. EXECUTION OF THE DOCUMENT The G7041(Mi document should be. executed in not less than cluaciruplicate by thc�Owner, Construction llanager, Architect and Contractor, each of whom retains an original. 8/92 adod 1223 Mineral Spring Avenue North Providence, Rhode Island 02904 CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE AFFIDAVIT - STRUCTURAL To: BUILDING OFFICIAL, Town of North Andover Date: February 22, 2002 Project: Kohl's Department Store Address: North Andover Mall 350 Winthrop Avenue In accordance with the requirements of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts General Laws, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, Section 116.2.2.3, and based on periodic construction observation visits by this office, I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the completed project described above appears to be in substantial compliance with the approved plans and specifications prepared by the structural engineer of record, Ambrose Engineering. Sincer '} l David J. O eh, P.E. Principal Massachusetts License Number 42755 f Phone: 401.724.1771 Fax: 401.724.1981 OF M\``�. /oma DAVID J. C-3 ODEH STRUCTURAL No. 42755 aA90 0 ��IwsS/pM DIMEO DIMEO CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 75 Chapman Street • Providence, Rhode Island 02905 • (401) 781-9800 • Fax: (401) 461-4580 • www.dimeo.com 2/22/02 Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner Town of North Andover 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 RE: Kohl's Department Store, North Andover DCC Job #012-01 Construction Certification Dear Mr. Nicetta, I certify to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, Dimeo Construction Company has built the above referenced project per the plans and specifications as prepared by KKE Architects. Sincerely, Di o Construction in y Scott A. Eaton Project Manager cc: file Builders & Construction Managers Established in 1930 Boston, Massachusetts New Haven, Connecticut Portsmouth, New Hampshire (781) 329-1992 (203) 777-5410 (603) 430-2800 i s� d: c CIO - CD c is ' o � i Q.. V oc �R •dam � � d c A c 0 OC :L • O � 4Q_ S. �H :mom ti 0 CL E_ o O ems 0 �U N A r: O � H v J ►�J C � 'L cc H O ✓W O o n� E'o U m o pm aC.3 I m mc c W �... y ' cm o c v C' aoz m Nv 'L o •- ca•�Z co oo � c Q y CL m C c Z :o N dm L_ p •y C = Z = •E v .5 v •y o myoca .0 C a F-- F- 2 S awm 5 1 0. CD O D x S J � V Z CD C. EA \ a r to a tz a EW c z chi w° 0 U w cocn V) d: c CIO - CD c is ' o � i Q.. V oc �R •dam � � d c A c 0 OC :L • O � 4Q_ S. �H :mom ti 0 CL E_ o O ems 0 �U N A r: O � H v J ►�J C � 'L cc H O ✓W O o n� E'o U m o pm aC.3 I m mc c W �... y ' cm o c v C' aoz m Nv 'L o •- ca•�Z co oo � c Q y CL m C c Z :o N dm L_ p •y C = Z = •E v .5 v •y o myoca .0 C a F-- F- 2 S awm 5 1 0. CD O CD L O V Z CD C. O o y = cm ca CD p 'O EW MMM W CLCD � v L = C M = -N O ev 1 � C Z � N O LD din COD cc C �!� C �0 — V2 VV 0 U) U) W w crw Lij VJ ,koaTk Of •t.n • �ti0 r Y '�4s$ACNtfs 1�9 CERTIFICATE OF USE & OCCUPANCY TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER Building Permit Number 068- 7/31/02 Date March 1, 2002 THIS CERTIFIES THAT THE BUILDING LOCATED ON 350 Winthrop Ave MAY BE OCCUPIED AS Retail Space IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE AND SUCH OTHER REGULATIONS AS MAY APPLY. Note: Interior illuminated signs are not allowed under section 6.5 of the Town of North Andover Zoning Bylaw. Any violation of this section without it finding by the ZBA will void this certificate. CERTIFICATE ESSUED TO Kohl's Department Store 350 Winthrop Ave, North Andover Mall North Andover MA 01845 Bu ding Inspector +101iT►� Of «w • ��O 1- 'A t �L'C�+SGi" • 4S$ACHII'�t't CERTIFICATE OF USE & OCCUPANCY TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER Building Permit Number 068- 7/31/02 Date March 1, 2002 THIS CERTIFIES THAT THE BUILDING LOCATED ON 350 Winthrop Ave MAY BE OCCUPIED AS Retail Space IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE AND SUCH OTHER REGULATIONS AS MAY APPLY. Note: Interior illuminated signs are not allowed under section 6.5 of the Town of North Andover Zoning Bylaw. Any violation of this section without a finding by the ZBA will void this certificate. CERTIFICATE ISSUED TO Kohl's Department Store 350 Winthrop Ave, North Andover Mall North Andover MA 01845 Bu lding Inspector N oma,( r R W cz `4 uml z om w' co is o QQ o c t� •a c a ev co m c c e`v a E a Cl), imp Clf) OR o 7 E c Z co � mC r a� N A 0�Z• h C/) m3 � yzoo�- a coo CD 0 -Im (f) W y0 0 c W yCD m o m .A; Ci 'g O C3 .� Z o cc Co o' c •c a m x CL a 0o N c') Cc CD m z W c +-• c o � •N dt � 2 °C •E c�s� w H o H a O.5 0C H = A g = C F- s s aim > F W A CD O CD O v Z O d O H o y O O •- m m CD O CD CD3��i O cc o a� y =s = •� O *r Cc 4 v v� CA z JM o CO C.7 C d' C •— 0 O — CIO N V e1 0 Lliw w Ir Cl)LLJ O! w O A Z j V \ a A 00 ch w° U w o c4 c� cn cn W cz `4 uml z om w' co is o QQ o c t� •a c a ev co m c c e`v a E a Cl), imp Clf) OR o 7 E c Z co � mC r a� N A 0�Z• h C/) m3 � yzoo�- a coo CD 0 -Im (f) W y0 0 c W yCD m o m .A; Ci 'g O C3 .� Z o cc Co o' c •c a m x CL a 0o N c') Cc CD m z W c +-• c o � •N dt � 2 °C •E c�s� w H o H a O.5 0C H = A g = C F- s s aim > F W A CD O CD O v Z O d O H o y O O •- m m CD O CD CD3��i O cc o a� y =s = •� O *r Cc 4 v v� CA z JM o CO C.7 C d' C •— 0 O — CIO N V e1 0 Lliw w Ir Cl)LLJ L GENERAL BUILDING NOTES/CHECKLIST- NOT LIMITED TO ITEMS BELOW POST ALL LOT NUMBERS, ADDRESS, AND PERMIT (COPY OK)..or no inspections INSPECTIONS: (Minimum) Excavation, Footing, Foundation, Frame, Insulation, Final. FOOTINGS: Continuous Full 2x4 Keyway / Continuous strip footings for interior columns FOUNDATION: Rebar as required Anchor bolts or straps Damproofing Foundation drain - pipe/stone/fabric filter/cover and outlet connection. FRAME: Fireblock - over girts/plates between floor joist Penetrations for plumbing, heat, elec, etc. WaUs at stair stringers. Windbrace corners and center bearing partitions. Size ridge to provide full bearing at rafter cuts. Hip and Valley rafters - watch bearing at walls. Ridge & Hip - Provide proper connections. Cathedral roof rafters provide proper connections and use "Hurricane Clips" tie to plate. Stair stringers - watch cuts and heal support. Joist hangers - fully nailed w/ hanger nails. Sill plates 2-2X6 (1 PT) w/sill seal. Girts - solid brick or steel plate bearing at foundations '/7 " air space at sides in foundation pockets. Lateral bracing at ends. Certified calculations. required for Beams/LVL's Trusses. Solid bearing support for Headers/Beams etc. Check headroom clearances - stairways, under beams Attic Access. (min. 22x30 w/3' headroom above). Crawl space access. (min. 18x24). Bath exhaust fans to have metal duct to exterior (not in soffit). Firecode S/R wood frame of "0" clearance fireplaces & stoves Window Schedule or Every Habitable Room Must Have: Natural light equal to 8% of floor area. % of required glazing shall be openable. Bedrooms required min. 20x24 egress window or door. Vent attic spaces - "proper vent", soffit and required ridge vents. Firecode under stairs if used for storage FIREPLACES: Separate permit required. Inspections at Footing - Smoke Chamber - Finish Smooth parging, clean joints, 8" solid @ combust. Surf. DECKS: Separate permit required: Lag to house, provide flashing. Rails min. 36" high, Baluster max space 5" on center. Over 8' above grade, use 6x6 posts w/lateral bracing. Lag all posts and rails. Pier footings down 48", Conc. pad at stair base. FINISH: Handrails returned to wall/newall post. Guardrails required alongside open cellar stairs. Exterior grading complete. Certificate or occupancy required prior to occupying structure. Temporary Stairs required for inspection. Re -inspection fee - $25.00 (Be Ready). Certificate of occupancy required prior to occupying structure. m+�R��f�C L AA AOM ��� Town of North AndoverNORTH q�. Building Department �,� gt`. �� ^b'6 0 27 Charles Street 0 �` North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 .. - (978) 688-9545 Fax (978) 688-9542 COCNILNwkk 1 APPLICATION FOR CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY / INSPECTION ADDRESS 356 64%rh Z,2i2 LOT NUMBER a 7 SUBDIVISION DATE REQUEST FILED / U Z DATE READY FOR INSPECTION FIVE (5) DAYS NOTICE PRIOR TO CLOSING DATE IS REQUIRED ALL WORK AND SIGN-OFF'S MUST BE COMPLETED WITHIN THIS TIME FRAME. A RE -INSPECTION FEE OF TWENTY-FIVE ($25.) DOLLARS WILL BE CHARGED IF THE STRUCTURE DOES NOT MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES. SIGNATURE OFFICIAL USE ONLY ROUTING CONSERVATION DATE PLANNING DATE b.P.W. — WATER MEDATE ��- D.P.W. MUST INDICATE THAT THE WATER METER HAS BEEN INSTALLED P TO �N PECTION RE ST DATE. �p 7Z) TURE/ ZADE ZADE COMPANY INC. Consulting Engineers 140 Beach St., Boston, MA 02111 (617) 338-4406 Fax 617.451-2540 Final Affidavit Mechanical Inspection Town of North Andover, MA 01845 To: Building Commissioner Date: February 21, 2002 Re: Kohl's Department Store North Andover Mall 350 Winthrop Avenue Mohammed Zade Ph.D., P.E. Mevlut S. Koymen, P.E. Muzaffer Muctehitzade M.Sc., P.E. I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, the construction for the renovation of the building at 350 Winthrop Avenue has been completed in accordance with the plans and the applicable codes and ordinances of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. ©f f;-14 qs y ENGINES M HAMMED ZADE MOHAMMED Massachusetts Registration No. 27233 � C> ZADE cn No. 27233 -IST 'W Then personally appeared the above-named .1, and made oath that the above statement by him is true. Before me, Notary Public W COMMISSION EXPIRES My Commission expires MARCH 8, 2007 02/22/02 FRI 09:41 FAX 401 724 1981 ODEH ENGINEERS i ,1 em"Ir , Inc 1223 Mineral Spring Avenue North Providence, Rhode Island 02904 I i CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE AFFIDAVIT - STRUCTURAL To: BUILDING OFFICIAL, Town of North Andover Date: February 22, 2002 Project, Kohl's Department Store Address: North Andover Mall 350 Winthrop Avenue In accordance with the requirements. of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts General Laws, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition, Section 116.2.2.3, and based on periodic construction observation visits by this office, I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, the completed project described above appears to be in substantial compliance with the approved plans and specifications prepared by the structural engineer of record, Ambrose Engineering. Since tA OF DAVIp��� l d. David J. 0 eh, P.E. :" STRUCTURAL Principal .o �F o. 427551 Massachusetts License Number 42755SroNAL Phone: 401.724.1771 Fax. 401,724,1981 i 10002/003 BergMeyer Final Affidavit Architectural Inspection Town of North Andover, MA 01845 To: Commissioner Robert Nicetta Date: February 6, 2002 Re: Kohl's Department Store North Andover Mall 350 Winthrop Avenue I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, the construction for the renovation of the building at 350 Winthrop Avenue has been completed in accordance with the documents of the architect of record, KKE Architects, and the applicable codes and ordinances of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street VA Boston, MA 02210 Architect: 14 r Phone 617 542 1025 t Ira M. Baline Fax 617 338 6897p� www.bergmeyer.com Massachusetts Registration No. 6546 MAA Then personally appeared the above-named �(� and made oath that the above statement by5__ ue. Before _ ary Public /I j 1 My Commission expires , V 126020402.ib0 finalaffidavit.doc ZADE ZADE COMPANY INC. Consulting Engineers 140 Beach St., Boston, MA 02111 (617) 338-4406 FaX 617.451-2540 Final Affidavit Electrical Inspection Town of North Andover, MA 01845 To: Building Commissioner Date: February 21, 2002 Re: Kohl's Department Store North Andover Mall 350 Winthrop Avenue Mohammed Zade Ph.D., P.E. Mevlut S. Koymen, P.E. Muzaffer Muctehitzade M.Sc., P.E. I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, the construction for the renovation of the building at 350 Winthrop Avenue has been completed in accordance with the plans and the applicable codes and ordinances of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. ENGINEER: MUZAFfER ���, MUZA MUCTEHITZ E MUCTEHITZADE Massachusetts Registration No. 32579 ELECTRICAL" No. 32579,�� Then personally appeared the above-named.MgIAM.. and made oath that the above statement by him is true. Before me, -� �`*94� Notary Public MY COMMISSION EXPIRic$ MARCH 8, 2007 My Commission expires 01125/02 15:45 FAX 6173385897 B7?XZGMRYER CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CONSTRUCTION MANAGS11-ADVISER EDITION AIA, DOCUMENT G7()4)CM2 (lnstru;tiorls on renerse side) PROJECT-, Kohis Dept. Stares 0yaner. O'd lidd") 350 Winthrop A'Venua Noith Andover, 14A 01843 TO OWNM Kohls Dept. Stores (Mims 6rd adlp es) Corporate Offices N56 West Ridgewood Drive Menor,Qnae Balls, WI 53051 DATE OF ISSUkNCE: PROJECT OR, DESIGNA,THD POIc'IJON SHALL INCfUDEi WJVVZ/UU4 OWNER 1 list of items to nc edmplctc Ur carrertcd CONS7r=TION MANAGER sibility of the Contractor to cornplerc al] V,' -k in aceore w h e Ct. 'Doc ttcnus. ARCHIlfF. U i coNTRACTOR ar+►+a�-� CON5TRliCTION P4ANA.GER FIELD ARCHITECT BY OTHER ❑ PROTECT NOS.: 01126.10 CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: August . 13,' 2001 'ASO CONTRACTOR; D:Lueo Canstx'uetion (narnc and address) 75 Chapman Street Providence, RI 02905 The Work perfoirned under this Contract has been revietimd and found, to the constXucrion Manager's and Architect's best knowl- edge, infoftm2tion 2nd belief, to tie substantially corrnl7lrte Substantial Compietiptr is the stage in the progress OF the Work when the Work OX desigmted pordOn thereof is Sufficiently compietc in accordance with thR COrANCC Doeumens so the Owner car occupy or utilize the W(irk for its intended use. Tlie date of Sub;!tamlal Completioli of.the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as wbich is also for date of, commeaeesncat of appilrabte warranties retluired'by the Contract D47,ment's, except as stated belO ' i attached hc:Cto, ThE fa711I to r( de any ' ems on such 1'151 does not alter the respon 1 list of items to nc edmplctc Ur carrertcd sibility of the Contractor to cornplerc al] V,' -k in aceore w h e Ct. 'Doc ttcnus. �� ar+►+a�-� CON5TRliCTION P4ANA.GER DATE ARCHITECT BY TE The Contractor w111 complete or oOrrect the Work on the 'ist of i s attackled beret ar 'n days from the above date of SubstzmW Complmion. ��r /,,, 7 CONTRACTOR D t The Ownr accepta tte Work or de:,igvated portion- thezcof as substantiallv compleie and will asspme full possession thereof at (Lim j an (dzc), OWNER BY DATA The responsibilities of the Owncr and the Contractor fo- security; malotenance; heat, utilides, damagF to the W'osk and insurance shall bC as follows; ' (Norr—pruner's anol ! nrrtrscttar'S lq d a:id r»urtekl sUoufd defermmo ane review insurance requfrstrrentj Gird cPverage ) QkUTION; You should use an original AIA document which hag this caution printed In red. WWAn original assuims that changes will ncd be obscured as may occur when documents are reprodueed. AIA VMUFR rr Wp47CIMa • erMr'tr.rCATE OP sVRSTnNTIAL COMPLETION , CQMSTRUCXTO;a 0 MANAGER4,LVISPR EUtTION • 1992 PDInON • AIA's - :DIM - THE AM1'•RICAN TWr11TUTE OF AROKITEC15. M5 NEW YORK LZIUNUE, NW,, WAS1fWU"YON, D.C. z6CO&SZ521 • WAPKMlt! Uolttmwd phat"Ming vloiatts U.S. cOPy ght Favus and Wil VUbject the vlatator to 10931 ProsaWtion. IO'd 6VSbT .I0b1 'ON XV] 00 NOIZO[1NZSN00 03WId X8:80 E1li a0 -H -8h 02/25/02 15:45 FAX 5173386897 BEROM EER PUNCH LIST p}� TQ;Be gmever From-. pate Re. Scdet'Eawn at d Mzxshall Conley, Dimco Constrruction. Jay Overholt, KtioM's Department Scores Holly 5chufa February 22, 2002 ArehiteaurA ;'unch List Num6er.01 Kohl's Department Store punch List D:,,tc: February 22, 2002 Project. No. 0 l 126, 10 01 -Gene awl 1. Relnovz all temporary facilities. 2, Furnish keys to th; owner/tenant. 3. Rcraove excess noterW, tools, and clean throughout the building, 171003/003 02 - sig a Construction 1. Lindsraping is incomplete: 2. Clem, up the back yard at the loading dock arra. 3. CA= up the from. yard free of debris. Archicecture,ind Interiors Bergmeycx llssocixzer, lv% OA — IViasosaxY 286 co!Lgwn Sue2r Boston, kk 1223 o 1. Washdown Che e:,xerior brick at the entrance arca. Rme 617 542 1025 Fax 6I7 338 6897 0 -r ,- t •*—w,hergmeyer.corn 1., Complete the cap flashkng ate left tower along the front Facade. 08 - 0vors and Windoo s 1, Missing door silencers in the office arms. 2. The hinge at the upahagtes office door is missing screws. 02, Fi c 1. meed to paink aic exterior egress stairs and bollards at the r*u of building 2. Warning stripes at the electrical panels treed to be painted. 3. Touch up rhe pai at at the cas11 office. 4. R.epait the bubble in the wall covering above the water cooler. 5. Touch up the poi at in the lut,4.1Xrom. F_ Repaint the emerl;ency dum at the front of building. 7. Replace the bent "TV in the ceiling grid and replace the ACT, 1. Need to obta7m ar.d HVAC Balance report from the airflow test. 2. Relocate the retut n air 011 in the manager's office- {Too close to the supply duct) za a Bts�T IDI ON xvi 00 NO110HISN00 03WIC SE:80 ins M -K -eh �EB-25--02 MON 1104 DIMEO CONSTRUCTION CO FAX NO, 14017814549 P. 01 DIME01 DIMEG CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 75 Chapman Street Providence, Rhode Island 02905 (401) 7$1.9$00. + Fax; (401) 461-4580 ww'w,dimeo.com 2!22102 Roboit Nicetta Building Commissioner ' Town of North Andover 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA, 01, 845 RE: Kohl's DepartmeDt Store, North Andover DCC 'Job 012-01 Construction Certification Deas Mr. Nicetta, 1. certify to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, Mimeo Construction Company has btaiit the above referenced project per the plans and specifications as prepared by KKE Architects. Sincerely, ' Di o Construction m y A coti A. atoa Project Manager cc: file Builder$ & Cansrructios MunGgers Etta6lishrd in 1930 'ROFYOn, Massac:husetisNew haven, ConneCtiicut Portsmouth, New IJampshire (781) 329=1992.. (203) 777-5410 (603) 430-2800 . September 12, 2001 Beramever Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, Massachusetts 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 Re: 350 Winthrop Street Store Renovation Field Observation Reports Project No. 40705.00 Dear Mr. Nicetta: We are scheduled to make our next visit on September] 3, 2001 and will continue to make weekly site visits until the project reaches substantial completion. We will keep you up to date on the project. Please contact us if you have any questions. Very truly yours, a't" z ----------- Ira M. Baline, RA Senior Associate 705LO91201.ib 1—cove rfield.doc I have attached field reports dating from the start of demolition activities on the site. The demolition Permit was received on August 2, 2001. The Building Permit dated July 31, 2001 was received by the contractor on August 18, 2001. This field observation report pertains to the renovation of the existing store into a new retail store. Architecture and Interiors The work includes renovations to the exterior enclosure systems, building utility Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street systems, fire protection systems and interior finish systems. Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 The general current status of the base building project is as follows: The removal of Fax 617338 6897 www.b.bergmeyer.com interior and exterior finishes is well along. The removal of existing MEP systems is well along. No new construction work has taken place. We are scheduled to make our next visit on September] 3, 2001 and will continue to make weekly site visits until the project reaches substantial completion. We will keep you up to date on the project. Please contact us if you have any questions. Very truly yours, a't" z ----------- Ira M. Baline, RA Senior Associate 705LO91201.ib 1—cove rfield.doc Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of August 6, 2001 Work ongoing: Project start up. Preliminary removal of interior finish materials. Architecture and Interiors Work planned: Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Continue removal of interior finishes. Begin removal of exterior finishes. Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com 705r091201.ib0fieldreportOLdoc Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of August 13, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systems. MEP system disconnects. Temporary power. Architecture and Interiors Removal of exterior finish materials. Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Continue removal of finishes, MEP systems and exterior finishes. 7051091201. i60_fieldreyort02.doc Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of August 20, 2001 Contractor received Building Permit on August 16`x'. Work ongoing: Architecture and Interiors Removal of interior finish materials. Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. Removal of interior MEPs stems. 286 Congress Street �' Boston, MA 02210 Removal of exterior finish materials. Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Work planned: Continue removal of finishes, MEP systems and exterior finishes. 705r091201.i60_fieldreport03.doc Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of August 27, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systems. Architecture and Interiors Removal of exterior finish materials. Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Continue removal of finishes, MEP systems and exterior finishes. 70 5 r091201. ib0_fieldrepo rt04. doc Bergmeyer Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Field Observation Report To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of September 3, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systems. Removal of exterior finish materials. Work planned: Continue removal of finishes, MEP systems and exterior finishes. 705r091201. i60_Fieldrepo rt05.doc Field Observation Report BerRMeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta of Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of September 10, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials Removal of interior MEP systems. Architecture and Interiors Removal of exterior finish materials. Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Begin insulation of exterior walls. Begin rough electric. 705 r091201.i60_fieldreport06.doc RECEIVE[) AMBROSE ENGINEERING, INC. AUG F toot W67 N222 Evergreen Blvd, Suite 106 Cedarburg, WI 53012 262/377-7602 FAX 262/377-4868 email ambeng@ambeng.com ©1ME00WSMUCnC"CM August 6, 2001 Scott Eaton Dimeo 75 Chapman Street Providence, RI 02905 RE: Town of North Andover Construction Control Form Dear Scott, FAX TL(OA TTAL # of Pa es �^ Nt � AMBROSE ENG. PHONE (262) 377-7602 FAX # (262) 377-4868 Please find attached a faxed copy of the Office Of Building Inspector Town of North Andover Construction Control form. A hard copy of this form will be sent in the mail today. incerely, rol Steckel, P.E. Attachment OF OPERT M. �y ECKEL cGn o STRUCTURAL No. 43008GIs El� c� 9 9oFFss ONAL NG\���Q JUL=30-01 MON 11:09 DIMEO CONSTRUCTION CO FAX NO. 14017814549 P,02 OFFICE OF BUILDING INSPECTOR TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER CONSTRUCTION CONTROL PROJECT NUMBER: DI-QA-.4863-0 PROJECT TITLE: Kohl's De artment Store PROJECT LOCATION: North Andover, MA NAME OF BUILDING: NATURE OF PROJECT: Takeover and remodel of existing Bradlees Department Store IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 116 OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE, 1, Robert M. Steckel REGISTRATION NO. BEING A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECH HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE PREPARED OR DIRECTLY SUPERVISED THE PREPARATION OF ALL DESIGN PLANS, COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONCERNING_ ENTIRE PROJECT a ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL 0 FIRE PROTECTION ELECTRICAL OTHER (SPECIFY) FOR THE ABOVE NAMED PROJECT AND THAT, TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEGE, SUCH PLANS, COMPUTATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS MEET THE APPLICABLE PROVISION OF THE MASSACHUSETTS STATE BUILDING CODE, ALL ACCEPTABLE ENGINEERING PRATICES, AND APPLICABLE LAWS AND ORDINANCES FOR THE PROPOSED USE AND OCCUPANCY. I FURTHER CERTIFY THAT I SHALL PERFORM THE NECESSARY PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AND Q EPRESENT ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE ON A REGULAR AND PERIODIC BASIS TO DETERMINE THAT THE WORK IS PROCEEEDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DOCUMENTS APPROVED FOR THE BUILDING PERMIT AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 116.0 1. Review, for conformance to the design concept, shop drawings, samples and other submittals which are submitted by the contractor in accordance with the requirements of the construction documents_ 2. Review and approval of the quality control procedures for all code -required controlled materials: 3. Be present at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become, generally familiar with6the progress and quality of the work and to determine, in general, if the work is being performed in a manner consistent with the construction documents. PURSUANT TO SECTION 116.2.2 1 SHALL SUBMIT iaiMRPROGRESS REPORT TOGETHER WITH PERTINENT COMMENTS TO THE NORTH ANDOVER BUILDING INSPECTOR_ W (ISR, *; ANDREA /2•• •� hy ��1.4 Ip� QN COMPLETION OF THE WORK, 1 SHALL SUBMIT A FINAL REPORT AS TO THE ACTORY COMPLETION AND READINESS OF THE PROJECT FOR QUP NCY. * - IGNAT BBC@BED AND SWO M TQ BEFORE ME THIS�_DAY OF 200/ Y PUBLIC MY COMMI COMMISSION �XPIRES September 13, 2001 Bergmeyer Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North. Andover, Massachusetts 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 Re: 350 Winthrop Street Store Renovation Field Observation Report Project No. 0 1126. 10 Dear Mr. Nicetta: We have attached our field report for September 13, 2001 to this letter. The work includes renovations to the exterior enclosure systems, building utility systems, fire protection systems and interior finish systems. There are minor modifications to the steel frame of the building. Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. Please let us know if the format for these field reports is adequate for your purposes. 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 We will keep you up to date on the project. Please contact us if you have any questions. Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 Ver truly yours, www.bergmeyer.com G Ira M. Baline, RA Senior Associate i _ . 126.10L091301.ib1 coverField.doc Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 13, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Pro)ect No. 0 1126. 10 Filed Observation Report of September 13, 2001 Time of Visit: 11 AM Weather: Fair, 60's Trades Present: None (no work this day) Architecture and Interiors Bergmeyer Associates, Inc. Work ongoing: 286 Congress Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Shoring of roof structure at CMU wall to be removed • Floor slab removal for plumbing line • Removal of exterior signage Work planned through next week • Installation of studding and insulation at exterior walls • Installation of HVAC distribution ductwork • Shoring of roof structure and removal of CMU wall. • Under slab plumbing • Excavation and setting of new footings at exterior and interior 126.10r091201. ib0_fieldreport07.doc m LEGAL NOTICE Data " � t� Article , Section of the Zoning Ordinance WHEREAS, violations of=Io N I , Section It `. of the suNdMg Code haw been found on , Section of the Code those promises, IT IS HER 1f ORDERED In accordance with the above Code that all persons carie, desist from, and STOP WORK at once psMhtning to construction, akerations or repalrs on these premises known as 5't'o2- - 350 \K/'I 'MttaP &2Fs' U67 All persons acting contrary to this order or removing or mutilating this notice are liable to arrest unless such action Is outhootmed by,the Department. _LL S, ¢m6b C.o�SI�SDI �- �t�f.�a1,'tL�.+-Q` �OJ�. Kpizi tmi r BUILUNG OFFICIAL 09/12/01 17:09 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Architecture & Interiors Bergrneycr Associates, Inc 286 Congress Street Bostoe, MA 02210 Phone 617 %2 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bargmeyw.com FAX TRANSMMAL COVER Job Number.- 40705.00 D4&- September 12, 2001 From: Ira Baline 0001 Re ICDhl's Department Stores 350 Winthrop Street ,MA Atht: Town of North Andover Robert Nicam 978 688 9542 Dimeo Scort Eaton 4017814549 We arc sending you under separate cover, vis Fwc w/ Hard Copy ro Follow 9 page(s) Pa a T e Number Dare Description Note 7 B 9/12101 Field Reports and Cover Leccer 2 A Original For Approval 1 B Copy / Print For Your Use 2 C Reproducible As Requested 3 D Reduction For Review & Comment 4 E Elactronic Media No Exceptions 5 F Submittal Return Make Corrections Noted 6 G Submitral Forward Revise & Resubmit 7 H Sample Re)=ed 8 O Other Other / See Remarks Below 9 If endosu= an nor ar Woad, kindly notify m ar once. Remarks. Mr Nimca, Please call tae if you have any questions. Ira Baline The information contained herein and any attachments to this transmitral are intended for the cxdusive use of The designated rcceipient(s) named above and may contain confidential or privileged information. If you arc not the intended recipient, please notify Bergmeyer Associates, Irc. immediately at 617 542 1025. 09/12/01 17:11 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYBR field Observation Report Bergrneyer To: Mr. Robert Nicctra Building Commissioner Noirh Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Saline MA Arch. Regisuation No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovarion Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of September 10, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systems. Atchirecnlre and Zpreriors Removal of exterior finish materials. Bergmeyer Associamq, Inc. '286 Congress Sucer Boscon, MA 02210 Work Planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 wwwbcrgnic/er.com Begin insulation of exterior walls. Begin rough cicc>•ric. 0 008 703r091201.ib0—FieldrepnrrO6.doc 09'/12/01 17:10 FAX 6173386897 BERGHEYER .Field Observation Report BerLyMeVer To: Mr. Robert Nicctta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Babne MAArch. Regisuadon No. 6546 Date: Scprcmber 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avcnuc Store Renovation Project No. 410705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of September 3, 2001 Work ongoinag: Removal of ulterior finish materials. Removal of inrcrior MEP systems. Arctlirccrurc and Interiors Removal of exterior finish maceri:ils. Berguieyer Associarca. Tnc 286 Congress Sneer Boscon, MA 02210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergiucycr.com Continue removal of finishes, MEP systcros and exterior Finishes. 9 007 7()5 rD91201. i b 0._fi eldreporr05. d oc 00/12/01 17:10 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Field Observation Report BerRMeyer To: Mr. Robcrr Nic:ecca Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Baline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Dace: St:ptember 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project Na_ 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of &Xusc 27.2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systems. Architecture and Interiors Removai of exterior finish materials. Derrgmeyer Associates. Inc. 286 Congms Street Bosron. MA 02210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 Fu 617 338 6897 Www.bagineyeecom Continue removal of finisbcs, M P:.P sysrcros and exterior finishes. Q006 7t15 rO91207. it,OJlddeepoao4.doe 09/12/01 17:10 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Ficld Observation Report BeraMeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicctra building Commissioner North Andovcr, MA 0184.5 From: Ira M. Balinc MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Srorc Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Rcport for the Week of August 20, 2001 Contractor received Building Permit on August IGx'. Work ongoing: Archiceccure and Inrcriors Removal of interior finish materials. 8ab$,eyerAstociates, Inc. Removal of inrerior MEP sysrcros. 286 Congress Snret Boscon, MA 02210 Removal of exrcrior finish m2rcrials. Pbonr 617 542 1925 Fax 617 33R 6897 wwwhcrgmcycccom Work planned: Continue removal of finishes, MEP systems and exterior finishes. Q005 705x091101.10_ficidrepon0ldoc 09/12/01 17:10 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Q004 Field Observation Report Bergmeyer To: From: Date: Re: Mr. Robert Nice= Building Commissioner Noah Andover, MA 01845 Ira M. Baline MAArch. Registration No. 6546 Scptcmber 12, 2001 350 Winduop Avenue Snore Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Filed Observation Report for the Week of August 13, 2001 Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish malcrials. Removal of interior MU systems. MEP system disconnects. 'Temporary power. Architecture and Interiors Removal of exterior finish materials. Bergmcyer Associates. Inc. 286 Congress Street Boston. MA U2210 Work planned: Phone 617 542 1025 fax 617 3386897 www.berplieyer.com Continue removal of finishes, MEP q stcrns and cxrerior finishes. 7D5 A912Dl.ibo_ficldreportU2.doc .*09/12/01 17:10 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEYER Field Observation Rcporr Bergmeyer To: Mr. Robert N1CCira Building Commi�ssioncr North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira M. Balinc MA Arch. Rcgistraaon No. 6546 Datc: September 12, 2001 Rc: 350 Winthrop Avenue Storc Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Piled Observation Report for the Week of August G, 2001 Work ongoing: Project stare LLP. Prelinunary removal of interior finish materials. Architecture and Interiors Work planned: Bergmcycr Asbuc:iues, Inc. 286 Congress Street Boscon, MA 0.2210 Conrinuc removal of interior finishes. BCgin removal of cxrcrior finishes. Phonc 617 542 1025 Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com Q003 705iO9l2O1.ibO_FeldrepnrrO l.diuc 09/12/01 17:09 FAX 6173386897 BERGMEITR 0 002 September 12, 2001 Bergmeyer Mr. Robcrt Nit:ett.1 Building Commissioner North Andover, Massachusetts 27 Charles Street Nordi Andover, M A 01845 Re: 350 Wimlirop Street Store Renovation Ficld Observation Reporrs Project No. 40705.00 Dear Mr. Nicetta: We are scheduled to make our next visit on Seprcmberl3, 2001 and will continue to make weekly site visits until the projccr reaches substantial completion. We will keep you up to dare on the projea. Please contact us if you have any qucsti.ons. Very truly yours, CK Z4 Tra M. Balinc, RA Senior Associate 7051091201 Jb 1 _coverfield. doe T have attached field reports dating from rhe starr of demolition activities on the site. The demolition Permit was received on August 2, 2001.11c Building Permit dared July 31, 2001 was received by the contractor on .'August 18, 2001. This field observation report pertains to the renovation of the existing store into a new retail store. Archirecrure and Interiors The work includes renovations to the exterior enclosure systems, building uriliry BergmeM Associates, Inc, 286 Congress Strict sysrems, fire protection systems and interior finish systems. llosron, MA 02210 Phone 617 542 1025 The general current status of the base building project is a$ follows: The cenloval of Fax 617 338 6897 www.bergmeyer.com interior and exterior finishes is well along. The removal of existing MEP stems is well g r �' along. No new construction work has taken plao:. We are scheduled to make our next visit on Seprcmberl3, 2001 and will continue to make weekly site visits until the projccr reaches substantial completion. We will keep you up to dare on the projea. Please contact us if you have any qucsti.ons. Very truly yours, CK Z4 Tra M. Balinc, RA Senior Associate 7051091201 Jb 1 _coverfield. doe SEP -13-01 THU 09;38 DIMEO CONSTRUCTION CO FAX NO, 14017814549 P,01 DI�0 Damm CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 75 Chapman Street 'Providence. Rhode Island 02905 •'(401) 781-9800. • Fax: (401) 461-4580 www,dimco.com 9/ 12/01 Via Fax: 978-688-9542 Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner Town of North Andover 27 Charles Street North Andover, MA 01845 RE: Kohl's Department.Store, North Andover DCC Job #012-0I Dear Mr. Nicetta, I would like to schedule a meeting early next week at your convenience: to discuss the Kohl's project as it pertains to your requirements for construction. We want to. make sure that �ou receive all -the information you. need in the format you require. The meeting would be held at your office with myself,.Marshall Connolly, Chris Romano (Dimeo's Project Executive), and possibly the Architect. I'think this meeting would be beneficial to all involved on this project. Please call me at 401-265-8471 to schedule a convenient time. Your continued cooperation Is. appreciated. Sincerely, U' »or-Dimeo, .A Joint Venture cots A. Eaton Project Manager cc: file SEP 1 3 2001 �ILD,!N ` EPS" Builders & Construction. Managers E'siablished in '7930 BG -ion,, Massachusetts New Haven, Connecticut Portsmouth, New Hampshire .(781) 329-1992, (203).777-5414 (603) 430-2800 shoos 09/12/01 17:o6 FAX 6 73386897 BERGMEYjR Field Obsemttion Report R�Y�r To: Mr. Robert Nicctta �./ 1► �'J ` Building C;ommissioncr North Andover, MA 01845 From: in M. l3aline MA Arch. Registration No. 6546 Date: September 12, —)601 Pw 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 , Filed Ubccrvport far rhe Week of September 10 2901 Wbrk ongohig: Rcmovai of interior finish Mlerials. Removal of interior MEP systems. A-Aircctarc and lnmion Removal of exteiYor fuush maceria4s. Remmc7et Awciaax, Fuc. 286 congmcs Surto Boston, MA 022lu Phone 617 5421025 Ba G 17 938 6897 waw.bcrwvSY,Mcom Work planned: Btpn i tsulation of exterior Walls. Ficgin rough electric_ BUILDING DEQ, 705.091201 AQLYeldtcP0M*,dvc r .Aitt9� 6VSV I SL l0V l 'ON Xd3 00 NO I.LonusN00 03W I a z0:80 M I0 -E I -d3S o9/12/01 17:06 FAX 6173386887 BERGMEYI 19007 Feld Obstmdon Report B�'.rgmeyer To: Mr. Robert Nicctta Building Commissioner North. Andover, MA 01845 From: In M. aalinc MA ArLh. Regiscracion No. 6546 Date! September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project Nn. 40705.00 F led Obscrwriork ReRrT for The Wcck of Smrcrnbcr I, 22Q1 Work ongoing: Removal of interior fiTlish material•. Reasoval of inrcrior MF.P systems. A.rehireMra and TAMiOTS Remov d of ex=ior finish xnawrial3, Ber cyerAnociares.Ina W -Con mus Sa= Work l'eU1I1 : Becton. MA 07.21 o P Phone 617 542 1025 Fax 617338 6897 Continue removal of&nishes, Mi -.P .,�ystcros and cicterior finishr-s. .a�rw6ergmereteom L L BUILDING DEPT. 705,091201.1160 ;u SO 'd 099 I SL I Otr t 'ON XH 00 N0110I1NZSN03 03W I 4 eO ; SO AHI 10 -EI -ES 09/12/01 17: os FAX 6173386897 BERG Bergmeyer Arckitemute and interiors gcrF„cy¢ Arsousaes, Inc. 7.86 Gor4nss Street Bwon, W. 02210 Phone 617 5421025 Fax 617 338 G197 wq-ltr;mgmcom Field Qlis vltion Iicgocc To: Mr. Robcrs Nicerta Building Commissioner Norrh Andover, MA 01845 From: ITs M. Balint jv1A Arch. Rel;istMdon No. 6546 Date_ Septcmber 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Projca No- 40705-00 Fila[ nbs rlruioll Repozz for the Wcck ofdi-usc Work ongoing: Removal of interior finish materials. Removal of interior MEP systcros- Removal of =6or finish M3TCM-11-1. Work planned: Continue removal of finishes, MEP rysrems and exrehor finishes, 10006 9 D E I C-9 E � R I SEP 1 3 201,,1 BUILDING DEPT. M,091201-10 -fwl3rep0sN4.doe LO 'd 6VSV I8L IOV i 'ON Xd.d 00 NOI1onmiSN00 03WI4 e0:80 AHI I O-£ I-d3S „09/ 2/01 27:05 Fa% 6193386897 DERGKEYER 10005 Bergrneyer Ards =Urc and ln=ion Bergmeyt= Aswda=, In;;- 286 ac286 Conc�rress Street Boston, MA 02211D Phone 617 5421 X25 Fax 637 338 6847 V"r c gcs.com Field Obmrwtion Report To: Mr. Robcrt Nic etta Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From_ ka M. Baline MA Arch, Regiscmdon No. 6.546 Da=: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winthrop Avenue Store Renovation Project No- 40705.00 Fi1cd 0bsrryadon R port f r Elie Week of �ugusT�O 20 1 ConcracTur received Building PcTmit on August Work ongoing: RCMoV$1 of interior finish marcrials. Removal of interior MEP xystcrm- Rcnzovval of cxtorior finish materials. Work planned: Coatinue removal of finishes, MEP systcrns and cxrcrior finishes. E6"EfV E 10 SEP 1 3 2,)U] BUILDING DEPT. i t15t0y 3203.ibOSxidropo �s09.d oc 90 'd 6VSV I SL I0V I 'ON Xb3 00 NO I10 ANISNOO 03W I Q 10:80 nHI 10 -SI -ES o8/& /91 17:os FAX 6113386897 BERGMEYER `r.1i ru - • ATChiimcture u►d inulior% Rcegmtyar KIMCiarea, tne. 286 Congrw Sneer Barron. MA 02210 Phone 617 5431025 Yaa 617 838 6857 ww.eberpnertreoM Field obs—aaoa Report To: Mr. RobeLz Nieetra Building Commissioner North Ando—r, MA 01845 From: Ira M_ Balint MA Arch. Ragipwadon No, 6546 Uate_ September 12, 2001- Re! 001Re: 350 Nruad rdp Avenue Store Renovation Project No. 40705.00 Hcd ObsMits 1n Re ore fo she Wof Iwl 13.2001 Work ougoing. tO 00 4 Removal of interior finish marerials. Removal of interior \, 41• l' systems- M F P system disconnects. "icmporary power. Removal of exterior finish matcrials- Werk planna -- Continue removal or Finishes, MEP systems aad exterior finishes. i OS�O91.Ol.ibO_f:eldreForA2.d�e SO 'd 6VSP I8L I OV I 'ON XdA 00 NO I10AUSN00 03W I Q 10:90 (IH1 I O-£ I -dHS 08/12/01 17:05 FAX Zooa 6 73386897 BER6��YfiR Field Observation Repan Berameya To:Mr_ Robert Nieena Building Commissioner North Andover, MA 01845 From: Ira A Balint MA Arch. Registradon No_ 654() Date: September 12, 2001 Re: 350 Winr4rop A—nuc Srorc Renov2don Project No. 40705.00 Filed Qbserycion Rcgocc for ncc cl: o Oust 6.2001 Work ongoing: pr ojcct starr up. prcliminary remo,%l of interior finish nncerials. Arch+rcesurc ana Irac6on Work plwned: Dersmcyer Acsoeiatea, Inc. 286 ConsTe" Strecr Saccati MA 02210 ioflilIIlSc rCi2l9val Of intcri0r finiskcs. $thin rtmoval of exterior finishes. Phone 617 5421023 617 338 6857 www bcrgmcy=com :C:E �§v c I c 1i 2?L?l a�pr 705z091301.10—Fe1dn9or0I.Aac ti0'd 6VSV18LIOPI 'ON XVd 00 NOI10MISN00 03WIC t0;80 AH1 t0-£t-d3S 09/12/01 17:08 FAX 6193366997 BERGWM . s Septe►nbcr 12, 2001 pleb zgzneer Mr. Kolxa Nicetta it Auilding Commissioner North Andover, Massachussew 27 Charles Street . . North Andover, MA 01845 Rc: 350 Winthrop Screen SmrE Renovation Field Observation Reports Project No_ 40705.00 9002 Vett truly yours, (� nn E ur"' 1 E U V E lul Ira M. BalintIN[ $enior Associate SEP 1 1 2001 10 £0'd 09V IBLIOM 'ON Xb3 00 NOI10MISN00 03WIC 10:80 M I0-£1-d3S Dear Mr. Niczrm- i have attached Geld reports dazing from the scar of demolition a crvvities osz the sive. I MG demolition Permit ww rcecivrd on Auguse 2, 2001_ The Building permit date July 31. 2001 wtu received by the contracror on August 18, 2001. This field observation report pertains to the rotovation of the existing store into a new rm-Z store. Archite=m and lavviots The work includes renovations to tltc cxtcriur cridusurc systems, building utility 8erVaqu Aaadaw% Inc p sem, finprotecdoll g3tenis and interior finish syscems. 2x6 congmis Saar Boston, MA 022110 Phonc 617 5621025 The general current status of chs lyse bu ildiug project is as Follows: The tetnovaj o T+x Al $38 097 interior and exterior finishes is well alone. The removal of existing MIP systems ie well .�.W.lu�gmey�Y.oefn along. No new construction work has taken place. We ue scheduled to make our next visit on Septcmberl 3, 2001 and will continue to malty wceldy siva visits until the project reaches substantial completion. We will keep you up to dace on the project. Please contact us if you have any questions. Vett truly yours, (� nn E ur"' 1 E U V E lul Ira M. BalintIN[ $enior Associate SEP 1 1 2001 10 £0'd 09V IBLIOM 'ON Xb3 00 NOI10MISN00 03WIC 10:80 M I0-£1-d3S 08/12/01 17.04 FAX 6173346907 BBRGZ+IEYER r Ascbivaure & lataioes BugraepazAoech=. lar. 286 Congrraa Street Boston, MA 02210 Phone 617 5421025 Fax 611338 6899 www.bcgPeyer-cM FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER Job Number 40705.00 Dow September 12.2001 Fane Its Baline Re IGbrs Depa=wt Stores 350'r�nrhmp Serret ,IMA V V 1 Atte: Town of Norch Andover Robert McMz 978 689 9542 Dimoo Scott ELwn 4017814549 We ate sending You nnder;squutc cover, via Ta wf Hard Copp M Follow 8 page(s) 7 8 I 9112101 Field Reports and Cover I.eW If encderww ase Wt 4F nom' 6&f nosft was M"' RerwIls Mr Mcg, Please call me if you hm any questions. Ita Biline The inform -169n contained herein and nay eancbm"its TO obis aaasmlttal nae in *c Ador you a not the des',=ed reoeipient(S) named abo a and may contain confidertual or PXiVg of d 2 lO25- thc iamaded .edpient. please no* Se tcyc�r Assoelaaes, Istc- immediac* at 617 eo 'd 6VSV t 8L I OV I 'ON XVH 00 NO I,L0MISN00 03W I Q 00:80 AHI 10-£ I AB For Approval 1 A Otiginat For Your Use 2 B Copy I Print As RegncMed 5 C Reprodudbie For Re iew 3C Con== 4 p Redcctioa No Fxccoons 5 8 }7 &TM orris Media MMabe Coraeccioua wemd 6 F cal tutn Revise & R r 7 G Submittal Forward Rejeaweeeed 8 Fi Other I See Remufs BeIO- 9 O Other If encderww ase Wt 4F nom' 6&f nosft was M"' RerwIls Mr Mcg, Please call me if you hm any questions. Ita Biline The inform -169n contained herein and nay eancbm"its TO obis aaasmlttal nae in *c Ador you a not the des',=ed reoeipient(S) named abo a and may contain confidertual or PXiVg of d 2 lO25- thc iamaded .edpient. please no* Se tcyc�r Assoelaaes, Istc- immediac* at 617 eo 'd 6VSV t 8L I OV I 'ON XVH 00 NO I,L0MISN00 03W I Q 00:80 AHI 10-£ I AB DINH 0 MIMEO CONSTRvuYION COMPANY 75 Chapman Street Providence, Rhode Island 02905 (401) 781-9800. Fax: (401) 461-4580 w�vw.dimco.corrl 9/12/01 'ViA Fax: 978-688-9542 Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner 27 Charles Stree=t North Andover, MA 01$45 RE: Kohl's Department Store, North Andover DCC Job 012-01 Dear Mr. Nicetta, ` Attached to this letter are the field observation reports requested, by you for -the demolition work performed since. it commenced approximately 1 month ago. Bergtneyer Associates, Inc., a well respected architectural firm in Boston, will bo providing inspections on, a weekly basis and forwarding their field observations to you. They will be on-site today to review this week's activities- I hope you find the inforination provided herein to your satisfaction. We will continue to work with you and your department closely throughout the duration of the project. If you have any questions or concerns, please call me at 401-265-8471._ Thank you in advance for you attention in this matter. Sincerely, O'C or-Dimeo, A Joint Venture A.to Project Manager cc, file &r+ilderc & Consrraerion .Mallogers Estabiished in 7930 I3oston,.M:assachUsetts New 1,Iavcn; CcnncCLiCUt Portarnouth, New 1lamps) ire (791),329-199'2 (203) 777.5410 (603) 43072800 10'd 60918LIOVI 'ON Xdd 00 NOI.LOI USNOO 03WI4 00.80 (IHI 1041 -ES I N° 3 415 Date../�... :7-f TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING This certifies that .` has permission to perform ^.-- �* ' •.• _ ... ...... `� `.` wiring in the building of = ' .. ..:............................................... at ..... ..;:"..t..'.'...... l �' �, r'� f , _,,. ��' ... , North Andover, Mass. ............. ......................... Feei%�... '......... Lic. No..`./............ `SIJ.... ........................... ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR Check # WHITE: Applicant CANARY: Building Dept. PINK: Treasurer THE09M10NWE4LTH0FM4MCHUSETTS Office Use only DEPARTMENTOFPUBLICS4FM Permit No. BOARDOFMEPREVEM ONRWMT10ANS27CMR12 0 Occupancy & Fees Checked PPLICATIONFOR PERMITTO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MASSACHUSSTS ELECTRICAL CODE, ) Z I CMR I L:U0 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) Dat Town of North Andover The undersigned annliec fnr a nermit to nerfnrm the electrical work described below. Location (Street 6 Owner or Tenant To the Inspector of Wires: Owner's Address Is this permit in conjunctionw' a Vl ilding permit: Yes No (Check Appropriate Box) Purpose of Building S; Utility Authorization No. Existing Service Amps/ ` Volts Overhead M Underground New Service Amps / Volts Overhead M Underground Q Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work No. of Meters No. of Meters No. of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs No. of Transformers Total KVA No. of Lighting Fixtures Swimming Pool Above Below Generators KVA ground ound No. of Receptacle Outlets No. of Oil Burners No. of Emergency Lighting Battery Units No. of Switch Outlets No. of Gas Burners FIRE ALARMS No. of Zones No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Total Tons No. of Detection and No. of Disposals No. of Heat Total Total Pumps Tons KW Initiating Devices No. of Sounding Devices No. of Dishwashers Space Area Heating KW No. of Self Contained Detection/Sounding Devices Local Municipal Other No. of Dryers Heating Devices KW Connections a No. of Water Heaters KW No. of No. of Signs Bailasis No. Hydro Massage Tubs No. of Motors Total HP � " J IcrnrxtoeCaerage PtasuatYbdteraqtaramats�CrerlaalLam Ihmcaar tLiab tyhtsw&=PobyaldngQnq*t Co"georits ttialoWh-that YES [E:fNO lhmeahTi&dvafidpimfofsmxlo8re01� YB M NO�' Ifj uhmcdwdWYFS,limeittdic*ttteNxcfmuaWbydeckrgttte w Ar- BOND GIHM a Flme) E*aficn D* Esbrn&dV"cfF�acaical Woik $ WctkbSlatt lnspe�D&Reqieslad Rough Fatal Sigtedtaxia�ie � �� � '" FtRMNAME 'C� ! Lim=% -- LioaueNo atessTelNa -i� A1tTdNo. LC II OWNER'SINSURANC:EWANER,I.ainmmibattheticrosedmnot $teautra=wmpctilsWArdWaFrivaimtastegiWbyhJi-,q mgCstaALam 1 andfmtmysigtutwmftpwTitt dtisret�snent (Please check one) Owner Agent a / S� Telephone No. PERMIT FEE $ �� /V 1,0_2—q� TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR GAS INSTALLATION ISS4 ..us 4 us This certifies—tha--- ' ........�.............'...''......... has for gas installation .'........................' in the -buildings of . ......'.'......'............ at ..9..Mass. Fm ... Lic' Nm''.'....... '...'... Check # 3768 MASSACHUSETTS UNIFORM APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO DO GASFITTING (Print or Type) G n A, A oy,,, , Mass. Dater 41, 7 Permit Building Location�� (� Wt�vd-Vi,V.�n 64 Owner's v of Occupancy Rt4i i 1 New ❑ Renovation p-**' p Plans Submitted: YesEK No ❑ PD— Installing Company NameV14/4ATM 11,�yimAcM 09Check one: Certificate Address M, Corporation 6 `iye-) h ❑ Partnership Business Telephone h l 7. J:11-'742 OJ ❑ Firm/Co. Name of Licensed Plumber or Gas Fitter �OSPr7lA %� 44 INSURANCE COVERAGE: I have a current liability insurance policy or its substantial equivalent which meets the requirements of MGL Ch. 142. Yes QY No ❑ (f you have checked Vis, please indicate the type coverage by checking the appropriate box. A� liability insurance policy ET""' Other type of indemnity ❑ Bond ❑ OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the licensee does not have the insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Signature of Owner or Owner's Agent Owner❑ Agent ❑ I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under the permit issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State Gas Code and Chapter 142 of the General I ws. By T license: Plumber Signature se lumber or Gas Fitter Title sfitter aster License Number City/Town Joumeyman APPROVED OFFICE USE ONLY) oil .. ■��������������������■ MEN Installing Company NameV14/4ATM 11,�yimAcM 09Check one: Certificate Address M, Corporation 6 `iye-) h ❑ Partnership Business Telephone h l 7. J:11-'742 OJ ❑ Firm/Co. Name of Licensed Plumber or Gas Fitter �OSPr7lA %� 44 INSURANCE COVERAGE: I have a current liability insurance policy or its substantial equivalent which meets the requirements of MGL Ch. 142. Yes QY No ❑ (f you have checked Vis, please indicate the type coverage by checking the appropriate box. A� liability insurance policy ET""' Other type of indemnity ❑ Bond ❑ OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the licensee does not have the insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws, and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Signature of Owner or Owner's Agent Owner❑ Agent ❑ I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under the permit issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State Gas Code and Chapter 142 of the General I ws. By T license: Plumber Signature se lumber or Gas Fitter Title sfitter aster License Number City/Town Joumeyman APPROVED OFFICE USE ONLY) z O P. U W a N _z N N W cr 0 O CC IL w W AL 0 z P F� N a O C O 1— O ¢ z d ccO IL z O H a a J a IL a 3 a 4 -110 IIA N2 J Date....1.....1...... � t NOR7N � 3r°.'; Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Fire Services . BOARD OF FIRE PREVENTION REGULATIONS Use Permit No. Occupancy and Fee Checked tev. 11/991 (leave Hank) APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO PERFORM ELECTRICAL WORK All work to be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code (1vfEC), 527 CMR 12.00 (PLEASE PRINT IN INK OR TYPE ALL INFORMATION) Date: //- (P-6 City or Town of: K)O (, F-) U Q p J e tr'_ To the Inspector of Wires: By this application the undersigned gives notice of his or her intention to perform the electrical work described below. Location (Street &Number) ^ �} , rl4•$�fC� Owner or Tenant Owner's Address LIs Is this permit in conjunction with a building permit? Purpose of Building Telephone No. Yes ❑ No � (Check Appropriate Box) Utility Authorization No. Existing Service Amps / Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrd No. of Meters New Service Amps / Volts Overhead ❑ Undgrd ❑ No. of Meters Number of Feeders and Ampacity Location and Nature of Proposed Electrical Work: Installation of Burglar Alarmg►- CC -r t . ranrnlatinn n/•tho !^11...,:,......1.1.. _.,... 1.- Z'1111 I .-alae^ aaattionai detail q desired• or as required by the Inspector of Wires. INSURANCE COVERAGE: Unless Nvaiyed by the owner, no permit for the performance of electrical work may issue unless the licensee provides proof of liability insurance including "completed operation" coverage or its substantial equivalent. The undersigned certifies that such coverage is in force. and has exhibited proof of same to the permit issuing office. CHECK ONE: INSURANCE ❑ BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Specify:) (Expiration Date) Estimated Value of Electrical Work: S 4 p (When required by municipal policy.) Work to Start: Inspections to be requested in accordance with 1%1EC Rule, 10, and upon completion. I certify, under the pains and penalties of perjury, that the information on this application is true and complete. FIRM NAME: ADT Security Services 111 Nlorse Street, NonvI od IA 020,627 NO.: 1533C Licensee: John S: Bassett Signature LIC. NO.: 1533C (If applicable, enter. "exempt •' in the license nttniber line.) Bus. Tel. No.: 781 278 1131 Address: Alt. Tel. No.: OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the L r-edsee sloes not have the liability insurance coverage normally required by law. By my signature below, I hereby waive this requirement" I am the (clieck one) ❑ owner ❑ owner's agent. Owner/Agent PERMIT FEE: Sj� Signature Telephone No. _ ector o wires. —IM ,„u,• ue nulveu ov ul:tningy No. of Recessed Fixtures No. of Ceil: Susp. (Paddle) Fans No. of tal Transformers VA No. of Lighting Outlets No. of Hot Tubs Generators 'A• No. of Lightinb Futures . Swimming Pool Above In- ❑ . o. o mergency” Ig rnd. rnd. Battery Units No. of Receptacle Outlets No. of Oil Burners FIRE ALARMS I No: of Zones No. of Switches No. of Gas Burners No. of Detection an Initiatin Devices No. of Ranges No. of Air Cond. Tons( No. of Alerting Devices No. of Waste Disposers Beat Pum Number """ �- "_. Tons _"...".._.__ IOW _—""....." No. oSelf-Contained Totals Detection/Alerting Devices No. of Dishwashers Space/Area Heating KW Local Nlunicipal ❑Other No. of Dryers Heating Appliances Hit Security Systems: No. o Water K�`' No. of No. of I Data Wiring Ou. 01 ces or Euivalcnt Heaters Signs Ballasts No. of Devices or E uivalcnt No. Hydromassage Bathtubs No. of Motors Total HP Telecommunications rng: u " No. of Devices or Equivalent OTHER: .-alae^ aaattionai detail q desired• or as required by the Inspector of Wires. INSURANCE COVERAGE: Unless Nvaiyed by the owner, no permit for the performance of electrical work may issue unless the licensee provides proof of liability insurance including "completed operation" coverage or its substantial equivalent. The undersigned certifies that such coverage is in force. and has exhibited proof of same to the permit issuing office. CHECK ONE: INSURANCE ❑ BOND ❑ OTHER ❑ (Specify:) (Expiration Date) Estimated Value of Electrical Work: S 4 p (When required by municipal policy.) Work to Start: Inspections to be requested in accordance with 1%1EC Rule, 10, and upon completion. I certify, under the pains and penalties of perjury, that the information on this application is true and complete. FIRM NAME: ADT Security Services 111 Nlorse Street, NonvI od IA 020,627 NO.: 1533C Licensee: John S: Bassett Signature LIC. NO.: 1533C (If applicable, enter. "exempt •' in the license nttniber line.) Bus. Tel. No.: 781 278 1131 Address: Alt. Tel. No.: OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the L r-edsee sloes not have the liability insurance coverage normally required by law. By my signature below, I hereby waive this requirement" I am the (clieck one) ❑ owner ❑ owner's agent. Owner/Agent PERMIT FEE: Sj� Signature Telephone No. Town of North Andover Office of the Building Department Community Development and Services Division 27 Charles Street North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 D. Robert Nicetta Building Commissioner October 22, 2001 Memorandum To: Lynn Savage, Town Accountant From: Jeannine McEvoy, Building Departmen Re: Gas Permit Telephone (978) 688-9545 Fax(978)688-9542 Attached please find a copy of a gas permit that was issued as a wiring permit by error. The permit amount of $3,000 should be designated to the gas account (4338) and the electrical account (4335) should deducted the amount of $3,000 in order to adjust these two accounts. I am also including a copy the schedule of departmental payments pertinent to this deposit to the Treasury department on October 11, 2001. If you have any questions please call me 978-688-9545. cc: Robert Nicetta, Building Commissioner / James Diozzi, Plumbing/Gas Inspector BOARD OF APPEALS 688-9541 BUILDING 688-9545 CONSERVATION 688-9530 HEALTH 688-9540 PLANNT ING 688-9535 i0 0 TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER SCHEDULE OF DEPARTMENTAL PAYMENTS NUMBER DEPARTMENT: r,171 -/D DATE: /4� GENERAL LEDGER A/C # 46� FROM WHOM SOURCE AMOUNT TOTAL 0 12 7— y 9, 4 4, <41 J CV -37(oo ;.3.7.79 00 0-1 —1 COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS NUMBER To the Accounting Officer: The above is a detailed list oflnonep to SUM of __aL, 14 For the l whose n TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER DATE: /d-//— dl RIECOVED PAYMENI TITLE OCT 112001 NORTH AN[K)V,E.f-� RE -0-k8t)" White: Departmental Copy Pink: Accounting Yellow: Treasurer f N2 3347 Date../Z.)..-..3 ... !nz ........... 0- TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER PERMIT FOR WIRING This certifies that ... . ......... .. ...... .. .. .. ........ has Permission to perform ...... - -j- -�-, ,(.Z ................................ wiring in the building of .....1..1..::'x, ....... ........ . ....................................... at .... . ......... ................ , North Andover, Mass. Fee . Lic. No. .. ............. Check # WHITE: Applicant CANARY: Building Dept. PINK: Treasurer gm MASSACHUSETTS UNIFORM APPLICATION FOR PERMIT TO DO PLUMBING (Print or Type) Uri 4& At -JI Vieit, . Mass. Date SW 20L Permit Building Location 160 W iA"oy— Owner's Name KO ki `S (oda x_.,e6 Type of Occupancy I42 f I a P New p Renovation ET"*" Replacement ❑ Plans Submitted: Yes C" No ❑ FIXTURES Installing Company Business }.,Name of Licensed Plumber Check one: ❑ Partnership ❑ Firm/Co. Certificate INSURANCE COVERAGE: I have a current I' bility insurance policy or its substantial equivalent which meets the requirements of MGL Ch. 142. Yes V No ❑ If you have checked Yes. please indicate the type coverage by checking the appropriate box. A liability insurance policy G?eiOther type of indemnity ❑ Bond ❑ OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the licensee does not have the insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws. and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Owner ❑ Agent ❑ I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under the permit issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State Plumbinga and Chapter 14 the General Laws. BY Signature sed Plu ber Title �, Type of License: Master L4"/ Journeyman ❑ City/Town w APPROVED OFFICE USE ONLI� License Number tin X93 or • Y • • • • • Installing Company Business }.,Name of Licensed Plumber Check one: ❑ Partnership ❑ Firm/Co. Certificate INSURANCE COVERAGE: I have a current I' bility insurance policy or its substantial equivalent which meets the requirements of MGL Ch. 142. Yes V No ❑ If you have checked Yes. please indicate the type coverage by checking the appropriate box. A liability insurance policy G?eiOther type of indemnity ❑ Bond ❑ OWNER'S INSURANCE WAIVER: I am aware that the licensee does not have the insurance coverage required by Chapter 142 of the Mass. General Laws. and that my signature on this permit application waives this requirement. Check one: Owner ❑ Agent ❑ I hereby certify that all of the details and information I have submitted (or entered) in above application are true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and that all plumbing work and installations performed under the permit issued for this application will be in compliance with all pertinent provisions of the Massachusetts State Plumbinga and Chapter 14 the General Laws. BY Signature sed Plu ber Title �, Type of License: Master L4"/ Journeyman ❑ City/Town w APPROVED OFFICE USE ONLI� License Number tin X93 or El N .0 m A O w r c m z D 3 m fp -1 m 0 m W c v_ z O m m z 0 O A m m N N z N V m A 0 z N e 4 0 A. m r O 91 0 w 0 In A m C N m 0 z y NUMBER % r C)�✓' TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER SCHEDULE OF DEPARTMENTAL PAYMENTS DEPARTMENT: �5�-/fJ DATE: 1619-11-101 GENERAL LEDGER A/C # FROM WHOM SOURCE AMOUNT TOTAL F $ $ ay E� rd 0 ✓1 44 : za CIO 3 7&o -79 Z d✓J COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS NUMBER // To the Accounting Officer: The above is a detailed list ofjnoney: to sum of For the Period ending %D 1�-fie whose receipt I hold therefor. TOWN OF NORTH ANDOVER DATE: /a,//— d/ OCTRECEIVED PAYMEN 112001 White: Departmental Copy Pink: Accounting Yellow: Treasurer TITLE